Sonicview16XP_Sonicview24XP_RM_E

Top panel

This section explains the displays and controls on the top panel.

NOTE

The various buttons that have indicators remain dimly lit even when off, making them easier to see and use even in dark situations.

Channel section

Master section

Touchscreen

Resistive-type (pressure-sensitive) 800×480 LCD color touchscreen.

Shows a variety of information.

Tap and swipe the screens being shown to operate them.

Only one point on one screen can be operated at a time.

Set the brightness on the PREFERENCES Screen. (See “PREFERENCES screen”.)

LCD knobs and indicators

When LCD knobs can be used to control items shown on the touchscreen, their indicators light.

Turn those LCD knobs to adjust various parameters shown on the touchscreen.

NOTE

Parameter adjustment with LCD knobs

Turning an LCD knob without pressing it will change the parameter value by one step with each click. This enables precise parameter adjustment.

When adjusting a parameter with high resolution, turning an LCD knob while pressing it will change the parameter value by multiple steps with each click. This enables efficient parameter adjustment.

By turning any LCD knob while pressing the HOME key, the brightness of the touchscreens, channel screens, various indicators and the lamp connected to the LAMP connector on the rear panel can all be adjusted at the same time.

By pressing and turning any LCD knob while pressing the HOME key, the brightness of the touchscreens and channel screens can be adjusted at the same time.

By turning an LCD knob while pressing the MENU key, the contrast of the channel screen that corresponds to that knob can be adjusted. (See “16 - List of shortcut operations”.)

MUTE keys and indicators

These mute/unmute modules assigned to the selected layer.

When a MUTE key is on (lit), the signal of the corresponding module is muted.

Depending on the DCA or Mute Group, the key will blink when muted.

When the SENDS ON FADER key is on (Sends On Fader mode is on), these turn sends on/off to the selected bus from the modules assigned to the selected layer (send off when MUTE key lit, send on when MUTE key unlit). For modules that do not have a send on/off function for the subject bus, however, these mute/unmute the corresponding module. (For example, this applies when the subject bus is FX 1 and the module is FX RTN 1 or the subject bus is MIX 1 and the module is MIX 1.)

SOLO keys and indicators

These turn soloing on/off for modules assigned to the selected layer.

When these keys are on (lit), the signals of the corresponding modules will be sent to the SOLO L/R bus.

The keys will blink if soloing is on because of DCA.

NOTE

Press this key while pressing the MENU key to open the SOLO/OSCILLATOR page, which is where various solo settings can be made, of the TALKBACK / MONITOR / SOLO / OSC SETUP screen. (See “Making solo and built-in oscillator settings” and “16 - List of shortcut operations”.)

SEL keys and indicators

Press these keys to open the MODULE Screens for modules assigned to the selected layer. The corresponding keys light. If the MODULE Screen shown for a module has been changed on the touchscreen, the corresponding SEL key will light.

When a lit SEL key is pressed, the MODULE screen for that module will be shown on the touchscreen that corresponds to that SEL key if it is not already shown. If the MODULE screen for that module is shown on the touchscreen that corresponds to that SEL key, it will close and the SEL key will become unlit.

NOTE

Pressing one of these keys while pressing the HOME key will set the fader level for the corresponding module to 0 dB. (When Sends On Fader mode is on, the SEND level will be set instead.) (See “16 - List of shortcut operations”.)

Channel screen

These show the following information for modules assigned to the selected layer.

Sub MODULE LABEL

This shows the module label according to the display mode set for the Sub MODULE LABEL on the DISPLAY MODE page. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

By default, the FIXED MODULE LABEL will be shown.

Main MODULE LABEL

This shows the module label according to the display mode set for the Main MODULE LABEL on the DISPLAY MODE page. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

By default, the USER MODULE LABEL will be shown.

NOTE

The following three display modes are available for the Main MODULE LABEL and Sub MODULE LABEL.

Display mode	Explanation
USER MODULE LABEL	Module names set by user
FIXED MODULE LABEL	Predetermined names for each module (for example, “CH 1” and “MIX 1”)
PORT LABEL	Names of input and output ports

The USER MODULE LABEL can be set on the MODULE LABEL Screen. (See “Setting and editing user module labels”.)

GATE/EXPANDER/DE-ESSER gain reduction meter

COMP/DUCKER gain reduction meter

Module icon

See “MODULE LABEL screen” for details about setting module icons.

Fader level value

Module meter (shows signal level of set metering point)

If the module is stereo, a stereo module meter will be shown.

Each module meter has an overload indicator at its top. They will light when the signal level reaches or exceeds −0.00026 dBFS (16-bit full-scale value).

The area below −60 dBFS at the bottom of the module meters will light when above −70 dBFS.

When the SENDS ON FADER key is on (Sends On Fader mode is on), the black and white display is inverted and “SEND to [bus name]” will be shown on a black band at the bottom of the screen.

When the FIX LAYER key () has been used to lock 8 channels to the layer, “FIXED LAYER” will be shown on a white band at the top of the screen.

When the Sends On Fader mode is on and 8 channels have been locked to the layer, the black and white display will be inverted and “SEND to [bus name]” and FIXED LAYER” will be shown on a black band at the bottom of the screen.

Use the PREFERENCES Screen to set the brightness and contrast of the channel screens. (See “PREFERENCES screen”.)

Channel color bars

These show the colors set for the modules assigned to the selected layer. (See “Changing set module colors”.)

Channel faders

When the SENDS ON FADER key is off (Sends On Fader mode is off), these adjust the fader levels for the modules assigned to the selected layer.

When the SENDS ON FADER key is on (Sends On Fader mode is on), these adjust the send levels to the selected bus for the modules assigned to the selected layer.

Output meters

These are output meters for the MAIN L/R bus.

The OVER indicators light red when they reach or exceed −0.00026 dBFS (16-bit full-scale value).

The bottommost indicator lights when above −70 dBFS.

HOME key

When the Menu Screen or a settings screen is open, press to return to the Home Screen on all touchscreens.

Press and hold this key and the MENU key together for 5 seconds to open the LOCK SETUP screen. (See “LOCK SETUP screen”.)

NOTE

Various shortcut operations are possible using this key in combination with others. See “16 - List of shortcut operations” for details.

MENU key

Press this key to open the Menu Screen on the right touchscreen.

Press and hold this key and the HOME key together for 5 seconds to open the LOCK SETUP screen. (See “LOCK SETUP screen”.)

NOTE

Various shortcut operations are possible using this key in combination with others. See “16 - List of shortcut operations” for details.

USER KEYS A–F and indicators

Users can assign functions and colors to these keys as they like. When functions that have different statuses are assigned to these keys, they will light, blink and become unlit accordingly. (See “USER DEFINED CONTROLS screen”.)

NOTE

Press one of these keys while pressing the MENU key to open the screen that corresponds to its assigned function. (See “16 - List of shortcut operations”.)

MUTE key and indicator (MASTER)

This mute/unmutes.

When the SENDS ON FADER is off (Sends On Fader mode is off), this mutes the module assigned to the MASTER slot on the Custom Layer SETUP page of the Layer Key SETUP Screen (MAIN L/R by default).

When the SENDS ON FADER key is on (Sends On Fader mode is on), this mutes the selected bus master module.

When a MUTE key is on (lit), the signal of the corresponding module is muted.

Depending on the DCA or Mute Group, the key will blink when muted.

SOLO CLEAR key and indicator

The SOLO CLEAR indicator lights when any module is being soloed.

Press this when the SOLO CLEAR indicator is lit to end soloing of all channels.

NOTE

Press this key while pressing the MENU key to open the SOLO/OSCILLATOR page of the TALKBACK / MONITOR / SOLO / OSC SETUP screen. (See “Making solo and built-in oscillator settings” and “16 - List of shortcut operations”.)

SOLO key and indicator (MASTER)

This turns soloing on and off.

When the SENDS ON FADER is off (Sends On Fader mode is off), this solos the module assigned to the MASTER slot on the Custom Layer SETUP page of the Layer Key SETUP Screen (MAIN L/R by default).

When the SENDS ON FADER key is on (Sends On Fader mode is on), this solos the selected bus master module.

When this key is on (lit), the signal of the corresponding module is sent to the SOLO L/R bus.

The key will blink if soloing is on because of DCA.

NOTE

SEL key and indicator (MASTER)

When the SENDS ON FADER is off (Sends On Fader mode is off), this functions as the SEL key for the module assigned to the MASTER slot on the Custom Layer SETUP page of the Layer Key SETUP Screen (MAIN L/R by default).

When the SENDS ON FADER key is on (Sends On Fader mode is on), this functions as the SEL key for the selected bus master module.

Press this key, lighting it, to open the MODULE screen for the assigned module on the right touchscreen. If the MODULE Screen shown for a module has been changed on the touchscreen, the corresponding SEL key will light.

When a lit SEL key is pressed, the MODULE screen for the that module will be shown on the touchscreen that corresponds to that SEL key if it is not already shown. If the MODULE screen for that module is shown on the touchscreen that corresponds to that SEL key, it will close and the SEL key will become unlit.

NOTE

Pressing this key while pressing the HOME key will set the fader/send level for the corresponding module to 0 dB. (See “16 - List of shortcut operations”.)

L/R indicator

When the SENDS ON FADER key is off (Sends On Fader mode is off) and MAIN L/R is the module assigned to the MASTER slot on the Custom Layer SETUP page of the Layer Key SETUP Screen, the MUTE, SOLO and SEL keys, the color bar and the MASTER fader in the top panel master section will control/display the MAIN L/R Master module, and the indicator will light.

This indicator will be unlit when the SENDS ON FADER key is on (Sends On Fader mode is on), as well as when the SENDS ON FADER key is off and MAIN L/R is not the module assigned to the MASTER slot on the Custom Layer SETUP page of the Layer Key SETUP Screen.

SEND indicator

This indicator will be unlit when the SENDS ON FADER key is off (Sends On Fader mode is off).

When the SENDS ON FADER key is on (Sends On Fader mode is on), the MUTE, SOLO and SEL keys, the color bar and the MASTER fader in the top panel master section will control/display the SENDS ON FADER operation bus (MIX 1–22/FX 1–4) and the indicator will light.

Color bar (MASTER)

When the SENDS ON FADER is off (Sends On Fader mode is off), this lights with this color set for the module assigned to the MASTER slot on the Custom Layer SETUP page of the Layer Key SETUP Screen (MAIN L/R by default). (See “Changing set module colors”.)

When the SENDS ON FADER key is on (Sends On Fader mode is on), this lights with the color set for the selected bus master module. (See “Changing set module colors”.)

LAYER KEYS 1–7 and indicators

Press these keys to switch layers. The last pressed key will light, showing the current selection. Switching layers will change the states of module faders, MUTE/SOLO/SEL keys, channel screens, color bars and touchscreens to correspond to the current layer.

The layer assignments of keys and their colors can be set freely by opening Menu Screen > Front Panel Setup menu > Layer/Master Fader Setup. (See “Layer Key SETUP page”.)

NOTE

The Layer Key SETUP screen for the selected LAYER key can be opened by pressing that key while pressing the MENU key. (See “Layer Key SETUP page” and “16 - List of shortcut operations”.)

MASTER fader

When the SENDS ON FADER key is off (Sends On Fader mode is off), this adjusts the fader level of the module assigned to the MASTER slot on the Custom Layer SETUP page of the Layer Key SETUP Screen (MAIN L/R by default).

When the SENDS ON FADER key is on (Sends On Fader mode is on), this adjusts the fader level of the selected bus master module.

FIX LAYER key and indicator

While pressing this key, press a SEL key for a block to fix the corresponding block of 8 channels to the current layer. This key and the LAYER KEYS that corresponds to the fixed layer will blink. “FIXED LAYER” will be shown on a white band at the top of the corresponding channel screen.

While pressing this key, press a SEL key for a block with a fixed layer to cancel fixing the corresponding block of 8 channels to a layer. This key and the LAYER KEYS that corresponds to the layer that is no longer fixed will stop blinking. “FIXED LAYER” will stop being shown at the top of the corresponding channel screen.

Either the left or right block of 8 channels can be fixed at a time.

USB port (5V0.5A)

This is a USB Type-C port. (This supports USB 2.0.)

Connect a USB keyboard here, and use it to enter names, for example. By default, the unit is set to use a Japanese keyboard. Since English and Japanese keyboards use different layouts, change the setting on the PREFERENCES screen if using an English keyboard. (See “PREFERENCES screen”.)

Load a USB flash drive to play files on it, as well as to load data into and back up data from this unit.

Mice and other pointing devices are not supported.

SD card slot

SD cards can be inserted into this slot. (See “Connecting and disconnecting SD cards and USB flash drives”.)

Load an SD card to play files on it and record to it, as well as to load data into and back up data from this unit.

MONITOR OUT volume

Use this to adjust the output level of the MAIN OUTPUT L/R jacks.

TALKBACK volume

Use this to adjust the TALKBACK input level.

TALKBACK key and indicator

This key turns talkback on and off. Press this key briefly to switch it on/off. Press this key continuously to turn the function on only while being pressed.

Press this key while pressing the MENU key to open the TALKBACK page, which is where various talkback settings can be made, of the TALKBACK / MONITOR / SOLO / OSC SETUP screen. (See “Making talkback settings” and “16 - List of shortcut operations”.)

SENDS ON FADER key and indicator

This turns the Sends On Fader mode on/off.

When the SENDS ON FADER key is on (Sends On Fader mode is on), this key lights and the unit operates as follows.

The SENDS ON FADER screen opens on the rightmost touchscreen. (See “SENDS ON FADER function”.)

This changes the Channel Screens to Sends On Fader mode display.

The channel faders move to the SEND level positions of the selected buses.

The MASTER fader moves to the FADER level position of the selected bus.

Press this key when the SENDS ON FADER screen is shown to end Sends On Fader mode. This will close the SENDS ON FADER screen and return the channel faders, MASTER fader and channel screens to their normal display states. (See “SENDS ON FADER function”.)

USER KEYS 1–12 and indicators

Press one of these keys while pressing the MENU key to open the screen that corresponds to its assigned function. (See “16 - List of shortcut operations”.)

Front panel

Headphone jack (stereo mini)

Use this 3.5mm (1/8") stereo mini jack to connect stereo headphones.

Headphone jack (stereo phone)

Use this 6.3mm (1/4") stereo phone jack to connect stereo headphones.

Headphone volume

Use this to adjust the headphone output level.

caution CAUTION

Before connecting headphones, minimize the volume with the headphone knob. Failure to do so might cause sudden loud noises, which could harm your hearing or result in other trouble.

Rear panel

Sonicview 16XP

Sonicview 24XP

LAMP jack

Use this to connect a gooseneck lamp to the illuminate the top of the unit.

Lamps with 4-pin XLR connectors can be used.

Adjust the lamp brightness on the PREFERENCES Screen. (See “PREFERENCES screen”.)

XLR 4-pin female (pin 4: +12V, pin 3: GND)

MIC/LINE input jacks

These are balanced XLR jacks for mic/line input.

XLR (1: GND, 2: HOT, 3: COLD)

LINE IN (BAL) jacks (TRS phone)

These are 6.3mm (1/4") TRS phone jacks for line input.

TRS (Tip: HOT, Ring: COLD, Sleeve: GND)

NOTE

This unit has some channels with two types of input jacks (XLR and TRS). Do not input signals through both the XLR and TRS jacks of the same channel at the same time. If signals are input at the same time, they will not be input properly.

Only MIC/LINE input jacks () provide phantom power.

INSERT jacks (TRS phone)

Use these 6.3mm (1/4") TRS phone jacks to connect external devices (including effects).

TRS (Tip: SEND, Ring: RETURN, Sleeve: GND)

TALKBACK input jack

Connect a talkback mic here.

Use the TALKBACK volume knob () to adjust the talkback input level, and use the TALKBACK key () to turn it on/off.

Make talkback settings on the TALKBACK page of the TALKBACK / MONITOR / SOLO / OSC SETUP screen. (See “Making talkback settings”.)

Analog output jacks

These analog outputs are XLR jacks.

XLR (1: GND, 2: HOT, 3: COLD)

Dante PRIMARY connector

This is the main etherCON Cat5e-compatible Dante transmission connector.

Use this to connect to a Dante network all the time. For LAN cables used for connection, use STP cables that are category 5e or higher. (See “Connecting to a Dante network”.)

Make settings for the built-in Dante module on the Dante SETUP Screen. (See “Dante SETUP screen”.)

Dante SECONDARY connector

This is the secondary etherCON Cat5e-compatible Dante transmission connector. The use changes depending on the mode.

When in redundant mode, this connects to the secondary Dante network.

When in switched (daisy-chain) mode, use this to connect another Dante device in the chain. For LAN cables used for connection, use STP cables that are category 5e or higher. (See “Connecting to a Dante network”.)

Make settings for the built-in Dante module on the Dante SETUP Screen. (See “Dante SETUP screen”.)

Expansion card slots (SLOT 2)

These slots can be used to install expansion cards (sold separately).

Make SLOT settings on the SLOT SETUP Screen. (See “SLOT SETUP screen”.)

WORD THRU/OUT connector

This BNC connector is for word clock output.

Use it for thru and normal output of word clock signals.

Switch word thru/output on the SYNC CLOCK Screen. (See “SYNC CLOCK screen”.)

WORD IN connector

This BNC connector is for word clock input.

Use it for word clock signal input.

Connect a word clock signal to this connector when synchronizing the word clock of this unit and other equipment.

FOOTSWITCH jack

This 6.3mm (1/4") TS phone jack is for connecting a footswitch.

Set functions assigned to the footswitch on the USER DEFINED CONTROL Screen Foot Switch page. (See “Foot Switch page”.)

TS (Tip: HOT, Sleeve: GND)

USB to PC port

This is a USB Type-B port.

Use a USB cable (Type-A to Type-B) to connect the unit to a computer.

ATTENTION

The unit should be connected directly to the computer, not through a USB hub. Moreover, proper transmission with a computer could fail if the cable is too long.

ETHERNET port

This is an Ethernet port.

Use this to connect to a network, primarily for the purpose of remote control of this unit using the dedicated TASCAM Sonicview Control application.

Make network settings on the Network Setup Screen. (See “Network Setup screen”.)

For details about the TASCAM Sonicview Control application, see its manual. TASCAM Sonicview Control and its application manual can be downloaded from the TASCAM website.

Sonicview 16XP

https://tascam.com/us/product/sonicview_16xp/support

Sonicview 24XP

https://tascam.com/us/product/sonicview_24xp/support

SD card slot for MTR

This slot is for SD cards used with the MTR.

Load an SD card to play files on it and record to it, as well as to back up MTR data.

NOTE

IF-MTR32 recording card in integrated into the Sonicview 16XP and Sonicview 24XP (US version only)

GPIO connector

This is a 25-pin D-sub Parallel control input/output connector.

It can send and receive control commands with 8 inputs and 8 outputs. See “GPIO connector overview” for details about pin assignments.

Set functions assigned to the GPIO input connector on the USER DEFINED CONTROL Screen GPIO-IN page. (See “GPIO-IN page”.)

Set functions assigned to the GPIO output connector on the USER DEFINED CONTROL Screen GPIO-OUT page. (See “GPIO-OUT page”.)

MONITOR OUT L/R jacks

These analog outputs are XLR jacks.

Make monitor output settings on the MONITOR 1/2 pages of the TALKBACK / MONITOR / SOLO / OSC SETUP screen.(See “Making monitor output settings”.)

XLR (1: GND, 2: HOT, 3: COLD)

ST IN 1/ST IN 2 jacks

These RCA pin jacks are analog line outputs.

Use RCA cables to connect CD players and similar devices to these jacks.

POWER switch

This turns the power on/off.

caution CAUTION

Before turning the power on or off, minimize the volumes of connected equipment. Failure to do so might cause sudden loud noises, which could harm your hearing or result in other trouble.

NOTE

Do not interrupt the power when the unit is operating (including recording, playing back, or writing data to an SD card or USB flash drive). Doing so could cause proper recording to fail and recorded data to be lost.

We recommend executing the Save Current Settings command on the Menu Screen before turning the unit off. (See “Saving the current settings”.)

AC IN connector

Plug the included power cord in here.

GPIO connector overview

The GPIO connector on the back of the unit is a parallel control connector that allows this unit to control and be controlled by other devices.

GPIO connector function settings can be changed on the USER DEFINED CONTROLS Screen GPIO-IN and GPIO-OUT pages. (See “USER DEFINED CONTROLS screen”.)

The pin assignments are as follows.

Pin No.	Function	IN/OUT
1	GND	-
2	GPIO IN 2	IN
3	GPIO IN 4	IN
4	GPIO IN 6	IN
5	GPIO IN 8	IN
6	NC	-
7	NC	-
8	NC	-
9	GPIO OUT 2	OUT
10	GPIO OUT 4	OUT
11	GPIO OUT 6	OUT
12	GPIO OUT 8	OUT
13	NC	-
14	GPIO IN 1	IN
15	GPIO IN 3	IN
16	GPIO IN 5	IN
17	GPIO IN 7	IN
18	NC	-
19	NC	-
20	GND	-
21	GPIO OUT 1	OUT
22	GPIO OUT 3	OUT
23	GPIO OUT 5	OUT
24	GPIO OUT 7	OUT
25	+5V	-

IN: For command input

Internal circuit with +5V pull-up

Operates with low signal input of 50 msec or longer

OUT: For command and tally output

Internal circuit is open collector (10Ω output impedance)

20V dielectric strength, 35mA maximum current

+5V: 50mA maximum supplied current

Basic unit operations

Touchscreen operations

Tap/swipe items on the touchscreens to operate them.

Special touchscreen operations

Press and hold	Press and hold the +48V button to turn phantom power (+48V) on and off.
Tap / press and hold	Tapping the DIM button on the MONITOR 1/2 page of the TALKBACK / MONITOR / SOLO / OSC SETUP screen, or tapping the TALKBACK, TARGET or SELECTED button on the TALKBACK page will turn that function on/off. Pressing and holding one will turn that function on temporarily until released.

LCD knob operations

The LCD knobs can be used to control the parameters shown and selected above them on the touchscreen.

When LCD knobs can be used, the corresponding indicators light.

LCD knob	Explanation
Turn without pressing	This allows precise adjustment of one step per click.
Turn while pressing	This allows quick parameter adjustment from one extreme to the other.

Top panel key operations

Press keys on the top panel to use them.

The following keys have special operation procedures.

Key

Use

TALKBACK key

Press this key briefly to turn talkback on/off.

Press this key continuously to turn the function on only while being pressed.

HOME key + MENU key

Press and hold the HOME and MENU keys together for 5 seconds to open the LOCK SETUP Screen.

NOTE

The parameters of this unit have unified image colors, making identification of parameter types easy by color.

GAIN/Level: Red

GATE: Yellow-green

EQ: Blue

COMP: Green

FX: Yellow-green

AUX mode bus: Orange

GROUP mode bus: Purple

PAN: Yellow

FADER: Light blue

Home Screen

This unit has multiple Home Screens for its layers. The names of modules assigned to layers, various parameters, meters and other items are shown in lists.

Press LAYER KEYS 1–7 to change what is shown on the Home Screen.

NOTE

When the Menu Screen or a settings screen is open, press the HOME key to return to the Home Screen.

CH 1–40 Module Home Screen

CH 1–40 Module Home Screen details

INPUT area

This shows the input settings of the selected input source. (A stereo module is shown on the right.)

Input area when the input source is “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante” and the PORT LABEL display mode is “FIXED”, or the PORT LABEL display mode is “USER” and the USER PORT LABEL is undefined

Input area when the input source is not “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante” and the PORT LABEL display mode is “FIXED”, or the PORT LABEL display mode is “USER” and the USER PORT LABEL is undefined

This shows the input source name.

If the PORT LABEL display mode is “USER”, the USER PORT LABEL (the port name set by the user) will be shown. If the USER PORT LABEL is undefined, the FIXED PORT LABEL will be shown. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

If the PORT LABEL display mode is “FIXED”, the FIXED PORT LABEL will be shown for each port (for example, “ANALOG 1” or “Dante 1”). (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

If a Dante port that has a mounted SB-16D assigned is selected, “SB#[ID] [port number]” will be shown.

If it is a virtually-mounted SB-16D, will appear to the bottom left of the port name.

If the module is stereo and input sources that are not left-right adjacent are selected, the FIXED PORT LABEL for the input sources will appear split left and right and abbreviated as follows.

Input source name	Input source name abbreviation
ANALOG	AN
Dante	DA
SLOT 1	S1
USB	US
ST IN 1	ST1
PLAYER	PL

When a module is stereo, if a Dante port that has a mounted SB-16D assigned is selected, “#[ID] [port number]” will be shown.

If it is a virtually-mounted SB-16D, the # background will be yellow.

These indicators appear to light as shown below depending on the input level. When a module is stereo, two sets of module indicators will be shown separately left and right.

Red: −3 dBFS, Green: −40 dBFS

This shows the input signal phase setting status. When a module is stereo, two module phase settings will be shown separately left and right.

	Normal
	Reversed

This shows the −20 dB pad setting status when the input source of the selected module is “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante”. When on, the icon will appear highlighted.

When the input sources for both the left and right channels of a stereo module are “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante”, if settings are different for the left and right channels, the colors on the left and right sides of the buttons will be different.

This shows the phantom power (+48V) setting status when the input source of the selected module is “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante”. When on, the icon will appear highlighted.

This shows the HPF setting status. When on, the icon will appear highlighted.

When the input source of the selected module is “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante”, this will show an analog gain knob and the input level of the unit or SB-16D MIC/LINE input jacks. When a module is stereo, two knobs and input level values will be shown for the module.

A black knob that cannot be operated will be shown if the input source is an SB-16D for which control privileges are not held.

A D.TRIM knob and the digital trim value will be shown when the input source of the selected module is not “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante”. When a module is stereo, two knobs and digital trim values will be shown for the module.

Tap this area to show the selection frame. When the selection frame is shown, corresponding LCD knobs can be used to adjust the parameters shown.

When the selection frame is shown, tap this area to open the MODULE (INPUT) Screen for the selected module. (See “MODULE (INPUT) Screen”.)

GATE/EXPANDER/DE-ESSER area

This shows the response graphs and gain reduction meters of dynamics effects.

Tap this area to open the MODULE (GATE/EXPANDER/DE-ESSER) Screen for the selected module. (See “MODULE (GATE/EXPANDER/DE-ESSER) screens”.)

HPF/EQ area

This shows graphs of the HPF and EQ frequency responses.

Tap this area to open the MODULE (EQ) Screen for the selected module. (See “MODULE (EQ) Screen”.)

COMP/DUCKER area

This shows the response graphs and gain reduction meters of dynamics effects.

Tap this area to open the MODULE (COMP/DUCKER) Screen for the selected module. (See “MODULE (COMP/DUCKER) Screen”.)

INSERT indicator

The indicator is shown when the INSERT button is on for the CH 1–40 module.

Level meter

This shows the level of the signal at the set metering point. (See “METERING POINT page” and “MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screen”.)

NOTE

If the selected module is stereo, a stereo level meter will be shown.

Each level meter has an overload indicator at its top. They will appear to light red when the signal level reaches or exceeds −0.00026 dBFS (16-bit full-scale value).

When a level overload occurs, the entire bar meter will light red.

The area below −60 dBFS at the bottom of the level meters will light when above −70 dBFS.

SEND area

This shows the states of SEND settings to MIX 1–22 and FX 1–4 buses 4 at a time. This also shows the parameters of the Audio Follow Video function.

This shows the MODULE LABEL set for the Main MODULE LABEL of the MIX 1–22 or FX RTN 1–4 module. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

If the Main MODULE LABEL display mode is “USER” but the USER MODULE LABEL for that module is undefined, the FIXED MODULE LABEL will be shown (for example, “MIX 1” or “FX 1”).

This shows the PRE/POST setting used for MIX 1–22 and FX 1–4 buses.

No indicator	Set to POST
PRE	Set to PRE

These show the assignment state and send level to MIX 1–22 and FX 1–4 buses in AUX mode.

MIX 1–22 bus	Shown in orange
FX 1–4 bus	Shown in green

This will be gray when not assigned.

If a MIX or FX bus is stereo-linked, send levels will be shown with two bars.

Purple rounded buttons are shown when GROUP mode MIX 1–22 buses are ON. These appear but cannot be turned on/off on the Home Screen.

Tap a SEND level to show the selection frame. When the selection frame is shown, corresponding LCD knobs can be used to adjust the SEND level shown.

When the selection frame is shown, tap this area to open the MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen for the selected module. (See “MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen”.)

Tap the SEND level while pressing the HOME key to set the SEND level for that bus to 0 dB. (See “16 - List of shortcut operations”.)

button

Tap this button to show the selection window for the parameters shown in the SEND area.

Tap a parameter selection button to open the selected parameter group in the SEND area.

Tap the button at the top left of the selection window to close it.

When the button is off (), tapping a parameter selection button will automatically close this window.

When the button is on (), tapping a parameter selection button will not close this window.

Tapping the AFV button will show 4 key parameters of the Audio Follow Video function in the SEND area.

ON/OFF button for the Audio Follow Video function of the selected module

Tap this button to turn on/off the Audio Follow Video function of the selected module. When ON, buttons will be highlighted.

This shows the name of the AFV TRIGGER SOURCE selected on the AFV TRIGGER SOURCE SELECT Screen.

WAIT

This adjusts the amount of time until fading starts after receiving an AFV ON event.

RISE

This adjusts the amount of fade time until the ON LEVEL is reached after fading starts when an AFV ON event is received.

FALL

This adjusts the amount of fade time until the OFF LEVEL is reached after fading starts when an AFV OFF event is received.

Tapping – will make a selection frame appear. When a selection frame is shown, corresponding LCD knobs can be used to adjust the parameters shown.

When a selection frame is shown, tap this area to open the MODULE (Audio Follow Video) Screen for the selected module. (See “MODULE (Audio Follow Video) Screen”.)

Tap the AUTO MIXER button to show the parameters and meters for the AUTO MIXER function in the SEND areas of the CH 1–16 modules. In this case, the send areas will be empty for modules other than the CH 1–16 modules.

AUTO MIXER GROUP button

This shows the name of the AUTO MIXER group (A/B/C/D) to which the corresponding channel module belongs. “---” will be shown if a group that is not subject to the AUTO MIXER is selected.

If the selected group is TOP PRIORITY, a “TOP” icon will be shown in the bottom left of the button. When the TOP PRIORITY setting is ON, this “TOP” icon will appear highlighted.

When the group AUTO MIXER function is OFF, this will appear dimmed.

Tap this button to open the AUTOMATIC MIXER Screen. (See “AUTO MIXER Function”.)

AUTO MIXER GAIN level meter

This shows the gain level as it is automatically adjusted by the AUTO MIXER.

AUTO MIXER GATE indicator

This indicator shows whether or not the gate is closed for the subject channel in the AUTO MIXER.

This lights when the GATE is closed and the input level to the AUTO MIXER is −90 dB or less. When the input level to the AUTO MIXER is −84 dB or higher and the GATE is open, it will be unlit.

AUTO MIXER WEIGHT setting indicator

This shows the current WEIGHT value for the AUTO MIXER.

Tap this area to show the selection frame. When the selection frame is shown, the corresponding LCD knob (lit light blue) can be used to adjust the WEIGHT value shown.

SEND/PAN button

Tap this button to open the MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen. (See “MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen”.)

ALL SEND button ()

Tap this button to change the SEND area display to ALL SEND bus display.

These show the assignment state and send level to MIX 1–22 and FX 1–4 buses in AUX mode.

MIX 1–22 bus	Shown in orange
FX 1–4 bus	Shown in green

This will be gray when not assigned.

When the selection frame is shown, corresponding LCD knobs can be used to adjust the SEND levels shown.

The selection frame can also be swiped up and down to select MIX 1–22 and FX 1–4 buses.

These show the assignment state and send level to MIX 1–22 buses in GROUP mode. These appear but cannot be adjusted.

OFF	Shown in dark purple
ON	Shown in bright purple

These appear light blue when the PRE/POST setting used for MIX 1–22 and FX 1–4 buses is “PRE”.

Tap the ALL SEND bus area to switch to showing 4 buses in the tapped area.

PAN area

This shows the pan/balance setting of the signals sent to the MAIN L/R bus as well as the MAIN L/R bus assignment status.

Tap this area to show the selection frame. When the selection frame is shown, corresponding LCD knobs can be used to adjust the pan/balance of the sent signals.

Tap this area while pressing the HOME key to set the tapped pan/balance setting to center (C). (See “16 - List of shortcut operations”.)

When the selection frame is shown, tap this area to open the MODULE (SEND/ PAN) Screen. (See “MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen”.)

MODULE LABEL area

The module label at the left of the top line is shown according to the display mode set for the Sub MODULE LABEL on the DISPLAY MODE page.

By default, the FIXED MODULE LABEL will be shown. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

At the top right, the Mute Group assignment status is shown in the top line and the DCA assignment status is shown in the bottom line. Red numbers show the assigned Mute Group numbers. Yellow numbers show the assigned DCA numbers.

See “Mute Group Assign page” and “MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screen” for changing Mute Group assignments.

See “DCA Assign page” and “MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screen” for changing DCA assignments.

The bottom line shows the module label according to the display mode set for the Main MODULE LABEL on the DISPLAY MODE page. By default, the USER MODULE LABEL will be shown. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

The MODULE LABEL area background color is the color set for the assigned module. See “Changing set module colors” to change set module colors.

Tap this area to open the MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screen. (See “MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screen”.)

NOTE

The following three display modes are available for the Main MODULE LABEL and Sub MODULE LABEL.

Display mode	Explanation
USER MODULE LABEL	Module name set by user
FIXED MODULE LABEL	Predetermined names for each module (for example, “CH 1” and “MIX 1”)
PORT LABEL	Names of input and output ports

The USER MODULE LABEL can be set on the MODULE LABEL Screen. (See “Setting and editing user module labels”.)

ST IN 1–2/FX RTN 1–4 Module Home Screen

ST IN 1–2/FX RTN 1–4 Module Home Screen details

INPUT area

This shows the input settings of the selected input source.

Input area display when the input source is not “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante”

Input area display when the input source is “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante”

This shows the input source name.

If the PORT LABEL display mode is “FIXED”, the FIXED PORT LABEL will be shown for each port (for example, “ANALOG 1” or “Dante 1”). (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

If a Dante port that has a mounted SB-16D assigned is selected, “SB#[ID] [port number]” will be shown.

If it is a virtually-mounted SB-16D, will appear to the bottom left of the port name.

If the module is stereo and input sources that are not left-right adjacent are selected, the FIXED PORT LABEL for the input sources will appear split left and right and abbreviated as follows.

Input source name	Input source name abbreviation
ANALOG	AN
Dante	DA
SLOT 1	S1
USB	US
ST IN 1	ST1
PLAYER	PL

When a module is stereo, if a Dante port that has a mounted SB-16D assigned is selected, “#[ID] [port number]” will be shown.

If it is a virtually-mounted SB-16D, the # background will be yellow.

These indicators appear to light as shown below depending on the input level.

Red: −3 dBFS, Green: −40 dBFS

This shows the input signal phase setting status.

	Normal
	Reversed

A D.TRIM knob and the digital trim value will be shown when the input source of the selected module is not “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante”.

This shows the −20 dB pad setting status when the input source of the selected module is “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante”. When on, the icon will appear highlighted.

If the input sources for both the left and right channels of a stereo module are “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante”, this shows the left channel setting.

This shows the phantom power (+48V) setting status when the input source of the selected module is “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante”. When on, the icon will appear highlighted.

If the input sources for both the left and right channels of a stereo module are “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante”, this shows the left channel setting.

When the input source of the selected module is “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante”, this will show 2 analog gain knobs and the input level values of the unit or SB-16D MIC/LINE input jacks.

A black knob that cannot be operated will be shown if the input source is an SB-16D for which control privileges are not held.

Tap this area to show the selection frame. When the selection frame is shown, corresponding LCD knobs can be used to adjust the parameters shown.

When the selection frame is shown, tap this area to open the MODULE (INPUT) Screen for the selected module. (See “MODULE (INPUT) Screen”.)

FX area

This shows effects names and main effect parameters.

Tap this area to show the selection frame. When the selection frame is shown, corresponding LCD knobs can be used to adjust effect parameters shown.

When the selection frame is shown, tap this area to open the MODULE (FX) Screen for the selected module. (See “MODULE (FX) Screen”.)

EQ area

This shows a graph of the EQ frequency response.

Tap this area to open the MODULE (EQ) Screen for the selected module. (See “MODULE (EQ) Screen”.)

Level meters

This shows the level of the signal at the set metering point. (See “METERING POINT page”, “ST IN 1–2 MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screens” and “FX RTN 1–4 MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screens”.)

NOTE

The ST IN 1–2/FX RTN 1–4 modules are stereo, so stereo level meters are shown.

Each level meter has an overload indicator at its top. They will appear to light red when the signal level reaches or exceeds −0.00026 dBFS (16-bit full-scale value).

When a level overload occurs, the entire bar meter will light red.

The area below −60 dBFS at the bottom of the level meters will light when above −70 dBFS.

SEND area

This shows the states of SEND settings to MIX 1–22 and FX 1–4 buses 4 at a time. This also shows the parameters of the Audio Follow Video function.

This shows the MODULE LABEL set for the Main MODULE LABEL of the MIX 1–22 or FX RTN 1–4 module. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

If the Main MODULE LABEL display mode is “USER” but the USER MODULE LABEL for that module is undefined, the FIXED MODULE LABEL will be shown (for example, “MIX 1” or “FX 1”).

This shows the PRE/POST setting used for MIX 1–22 and FX 1–4 buses.

No indicator	Set to POST
PRE	Set to PRE

These show the assignment state and send level to MIX 1–22 and FX 1–4 buses in AUX mode.

MIX 1–22 bus	Shown in orange
FX 1–4 bus	Shown in green

This will be gray when not assigned.

If a MIX or FX bus is stereo-linked, send levels will be shown with two bars.

Purple rounded buttons are shown when GROUP mode MIX 1–22 buses are ON. These appear but cannot be turned on/off on the Home Screen.

, and are not shown in the FX 1–4 area of the FX RTN module.

Tap a SEND level to show the selection frame. When the selection frame is shown, corresponding LCD knobs can be used to adjust the SEND level shown.

Tap the SEND level while pressing the HOME key to set the SEND level for that bus to 0 dB. (See “16 - List of shortcut operations”.)

button

Tap this button to show the selection window for the parameters shown in the SEND area.

Tap a parameter selection button to open the selected parameter group in the SEND area.

Tap the button at the top left of the selection window to close it.

When the button is off (), tapping a parameter selection button will automatically close this window.

When the button is on (), tapping a parameter selection button will not close this window.

Tapping the AFV button will show 4 key parameters of the Audio Follow Video function in the SEND area.

ON/OFF button for the Audio Follow Video function of the selected module

Tap this button to turn on/off the Audio Follow Video function of the selected module. When ON, buttons will be highlighted.

This shows the name of the AFV TRIGGER SOURCE selected on the AFV TRIGGER SOURCE SELECT Screen.

WAIT

This adjusts the amount of time until fading starts after receiving an AFV ON event.

RISE

This adjusts the amount of fade time until the ON LEVEL is reached after fading starts when an AFV ON event is received.

FALL

This adjusts the amount of fade time until the OFF LEVEL is reached after fading starts when an AFV OFF event is received.

Tapping – will make a selection frame appear. When a selection frame is shown, corresponding LCD knobs can be used to adjust the parameters shown.

When a selection frame is shown, tap this area to open the MODULE (Audio Follow Video) Screen for the selected module. (See “MODULE (Audio Follow Video) Screen”.)

SEND/PAN button

Tap this button to open the MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen. (See “MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen”.)

ALL SEND button ()

Tap this button to change to the ALL SEND bus display.

These show the assignment state and send level to MIX 1–22 and FX 1–4 buses in AUX mode.

MIX 1–22 bus	Shown in orange
FX 1–4 bus	Shown in green

This will be gray when not assigned.

When the selection frame is shown, corresponding LCD knobs can be used to adjust the SEND levels shown.

The selection frame can also be swiped up and down to select MIX 1–22 and FX 1–4 buses.

These show the assignment state and send level to MIX 1–22 buses in GROUP mode. These appear but cannot be adjusted.

OFF	Shown in dark purple
ON	Shown in bright purple

These appear light blue when the PRE/POST setting used for MIX 1–22 and FX 1–4 buses is “PRE”.

Tap the ALL SEND bus area to switch to showing 4 buses in the tapped area.

PAN area

This shows the pan/balance setting of the signals sent to the MAIN L/R bus as well as the MAIN L/R bus assignment status.

Tap this area to show the selection frame. When the selection frame is shown, corresponding LCD knobs can be used to adjust the pan/balance of the sent signals.

Tap this area while pressing the HOME key to set the tapped pan/balance setting to center (C). (See “16 - List of shortcut operations”.)

When the selection frame is shown, tap this area to open the MODULE (SEND/ PAN) Screen. (See “MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen”.)

MODULE LABEL area

The module label at the left of the top line is shown according to the display mode set for the Sub MODULE LABEL on the DISPLAY MODE page. By default, the FIXED MODULE LABEL will be shown. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

See “Mute Group Assign page” and “MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screen” for changing Mute Group assignments.

See “DCA Assign page” and “MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screen” for changing DCA assignments.

The MODULE LABEL area background color is the color set for the assigned module. See “Changing set module colors” to change set module colors.

Tap this area to open the MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screen. (See “ST IN 1–2 MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screens”.)

NOTE

The following three display modes are available for the Main MODULE LABEL and Sub MODULE LABEL.

Display mode	Explanation
USER MODULE LABEL	Module name set by user
FIXED MODULE LABEL	Predetermined names for each module (for example, “CH 1” and “MIX 1”)
PORT LABEL	Names of input and output ports

The USER MODULE LABEL can be set on the MODULE LABEL Screen. (See “Setting and editing user module labels”.)

MIX 1–22 and MAIN L/R Master Module Home Screen

MIX 1–22 and MAIN L/R Master Module Home Screen details

OUTPUT area

If the PORT LABEL display mode is “FIXED”, the FIXED PORT LABEL will be shown for each port (for example, “ANALOG 1” or “Dante 1”). (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

This shows the output port assignment status.

If a Dante port that has a mounted SB-16D assigned is selected, “SB#[ID] [port number]” will be shown.

If it is a virtually-mounted SB-16D, will appear to the left of the port name.

If the module is stereo, the FIXED PORT LABEL for the output ports will appear split left and right and abbreviated as follows.

Output port name	Output port name abbreviatio
ANALOG	AN
Dante	DA
SLOT 1	S1
USB	US

When a module is stereo, if a Dante port that has a mounted SB-16D assigned is selected, “#[ID] [port number]” will be shown.

If it is a virtually-mounted SB-16D, the # background will be yellow.

Tap this area to open the MODULE (OUTPUT) Screen for the selected module. (See “MODULE (OUTPUT) Screen”.)

EQ area

This shows a graph of the EQ frequency response.

Tap this area to open the MODULE (EQ) Screen for the selected module. (See “MODULE (EQ) Screen”.)

GEQ area

This shows a graph of the GEQ frequency response.

Tap this area to open the MODULE (GEQ) Screen for the selected module. (See “MODULE (GEQ) Screen”.)

COMP/DUCKER area

This shows the response graphs and gain reduction meters of dynamics effects.

Tap this area to open the MODULE (COMP/DUCKER) Screen for the selected module. (See “MODULE (COMP/DUCKER) Screen”.)

INSERT indicator

The indicator is shown when the INSERT button is on for the MIX 1–22 module or MAIN L/R master module.

Level meters

This shows the level of the signal at the set metering point. (See “METERING POINT page” and “MIX 1–22 and MAIN L/R Master MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screens”.)

NOTE

If the selected module is stereo, a stereo level meter will be shown.

Each level meter has an overload indicator at its top. They will appear to light red when the signal level reaches or exceeds −0.00026 dBFS (16-bit full-scale value).

When a level overload occurs, the entire bar meter will light red.

The area below −60 dBFS at the bottom of the level meters will light when above −70 dBFS.

SEND area

This shows the states of SEND settings to MIX 1–22 and FX 1–4 buses 4 at a time. This also shows the parameters of the Audio Follow Video function.

This shows the MODULE LABEL set for the Main MODULE LABEL of the MIX 1–22 or FX RTN 1–4 module. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

If the Main MODULE LABEL display mode is “USER” but the USER MODULE LABEL for that module is undefined, the FIXED MODULE LABEL will be shown (for example, “MIX 1” or “FX 1”).

This shows the PRE/POST setting used for MIX 1–22 and FX 1–4 buses.

No indicator	Set to POST
PRE	Set to PRE

These show the assignment state and send level to MIX 1–22 and FX 1–4 buses in AUX mode.

MIX 1–22 bus	Shown in orange
FX 1–4 bus	Shown in green

This will be gray when not assigned.

If a MIX or FX bus is stereo-linked, send levels will be shown with two bars.

Purple rounded buttons are shown when GROUP mode MIX 1–22 buses are ON. These appear but cannot be turned on/off on the Home Screen.

, and are not shown in the bus areas of the corresponding modules themselves. , and are also not shown in the FX 1–4 area of the MAIN L/R Master module.

Tap a SEND level to show the selection frame. When the selection frame is shown, corresponding LCD knobs can be used to adjust the SEND level shown.

Tap the SEND level while pressing the HOME key to set the SEND level for that bus to 0 dB. (See “16 - List of shortcut operations”.)

button

Tap this button to show the selection window for the parameters shown in the SEND area.

Tap a parameter selection button to open the selected parameter group in the SEND area.

Tap the button at the top left of the selection window to close it.

When the button is off (), tapping a parameter selection button will automatically close this window.

When the button is on (), tapping a parameter selection button will not close this window.

Tapping the AFV button will show 4 key parameters of the Audio Follow Video function in the SEND area.

ON/OFF button for the Audio Follow Video function of the selected module

Tap this button to turn on/off the Audio Follow Video function of the selected module. When ON, buttons will be highlighted.

This shows the name of the AFV TRIGGER SOURCE selected on the AFV TRIGGER SOURCE SELECT Screen.

WAIT

This adjusts the amount of time until fading starts after receiving an AFV ON event.

RISE

This adjusts the amount of fade time until the ON LEVEL is reached after fading starts when an AFV ON event is received.

FALL

This adjusts the amount of fade time until the OFF LEVEL is reached after fading starts when an AFV OFF event is received.

Tapping – will make a selection frame appear. When a selection frame is shown, corresponding LCD knobs can be used to adjust the parameters shown.

When a selection frame is shown, tap this area to open the MODULE (Audio Follow Video) Screen for the selected module. (See “MODULE (Audio Follow Video) Screen”.)

SEND/PAN button

Tap this button to open the MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen. (See “MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen”.)

ALL SEND button ()

Tap this button to change to the ALL SEND bus display.

These show the assignment state and send level to MIX 1–22 and FX 1–4 buses in AUX mode.

MIX 1–22 bus	Shown in orange
FX 1–4 bus	Shown in green

This will be gray when not assigned.

When the selection frame is shown, corresponding LCD knobs can be used to adjust the SEND levels shown.

The selection frame can also be swiped up and down to select MIX 1–22 and FX 1–4 buses.

These show the assignment state and send level to MIX 1–22 buses in GROUP mode. These appear but cannot be adjusted.

OFF	Shown in dark purple
ON	Shown in bright purple

These appear light blue when the PRE/POST setting used for MIX 1–22 and FX 1–4 buses is “PRE”.

Tap the ALL SEND bus area to switch to showing 4 buses in the tapped area.

PAN area (MIX 1–22 modules only)

This shows the pan/balance setting of the signals sent to the MAIN L/R bus as well as the MAIN L/R bus assignment status.

Tap this area to show the selection frame. When the selection frame is shown, corresponding LCD knobs can be used to adjust the position/balance of the sent signals.

Tap this area while pressing the HOME key to set the tapped pan/balance setting to center (C). (See “16 - List of shortcut operations”.)

When the selection frame is shown, tap this area to open the MODULE (SEND/ PAN) Screen. (See “MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen”.)

MODULE LABEL area

The module label at the left of the top line is shown according to the display mode set for the Sub MODULE LABEL on the DISPLAY MODE page.

By default, the FIXED MODULE LABEL will be shown. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

See “Mute Group Assign page” and “MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screen” for changing Mute Group assignments.

See “DCA Assign page” and “MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screen” for changing DCA assignments.

The MODULE LABEL area background color is the color set for the assigned module. See “Changing set module colors” to change set module colors.

Tap this area to open the MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screen. (See “MIX 1–22 and MAIN L/R Master MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screens”.)

NOTE

The following three display modes are available for the Main MODULE LABEL and Sub MODULE LABEL.

Display mode	Explanation
USER MODULE LABEL	Module name set by user
FIXED MODULE LABEL	Predetermined names for each module (for example, “CH 1” and “MIX 1”)
PORT LABEL	Names of input and output ports

The USER MODULE LABEL can be set on the MODULE LABEL Screen. (See “Setting and editing user module labels”.)

DCA Module Home Screen

DCA Module Home Screen details

DCA assignment display area

This shows the FIXED MODULE LABEL and USER MODULE LABEL of modules that have been assigned to that DCA.

Tap this area to open the DCA/Mute Group SETUP Screen DCA Assign page. (See “DCA Assign page”.)

MODULE LABEL area

See “Mute Group Assign page” for changing Mute Group assignments.

See “DCA Assign page” for changing DCA assignments.

The MODULE LABEL area background color is the color set for the assigned module. See “Changing set module colors” to change set module colors.

Tap this area to open the MODULE LABEL Screen where the USER MODULE LABEL and set module color can be changed. (See “MODULE LABEL screen”.)

NOTE

The following three display modes are available for the Main MODULE LABEL and Sub MODULE LABEL.

Display mode	Explanation
USER MODULE LABEL	Module name set by user
FIXED MODULE LABEL	Predetermined names for each module (for example, “CH 1” and “MIX 1”)
PORT LABEL	Names of input and output ports

The USER MODULE LABEL can be set on the MODULE LABEL Screen. (See “Setting and editing user module labels”.)

Menu Screen

Open various settings screens and use snapshot functions from this screen.

Press the MENU key to open this on the right touchscreen.

Snapshot function area

This shows items related to the snapshot function.

See “Snapshot functions” for details about the snapshot function.

Menu item area

This shows menu items.

Tap a menu item to show its submenu items.

Submenu item area

This shows submenu items. If the submenu has 9 or more items, swipe the submenu area up and down to scroll it.

Tap a submenu item to open a settings screen.

button

Tap this button to close the Menu Screen.

NOTE

On the Menu Screen, an icon sometimes appears with System Setup menu items and Version Information submenu items.

In this case, an update is necessary for a device, application or this unit.

Check the Version Information Screen.(See “Version Information Screen”.)

Menu Screen operations

In this example, will open the TALKBACK Setup Screen.

1.Press the MENU button to switch to the Menu Screen.

NOTE

When the Menu Screen is opened the first time after startup, submenu items will not be shown.

2.Tap “Front Panel Setup” in the menu item area to show its submenu items.

3.Tap “Talkback Setup” to open the TALKBACK page of the TALKBACK / MONITOR / SOLO / OSC SETUP screen.

SYNC CLOCK screen

On this screen, the status of each audio clock is shown and audio synchronization settings and word clock output jack output mode settings can be made.

Tap Menu Screen > System Setup > Sync Clock to open this screen.

STATUS display area

This shows the status of each audio clock.

Item	Explanation
SYNC CLOCK	This shows the synchronization status of this unit with the master clock (Locked/Unlocked/Regained) and the operation frequency (96kHz/48kHz/No Signal).
WORD IN	This shows the synchronization status of this unit with the WORD signal input through the WORD IN jack (Locked/Unlocked/Regained) and the operation frequency (actual measured value/No Signal).
Dante	This shows the synchronization status of this unit with the connected Dante system (Locked/Unlocked/Regained) and the operation frequency (actual measured value/No Signal). Tap the icon to open the Dante Settings page of the Dante Setup Screen.
SLOT1	These show the names of the expansion cards in SLOT 1 and 2 and the synchronization statuses of this unit with them (Locked/Unlocked/Regained) and the operation frequency (actual measured value/No Signal).
SLOT2

NOTE

The operation frequency will not be shown for SLOT 1 or SLOT 2 if it has an IF-MTR32 (multitrack recording) card installed.

Sync Clock buttons

These set the synchronization clock frequency of the digital input and output signals.

The selected button will be highlighted light blue.

Options: 48 kHz, 96 kHz (default)

NOTE

This unit will always operate internally at 96 kHz even when synchronized to a master clock that is 48 kHz.

Synchronization is possible even if the built-in Dante “Sampling rate” and the main unit “Sync Clock” settings are different.

Synchronization is not possible if the IF-DA64 (Dante) card “Sampling rate” is 44.1 or 88.2 kHz.

If the IF-DA64 (Dante) card “Sampling rate” is 48 or 96 kHz, synchronization is possible even if the main unit “Sync Clock” setting is different. (Set the IF-DA64 (Dante card) “Sampling rate” with Dante Controller.)

When the Clock Master is Dante, if the “Sampling rate” setting and Dante sampling rate are different, the following values will be shown for the operation frequency of the SYNC CLOCK.

When the internal Dante “Sampling rate” is “96 kHz” and Sync Clock is “48 kHz”, half the internal Dante measured value

When the internal Dante “Sampling rate” is “48 kHz” and Sync Clock is “96 kHz”, twice the internal Dante measured value

Clock Master buttons

These set the master clock used by this unit for audio synchronization. (default: INT)

A mark appears on the master clock being used.

If the selected master clock is locked, the select button will be highlighted light blue.

If Sync Clock is “48 kHz” when the internal Dante “Sampling rate” is “96 kHz”, “1/2” will be shown at the top right of the Dante button.

If Sync Clock is “96 kHz” when the internal Dante “Sampling rate” is “48 kHz”, “x2” will be shown at the top right of the Dante button.

If the “Sampling rate” of an IF-DA64 (Dante) card installed in SLOT 1 or SLOT 2 is “96kHz” and Sync Clock is “48kHz”, “1/2” will be shown at the top right of the corresponding SLOT button.

If the “Sampling rate” of an IF-DA64 (Dante) card installed in SLOT 1 or SLOT 2 is “48kHz” and Sync Clock is “96kHz”, “×2” will be shown at the top right of the corresponding SLOT button.

If the selected external clock is unlocked, the unit will operate using the internal clock. In this case the will be shown on the INT button as the clock in use, while is shown on the selected button for the unlocked source. The selected button for the unlocked source will be highlighted red.

If synchronization becomes possible with an external clock after synchronization with it failed (Regain state), the will be shown on the INT button as the clock in use, while is shown on the selected button for the clock in a regain state. Tap the red-highlighted button with the mark to open a confirmation message for switching back to the selected master clock.

Tap the OK button to switch to synchronization with the selected external clock.

WORD OUT Mode buttons

These set the output mode of the WORD THRU/OUT connector on the back of the unit.

The selected button will be highlighted light blue.

Option	Meaning
WORD OUT/TERM-ON (default)	This sets the signal output from the WORD THRU/OUT connector to WORD OUT and turns WORD IN connector termination resistance (75Ω) on.
THRU OUT/TERM-OFF	This sets the signal output from the WORD THRU/OUT connector to THRU output of the signal from the WORD IN connector and turns WORD IN connector termination resistance (75Ω) off.

Clock Synchronous Type buttons

These can be shown by swiping up from the bottom of the SYNC CLOCK Screen.

These are settings for evaluating the synchronization status (locked/unlocked) of this unit and Dante signals.

Button	Meaning
Tight (default)	Synchronization status is evaluated strictly.
Loose	Synchronization status is evaluated loosely.

Setting the sampling frequency

1.Tap Menu Screen > System Setup > Sync Clock to open the SYNC CLOCK Screen.

2.Tap the button for the desired sampling frequency to set it.

A confirmation message will appear.

3.Tap the OK button to switch the sampling frequency.

ATTENTION

Switching the sampling frequency will mute the sound for a few seconds. Be aware of this timing when switching.

Setting the master clock

The unit's master clock can be set.

ATTENTION

When connecting multiple digital audio devices, set up the system so that it uses only one master clock.

1.Tap Menu Screen > System Setup > Sync Clock to open the SYNC CLOCK Screen.

2.Tap the button for the desired master clock to set it.

A confirmation message will appear.

Button	Use
INT	The unit's internal clock is used.
WORD IN	Synchronize with the word clock signal input through the WORD IN connector.
Dante	Synchronize with the clock of a connected Dante system.
SLOT1	Synchronize with the digital signal clock received through SLOT 1.
SLOT2	Synchronize with the digital signal clock received through SLOT 2.

NOTE

If the SLOT1/SLOT2 button for the slot that has an IF-AE16 installed is tapped, a window will open that allows 8 pairs of input signals to be selected for the master clock. Tap the button for the input signal to set for the master clock.

A confirmation message will appear.

3.Tap the OK button to switch the master clock.

NOTE

If the SLOT 1 or SLOT 2 button is tapped when an IF-AN16/OUT or IF-MTR32 is installed in that slot, or if no expansion card has been installed in that slot, the following message will appear and the master clock will not be selected.

When synchronization with the external master clock becomes possible again, a message like the one below will appear at the top of all touchscreens.

WORD clock regained. Can be re-synced to WORD.

Tap this message to open the SYNC CLOCK Screen on the right touchscreen.

Tap the red-highlighted button with the mark to open a confirmation message for switching back to the selected master clock.

Tap the OK button to switch to synchronization with the selected external clock.

ATTENTION

When switching the master clock, noise might occur in the audio input and output.

Be aware of this when choosing when to change the master clock.

PREFERENCES screen

Make settings and view information as follows on this screen.

Cooling fan operation mode and speed settings

Cooling fan operation status display

Temperature value and status display for various locations

Snapshot STORE/RECALL confirmation setting

Digital Reference Level setting

Analog Reference Level setting

ON AIR Tally Inhibit setting

Mute Group LED Flash setting

Solo/Mute/Fader Speed setting

USB Keyboard type setting

Brightness settings for the various displays

Contrast settings for the channel screens

Tap any of the following menu screens to open this screen.

“Brightness“ in the Front Panel Setup menu

LAMP Dimmer Setup in the Rear Panel Setup menu

Preferences in the System Setup menu

FAN Status

This shows the cooling fan operation status and rotation speed.

Indicator	FAN STATUS	Meaning
Green	OK	Normal
Red	FAILURE	Malfunctioning

FAN Control buttons

Use these to set the internal cooling fan operation mode.

The selected button will be highlighted.

Button	Meaning
Auto (default)	Cooling fan operation will be controlled automatically.
Manual	FAN Speed () will be shown and the user can set cooling fan operation.

Temperature Status

These show the temperature values of the SYSTEM (internal temperature), CPU and DSP.

Indicator	Meaning
Green	Temperature is within normal range
with orange WARNING	Temperature is not in normal range

Snapshot STORE Confirmation switch

Set whether or not to show a confirmation message when storing snapshots.

When on, the sliding switch will appear highlighted.

NOTE

This can also be set by tapping the icon in the Snapshot function item area at the top of the Menu Screen and opening the CONFIRMATION settings window. (See “Snapshot functions”.)

Snapshot RECALL Confirmation switch

Set whether or not to show a confirmation message when recalling snapshots.

When on, the sliding switch will appear highlighted.

NOTE

This can also be set by tapping the icon in the Snapshot function item area at the top of the Menu Screen and opening the CONFIRMATION settings window. (See “Snapshot functions”.)

Digital Reference Level buttons

Use these to set the digital reference level.

The selected button will be highlighted.

Options:−9dBFS, −14dBFS, −16dBFS, −18dBFS, −20dBFS (default)

CH Display Contrast GANG button

This turns the Channel Screen contrast adjustment knob GANG function on or off (default).

When the GANG function is on, the button will appear highlighted.

When the GANG function is on, operating any LCD knob 1–3 will cause the contrast settings of all to follow, maintaining set differences.

CH Display Contrast knobs

Use these to adjust the contrasts of the channel screens.

Range: 0 – 60 (default: 40)

Turn an LCD knob to adjust 1 step at a time.

Press and turn an LCD knob to adjust 4 steps at a time.

LCD knob 1	Channels 1–8
LCD knob 2	Channels 9–16
LCD knob 3	Channels 17–24 (Sonicview 24XP only)

NOTE

By turning an LCD knob while pressing the MENU key on the top of the unit, the contrast of the channel screen that corresponds to that knob can be adjusted. (See “16 - List of shortcut operations”.)

FAN Speed

When the operation mode of the cooling fan is “Manual”, its rotation speed can be adjusted.

Range: 1.0 – 10.0 (36 levels, default: 3.5)

Turn LCD knob 4 (lit blue) to adjust it.

Shortcut Help button

Tap this button to open a window that explains shortcut operations for adjusting the contrast of channel screens and brightness of the various displays.

Tap at the top right of the SHORTCUT OPERATION HELP window or the Close Help button to close it.

LCD brightness knob

Turn LCD knob 5 (lit blue) to adjust the touchscreen brightness.

Range: 0 – 7 (default 6)

CH Display brightness knob

Turn LCD knob 6 (lit green) to adjust the channel screen brightness.

Range: 0 – 7 (default 6)

LED brightness knob

Turn LCD knob 7 (lit yellow) to adjust the indicator brightness.

Range: 0 – 7 (default 6)

LAMP brightness knob

Turn LCD knob 8 (lit red) to adjust the brightness of the lamp connected to the LAMP connector on the rear panel.

Range: 0 – 7 (default 6)

Scrollbar display

This scroll bar shows the position of the setting items currently shown on the screen relative to all items on the PREFERENCES Screen.

NOTE

To view setting items not shown on the screen, swipe the setting items area up and down to scroll the screen.

Brightness GANG button

This turns the brightness knods GANG function on (default) and off.

When the GANG function is on, the button will appear highlighted.

When the GANG function is on, operating any LCD knob 5–8 will cause the brightness settings of all to follow, maintaining set differences.

Analog Reference Level buttons

Use these to set the analog reference level.

The selected button will be highlighted.

Options: +6dBu, +4dBu (default), 0dBu

NOTE

Depending on the Digital Reference Level button setting, selection of some Analog Reference Level buttons will not be possible.

Buttons that cannot be selected will appear dark gray.

		Analog Reference Level
		+6dBu	+4dBu	0dBu
Digital Reference Level	−9dBFS
	−14dBFS
	−16dBFS
	−18dBFS
	−20dBFS

: Selectable

: Not selectable

OA Tally Inhibit switch

This switches on/off the ON AIR Tally Inhibit function that limits operations during ON AIR Tally input. (See “Operation restriction during ON AIR Tally input”.) (Default: OFF)

OA Tally Input port

This shows the name of the GPIO-IN port that has the ON AIR Tally Input function assigned.

Tap this area to switch to the GPIO-IN page of the USER DEFINED CONTROLS Screen. (See “GPIO-OUT page”.)

Mute Group LED Flash switch

This sets whether the MUTE buttons and the top panel MUTE keys flash for modules that have been muted by a Mute Group or DCA.

When ON, the sliding switch will appear highlighted.

Option	Meaning
ON (default)	MUTE buttons and top panel MUTE keys will flash
OFF	MUTE buttons and top panel MUTE keys will not flash

ON AIR Tally Inhibit subjects

This shows the status of subjects of the ON AIR Tally Inhibit function.

Items that are selected as subjects of the ON AIR Tally Inhibit function will appear highlighted.

Items that are not selected as subjects of the ON AIR Tally Inhibit function will appear gray.

Tap this area to open a window where the selection status of the items subject to the ON AIR Tally Inhibit function can be set.

By tapping checkboxes to add check marks (), items can be selected as subject to operation restriction during ON AIR Tally input (See “Operation restriction during ON AIR Tally input”.).

Mute Group Priority buttons

This switches the muting behavior of modules that are assigned to mute groups when the assigned groups are unmuted but the modules themselves are muted.

Option	Meaning
CH Mute (default)	Corresponding modules continue to be muted
Mute Group	Corresponding modules are unmuted when their mute groups are unmuted

DCA Mute Priority buttons

This switches the muting behavior of modules that are assigned to DCAs when the assigned DCAs are unmuted but the modules themselves are muted.

Option	Meaning
CH Mute (default)	Corresponding modules continue to be muted
DCA Mute	Corresponding modules are unmuted when their DCAs are unmuted

DCA Solo Priority buttons

If SOLO MODE is set to MIX, this switches the solo behavior of modules that are assigned to DCAs when solo is turned off on those DCAs but the modules themselves are soloed.

Option	Meaning
CH Solo (default)	Corresponding modules continue to be soloed
DCA Solo	Corresponding modules are unsoloed when DCA solo is turned off

Solo/Mute/Fader Speed buttons

These adjust the fade in/out speed when operating faders and turning soloing and muting on/off.

Option	Explanation
Default (default)	This is the fastest fade in/out setting.
Mid	The speed of this fade in/out setting is between Default and Slow.
Slow	This is the slowest fade in/out setting.

Auto Mixer Priority Inhibit switch

This turns on/off the Auto Mixer Priority Inhibit function, which restricts the following PRIORITY settings of the AUTO MIXER. (Default: ON)

TOP PRIORITY setting (See “ TOP PRIORITY ON/OFF button”.)

Group PRIORITY setting (See “ Group PRIORITY setting ON/OFF buttons”.)

Channel PRIORITY setting (See “ Channel PRIORITY setting ON/OFF button”.)

Switching this ON, turns OFF all the above PRIORITY settings of the AUTO MIXER, disabling their operation.

USB KEYBOARD TYPE buttons

Set the type of USB keyboard connected to the USB port on the top of the unit.

The selected button will be highlighted.

Button	Meaning
US	US English keyboard
JPN (default)	Japanese keyboard

Operation restriction during ON AIR Tally input

When “Oscillator” is subject to the ON AIR Tally Inhibit function

The OA Tally Inhibit switch is ON

The “Oscillator” checkbox is checked for items subject to the ON AIR Tally Inhibit function

If ON AIR Tally is input when all the above conditions are met, the built-in oscillator will turn off automatically (See “ OSCILLATOR button”.). Moreover, the built-in oscillator cannot be turned on during ON AIR Tally input.

When “Talkback to MAIN L/R” is subject to the ON AIR Tally Inhibit function

The OA Tally Inhibit switch is ON

The “Talkback to MAIN L/R” checkbox is checked for items subject to the ON AIR Tally Inhibit function

If ON AIR Tally is input when all the above conditions are met, the MAIN L/R button for the TALKBACK output to MAIN L/R will turn off automatically (See “ TARGET buttons”.). Moreover, TALKBACK output to MAIN L/R cannot be turned on during ON AIR Tally input.

When “Output port assign from MIX 1–22, MAIN L/R” is subject to the ON AIR Tally Inhibit function

The OA Tally Inhibit switch is ON

The “Output port assign from MIX 1–22, MAIN L/R” checkbox is checked for items subject to the ON AIR Tally Inhibit function

When all the above conditions are met, output port assignments for MIX 1–22 and MAIN L/R cannot be changed while ON AIR Tally is input.

NOTE

When the following two conditions apply, All System Data Cannot be loaded.

ON AIR Tally is input to GPIO-IN

The OA Tally Inhibit switch is ON

If Snapshot Recall is executed when ON AIR Tally is input to GPIO-IN, settings subject to ON AIR Tally Inhibit will become as follows.

1) Oscillator

ON AIR Tally is input to GPIO-IN

The OA Tally Inhibit switch is ON

The “Oscillator” checkbox is checked for items subject to the ON AIR Tally Inhibit function

If all the above conditions are met, the on/off state of the built-in oscillator signal will not be recalled when Snapshot Recall is executed.

If any of the above conditions are not met, the on/off state of the built-in oscillator signal will be recalled when Snapshot Recall is executed.

2) Talkback to MAIN L/R

This setting is not subject to snapshots.

For this reason, it will become as follows.

ON AIR Tally is input to GPIO-IN

The OA Tally Inhibit switch is ON

The “Talkback to MAIN L/R” checkbox is checked for items subject to the ON AIR Tally Inhibit function

If all the above conditions are met, the Talkback to MAIN L/R setting will be turned off when Snapshot Recall is executed.

If any of the above conditions are not met, the Talkback to MAIN L/R setting will not be changed when Snapshot Recall is executed.

3) Output port assign from MIX 1–22, MAIN L/R

ON AIR Tally is input to GPIO-IN

The OA Tally Inhibit switch is ON

The “Output port assign from MIX 1–22, MAIN L/R” checkbox is checked for items subject to the ON AIR Tally Inhibit function

If Snapshot Recall is executed when all the above conditions are met, routing settings from MIX 1–22 and MAIN L/R modules to output ports will be retained (not recalled).

METER screen

View various meters and make settings for them on this screen.

Tap Menu Screen > Mixer Setup > Meter to open this screen.

NOTE

Using the User Defined Control function, this screen can also be opened with a USER KEYS, footswitch or the GPIO-IN. (See “USER DEFINED CONTROLS screen”.)

button

Tap this button to return to the Menu Screen.

NOTE

If the button () on this screen appears highlighted (), tapping this button will not return to the Menu Screen.

OVER Indicator

This will appear highlighted red if the signal level at a metering point of any module has overloaded. This will continue to appear highlighted for the PEAK HOLD time () set on this screen.

Tap this area to clear the highlighting of this indicator and the overload indicators of all level meters.

NOTE

They will appear to light red when the level reaches or exceeds −0.00026 dBFS (16-bit full-scale value).

PEAK CLEAR button

Tap this button to clear the peak hold indicators for the following level meters.

Peak indicators that are held below overload levels

Overload indicators for all level meters

NOTE

The OVER indicator () on this screen will not be cleared.

PEAK HOLD time display

This shows the level meter peak hold time.

Tap this area to open a window where the level meter peak hold time can be set.

Options: OFF(no hold), 2 sec, 5 sec (default), 10 sec, 20 sec, ∞ sec (hold until cleared)

button

Tap this button to open the METER SETUP Screen. (See “METER SETUP screen”.)

button

Tap this button, highlighting it, to disable the METER Screen () and () buttons as shown below and prevent the METER Screen from being closed.

In this state, the METER Screen will stay open even if the HOME key on the top of the unit is pressed.

The screen can still be switched, however, by conducting the following operation.

Tap the () button to open the METER SETUP Screen.

Press the MENU key on the top panel to switch to the Menu Screen.

Press the HOME and MENU keys together to open the LOCK SETUP Screen.

Press the SEL key on the top panel to switch to the MODULE Screen.

Tap the Home Screen MODULE LABEL area () at the bottom of this screen to open the MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screen.

Tap the button when it is highlighted () to open a confirmation message.

Tap the OK button to end highlighting of the button, enabling closing of the METER Screen.

button

Tap this button to return to the Home Screen.

NOTE

If the button () on this screen appears highlighted (), tapping this button will not return to the Home Screen.

Page selection buttons

The button for the currently selected page is highlighted and corresponding level meters are shown in the meter area ().

Tap one of these buttons to switch to showing the corresponding level meters.

Meter Area

The level meters are shown for the page with the highlighted selection button.

Page name	Contents
ALL LAYERS	This shows level meters for the modules assigned to all of the 7 layers on one line per layer. The MODULE LABEL set as the Main MODULE LABEL will be shown at the bottom of each level meter. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)
OUTPUTS	This shows level meters for MIX 1–22 and MAIN L/R Master modules and the MONITOR OUT. The FIXED MODULE LABEL, the MODULE LABEL set as the Main MODULE LABEL (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.) and the Metering Point will be shown at the bottom of each level meter.
LAYER1	This shows level meters for the modules assigned to the corresponding layer. The FIXED MODULE LABEL, the MODULE LABEL set as the Main MODULE LABEL (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.) and the Metering Point name will be shown at the bottom of each level meter.
LAYER2
LAYER3
LAYER4
LAYER5
LAYER6
LAYER7

Two meters will be shown for stereo modules.

Each level meter has an overload indicator at its top. They will appear to light red when the signal level reaches or exceeds −0.00026 dBFS (16-bit full-scale value).

When a level overload occurs, the entire bar meter will light red.

The area below −60 dBFS at the bottom of the level meters will light when above −70 dBFS.

Home screen MODULE LABEL area

This shows the same information as the MODULE LABEL area on the Home Screen for modules assigned to the right touchscreen on the current layer (module labels according to the display mode set for the Sub MODULE LABEL and Main MODULE LABEL (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.), Mute Group assignment or DCA assignment).

Tap this area to open the MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screen. (See “MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screen”.)

METER SETUP screen

Make the following settings on this screen.

METERING POINT page

Set the metering points for each module type.

METER HEADROOM page

Set the point where level meter colors change on each screen.

Tap on the METER Screen to open this screen.

OVER Indicator

This has the same function as the OVER indicator on the METER Screen. (See “METER screen”.)

PEAK CLEAR button

This has the same function as the PEAK CLEAR button on the METER Screen. (See “METER screen”.)

PEAK HOLD time display

This has the same function as the PEAK HOLD time display on the METER Screen. (See “METER screen”.)

button

Tap this button to return to the METER Screen. (See “METER screen”.)

Page selection buttons

Tap these buttons to switch the page shown.

Home screen MODULE LABEL area

This shows the MODULE LABEL area of the right touchscreen Home Screen. (See “METER screen”.)

METERING POINT page

Set the metering points for each module type on this page.

Tap icons to set metering points.

When a metering point is selected, that icon will appear highlighted ().

Module type	default
CH 1–40 module	PRE HPF
ST IN 1–2 module	PRE EQ
FX RTN 1–4 module	FX OUTPUT
MIX 1–22 and MAIN L/R Master modules when the BUS mode is AUX	OUTPUT*
MIX 1–22 modules when the BUS mode is GROUP	POST FADER

*Metering Point “OUTPUT” setting explanation

For the following module types, this is the Metering Point setting when the icon to the right of “OUT PORT STATUS” is lit ( ).

MIX: AUX MODE, MAIN L/R

MIX: GROUP MODE

NOTE

These can also be set on the MODULE (OVERVIEW) screens for each module using Metering Point buttons. (See “MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screen”.)

When the Metering Point is OUTPUT*, and the corresponding bus has not been assigned to an output port (not being output from the unit), meters will not be shown.

METER HEADROOM page

On this page, set the point where level meter colors change on each screen.

Options: −9dBFS, −14dBFS, −16dBFS, −18dBFS, −20dBFS, Ref.Level (default)

Swipe the options up and down to select the point where colors change.

LOCK SETUP screen

On this screen, set the lock function to prevent this unit from being controlled from its front panel or an external device.

Preventing only selected operations is also possible.

Press and hold the HOME and MENU keys on the top panel together for 5 seconds to open the screen on the right touchscreen.

ALL LOCK button

Tap this button to switch it ON and OFF. (Default: OFF)

When ON, this button will be highlighted and all operations subject to locking will be prohibited.

SELECTED LOCK status

This shows the ON/OFF status of SELECTED LOCK which prevents the operation of selected items. (Default: OFF)

icon

Tap this icon to open the SELECTED LOCK settings window.

List of items subject to locking

This shows whether each item subject to locking is locked or not.

Unlocked items are shown with white letters.

Locked items, which are prohibited from operation, are shown with a lock mark and black letters.

SELECTED LOCK setting window

CHECK ALL button

This puts checks () into the checkboxes of all items subject to locking.

UNCHECK ALL button

This removes checks () from the checkboxes of all items subject to locking.

SELECTED LOCK button

When a check () is in at least one of the checkboxes for items subject to locking, tap this button to switch it ON/OFF.

When ON, this button will be highlighted and the selected operations subject to locking will be prohibited.

When this is ON, the CHECK ALL () and UNCHECK ALL () buttons as well as the checkboxes for items subject to locking will be hidden and cannot be operated.

Appearance when HOME KEY item set as subject to locking

button

Tap this button to close the SELECTED LOCK settings window.

Selection list for subjects of individual locking

Use this to switch the lock function on/off.

Tap the checkboxes of items you want to select as subject to locking to put checks () in them.

NOTE

Lockable controls and operations

LCD touchscreen and LCD knob operations

MUTE key operations

SOLO key operations

SEL key operations

Fader operations

HOME key operations

MENU key operations

TALKBACK key operations

USER KEY operations

SENDS ON FADER key operations

LAYER KEY operations

GPIO-IN operations

FOOT SWITCH operations

Various parameter setting change operations for Contrast and Brightness

Setting changes on the Network Setup Screen (See “Network Setup screen”.)

The following controls and operations will not be locked.

Headphone volume

MONITOR OUT volume

TALKBACK volume

POWER switch

Pressing HOME and MENU keys simultaneously

Touchscreen operations on the LOCK SETUP Screen

MIXER CONFIG screen

Make the following settings on this screen.

CH 1–40 CONFIG page

CH 1–40 stereo link settings

DIRECT OUT POINT settings

DELAY POINT settings

INSERT POINT unified settings

LOCATION CONFIG page

LOCATION settings for CH 1–40, ST IN 1-2, FX RTN 1–4 and MIX 1–22

LOCATION settings for MONITOR 1/2

BUS CONFIG page

BUS MODE settings

MIX 1–22 stereo link settings

PAN LINK settings

Tap Menu Screen > Mixer Setup > Config Mixer / Location / Bus to open this screen.

CH 1–40 CONFIG page

Page selection buttons

Tap these buttons to switch the page shown.

CH 1–40 MODULE LABEL button area

This shows the CH 1–40 module labels according to the set Sub MODULE LABEL and Main MODULE LABEL display modes. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

Tap these buttons to open the MODULE LABEL Screen where the USER MODULE LABEL and set module color can be changed. (See “MODULE LABEL screen”.)

STEREO LINK button area

These show the stereo link settings states of the CH 1–40 modules.

Tap these buttons to turn the stereo link setting on and off (default) for the CH 1–40 modules.

When the stereo link is on, the button will appear highlighted.

Scroll knob and scrollbar

Drag the scrollbar left and right to show CH 1–40 modules that are not shown on the screen. The screen can also be scrolled by turning LCD knob 8.

NOTE

The screen can also be scrolled by swiping left and right between the CH 1–40 module MODULE LABEL area () and the STEREO LINK button area ().

DIRECT OUT POINT buttons

Tap these buttons to change all direct out points for the CH 1–40 modules at the same time.

Options: INPUT (default), POST HPF, POST FADER

DELAY POINT buttons

Tap these buttons to change the delay function insert position for the CH 1–40 modules at the same time.

INSERT POINT BATCH SETUP buttons

These change all the insert points at once for the CH 1–40 modules, which can be set individually on the MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screen.

Tapping a button will open a setting change confirmation message.

Tap the OK button to change the insert points for all CH 1–40 modules at the same time.

LOCATION CONFIG page

Page selection buttons

Tap these buttons to switch the page shown.

MODULE LABEL area for CH 1–40 / ST IN 1–2 / FX RTN / MIX modules

This shows the module labels according to the set Sub MODULE LABEL and Main MODULE LABEL display modes for the CH 1–40, ST IN 1–2, FX RTN and MIX modules. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

Tap these buttons to open the MODULE LABEL Screen where the USER MODULE LABEL and set module color can be changed. (See “MODULE LABEL screen”.)

Module Location setting area

Tap these buttons to change the Location settings of the CH 1–40, ST IN 1–2, FX RTN and MIX modules.

Button	Function
CR	Set Location to Control Room (CR).
ST	Set Location to Studio (ST).
NONE (default)	Leave Location unset.

Scroll knob and scrollbar

Drag the scrollbar left and right to show CH 1–40, ST IN 1–2, FX RTN and MIX modules that are not shown on the screen. The screen can also be scrolled by turning LCD knob 8.

NOTE

The screen can also be scrolled by swiping left and right between the CH 1–40, ST IN 1–2, FX RTN and MIX module LABEL area () and the module Location setting area ().

Monitor Location setting area

Tap these buttons to change the Location settings of MONITOR 1 and MONITOR 2.

Button	Function
CR	Set Location to Control Room (CR).
ST	Set Location to Studio (ST).
NONE (default)	Leave Location unset.

NOTE

If the Location of any monitors are set to “ST”, the Monitor Exclusive button (See “ Monitor Exclusive button”.) cannot be switched on and the MONITOR 1/2 exclusive selection function cannot be used.

To use the MONITOR 1/2 exclusive function, switch the monitor Location setting to “CR” or “NONE”.

Automatic muting of monitor signals using the Location function

With the Location function, the muting of monitoring signals is as follows, which is useful for solo DJs.

Just before an input signal, or bus that it passes through, set to the same Location (excluding NONE) as MONITOR 1 or MONITOR 2 begins to be output from the MAIN L/R bus when no such signal had been output before, the corresponding monitoring signal will be automatically muted.

Just after all input signals, and buses that they pass through, set to the same Location (excluding NONE) as MONITOR 1 or MONITOR 2 stop being output from the MAIN L/R bus, the corresponding monitoring signal will be automatically unmuted.

If on route from the input signal to the MAIN L/R bus, it passes through a bus set to a different Location, muting of the monitoring signal will not be controlled.

Examples:

CH 1 module (Location: CR) RIGHTWARDS ARROW MIX 1 module (Location: CR) MAIN L/R bus: Monitoring signal will be muted/unmuted

CH 1 module (Location: CR) RIGHTWARDS ARROW MIX 1 module (Location: ST) MAIN L/R bus: Monitoring signal will not be muted/unmuted

CH 1 module (Location: CR) RIGHTWARDS ARROW MIX 1 module (Location: NONE) MAIN L/R bus: Monitoring signal will not be muted/unmuted

If the conditions are fulfilled as a result of the following parameter operations, muting of monitoring signals will be controlled.

Changing the FADER LEVEL to/from −∞ dB (including level operation using a DCA layer)

Switching MUTE on/off (including DCA/Mute Group muting operations)

Turning on/off SEND or MAIN L/R assignments

Changing the SEND LEVEL to/from −∞ dB

SEND PRE/POST switching

MODULE Library recall

Snapshot Recall

Changing Location settings

Changing bus mode settings (AUX/GROUP)

Changing CH MUTE / PRE-SEND LINK settings

Changing DCA assignments

Changing Mute Group assignments

All System Data Load

The following routes are supported when searching for routes from inputs to the MAIN L/R bus.

Supported routes

Route without buses

Input module RIGHTWARDS ARROW MAIN

Routes that pass through 1 bus

Input module RIGHTWARDS ARROW MIX MAIN

Input module RIGHTWARDS ARROW FX MAIN

Routes that pass through 2 buses

Input module RIGHTWARDS ARROW MIX MIX MAIN

Input module RIGHTWARDS ARROW MIX FX MAIN

Input module RIGHTWARDS ARROW FX MIX MAIN

Route that passes through 3 buses

Input module RIGHTWARDS ARROW MIX FX MIX MAIN

The following routes are not supported.

If a route is unsupported, the judgment is that it does not reach the MAIN L/R bus and so is not output from the MAIN L/R bus. For this reason, operating a module parameter of an unsupported route will function toward unmuting the monitoring signal.

Unsupported routes

The following routes that pass through 3 buses

Input module RIGHTWARDS ARROW MX MX MX MAIN

Input module RIGHTWARDS ARROW MX MX FX MAIN

Input module RIGHTWARDS ARROW FX MX MX MAIN

Input module RIGHTWARDS ARROW FX MX FX MAIN

Routes that pass through 4 or more buses

BUS CONFIG page

Page selection buttons

Tap these buttons to switch the page shown.

MIX 1–22 MODULE LABEL area

This shows the MIX 1–22 module labels according to the set Sub MODULE LABEL and Main MODULE LABEL display modes. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

Tap these buttons to open the MODULE LABEL Screen where the USER MODULE LABEL and set module color can be changed. (See “MODULE LABEL screen”.)

BUS MODE area

Tap these buttons to change the bus modes of MIX 1–22 modules.

Button

Function

AUX

Set the MIX bus that corresponds to the button to function as an AUX bus.

SEND level, on/off and PRE/POST settings can be made from each module to AUX mode buses. (PRE/POST is only for input modules.)

GROUP

Set the MIX bus that corresponds to the button to function as a GROUP bus.

Only on/off can be set for modules to GROUP mode buses. They are always sent POST FADER.

NOTE

When BUS is changed from GROUP to AUX, the setting color of corresponding MIX 1–22 modules will change to orange.

When BUS is changed from AUX to GROUP, the setting color of corresponding MIX 1–22 modules will change to purple.

AUX bus counts

This shows the number of modules set to AUX in the BUS MODE area.

“ST” shows the number of AUX mode module pairs that have the stereo link setting on.

“MONO” shows the number of AUX mode modules that have the stereo link setting off.

GROUP bus counts

This shows the number of modules set to GROUP in the BUS MODE area.

“ST” shows the number of GROUP mode module pairs that have the stereo link setting on.

“MONO” shows the number of GROUP mode modules that have the stereo link setting off.

STEREO LINK button area

These show the stereo link settings states of the MIX 1–22 modules.

Tap these buttons to turn the stereo link setting on/off for the MIX 1–22 modules.

When the stereo link is on, the button will appear highlighted.

PAN LINK button area

These buttons appear when MIX 1–22 module stereo link settings are on and the BUS mode is AUX.

When the PAN LINK setting is on, the AUX bus pan/balance (SEND PAN) setting is linked to the MAIN L/R bus pan/balance setting.

Scroll knob and scrollbar

Drag the scrollbar left and right to show MIX 1–22 modules that are not shown on the screen. The screen can also be scrolled by turning LCD knob 8.

NOTE

The screen can also be scrolled by swiping left and right between the MIX 1–22 module LABEL area () and the PAN LINK button area ().

USER DEFINED CONTROLS screen

The following settings can be made on this screen.

User Key page

Functions can be assigned to USER KEYS A–F and USER KEYS 1–12.

Tap Menu Screen > Front Panel Setup > User Key Setup to open this page.

Foot Switch page

Functions can be assigned to the footswitch.

Tap Menu Screen > Rear Panel Setup > FOOT SW Setup to open this page.

GPIO-IN page

Functions can be assigned to the GPIO input connector of this unit or of an SB-16D connected through the built-in Dante.

Tap Menu Screen > Rear Panel Setup > GPIO Input Setup to open this page.

GPIO-OUT page

Functions can be assigned to the GPIO output pins of an SB-16D connected to this unit or through the built-in Dante.

Tap Menu Screen > Rear Panel Setup > GPIO Output Setup to open this page.

The settings for keys and connectors are made in operation setting tables on each page.

Tap one of the four page selection buttons to open that page. (See “USER DEFINED CONTROLS screen structure”.)

The functions that can be assigned on these pages are as follows.

User Key, Foot Switch and GPIO-IN pages

Function	Parameter1	Parameter2	Parameter3	Function explanation
Snapshot	Select	Next		Increase by one the number of the Snapshot available for STORE/RECALL shown at the top of the Menu Screen. (See “Snapshot functions”.)
		Prev		Decrease by one the number of the Snapshot available for STORE/RECALL shown at the top of the Menu Screen. (See “Snapshot functions”.)
		No.	001–128/P001	This makes the specified Snapshot number shown at the top of the Menu Screen the target for STORE/RECALL. (See “Snapshot functions”.)
	Recall	Selected		Recall the Snapshot available for RECALL shown at the top of the Menu Screen. (See “Snapshot functions”.)
		Next		Switch the number of the Snapshot available for RECALL shown at the top of the Menu Screen to the number of the next Snapshot that is not an existing preset, and then recall it. (See “Snapshot functions”.)
		Prev		Switch the number of the Snapshot available for RECALL shown at the top of the Menu Screen to the number of the next lower Snapshot that is not an existing preset, and then recall it. (See “Snapshot functions”.)
		No.	001–128/P001	Recall a snapshot by number. (See “Snapshot functions”.)
		+Target Key		Press this simultaneously with a key that has Function set to Snapshot and Parameter 1 set to Target to recall that set snapshot number. (See “Snapshot functions”.)
Snapshot	Store	Selected		Store the Snapshot available for STORE shown at the top of the Menu Screen. (See “Snapshot functions”.)
		No.	001–128	Store a snapshot by number. (See “Snapshot functions”.)
		+Target Key		Press this simultaneously with a key that has Function set to Snapshot and Parameter 1 set to Target to store in that set snapshot number. (See “Snapshot functions”.) However, even when Function is set to Snapshot and Parameter 1 is set to Target, this will not work if the key assigned to Parameter 2 as “Next” or “Prev” is pressed at the same time.
	Target	Selected		Press simultaneously with a key assigned to a +Target Key function to STORE to or RECALL from the Snapshot number shown at the top of the Menu Screen.
		Next		Press this key simultaneously with a key set to Function: Snapshot, Parameter 1: RECALL and Parameter 2: +Target Key to recall the next Snapshot that is not an existing preset after the one shown at the top of the Menu Screen.
		Prev		Press this key simultaneously with a key set to Function: Snapshot, Parameter 1: RECALL and Parameter 2: +Target Key to recall the next Snapshot that is not an existing preset before the one shown at the top of the Menu Screen.
		No.	001–128/P001	Press simultaneously with a key assigned to a +Target Key function to STORE to or RECALL from the specified Snapshot number.
	Undo/Redo	Undo Color (USER KEY only)	Redo Color (USER KEY only)	Undo/redo Snapshot RECALL operations. (See “Snapshot functions”.) When undoing is possible, the USER KEYS that this function is assigned to will light in the color set by Parameter 2: Undo Color. When redoing is possible, the USER KEYS that this function is assigned to will light in the color set by Parameter 3: Redo Color. (Parameters 2 and 3 can only be set to USER KEYS.)
Monitor	MONITOR 1 MONITOR 2	Source select	1–6	When pressed individually, this selects a single monitoring source with the number specified by Parameter 3 for the monitor specified by Parameter 1. (See “ MONITOR SELECT buttons (MONITOR 1)” and “ MONITOR SELECT buttons (MONITOR 2)”.) When multiple buttons that have this function assigned are pressed simultaneously, the ADD function will be turned on, so multiple monitoring sources pressed at the same time can be selected together. This allows multiple selected monitoring sources to be mixed and monitored together. USER KEYS will light when in selected status.
Monitor	MONITOR 1 MONITOR 2	MUTE		Turn muting on/off for the monitoring signal specified by Parameter 1. (See “ MUTE button (MONITOR 1)” and “ MUTE button (MONITOR 2)”.) USER KEYS will light when this is on.
		DIM		Turn dimming on/off for the monitoring signal specified by Parameter 1. (See “ DIM button (MONITOR 1)” and “ DIM button (MONITOR 2)”.) USER KEYS will light when this is on.
		PFL to MON		Turn on/off PFL to MON for the monitor specified by Parameter 1. (See “ PFL to MON 1/AFL to MON 1 buttons” and “ PFL to MON 2/AFL to MON 2 buttons”.) USER KEYS will light when this is on.
		AFL to MON		Turn on/off AFL to MON for the monitor specified by Parameter 1. (See “ PFL to MON 1/AFL to MON 1 buttons” and “ PFL to MON 2/AFL to MON 2 buttons”.) USER KEYS will light when this is on.
		MON 2 FOLLOW MON 1 FOLLOW		Turn on/off FOLLOW for the monitor specified by Parameter 1. (See “ MON 2 FOLLOW button” and “ MON 1 FOLLOW button”.) USER KEYS will light when this is on.
		ADD		Turn on/off the ADD function for the monitor specified by Parameter 1. (See “ ADD button (MONITOR 1)” and “ ADD button (MONITOR 2)”.) USER KEYS will light when this is on.
		STEREO/MONO	MONO COLOR (USER KEY only)	Switch between STEREO and MONO for the monitor specified by Parameter 1. When set to STEREO, it will light with the color set for the USER KEY. When set to MONO, it will light with the color set by Parameter 3: MONO COLOR.
	Exclusive	MON 1/MON 2	MON 2 COLOR (USER KEY only)	Alternate the monitor exclusive selection between MONITOR 1 and MONITOR 2. When MONITOR 1 is selected, USER KEYS light with the set color. When MONITOR 2 is selected, USER KEYS light with the color set for Parameter 3. When the Monitor Exclusive function is off, USER KEYS are unlit and disabled.
		MONITOR 1 MONITOR 2		Press this key to exclusively select the monitors set with Parameter 2. When monitors set with Parameter 2 are selected, USER KEYS light with the set color. When the Monitor Exclusive function is off, USER KEYS are unlit and disabled.
SOLO	PFL/AFL	AFL COLOR (USER KEY only)		This switches the SOLO TYPE between PFL and AFL. When SOLO TYPE is PFL, it will light with the color set for the USER KEY. When SOLO TYPE is AFL, it will light with the color set for Parameter 2: AFL Color.
OSC	ON/OFF			Turn on/off the internal oscillator signal. USER KEYS will light when this setting is on.
Talkback	TALKBACK Key to MIX1 – to MIX22 to MAIN L/R to Selected BUS to MON 1 to MON 2 to EXT 1 to EXT 2	Single Key +SLATE Key		When Parameter 1 is set to “TALKBACK Key”, it has the same function as the TALKBACK key on the front panel. This turns on/off talkback output to the output assigned to the TALKBACK KEY button on the TALKBACK page of the TALKBACK / MONITOR / SOLO / OSC SETUP Screen. USER KEYS will light when this is on. When Parameter 1 is “to…”, this switches on/off talkback output to the corresponding output destination. USER KEYS will light when this is on. When “Single Key” is selected for Parameter 2, this key operates alone. When it is a USER key, press this key briefly to turn it on, and press it again to turn it off. Press this key continuously to turn the function on only while being pressed, turning it off when it is released. If “+SLATE Key” is selected for Parameter 2, when a USER key / FOOTSWITCH / GPIO-IN set to Function: Talkback / Parameter 1: SLATE Key is pressed first, talkback output to the Parameter 1 output destination will be on only while this key is being pressed.
	SLATE Key
MODULE LABEL	to Selected to MON 1 to MON 2 to EXT OUT to SOLO	Single Key + SLATE Key		When Parameter 1 is “to…”, this switches on/off return talkback output to the corresponding output destination. USER KEYS will light when this is on. When “Single Key” is selected for Parameter 2, this key operates alone. When it is a USER key, press this key briefly to turn it on, and press it again to turn it off. Press this key continuously to turn the function on only while being pressed, turning it off when it is released. If “+SLATE Key” is selected for Parameter 2, when a USER key / FOOTSWITCH / GPIO-IN that is set to Function: Return Talkback / Parameter 1: SLATE Key is pressed first, return talkback output to the Parameter 1 output destination will be on only while this key is being pressed.
	SLATE Key
AUTO MIXER	TOP PRIORITY			This turns on/off the TOP PRIORITY setting of the AUTO MIXER. USER KEYS will light when this is on.
	PRIORITY A-D			This turns on/off the group PRIORITY setting of the AUTO MIXER. USER KEYS will light when this is on.
	LO CUT A-D ON/OFF			This turns on/off the LO CUT button for the AUTO MIXER (A/B/C/D) group. USER KEYS will light when this is on.
AFV	ON/OFF			This turns all the Audio Follow Video functionality on/off. (See “MODULE (Audio Follow Video) Screen”.) USER KEYS will light when this is on.
	MODULE ON/OFF	CH1–40 STIN1–2 FXRTN1–4 MIX1–22 MAIN L/R		This turns the Audio Follow Video functionality on/off for individual modules. USER KEYS will light when this is on.
	Trigger Source Emulate (USER KEY only)	GPIO-IN 1–8 #--- GPIO-IN 1–8 #--- GPIO-IN 1–8 #--- GPIO-IN 1–8 #--- GPIO-IN 1–8 FOOT SW	Latch Unlatch	AFV trigger input by the trigger source (GPIO-IN port or FOOT SW) set by Parameter 2 is emulated by USER KEY operation. If Parameter 3 is set to “Unlatch”, it will operate as follows. Press this key to emulate the closed state of the Trigger Source selected by Parameter 2. Release this key to emulate the open state of the Trigger Source selected by Parameter 2. If Parameter 3 is set to “Latch”, it will operate as follows. Press this key when AFV operation is not active to emulate the closed state of the Trigger Source selected by Parameter 2. Press this key when AFV operation is active to emulate the open state of the Trigger Source selected by Parameter 2. USER KEYS will light while they are emulating the closed state of the Trigger Source selected by Parameter 2.
LED Indication (USER KEY only)	GPIO-IN	GPIO-IN 1–8 #--- GPIO-IN 1–8 #--- GPIO-IN 1–8 #--- GPIO-IN 1–8 #--- GPIO-IN 1–8	Closed-LIT Open-LIT	Depending on the GPIO-IN/OUT signal specified by Parameter 1 and 2, corresponding USER KEYS light. When Parameter 3 is “Closed-LIT”, if the selected GPIO-IN/OUT signal becomes shorted (Closed), corresponding USER KEYS light. When Parameter 3 is “Open-LIT”, if the selected GPIO-IN/OUT signal becomes open (Open), corresponding USER KEYS light. This can only be set on the User Key page. #---: ID of connected SB-16D
	GPIO-OUT	GPIO-OUT 1–8 #--- GPIO-OUT 1–8 #--- GPIO-OUT 1–8 #--- GPIO-OUT 1–8 #--- GPIO-OUT 1–8	Closed-LIT Open-LIT
	ON AIR Tally			When the GPIO-IN port specified for OA Tally Input becomes shorted (Closed), corresponding USER KEYS light.
LED Indication (USER KEY only)	MON DIM Status	TB DIM (MON 1)		When DIM becomes enabled by a TALKBACK operation for MONITOR 1, corresponding USER KEYS light.
		TB DIM (MON 2)		When DIM becomes enabled by a TALKBACK operation for MONITOR 2, corresponding USER KEYS light.
		TB DIM/DIM (MON 1)		When MONITOR 1 DIM is enabled by TALKBACK operation or DIM button, corresponding USER KEYS light. (See “ DIM button (MONITOR 1)”.)
		TB DIM/DIM (MON 2)		When MONITOR 2 DIM is enabled by TALKBACK operation or DIM button, corresponding USER KEYS light. (See “ DIM button (MONITOR 2)”.)
		TB DIM (MON 1/MON 2)		When DIM becomes enabled by a TALKBACK operation for MONITOR 1 or MONITOR 2, corresponding USER KEYS light.
		ALL		When MONITOR 1 or MONITOR 2 DIM is enabled by TALKBACK operation or DIM button, corresponding USER KEYS light. (See “ DIM button (MONITOR 1)” and “ DIM button (MONITOR 2)”)
OA Tally Input (GPIO-IN only)				This function can only be assigned to one GPIO-IN port. If the GPIO-IN port that this function is assigned to becomes shorted (Closed), ON AIR Tally Inhibit operation will be implemented in accordance with settings for ON AIR Tally Inhibit subjects (See “ ON AIR Tally Inhibit subjects”.).
Sends On Fader	MIX1–22/FX1–4			Turn the Sends On Fader mode for the selected bus on/off. (See “SENDS ON FADER screen”.)
Recorder/Player	Recorder	REC		This has the following functions, which are the same as the (recording) button for the recorder on the left side of the RECORDER/PLAYER Screen. When the recorder is stopped, this starts recording. Press this when recording is paused to resume recording. USER KEYS will light when the recorder is recording or paused.
		PAUSE		This has the following functions, which are the same as the (pause) button for the recorder on the left side of the RECORDER/PLAYER Screen. Press this when the recorder is recording to pause recording. USER KEYS will light when the recorder is paused.
		STOP		This has the following functions, which are the same as the (stop) button for the recorder on the left side of the RECORDER/PLAYER Screen. Press this when the recorder is recording to stop recording. USER KEYS will light when the recorder is stopped.
Recorder/Player	Player	PLAY/PAUSE	PAUSE COLOR (USER KEY only)	This starts/pauses playback of the player on the right side of the RECORDER/PLAYER Screen. Press this when the player is playing to pause playback. Press this when the player is stopped or paused to start playback. When the player is playing, keys will light with USER KEY setting colors. When the player is paused, USER KEYS will light with the colors set by Parameter 3.
		PLAY		This has the same functions as the (play) button of the player on the right side of the RECORDER/PLAYER Screen. Press this when the player is stopped or paused to start playback. USER KEYS will light when the player is playing.
		PAUSE		This has the following functions, which are the same as the (pause) button for the player on the right side of the RECORDER/PLAYER Screen. Press this when the player is playing to pause playback. USER KEYS will light when the player is paused.
		STOP		This has the following functions, which are the same as the (stop) button for the player on the right side of the RECORDER/PLAYER Screen. Press this when the player is playing to stop playback. USER KEYS will light when the player is stopped.
		FAST FORWARD		This has the same functions as the button of the player on the right side of the RECORDER/PLAYER Screen. When the player is stopped, playing back or paused, press this key to start searching forward. Press and hold this key to search while it is being pressed. Press this key when the player is searching forward to return to the state before searching forward. USER KEYS will light when the player is searching forward.
		REWIND		This has the same functions as the button of the player on the right side of the RECORDER/PLAYER Screen. When the player is stopped, playing back or paused, press this key to start searching backward. Press and hold this key to search while it is being pressed. Press this key when the player is searching backward to return to the state before searching backward. USER KEYS will light when the player is searching backward.
Recorder/Player	Player	FILE SKIP NEXT		This has the same functions as the button of the player on the right side of the RECORDER/PLAYER Screen. Press this when the player is stopped, playing or paused to skip to the next file.
		FILE SKIP PREV		This has the same functions as the button of the player on the right side of the RECORDER/PLAYER Screen. Press this when the player is stopped to skip to the previous file. Press this when the player is playing or paused to return to the beginning of the file. Press when a file is stopped at its beginning to skip to the previous file.
		DIRECT PLAY	1–100 (file number)	Pressing the key will start playback from the beginning of the file, which is specified by number with Parameter 3, in the player on the right side of the RECORDER/PLAYER Screen. USER KEYS will light when the player is playing the file with the specified number.
MTR	REC			This has the following functions, which are the same as the button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen. Press this when stopped and at least one REC READY is on to put the unit into recording standby. If the MTR operation mode is LIVE RECORDING MODE, pressing this when recording will not interrupt recording, but it will end the current take and start a new take (take splitting). When the MTR operation mode is LIVE RECORDING MODE or VIRTUAL SOUND CHECK MODE, press this when in recording standby to start a new take and remain in recording standby. When the MTR operation mode is OVERDUB MODE and at least one REC READY is on, press this when playing to punch in and start recording. USER KEYS will light when recording and when recording is paused. USER KEYS will be unlit when stopped or playing back.
	PLAY			This has the following functions, which are the same as the button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen. Press this when stopped or paused to start playback. Press this when recording is paused to resume recording. The indicator lights when recording or playing. USER KEYS will be unlit when stopped.
MTR	STOP			This has the following functions, which are the same as the button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen. Press when recording/playing to stop recording/playing. USER KEYS will light when stopped.
	PAUSE			This has the following functions, which are the same as the button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen. Press this when stopped or playing to pause playback. When the MTR operation mode is LIVE RECORDING MODE or VIRTUAL SOUND CHECK MODE, press this when recording to pause recording. This cannot be used during recording when the MTR operation mode is OVERDUB MODE. USER KEYS will light when recording or playback is paused.
	FAST FORWARD			This has the following functions, which are the same as the (F.FWD) button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen. When stopped, playing back or playback is paused, press this key to start searching forward. Press and hold this key to search while it is being pressed. Press this key when searching forward to return to the state before searching forward. USER KEYS will light when searching forward.
	REWIND			This has the following functions, which are the same as the (REW) button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen. When stopped, playing back or playback is paused, press this key to start searching backward. Press and hold this key to search while it is being pressed. Press this key when searching backward to return to the state before searching backward. USER KEYS will light when searching backward.
	TAKE SKIP NEXT			This has the following functions, which are the same as tapping the (SKIP NEXT) and (TO END) buttons on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen. When the MTR operation mode is LIVE RECORDING MODE or VIRTUAL SOUND CHECK MODE: Tap this when stopped, playing or paused to skip to the next take. USER KEYS will light when skipping. When the MTR operation mode is OVERDUB MODE: Tap this when stopped, playing or paused to skip to the end of the take. USER KEYS will light when skipping.
MTR	TAKE SKIP PREV			This has the following functions, which are the same as tapping the (TO TOP/SKIP PREV.) and (TO TOP) buttons on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen. When the MTR operation mode is LIVE RECORDING MODE or VIRTUAL SOUND CHECK MODE: Press this when playing or paused to return to the beginning of the current take. Press this when a take is stopped at its beginning to skip to the beginning of the previous take. USER KEYS will light when skipping. When the MTR operation mode is OVERDUB MODE: Tap this when stopped, playing or paused to return to the beginning of the take. USER KEYS will light when skipping.
	MARK SKIP NEXT			This has the following functions, which are the same as tapping the MARK SKIP button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen. Press this key to move to the position of the nearest mark that is after the current playback position.
	MARK SKIP PREV			This has the following functions, which are the same as tapping the MARK SKIP button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen. Press this key to move to the position of the nearest mark that is before the current playback position.
	Undo/Redo	Undo Color (USER KEY only)	Redo Color (USER KEY only)	This has the following functions, which are the same as tapping the UNDO/REDO button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen. Press when the key is the Parameter 2 UNDO color (blue by default) to undo. Press when the key is the Parameter 3 REDO color (orange by default) to redo. When this key is unlit, UNDO and REDO are not possible.
	Punch IN/OUT			Use this to punch in/out in the MULTI TRACK RECORDER. When the MTR operation mode is OVERDUB MODE and at least one REC READY is on, press this when playing to punch in and start recording. Press during recording to punch to punch out and continue playback.
	SET MARK			This has the following functions, which are the same as tapping the SET MARK button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen. Pressing this key sets a mark at the current recording/playback time. USER KEYS will light while being pressed.
	SOUND CHECK	SOUND CHECK		This has the same function as tapping the SOUND CHECK button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen. USER KEYS will light when SOUND CHECK mode is ON.
		YES		Pressing this button when an MTR SOUND CHECK confirmation message is shown has the same function as tapping the YES button in that message.
MTR	IN-OUT	SET IN		This has the same function as tapping the SET IN button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen. USER KEYS will light when an IN point is set.
		SET OUT		This has the same function as tapping the SET OUT button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen. USER KEYS will light when an OUT point is set.
		I-O CLEAR		This has the same function as tapping the CLEAR button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen. USER KEYS will light while being pressed.
	REPEAT			This has the same function as tapping the repeat mode setting button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen. USER KEYS will light when repeat mode is not OFF.
	REHEARSAL			This has the same function as tapping the REHEARSAL button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen. USER KEYS will light when REHEARSAL mode is ON. This function works only when MTR operation mode is OVERDUB MODE.
Insert On/Off	CH1–40 MIX1–22 MAIN L/R			This turns on/off the INSERT of the module specified with Parameter 1. USER KEYS will light when the corresponding setting is on.
Send On/Off	CH1–40 STIN1–2 FXRTN1–4 MIX1–22 MAIN L/R	MIX1–22 FX1–4 MAIN L/R		This turns ON/OFF the SEND from the module specified with Parameter 1 to the bus specified with Parameter 2. USER KEYS will light when the corresponding setting is on.
Mute	CH1–40 STIN1–2 FXRTN1–4 MIX1–22 MAIN L/R DCA1–8 Mute Group1–8	Mute - LIT Unmute - LIT (USER KEY only)		This switches the MUTE/UNMUTE status of the specified module. If Parameter 2 is “Mute-LIT”, USER KEYS will light when muted. If Parameter 2 is “Unmute-LIT”, USER KEYS will light when unmuted.
		Closed - Mute Closed - Unmute (FOOT Switch/GPIO-IN)		This switches the MUTE/UNMUTE status of the specified module. If Parameter 2 is “Closed-Mute”, when the FOOTSWITCH/GPIO-IN becomes shorted (Closed), it will become muted. If Parameter 2 is “Closed-Unmute”, when the FOOTSWITCH/GPIO-IN becomes shorted (Closed), it will become unmuted.
Tap Tempo	FX1–4	Delay1–3		Use to tap the tempo to input the DELAY TIME when the selected effect type is DELAY. (See “MODULE (FX) Screen”.) When the effect type is any delay other than “DELAY LCR”, set Parameter 2 to “Delay 1”. When the effect type is “DELAY LCR”, set Parameter 2 as follows.
				Desired parameter	Parameter 2 setting
				DELAY TIME L	Delay1
				DELAY TIME C	Delay2
				DELAY TIME R	Delay3
Screen	Information	ERROR COLOR (USER KEY only)		This opens the INFORMATION Screen on the right touchscreen. In this case, the last open page of the INFORMATION Screen will be shown again if the unit is functioning properly. The ERROR page will open if an error or alert is occurring with the unit. When any page of the INFORMATION Screen is open, pressing corresponding USER KEYS will close the screen. Regardless of whether the INFORMATION Screen is open, corresponding USER KEYS will be lit/unlit as follows. Keys will light with the colors set for USER KEYS if the unit is functioning properly If an error or alert is occurring with the unit, they will blink with the color set by Parameter 2
	Snapshot			This opens the SNAPSHOT Screen on the right touchscreen and lights corresponding USER KEYS. When this screen is open, pressing corresponding USER KEYS will close it.
	METER	ALL LAYERS OUTPUTS LAYER1–7 LAST TAB		Show the page of the METER Screen specified by Parameter 2 on the rightmost touchscreen and light the corresponding USER KEYS. When this screen is open, pressing a corresponding USER KEYS will close it.
	Monitor/TB/OSC	TALKBACK		Show the TALKBACK page of the TALKBACK / MONITOR / SOLO / OSC SETUP Screen on the rightmost touchscreen and light corresponding USER KEYS. When this screen is open, pressing corresponding USER KEYS will close it.
		MONITOR 1/2		Show the MONITOR 1/2 page of the TALKBACK / MONITOR / SOLO / OSC SETUP Screen on the rightmost touchscreen and light corresponding USER KEYS. When this screen is open, pressing corresponding USER KEYS will close it.
		SOLO/OSCILLATOR		Show the SOLO/OSCILLATOR page of the TALKBACK / MONITOR / SOLO / OSC SETUP Screen on the rightmost touchscreen and light corresponding USER KEYS. When this screen is open, pressing a corresponding USER KEYS will close it.
	SEND OVERVIEW	MIX1–22 FX1–4 MAIN L/R	LCD L LCD C (Sonicview 24XP only) LCD R	This will show the Send Overview Screen for the bus specified by Parameter 2 on the touchscreen specified by Parameter 3, and corresponding USER KEYS will light. When this screen is open, pressing corresponding USER KEYS will close it.
	MODULE(FX)	FX RTN 1–4	LCD L LCD C (Sonicview 24XP only) LCD R	This will show the MODULE (FX) for the FX specified by Parameter 2 on the touchscreen specified by Parameter 3, and corresponding USER KEYS will light. When this screen is open, pressing corresponding USER KEYS will close it.
Screen	HOME	SEND 1st BLOCK SEND 2nd BLOCK SEND 3rd BLOCK SEND 4th BLOCK SEND 5th BLOCK SEND 6th BLOCK SEND 7th BLOCK ALL SEND AUTO MIXER AFV		This will show the Home Screen with, as specified by Parameter 2, the 4 Send buses of a block, all the Send buses, the AUTO MIXER settings or the Audio Follow Video function parameter settings on the touchscreen, and corresponding USER KEYS will light.
	AUTO MIXER			This opens the AUTOMATIC MIXER Screen on the right touchscreen and lights corresponding USER KEYS. When this screen is open, pressing corresponding USER KEYS will close it.
	RECORDER/PLAYER			Show the RECORDER PLAYER Screen on the right touchscreen and light the corresponding USER KEYS. When this screen is open, pressing a corresponding USER KEYS will close it.
	Multi Track Recorder			Show the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen on the right touchscreen and light the corresponding USER KEYS. When this screen is open, pressing a corresponding USER KEYS will close it.
Label	Module Main Label Module Sub Label	User		This sets the display mode of the MODULE LABEL specified by Parameter 1 to “USER”. Corresponding USER KEYS will light when the MODULE LABEL display mode is “USER”.
		Fixed		This sets the display mode of the MODULE LABEL specified by Parameter 1 to “FIXED”. Corresponding USER KEYS will light when the MODULE LABEL display mode is “FIXED”.
		Port Label		This sets the display mode of the MODULE LABEL specified by Parameter 1 to “PORT LABEL”. Corresponding USER KEYS will light when the MODULE LABEL display mode is “PORT LABEL”.
		Rotation		Pressing this key will cycle through the display mode of the MODULE LABEL specified by Parameter 1 in order: USER, FIXED, PORT LABEL.
	Port Label	User		This sets the PORT LABEL display mode to “USER”. Corresponding USER KEYS will light when the PORT LABEL display mode is “USER”.
		Fixed		This sets the PORT LABEL display mode to “FIXED”. Corresponding USER KEYS will light when the PORT LABEL display mode is “PORT LABEL”.
		Toggle		Pressing this key will alternate the PORT LABEL display mode between “USER” and “FIXED”.

NOTE

Foot Switch/GPIO-IN:

When one of the functions below is assigned, the selected function will become active while a low level signal is input. Moreover, if the same function is assigned to multiple GPIO-IN and/or footswitches, the function will be activated when any one of those signals is Low level. The function will be deactivated only when all the signals from the assigned GPIO-IN and/or footswitches are High level (OR operation).

If any of the following functions are assigned, when the unit starts up or when All System Data is loaded, the corresponding function will become active/inactive according to the GPIO-IN connector / Foot Switch status.

Monitor Mute

Monitor DIM

Monitor PFL to MON

Monitor AFL to MON

Monitor FOLLOW

Monitor Stereo/Mono (Mono at Low level)

SOLO (AFL at Low level)

OSC

Talkback

Return Talkback

AUTO MIXER

AFV

OA Tally Input

Insert On/Off

Send On/Off

Mute

When one of the functions below is assigned, the selected function will operate if a low level signal of 50 ms or longer is input.

Snapshot

Monitor Source Select

Monitor Exclusive MONITOR 1

Monitor Exclusive MONITOR 2

Sends On Fader

Recorder/Player

MTR

Tap Tempo

Screen

Label

When one of the functions below is assigned, the selected function will be toggled on/off if a low level signal of 50 ms or longer is input.

Monitor ADD

Monitor Exclusive MON 1/MON 2

Excluding the current snapshot, snapshots stored using a USER key, FOOTSWITCH or GPIO-IN are named “USER KEY” followed by a three-digit slot number (for example, “USER KEY 018”).

When the Function is set to Snapshot and Parameter 2 is set to No, if Parameter 3 matches the current Snapshot number, the corresponding USER KEY will light.

When a USER key with an MTR function set is operated, the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen will open on the right touchscreen. When MTR operation mode is active, however, the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen will not open if it does not have a button with the corresponding function.

GPIO-OUT page

Function	Parameter1	Parameter2	Parameter3	Function explanation
Fader Start	CH1–40 STIN1–2 FXRTN1–4 MIX1–22 MAIN L/R	Pulse 30msec Pulse 50msec Pulse 100msec Pulse 150msec Pulse 200msec Pulse 250msec Pulse 300msec	NORMAL-Open NORMAL-Closed	A pulse signal will be output with the width set by Parameter 2 when the status of the specified module becomes as follows. When Parameter 3 is “NORMAL-Open”, a pulse signal shaped like will be output. When Parameter 3 is “NORMAL-Closed”, a pulse signal shaped like will be output. When MUTE is off and the FADER level changes from below to above the fader start level setting value When the FADER level is above the fader start level setting value, and MUTE changes from on to off
Fader Stop	CH1–40 STIN1–2 FXRTN1–4 MIX1–22 MAIN L/R	Pulse 30msec Pulse 50msec Pulse 100msec Pulse 150msec Pulse 200msec Pulse 250msec Pulse 300msec	NORMAL-Open NORMAL-Closed	A pulse signal will be output with the width set by Parameter 2 when the status of the specified module becomes as follows. When Parameter 3 is “NORMAL-Open”, a pulse signal shaped like will be output. When Parameter 3 is “NORMAL-Closed”, a pulse signal shaped like will be output. When MUTE is off, and the FADER level changes from above to below the fader start level setting value When the FADER level is above the fader start level setting value and MUTE changes from off to on
Fader Start/Stop	CH1–40 STIN1–2 FXRTN1–4 MIX1–22 MAIN L/R	Alternate	NORMAL-Open NORMAL-Closed	The signal level output will change depending on the MUTE and FADER level states of the specified module. When MUTE is off for the specified module and the FADER level is above the fader start level setting value, if Parameter 3 is NORMAL-Open, low level signal output will be latched. When Parameter 3 is “NORMAL-Closed”, high level signal output will be latched.
				Parameter 3	When MUTE is on for the specified module or the FADER level is not above the fader start level setting value	When MUTE is off for the specified module and the FADER level is above the fader start level setting value
				NORMAL-Open	High level (Open) is output	Low level (Closed) is output
				NORMAL-Closed	Low level (Closed) is output	High level (Open) is output
USER KEY OUT	USER KEY A–F USER KEY 1–12	Pulse 30msec Pulse 50msec Pulse 100msec Pulse 150msec Pulse 200msec Pulse 250msec Pulse 300msec Alt. Latch Alt. Unlatch	NORMAL-Open NORMAL-Closed	If a USER KEY designated by Parameter 1 is pressed, the GPIO-OUT connector output status will be changed. When Parameter 2 is “Pulse xxx msec”, if a USER KEY designated by Parameter 1 is pressed, a pulse signal will be output from the corresponding GPIO-OUT connector with the length specified by Parameter 2. When Parameter 3 is “NORMAL-Open”, a pulse signal shaped like will be output. When Parameter 3 is “NORMAL-Closed”, a pulse signal shaped like will be output. When Parameter 2 is “Alt.Latch”, if a USER KEY designated by Parameter 1 is pressed, the output from the corresponding GPIO-OUT will alternate between low and high level. When Parameter 3 is “NORMAL-Open”, high level (Open) will be output in the initial state. When Parameter 3 is “NORMAL-Closed”, low level (Closed) will be output in the initial state. When Parameter 2 is “Alt.Unlatch”, the signal level of the output from the corresponding GPIO-OUT will change only while the USER KEY designated by Parameter 1 is pressed. When Parameter 3 is “NORMAL-Open”, high level (Open) will be output when the USER KEY is not pressed and low level will be output when it is pressed. When Parameter 3 is “NORMAL-Closed”, low level (Closed) will be output when the USER KEY is not pressed and high level will be output when it is pressed.
GPIO-IN OUT	GPIO-IN 1–8 #--- GPIO-IN 1–8 #--- GPIO-IN 1–8 #--- GPIO-IN 1–8 #--- GPIO-IN 1–8	NORMAL INVERT		The input state (high/low level) of the GPIO-IN specified by Parameter 1 is output to GPIO-OUT. If Parameter 2 is “NORMAL”, the input state is output unchanged. If Parameter 2 is “INVERT”, the input state is inverted and output. #---: ID of connected SB-16D
MTR Status	REC PLAY STOP PAUSE FAST FORWARD REWIND TAKE SKIP NEXT TAKE SKIP PREV			These output the MTR status from the GPIO-OUT port. While selected, they output LOW level.
AUTO MIXER Tally	TOP PRIORITY	NORMAL- Open NORMAL- Closed		This outputs AUTO MIXER TOP PRIORITY on/off states from the GPIO-OUT port. When TOP PRIORITY is ON and Parameter 2 is “NORMAL-Open”, low level signal (Closed) output will be latched. When Parameter 3 is “NORMAL-Closed”, high level signal (Open) output will be latched.
	PRIORITY A-D			This outputs AUTO MIXER (A/B/C/D) group PRIORITY on/off states from the GPIO-OUT port. When AUTO MIXER (A/B/C/D) group PRIORITY is ON and Parameter 2 is “NORMAL-Open”, low level signal (Closed) output will be latched. When Parameter 3 is “NORMAL-Closed”, high level signal (Open) output will be latched.
	LO CUT A-D ON/OFF			This outputs AUTO MIXER (A/B/C/D) group LO CUT button on/off states from the GPIO-OUT port. When AUTO MIXER (A/B/C/D) group LO CUT is ON and Parameter 2 is “NORMAL-Open”, low level signal (Closed) output will be latched. When Parameter 3 is “NORMAL-Closed”, high level signal (Open) output will be latched.
Monitor Status	MONITOR 1 MONITOR 2	1–6		This outputs the monitoring source selection status for the monitor specified by Parameter 1 from the GPIO-OUT. When the monitoring source with the number specified by Parameter 2 is selected, low level (Closed) will be output.
		Mute		This outputs whether the monitor specified by Parameter 1 is muted or unmuted from the GPIO-OUT. When muted, low level (Closed) will be output.
		Add		This outputs the ADD function on/off status for the monitor specified by Parameter 1 from the GPIO-OUT. When the ADD function is on, low level (Closed) will be output.

USER DEFINED CONTROLS screen structure

Page selection buttons

Tap these buttons to switch the page shown.

button

Tap this button to open a window where the footswitch polarity and fader start level can be set. (See “Setting the footswitch polarity” and “Fader Start Level setting”.)

Control names and buttons (User Key page only)

The colors that USER KEYS light when their functions are activated can be set.

Tap these buttons to open a color palette window.

Tap a color in the color palette to close the window and change the control name display color.

Set function names

The show the names of functions that have been assigned to the controls.

Tap this area to open the control setting table for the controls.

Scroll knob and scrollbar

These appear when all selectable options cannot be shown on the display at the same time.

Drag the bar to scroll the visible options. The options can also be scrolled by swiping up and down on the control name () and set function name () area as well as by turning LCD knob 8.

Control setting on USER DEFINED CONTROLS Screen

/ buttons

Tap these buttons to switch the control that is being edited.

Control name area

This shows the name of the currently selected control.

button (User Key page only)

The colors that USER KEYS light when their functions are activated can be set.

Tap these buttons to open a color palette window.

Tap a color in the color palette to close the window and change the control name display color.

Function list

Functions that can be set for the controls and their parameters are shown in a 4-column list.

Tap a column and select the setting to be changed. The selected column will be highlighted.

To change a setting, swipe the list up and down in the highlighted column. The setting can also be changed by turning LCD knob 8 (lit light blue).

CANCEL button

Tap this button to cancel setting changes and return to the top USER DEFINED CONTROLS Screen.

APPLY button

Tap this button to apply setting changes and return to the top USER DEFINED CONTROLS Screen.

Scroll knob icon

This icon shows that LCD knob 8 (lit light blue) can be used to scroll.

User Key page

On this page, functions can be assigned to USER KEYS A–F and USER KEYS 1–12.

Tap Menu Screen > Front Panel Setup > User Key Setup to open this page.

User Key page when setting controls

The factory default settings are as follows.

Key	Lit color	Assigned function
USER KEYS A	Green	Monitor \| MONITOR 1 \| Source select \| 1 (MAIN L/R)
USER KEYS B	Green	Monitor \| MONITOR 1 \| Source select \| 2 (MIX 15-16)
USER KEYS C	Red	Monitor \| MONITOR 1 \| MUTE
USER KEYS D	Green	Monitor \| MONITOR 1 \| Source select \| 3 (MIX 1)
USER KEYS E	Green	Monitor \| MONITOR 1 \| Source select \| 4 (MIX 11-12)
USER KEYS F	Orange	Monitor \| MONITOR 1 \| DIM
USER KEYS 1	Red	Mute \| Mute Group1 \| Mute - LIT
USER KEYS 2	Red	Mute \| Mute Group2 \| Mute - LIT
USER KEYS 3	Red	Mute \| Mute Group3 \| Mute - LIT
USER KEYS 4	Red	Mute \| Mute Group4 \| Mute - LIT
USER KEYS 5	Orange	Sends On Fader \| MIX1
USER KEYS 6	Orange	Sends On Fader \| MIX2
USER KEYS 7	Orange	Sends On Fader \| MIX3
USER KEYS 8	Orange	Sends On Fader \| MIX4
USER KEYS 9	Orange	Sends On Fader \| MIX5
USER KEYS 10	Orange	Sends On Fader \| MIX6
USER KEYS 11	Orange	Sends On Fader \| MIX7
USER KEYS 12	Orange	Sends On Fader \| MIX8

Foot Switch page

Functions can be assigned to the footswitch on this page.

Tap Menu Screen > Rear Panel Setup > FOOT SW Setup to open this page.

Foot Switch page when setting controls

AFV indicator

If Foot Switch is selected as a trigger source for the Audio Follow Video function “AFV” will be shown here in blue.

Checking whether multiple functions have been assigned to the Foot Switch is possible.

The factory default setting is “Tap Tempo | FX3 | Delay1”.

Setting the footswitch polarity

This unit was designed to be used with momentary footswitches that must be pushed to function (shorted when pushed). Since the polarity can be reversed, however, push-to-break (shorted with not pushed) footswitches can also be used.

The setting of this unit can be changed according to the polarity of the footswitch being used.

1.Tap the button on the USER DEFINED CONTROLS Screen to open a settings window.

2.Tap the Foot Switch Polarity slider in the window to set the footswitch polarity.

Options: Normal (default), Invert

GPIO-IN page

On this page, functions can be assigned to the GPIO input connector of this unit or of a mounted SB-16D connected through the built-in Dante.

See “Using GPIO extension functions” for details about using the GPIO connector of a mounted SB-16D.

Tap Menu Screen > Rear Panel Setup > GPIO Input Setup to open this page.

GPIO-IN page when setting controls

AFV indicators

If an item is selected as a trigger source for the Audio Follow Video function “AFV” will be shown here in blue.

Checking whether multiple functions have been assigned to an item is possible.

Functions are not assigned in the factory default settings.

NOTE

The GPIO input connector of a mounted SB-16D does not have functions assigned when shipped from the factory.

GPIO-OUT page

On this page, functions can be assigned to the GPIO output connector of this unit or of a mounted SB-16D connected through the built-in Dante.

See “Using GPIO extension functions” for details about using the GPIO connector of a mounted SB-16D.

Tap Menu Screen > Rear Panel Setup > GPIO Output Setup to open this page.

GPIO-OUT page when setting controls

The factory default settings are as follows.

Port number	Assigned function
1	Fader Start/Stop \| CH29 \| Alternate \| NORMAL-Open
2	Fader Start/Stop \| CH31 \| Alternate \| NORMAL-Open
3	Fader Start/Stop \| CH33 \| Alternate \| NORMAL-Open
4	Fader Start/Stop \| CH35 \| Alternate \| NORMAL-Open
5	Fader Start/Stop \| CH37 \| Alternate \| NORMAL-Open
6	Fader Start/Stop \| CH39 \| Alternate \| NORMAL-Open
7	Fader Start/Stop \| STIN1 \| Alternate \| NORMAL-Open
8	Fader Start/Stop \| STIN2 \| Alternate \| NORMAL-Open

NOTE

The GPIO output connector of a mounted SB-16D does not have functions assigned when shipped from the factory.

Fader Start Level setting

This sets the trigger level of the fader start/stop function (default: −60 dB).

1.Tap the button on the USER DEFINED CONTROLS Screen to open a settings window.

2.Tap the setting level value of the Fader Start Level item in the window to change its appearance as shown below. The Channel Screens also switch to showing fader start setting.

3.Adjust the channel faders on the right top panel to the desired start/stop trigger levels.

The adjusted values are shown in the window.

4.Tap the APPLY button to set the fader start level to the position of the corresponding fader, closing the window and returning to normal display.

Tap the CANCEL button to close the window and return to normal display.

Layer Key SETUP page

Assign channel sets and custom layers to the 7 LAYER KEYS on this screen.

Tap Menu Screen > Front Panel Setup > Layer / Master Fader Setup to open this page.

Sonicview 24XP Layer Key SETUP Screen

Layer Key SETUP layer key setting screen

Page selection buttons

Tap these buttons to switch the page shown.

Layer Key names

The colors that LAYER KEYS 1–7 light when they are selected can be set.

Tap this area to open a color palette window.

Tap a color in the color palette to change the layer key name button color and close the palette window.

Layer Key settings

This shows channel sets and custom layers assigned to LAYER KEYS 1–7.

Tap this area to open a settings screen for the layer keys.

/ buttons

Tap these buttons to switch the LAYER KEYS (1–7) that is being edited.

Layer Key name

This shows the name of the currently selected LAYER KEYS (1–7).

button

The colors that LAYER KEYS 1–7 light when they are selected can be set.

Tap this button to open a color palette window.

Tap a color in the color palette to change the layer key name display color and close the palette window.

Settings list

This shows channel sets and custom layers that can be set for LAYER KEYS 1–7.

To change a setting, swipe the list up and down. The setting can also be changed by turning LCD knob 8 (lit blue).

Settings that can be selected are as follows.

Model	Option
Sonicview 16XP	CH 1-16
	CH 17-32
	CH 33-40 / ST IN / FX RTN
	MIX 1-16
	MIX 17-22 / MAIN L/R
	DCA
	CUSTOM 1
	CUSTOM 2
	CUSTOM 3
	CUSTOM 4
	CUSTOM 5
	CUSTOM 6
	CUSTOM 7
Sonicview 24XP	CH 1-24
	CH 25-40 / ST IN / FX RTN
	MIX 1-22 / MAIN L/R
	DCA
	CUSTOM 1
	CUSTOM 2
	CUSTOM 3
	CUSTOM 4
	CUSTOM 5
	CUSTOM 6
	CUSTOM 7

CANCEL button

Tap this button to cancel setting changes and close to the layer settings screen.

APPLY button

Tap this button to confirm setting changes and close to the layer settings screen.

Scroll knob icon

This icon shows that LCD knob 8 (lit light blue) can be used to scroll.

Default settings for LAYER KEYS 1–7

The factory default settings are as follows.

Sonicview 16XP

Key	Lit color	Assigned function
LAYER 1	Blue	CH 1-16
LAYER 2	Blue	CH 17-32
LAYER 3	Blue	CH 33-40 / ST IN / FX RTN
LAYER 4	Orange	MIX 1-16
LAYER 5	Orange	MIX 17-22 / MAIN L/R
LAYER 6	Yellow	DCA
LAYER 7	Pink	CUSTOM 1

Sonicview 24XP

Key	Lit color	Assigned function
LAYER 1	Blue	CH 1-24
LAYER 2	Blue	CH 25-40 / ST IN / FX RTN
LAYER 3	Orange	MIX 1-22 / MAIN L/R
LAYER 4	Yellow	DCA
LAYER 5	Pink	CUSTOM 1
LAYER 6	Pink	CUSTOM 2
LAYER 7	Pink	CUSTOM 3

Custom Layer SETUP page

The modules assigned to custom layers and the modules assigned to the master fader can be set in the settings list on this screen.

Tap Menu Screen > Front Panel Setup > Layer / Master Fader Setup to open the Layer Key SETUP page. Then, tap the Custom Layer SETUP button to open this page.

Page selection buttons

Tap these buttons to switch the page shown.

Custom Layer selection

This shows the name of the custom layer that is being edited.

Tap this area to open a window where the custom layer can be selected.

Tap the name of the custom layer to be edited to close this window and show the module labels for the display mode set by the Sub MODULE LABEL or Main MODULE LABEL (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.) for the modules assigned to the selected custom layer in the custom layer slot buttons ().

Tap “All Custom Layers” in the window to close the window and open the All Custom Layers display.

This shows the module labels for the display mode set by the Sub MODULE LABEL or Main MODULE LABEL (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.) for the modules assigned to all 7 custom layers on one line per layer.

Tap a button shown to switch to display of its custom layer.

Module group switching buttons

Tap these buttons to change which group of modules assigned to the layer is shown.

Module buttons

These are the buttons for the modules in the group assigned to the layer.

Use the module group switching buttons to select the shown group.

Custom layer slot buttons

In sets of 8 channels, these show the module labels for the display mode set by the Sub MODULE LABEL or Main MODULE LABEL (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.) of the modules assigned to the custom layer that is being edited. Modules that are not assigned will appear blank ().

Use the block selection buttons () to switch the 8 channels that are shown.

button

Tap this button to open the custom layer editing menu.

Items that can be used will be shown highlighted.

Menu item	Function
COPY LAYER	This copies the setting state of the selected custom layer to a buffer.
PASTE LAYER	This pastes the custom layer setting state copied to the buffer to the selected custom layer.
CLEAR LAYER	This clears all the settings of the selected custom layer. A confirmation message will appear before clearing is executed.
INSERT BLANK	This inserts a blank at the position of the selected slot button (framed in yellow). When this is done, the contents assigned to the selected slot button and the slot buttons to its right will be shifted right.
DELETE	This deletes the assignment of the selected slot button (framed in yellow) and shifts left by one slot the settings to its right. Doing this causes the rightmost slot button to become blank.
CLEAR	This removes the assignment of the selected slot button (framed in yellow). This does not move any slot buttons.

Block selection buttons

The block selection button for the 8 channels that are shown is highlighted.

Tap one of these buttons to switch the shown 8-channel block, which shows custom layer and slot buttons ().

CANCEL button

Tap this button to cancel setting changes.

APPLY button

Tap this button to confirm setting changes.

button

Tap this button to make the assignment of the selected slot (framed in yellow) blank.

MASTER slot button

This shows the module label for the display mode set by the Sub MODULE LABEL or Main MODULE LABEL of the module assigned to the MASTER fader (MAIN L/R by default), which does not depend on layer selection. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

Custom layer assignment operation procedures

Selecting the custom layer slot button followed by the module button

1.Tap the custom layer slot button to select it for assignment change.

Selecting will make a yellow frame appear.

2.Tap the button for the module to be assigned to the selected slot.

This will assign the tapped module to the custom layer slot selected in step 1.

3.Tap the APPLY button to confirm setting changes.

Tap the CANCEL button to cancel setting changes.

Selecting the module button followed by the custom layer slot button

1.Tap the button for the module to be assigned.

Selecting will make a yellow frame appear.

2.Tap the button for the custom layer slot to assign the selected module to it.

This will assign the module selected in step 1 to the tapped custom layer slot.

3.Tap the APPLY button to confirm setting changes.

Tap the CANCEL button to cancel setting changes.

NOTE

In either procedure, multiple buttons can be selected in step 1 and assigned consecutively at one time.

Making talkback settings

Make talkback settings on the TALKBACK page of the TALKBACK / MONITOR / SOLO / OSC SETUP screen.

Tap Menu Screen > Mixer Setup > Talkback / Monitor / Solo / OSC to open this screen.

Page appearance when the input source for the TALKBACK signal is “TALKBACK IN”

NOTE

This screen can also be opened by pressing the TALKBACK key while pressing the MENU key. (See “16 - List of shortcut operations”.)

Using the User Defined Control function, this screen can also be opened with a USER KEYS, footswitch or the GPIO-IN. (See “USER DEFINED CONTROLS screen”.)

Each level meter has an overload indicator at its top.

INPUT SEL button

This shows the name of the input source for the TALKBACK signal.

The upper line shows an abbreviation of the FIXED PORT LABEL.

The lower line shows the USER PORT LABEL.

If the USER PORT LABEL is undefined, the FIXED PORT LABEL will be shown.

Tap this button to open the TALKBACK INPUT SELECT Screen where the input port for the TALKBACK signal can be selected.

This screen shows the same content as the INPUT SOURCE SELECT Screen and is operated in the same way, except for being able to select “TALKBACK IN” on the ST IN and Player/TB page.

See “INPUT SOURCE SELECT screen” for details.

LOCATION setting button

This shows the Location setting of the TALKBACK mic.

Tap this area to open the Location setting menu.

Button	Meaning
CR (default)	This sets the Location of the TALKBACK mic to Control Room (CR).
ST	This sets the Location of the TALKBACK mic to Studio (ST).
NONE	This leaves the Location of the TALKBACK mic unset.

+48V button

Use this button to supply phantom power to the input source of the TALKBACK signal.

Press and hold the +48V button to turn phantom power (+48V) on/off. (Default: OFF)

When this is on, the button will appear highlighted.

This only appears when the input shown by the INPUT SEL button is “ANALOG”, “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante” or “TALKBACK IN”.

A black button that cannot be operated will be shown if the input source for the TALKBACK signal is an SB-16D for which control privileges are not held.

PAD button

The PAD button is shown when the input source of the TALKBACK signal is “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante”.

Tap this button to turn the −20 dB pad on/off. (Default: off)

When this button is on, it will appear highlighted.

A black button that cannot be operated will be shown if the input source for the TALKBACK signal is an SB-16D for which control privileges are not held.

Analog GAIN knob

When the input source of the TALKBACK signal is “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante”, an analog gain knob will be shown for this unit or the SB-16D. This knob can be used to adjust the input level of the MIC/LINE input jack.

Turn LCD knob 1 (lit red) to adjust it.

A black knob that cannot be operated will be shown if the input source for the TALKBACK signal is an SB-16D for which control privileges are not held.

NOTE

Use the TALKBACK volume knob on the top panel to adjust the TALKBACK IN analog input level. (See “ TALKBACK volume”.)

D.TRIM knob

Use this to adjust the TALKBACK signal digital trim value.

Range: −20 dB – +20 dB (default: 0 dB)

Turn LCD knob 2 (lit red) to adjust it.

TALKBACK level meter

This shows the TALKBACK signal input level.

DIM TARGET knob

When TALKBACK is on, this adjusts the attenuation of the TARGET signal that is being interrupted by the TALKBACK signal.

Range: −40 dB – 0 dB (default: −20 dB)

Turn LCD knob 4 (lit red) to adjust it.

When any TARGET button is on and dimming is applied to the TARGET signal in the amount set by the DIM TARGET knob, “DIM” will appear in orange in this area.

NOTE

This setting is shared with the RETURN TALKBACK page (“ DIM TARGET knob”).

DIM MON 1 and MON 2 knobs

When TALKBACK is on, use these to adjust the attenuation of MONITOR 1 and MONITOR 2.

Range: −40 dB – 0 dB (default: −20 dB)

Use LCD knobs 5–6 (lit red) to adjust these.

When TALKBACK is on and dimming is applied to MON 1 in the amount set by the DIM MON 1 knob, “DIM” will appear in orange in the DIM MON 1 area.

When TALKBACK is on and dimming is applied to MON 2 in the amount set by the DIM MON 2 knob, “DIM” will appear in orange in the DIM MON 2 area.

If the Location setting for MONITOR 1 or MONITOR 2 is “CR” or “ST”, “CR” or “ST” will appear to the top right of the DIM MON 1/2 knob area.

NOTE

This setting is shared with the RETURN TALKBACK page (“ DIM MON 1 and MON 2 knobs”).

TARGET buttons

Tap bus module buttons to set the buses that will be interrupted with the TALKBACK signal. (These are off by default.)

Buttons for selected talkback destinations will be highlighted.

Tapping the MON 1/MON 2 button will output the TALKBACK signal to MONITOR 1/MONITOR 2.

If the Location setting for MONITOR 1 or MONITOR 2 is “CR” or “ST”, “CR” or “ST” will be shown on the MON 1/2 button.

Tapping the EXT 1 button will output the TALKBACK signal to the output port assigned to the EXT 1 OUT button.

Tapping the EXT 2 button will output the TALKBACK signal to the output port assigned to the EXT 2 OUT button.

NOTE

The bus module buttons show module labels according to the display modes set for the Sub MODULE LABEL in the upper line and the Main MODULE LABEL in the lower line. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

Stereo buses have a single button for each pair.

Tap this button to turn it on and off. Press and hold this button to turn the function on only while being pressed.

SELECTED ASSIGN button

Tap this button to open a window where you can select the output destinations for which you want to enable TALKBACK output when the SELECTED button is pressed.

Tap an option to select that output for the TALKBACK signal. (These are off by default.)

Buttons for selected outputs will be highlighted.

If the Location setting for MONITOR 1 or MONITOR 2 is “CR” or “ST”, “CR” or “ST” will be shown on the MON 1/2 button.

Tap this button when the selection window is open to confirm the setting and close the window.

NOTE

Stereo buses have a single button for each pair.

SELECTED button

Tap this button to turn on/off the TALKBACK function for output destinations selected on the window shown using the SELECTED ASSIGN button.

When this button is on, set buttons will appear highlighted.

NOTE

Tap this button to turn it on and off. Press and hold this button to turn the function on only while being pressed.

TALKBACK KEY ASSIGN button

Tap this button to open a window where you can select the output destinations for which you want to enable TALKBACK output when the TALKBACK key on the top panel or the TALKBACK KEY button is pressed.

Tap an option to select that output destination. (These are off by default.)

Buttons for selected outputs will be highlighted.

If the Location setting for MONITOR 1 or MONITOR 2 is “CR” or “ST”, “CR” or “ST” will be shown on the MON 1/2 button.

Tap this button when the selection window is open to confirm the setting and close the window.

TALKBACK KEY button

Tap this button to turn on/off the TALKBACK function for output destinations selected on the window shown using the TALKBACK KEY ASSIGN button (off by default).

When this is ON, the button will appear highlighted.

NOTE

This has the same function as the TALKBACK key on the top panel.

Tap this button to switch it ON and OFF. Press and hold this button to turn the function on only while being pressed.

Using the User Defined Control function, TALKBACK ON/OFF switching is also possible with a USER KEYS, the footswitch or the GPIO-IN. (See “USER DEFINED CONTROLS screen”.)

EXT 1 OUT / EXT 2 OUT buttons

These show the names of the output ports assigned to the EXT 1 OUT and EXT 2 OUT buttons.

The upper line shows an abbreviation of the FIXED PORT LABEL.

The lower line shows the USER PORT LABEL.

If the USER PORT LABEL is undefined, the FIXED PORT LABEL will be shown.

Tap these buttons to open the TALKBACK EXT1 DIRECT OUT PORT SELECT and TALKBACK EXT2 DIRECT OUT PORT SELECT screens where output ports for the TALKBACK signal can be selected.

TALKBACK EXT1 DIRECT OUT PORT SELECT Screen

TALKBACK EXT2 DIRECT OUT PORT SELECT Screen

These screens show the same content as the OUTPUT PORT SELECT Screen and are operated in the same way.

See “OUTPUT PORT SELECT screen” for details.

EXT 1 VOL. / EXT 2 VOL. knobs

These adjust the output levels of the TALKBACK signals sent to the output ports assigned to the EXT 1 and EXT 2 buttons.

Range: −∞ dB – +10 dB (default: 0 dB)

Turn LCD knobs 7 and 8 (lit green) to adjust them.

RETURN TALKBACK settings

Make return talkback settings on the RETURN TALKBACK page of the TALKBACK / MONITOR / SOLO / OSC SETUP screen.

Tap Menu Screen > Mixer Setup > Talkback / Monitor / Solo / OSC to open this screen.

Page appearance when the input source for the TALKBACK signal is “ANALOG 1”

INPUT SEL button

This shows the name of the input source for the RETURN TALKBACK signal.

The upper line shows an abbreviation of the FIXED PORT LABEL.

The lower line shows the USER PORT LABEL.

If the USER PORT LABEL is undefined, the FIXED PORT LABEL will be shown.

Tap this button to open the RETURN TALKBACK INPUT SELECT Screen where the input port for the RETURN TALKBACK signal can be selected.

This screen shows the same content as the INPUT SOURCE SELECT Screen and is operated in the same way, except for being able to select “TALKBACK IN” on the ST IN and Player/TB page.

See “INPUT SOURCE SELECT screen” for details.

LOCATION setting button

This shows the location setting of the RETURN TALKBACK mic.

Tap this area to open the location setting menu.

Button	Meaning
CR	This sets the location of the RETURN TALKBACK mic to Control Room (CR).
ST (default)	This sets the location of the RETURN TALKBACK mic to Studio (ST).
NONE	This leaves the location of the RETURN TALKBACK mic unset.

+48V button

Use this button to supply phantom power to the input source of the RETURN TALKBACK signal.

Press and hold the +48V button to turn phantom power (+48V) on/off. (Default: OFF)

When this is on, the button will appear highlighted.

This only appears when the input shown by the INPUT SEL button is “ANALOG”, “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante” or “TALKBACK IN”.

A black button that cannot be operated will be shown if the input source for the RETURN TALKBACK signal is an SB-16D for which control privileges are not held.

PAD button

The PAD button is shown when the input source of the RETURN TALKBACK signal is “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante”.

Tap this button to turn the −20dB pad on/off. (Default: off)

When this button is on, it will appear highlighted.

A black button that cannot be operated will be shown if the input source for the RETURN TALKBACK signal is an SB-16D for which control privileges are not held.

Analog GAIN knob

When the input source of the RETURN TALKBACK signal is “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante”, an Analog GAIN knob will be shown for this unit or the SB-16D. This knob can be used to adjust the input level of the MIC/LINE input jack.

Turn LCD knob 1 (lit red) to adjust it.

A black knob that cannot be operated will be shown if the input source for the RETURN TALKBACK signal is an SB-16D for which control privileges are not held.

NOTE

Use the TALKBACK volume knob on the top panel to adjust the TALKBACK IN analog input level. (See “ TALKBACK volume”.)

D.TRIM knob

Use this to adjust the RETURN TALKBACK signal digital trim value.

Range: −20 dB – +20 dB (default: 0 dB)

Turn LCD knob 2 (lit red) to adjust it.

TALKBACK level meter

This shows the RETURN TALKBACK signal input level.

DIM TARGET knob

When TALKBACK is on, this adjusts the attenuation of the TARGET signal that is being interrupted by the TALKBACK signal.

Range: −40 dB – 0 dB (default: −20 dB)

Turn LCD knob 5 (lit red) to adjust it.

When any TARGET button is on and dimming is applied to the TARGET signal in the amount set by the DIM TARGET knob, an orange DIM button will appear in this area.

NOTE

This setting is shared with the TALKBACK page (“ DIM TARGET knob”).

DIM MON 1 and MON 2 knobs

When TALKBACK is on, use these to adjust the attenuation of MONITOR 1 and MONITOR 2.

Range: −40 dB – 0 dB (default: −20 dB)

Turn LCD knobs 5 and 6 (lit red) to adjust them.

When TALKBACK is on and dimming is applied to MON 1 in the amount set by the DIM MON 1 knob, an orange DIM button will appear in the DIM MON 1 area.

When TALKBACK is on and dimming is applied to MON 2 in the amount set by the DIM MON 2 knob, an orange DIM button will appear in the DIM MON 2 area.

If the Location setting for MONITOR 1 or MONITOR 2 is “CR” or “ST”, “CR” or “ST” will appear to the top right of the DIM MON 1/2 knob area.

NOTE

This setting is shared with the TALKBACK page (“ DIM MON 1 and MON 2 knobs”).

TARGET buttons

Tap these buttons to select them for interruption by RETURN TALKBACK signals. (Default: off)

Buttons for selected talkback destinations will be highlighted.

Tapping the MON 1/MON 2 button will output the RETURN TALKBACK signal to MONITOR 1/MONITOR 2.

If the LOCATION setting for MONITOR 1 or MONITOR 2 is “CR” or “ST”, “CR” or “ST” will be shown on the MON 1/2 buttons.

Tapping the EXT OUT button will output the RETURN TALKBACK signal to the output port assigned to the RTB EXT OUT button.

Tapping the SOLO button will output the RETURN TALKBACK signal to SOLO bus.

NOTE

Tap this button to turn it on and off. Press and hold this button to turn the function on only while being pressed.

SELECTED ASSIGN button

Tap this button to open a window where you can select the output destinations for which you want to enable RETURN TALKBACK output when the SELECTED button is pressed.

Tap an option to select that output for the RETURN TALKBACK signal. (Default: off)

Buttons for selected outputs will be highlighted.

If the Location setting for MONITOR 1 or MONITOR 2 is “CR” or “ST”, “CR” or “ST” will be shown on the MON 1/2 button.

Tap this button when the selection window is open to confirm the setting and close the window.

SELECTED button

Tap this button to turn on/off RETURN TALKBACK for output destinations selected on the window shown using the SELECTED ASSIGN button.

When this button is on, set buttons will appear highlighted.

NOTE

Tap this button to turn it on and off. Press and hold this button to turn the function on only while being pressed.

RTB EXT. OUT button

This shows the names of the output ports that the RETURN TALKBACK signal is assigned to.

The upper line shows an abbreviation of the FIXED PORT LABEL.

The lower line shows the USER PORT LABEL.

If the USER PORT LABEL is undefined, the FIXED PORT LABEL will be shown.

Tap this button to open the Return TALKBACK EXT DIRECT OUT PORT SELECT Screen where output ports for the RETURN TALKBACK signal can be selected.

This screen shows the same content as the OUTPUT PORT SELECT Screen and is operated in the same way.

See “OUTPUT PORT SELECT screen” for details.

Making monitor output settings

Make monitor output settings on the MONITOR 1/2 pages of the TALKBACK / MONITOR / SOLO / OSC SETUP screen.

Tap Menu Screen > Mixer Setup > Talkback / Monitor / Solo / OSC to open this screen.

SEL button

This button can be used to switch between MONITOR 1 and MONITOR 2, which could be large and small monitors.

When the Monitor Exclusive button on the Additional Settings page (Additional settings window) is on, this button will be highlighted and can be used, and BLACK LEFT-POINTING TRIANGLE or BLACK RIGHT-POINTING TRIANGLE will appear.

In this state, tap this button to select output exclusively from MONITOR 1 or MONITOR 2. BLACK LEFT-POINTING TRIANGLE and BLACK RIGHT-POINTING TRIANGLE will appear alternately to the left and right of the button.

	MONITOR 1 MUTE button	MONITOR 2 MUTE button
When is shown	Off	On
When is shown	On	Off

When the Monitor Exclusive button is off, this button will appear gray and cannot be used, and BLACK LEFT-POINTING TRIANGLE or BLACK RIGHT-POINTING TRIANGLE will not be shown.

icon

Tap this icon to open the Additional settings window. (See “Additional settings window”.)

MUTE button (MONITOR 1)

Tap this button to turn monitoring signal muting on and off (default).

When this is on, the button will appear highlighted.

NOTE

Output from the headphone jacks will not be muted.

When MONITOR 1 is muted because of the Monitor Exclusive or Location function, muting cannot be disabled by tapping this button.

Using the User Defined Control function, monitor muting can also be operated with a USER KEYS, the footswitch or the GPIO-IN. (See “USER DEFINED CONTROLS screen”.)

The following USER KEY is set for MONITOR 1 on the User Key page by default.

USER KEYS C (Monitor | MONITOR 1 | MUTE)

icon (MONITOR 1)

Tap this icon to open the MONITOR 1 SOURCE ASSIGN Screen. (See “MONITOR SOURCE ASSIGN screen”.)

MON 2 FOLLOW button

Tap this button to turn on/off the function that has MONITOR 1 monitor the signal of MONITOR 2. (This is off by default.)

When this is on, the button will appear highlighted.

MONITOR SELECT buttons (MONITOR 1)

These show the names of the monitoring sources selected on the MONITOR SOURCE ASSIGN Screen. (See “MONITOR SOURCE ASSIGN screen”.)

These buttons show the names of the monitoring sources with the L channels in the upper lines and the R channels in the lower lines.

If the selected monitoring source is a bus module, the USER MODULE LABEL will be shown. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

If the USER MODULE LABEL is undefined, the FIXED MODULE LABEL will be shown.

If a selected monitoring source is an Input jack, the PORT LABEL selected with the PORT LABEL display mode setting will be shown. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

If a Dante port that has a mounted SB-16D assigned is selected as a monitoring source, “SB #[ID] [port number]” will be shown at the top of the button. If it is a virtually-mounted SB-16D, will appear to the right of the monitoring source name.

Tap these buttons to select monitoring sources output from the following connectors.

Front panel headphone jacks

Rear panel MONITOR OUT L/R jacks

MONITOR 1 Direct OUT PORT (See “ Direct OUT PORT button (MONITOR 1)”.)

Tapping these buttons when the MONITOR 1 ADD button is off will select only one monitor source. The selected button will be highlighted light blue.

Multiple monitor sources can be selected by tapping these buttons when the MONITOR 1 ADD button is on. This allows multiple selected monitoring sources to be mixed and monitored together. The selected button will be highlighted yellowish green.

If the MONITOR SELECT button for a Dante port that has a virtually mounted SB-16D assigned is selected, the selected button will be highlighted yellow.

NOTE

If a bus is selected as the monitoring source, sound output from the unit will be monitored. Monitoring will also be silent if the Metering Point setting is “OUTPUT” for the selected bus but no assignment has been made to an output port (no external output from the unit). To monitor a bus AFL, use the SOLO function.

Using the User Defined Control function, MONITOR SELECT 1–6 can also be operated with USER KEYS, the footswitch or the GPIO-IN. (See “USER DEFINED CONTROLS screen”.)

The following USER KEYS are set for MONITOR SELECT 1–4 on the User Key page by default.

USER KEYS A (Monitor | MONITOR 1 | Source select | 1 (MAIN L/R))

USER KEYS B (Monitor | MONITOR 1 | Source select | 2 (MIX 15-16))

USER KEYS D (Monitor | MONITOR 1 | Source select | 3 (MIX 1))

USER KEYS E (Monitor | MONITOR 1 | Source select | 4 (MIX 11-12))

ADD button (MONITOR 1)

Tap this button to turn on/off the ADD function, which enables selecting multiple monitoring sources at the same time, for MONITOR 1 (off by default).

When this is on, the button will appear highlighted.

PFL to MON 1/AFL to MON 1 buttons

Tap these buttons to set whether or not to switch the MONITOR 1 monitoring signal to the SOLO signal (on by default).

When this is on, the button will appear highlighted.

Button	Function
	If SOLO is turned on when SOLO TYPE is “PFL”, the MONITOR 1 monitoring signal will switch to the SOLO signal.
	If SOLO is turned on when SOLO TYPE is “AFL”, the MONITOR 1 monitoring signal will switch to the SOLO signal.

NOTE

If both buttons are turned off, the SOLO signal will stop being output from MONITOR 1 even if the SOLO key is pressed. For this reason, “SOLO signal is not output from Monitor 1” will be shown as a warning in the area above the PFL to MON 1 button.

DIM LEVEL knob (MONITOR 1)

This adjusts the attenuation of the monitoring signal when the MONITOR 1 DIM function is on.

Range: −40 dB – 0 dB (default: −20 dB)

Turn LCD knob 3 (lit red) to adjust it.

DIM button (MONITOR 1)

Tap this button to turn the monitoring dimming function on and off (default).

When the MONITOR 1 DIM function is on, the monitoring signal output level will be lowered according to the DIM LEVEL () setting.

When this is on, the button will appear highlighted.

NOTE

This button affects the output signals of MONITOR OUT L/R and headphone jacks.

Tap this button to turn it on and off. Press and hold this button to turn the function on only while being pressed.

Using the User Defined Control function, the MONITOR 1 DIM function can also be operated with a USER KEY, the footswitch or the GPIO-IN. (See “USER DEFINED CONTROLS screen”.)

The following USER KEY is set for the MONITOR 1 DIM function on the User Key page by default.

USER KEYS F (Monitor | MONITOR 1 | DIM)

STEREO/MONO buttons (MONITOR 1)

Tap these buttons to switch between MONO and STEREO (default) for monitoring signals.

The selected button will be highlighted.

MONITOR SELECT buttons (MONITOR 2)

These show the names of the monitoring sources selected on the MONITOR 2 SOURCE ASSIGN Screen. (See “MONITOR SOURCE ASSIGN screen”.)

Tap these buttons to select monitoring sources output from the following connectors.

MONITOR 2 Direct OUT PORT (See “ Direct OUT PORT button (MONITOR 2)”.)

MONITOR 2 OUTPUT PORT (See “ OUTPUT PORT button (MONITOR 2)”.)

Tapping these buttons when the MONITOR 2 ADD button is off will select only one monitor source. The selected button will be highlighted light blue.

Multiple monitor sources can be selected by tapping these buttons when the MONITOR 2 ADD button is on. This allows multiple selected monitoring sources to be mixed and monitored together. The selected button will be highlighted yellowish green.

These have the same function as the MONITOR SELECT () button for MONITOR 1.

ADD button (MONITOR 2)

Tap this button to turn on/off the ADD function, which enables selecting multiple monitoring sources at the same time, for MONITOR 2 (off by default).

When this is on, the button will appear highlighted.

PFL to MON 2/AFL to MON 2 buttons

Tap these buttons to set whether or not to switch the MONITOR 2 monitoring signal to the SOLO signal (off by default).

When this is on, the button will appear highlighted.

Button	Function
	If SOLO is turned on when SOLO TYPE is “PFL”, the MONITOR 2 monitoring signal will switch to the SOLO signal.
	If SOLO is turned on when SOLO TYPE is “AFL”, the MONITOR 2 monitoring signal will switch to the SOLO signal.

NOTE

If both buttons are turned off, the SOLO signal will stop being output from MONITOR 2 even if the SOLO key is pressed. For this reason, “SOLO signal is not output from Monitor 2” will be shown as a warning in the area above the PFL to MON 2 button.

DIM LEVEL knob (MONITOR 2)

This adjusts the attenuation of the monitoring signal when the MONITOR 2 DIM function is on.

Range: −40 dB – 0 dB (default: −20 dB)

Turn LCD knob 7 (lit red) to adjust it.

DIM button (MONITOR 2)

Tap this button to turn the monitoring dimming function on and off (default).

When the MONITOR 2 DIM function is on, the monitoring signal output level will be lowered according to the DIM LEVEL () setting.

When this is on, the button will appear highlighted.

NOTE

Tap this button to turn it on and off. Press and hold this button to turn the function on only while being touched.

Using the User Defined Control function, the MONITOR 2 DIM function can also be operated with a USER KEY, the footswitch or the GPIO-IN. (See “USER DEFINED CONTROLS screen”.)

VOLUME knob (MONITOR 2)

Use this to adjust the MONITOR 2 output level.

Range: −∞ dB – +10 dB (default: 0 dB)

Turn LCD knob 8 (lit green) to adjust it.

MON 1 FOLLOW button

Tap this button to turn on/off the function that has MONITOR 2 monitor the signal of MONITOR 1 (on by default).

When this is on, the button will appear highlighted.

icon (MONITOR 2)

Tap this icon to open the MONITOR 2 SOURCE ASSIGN Screen. (See “MONITOR SOURCE ASSIGN screen”.)

MUTE button (MONITOR 2)

Tap this button to turn monitoring signal muting on and off (on by default).

When this is on, the button will appear highlighted.

NOTE

When MONITOR 2 is muted because of the Monitor Exclusive or Location function, muting cannot be disabled by tapping this button.

Using the User Defined Control function, MONITOR 2 muting can also be done with a USER KEY, the footswitch or the GPIO-IN. (See “USER DEFINED CONTROLS screen”.)

STEREO/MONO buttons (MONITOR 2)

Tap these buttons to switch between MONO and STEREO (default) for monitoring signals.

The selected button will be highlighted.

MONITOR SOURCE ASSIGN screen

On this screen, assign monitoring sources for monitoring from the front panel headphone jacks and the rear panel MONITOR OUT L/R jacks to the 6 MONITOR SELECT buttons.

To open this screen, tap the icon in the MONITOR SELECT area on the right side of the MONITOR SELECT button of the TALKBACK / MONITOR / SOLO / OSC SETUP Screen.

MONITOR 1 SOURCE ASSIGN screen

L/R selection buttons

These select which output ports of the monitoring source left/right channels to set.

Tap these buttons to switch between left and right. The selected button will be highlighted.

MONITOR SELECT page switches

Monitoring sources can be assigned on each MONITOR SELECT page separately.

The names of the assigned monitoring sources are shown on the MONITOR SELECT page.

These buttons show the names of the monitoring sources with the L channels in the upper lines and the R channels in the lower lines. If the selected monitoring source is a bus module, the USER MODULE LABEL will be shown. (See “MODULE LABEL page”.)

If the USER MODULE LABEL is undefined, the FIXED MODULE LABEL will be shown.

If a selected monitoring source is an Input jack, the PORT LABEL selected with the PORT LABEL display mode setting will be shown. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

Tap this area to switch open MONITOR SELECT pages.

Monitoring source group page switches

These show monitor source group page names.

Tap a page name to switch to the page with the corresponding monitoring sources.

The name of the selected page will be highlighted.

Page name	Contents
MIX MAIN L/R	Select output signals from MIX 1–22 and MAIN L/R Master modules.
MON SOLO	Select other monitoring signals and SOLO bus signals.
ANALOG INPUT	Select input signals from analog MIC/LINE input jacks.
ST-IN PLAYER	Select input signals from the two pairs of ST IN jacks and the internal player.
Dante	Select input signals from the Dante connectors.
SLOT 1	Select the inputs of the expansion card installed in SLOT 1.
SLOT 2	Select the inputs of the expansion card installed in SLOT 2.
USB IN	Select USB audio interface inputs.

Monitoring source assignment buttons

Tap these buttons to select monitor sources to assign to the selected MONITOR SELECT button. Assigned buttons will be highlighted light blue. Assigned buttons for Dante ports that have virtually-mounted SB-16Ds will be highlighted yellow.

The bus module buttons show the FIXED MODULE LABEL in the upper line and the USER MODULE LABEL in the lower line. (See “MODULE LABEL page”.)

If the USER MODULE LABEL is undefined, the FIXED MODULE LABEL will be shown.

The input jack buttons show an abbreviated FIXED PORT LABEL in the upper line and a USER PORT LABEL in the lower line. (See “INPUT PORT LABEL page” and “OUTPUT PORT LABEL page”)

If the USER PORT LABEL is undefined, the FIXED PORT LABEL will be shown.

Buttons for Dante ports that have mounted SB-16Ds assigned will be shown as follows.

1st line: DA port number

2nd line: SB #[ID] port number

3rd line: USER PORT LABEL or SB #[ID] port number (if the USER PORT LABEL is undefined)

If it is a virtually-mounted SB-16D, will appear to the top right.

Additional settings window

Monitor Exclusive button

Tap this button to turn on/off the Monitor Exclusive function that selects exclusively the output of MONITOR 1 or MONITOR 2. Use this function to switch between MONITOR 1 and MONITOR 2, which could be large and small monitors (on by default).

When on, this button is highlighted and the MONITOR 1/2 page SEL button is enabled.

NOTE

If the Location of any monitors are set to “ST” (See “ Monitor Location setting area”.), the Monitor Exclusive button cannot be switched on and the MONITOR 1/2 exclusive function cannot be used.

To use the MONITOR 1/2 exclusive function, set the monitor Location to “CR” or “NONE”.

DELAY button

Tap this button to turn the delay function ON and OFF (default). This can be used to adjust the timing of the monitoring signal, for example.

When this is ON, the button will appear highlighted.

DELAY TIME

This adjusts the delay time used to correct the timing of monitoring signals, for example.

The highlighted unit will be used for operation, so tap the button for the desired unit.

Unit options	Range
meter	0 – 117.3 (meter)
feet	0 – 384.8 (feet)
msec (default)	0 – 341.32 (msec)

Turn LCD knob 2 (lit green) to adjust it.

LOCATION setting buttons (MONITOR 1)

Tap these buttons to change the Location setting of MONITOR 1. (The default setting is NONE.)

See “ Monitor Location setting area” for details about Location settings.

When the MONITOR 1 Location is set, “CR” or “ST” icons will be shown on the additional settings window and to the right of the MONITOR 1 display on the MONITOR 1/2 page.

Appearance when MONITOR 1 Location set to “CR”

Direct OUT PORT VOLUME knob (MONITOR 1)

Use this to adjust the output level from the MONITOR 1 DIRECT OUT PORT.

Range: −∞ dB – +10 dB (default: 0 dB)

Turn LCD knob 4 (lit red) to adjust it.

Direct OUT PORT button (MONITOR 1)

This shows the name of the output port that the MONITOR 1 DIRECT OUT signal is assigned to.

The upper line shows an abbreviation of the FIXED PORT LABEL.

The lower line shows the USER PORT LABEL. If the USER PORT LABEL is undefined, the FIXED PORT LABEL will be shown.

Tap this button to open the MONITOR 1 DIRECT OUT PORT SELECT Screen where DIRECT OUT signal output ports for MONITOR 1 can be selected.

This screen shows the same content as the OUTPUT PORT SELECT Screen and is operated in the same way.

See “OUTPUT PORT SELECT screen” for details.

Direct OUT PORT button (MONITOR 2)

This shows the name of the output port that the MONITOR 2 DIRECT OUT signal is assigned to.

This button shows an abbreviated FIXED PORT LABEL in the upper line and a USER PORT LABEL in the lower line. If the USER PORT LABEL is undefined, the FIXED PORT LABEL will be shown.

Tap this button to open the MONITOR 2 DIRECT OUT PORT SELECT Screen where DIRECT OUT signal output ports for MONITOR 2 can be selected.

This screen shows the same content as the OUTPUT PORT SELECT Screen and is operated in the same way.

See “OUTPUT PORT SELECT screen” for details.

Direct OUT PORT VOLUME knob (MONITOR 2)

Use this to adjust the output level from the MONITOR 2 DIRECT OUT PORT.

Range: −∞ dB – +10 dB (default: 0 dB)

Turn LCD knob 5 (lit red) to adjust it.

LOCATION setting buttons (MONITOR 2)

Tap these buttons to change the Location setting of MONITOR 2. (The default setting is NONE.)

See “ Monitor Location setting area” for details about Location settings.

When the MONITOR 2 Location is set, “CR” or “ST” icons will be shown on the additional settings window and to the side of the MONITOR 2 display on the MONITOR 1/2 page.

Appearance when MONITOR 2 Location set to “ST”

OUTPUT PORT button (MONITOR 2)

This shows the name of the output port that the MONITOR 2 OUTPUT signal is assigned to.

This button shows an abbreviated FIXED PORT LABEL in the upper line and a USER PORT LABEL in the lower line. If the USER PORT LABEL is undefined, the FIXED PORT LABEL will be shown.

Tap this button to open the OUTPUT PORT SELECT Screen where output ports for the MONITOR 2 OUTPUT signals can be selected.

This screen shows the same content as the OUTPUT PORT SELECT Screen and is operated in the same way.

See “OUTPUT PORT SELECT screen” for details.

button

Tap the button to close the additional settings window.

Making solo and built-in oscillator settings

Make solo and built-in oscillator settings on the SOLO/OSCILLATOR page of the TALKBACK / MONITOR / SOLO / OSC SETUP screen.

Tap Menu Screen > Mixer Setup > Talkback / Monitor / Solo / OSC to open this screen..

NOTE

This screen can also be opened by pressing either the SOLO or SOLO CLEAR key while pressing the MENU key. (See “16 - List of shortcut operations”.)

SOLO MODE buttons

Tap these buttons to set the solo function operation mode.

Option	Meaning
MIX (default)	In solo mode, signals from modules that have their SOLO keys pressed are mixed for solo monitoring.
EXCLUSIVE	In solo mode, only the signal from the module that had its SOLO key pressed last is used for solo monitoring.

The selected button will be highlighted.

SOLO TYPE buttons

Tap these buttons to set the solo function type.

Option	Meaning
PFL (default)	Pre-fader signals are used for solo monitoring.
AFL	Signals after panning (post-fader for the MAIN L/R Master module) are used for solo monitoring.

The selected button will be highlighted.

OUTPUT button

This shows the names of the output ports that the OUTPUT signal is assigned to.

This button shows an abbreviated FIXED PORT LABEL in the upper line and a USER PORT LABEL in the lower line. If the USER PORT LABEL is undefined, the FIXED PORT LABEL will be shown.

Tap this button to open the Solo DIRECT OUT PORT SELECT Screen where solo signal output ports can be selected.

This screen shows the same content as the OUTPUT PORT SELECT Screen and is operated in the same way.

See “OUTPUT PORT SELECT screen” for details.

OSCILLATOR ASSIGN

Tap these buttons to set the outputs for the built-in oscillator signal. (These are off by default.)

Buttons for selected outputs will be highlighted.

NOTE

Outputs can be turned on/off independently even for stereo buses.

These buttons show the FIXED MODULE LABEL in the upper line and the USER MODULE LABEL in the lower line. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

SOLO LEVEL knob

Use this to adjust the output level from the SOLO L/R bus.

Range: −∞ dB – +10 dB (default: 0 dB)

Turn LCD knob 3 (lit red) to adjust it.

SOLO CLEAR button

This button will appear highlighted when soloing is on for any of the modules.

When this button is highlighted, tap it to end soloing on all channels.

NOTE

This has the same function as the SOLO CLEAR key on the top panel.

OSCILLATOR button

Tap this button to turn the built-in oscillator signal ON and OFF (default).

When this is ON, the button will appear highlighted.

OSCILLATOR level meter

This shows the output level of the built-in oscillator.

OSC LEVEL knob

Use this to adjust the output level of the built-in oscillator.

Range: −36 dB – 0 dB (default: −20 dB)

Turn LCD knob 6 (lit red) to adjust it.

SIGNAL TYPE button

This shows the signal type of the built-in oscillator.

Tap this button to open the type selection menu.

Options: SINE WAVE (default), PINK NOISE, WHITE NOISE

Tap an option button to close the menu, and show the selected signal type.

FREQ

This appears if the signal type is set to “SINE WAVE”.

Use this to adjust the output frequency of the built-in oscillator.

Options: 100 Hz, 440 Hz, 1 kHz (default), 10 kHz

Turn LCD knob 8 (lit blue) to adjust it.

Dante SETUP screen

On this screen, set and view the status of the built-in Dante module and an SB-16D connected via the built-in Dante module.

Tap Menu Screen > Rear Panel Setup > Dante Setup to open this page.

Dante Settings page

MODULE status

This shows the status of the Dante module.

Item	Content
Dante Device Name	This shows the module name of the Dante device.
Dante Module Staus	This shows the status of the Dante module.
Software Version	This shows the version of the built-in Dante module. This is the same as the Product Version shown in Dante Controller.
Dante Firmware Version	This shows the firmware version of the Dante system. This is the same as the Dante Firmware Version shown in Dante Controller.
Dante Model	This shows the hardware type of the built-in Dante module. This is the same as the Dante Model shown in Dante Controller.

NETWORK status

This shows the status of the Dante network.

When in Redundant mode, settings will be shown for the Primary connector on the left and for the Secondary connector on the right.

When in Switched (daisy-chain) mode, only the left side will be active.

Item	Content
Switch	This shows the selected connection mode. Tap this area to open a window where Redundant or Switched mode can be selected. (default: Redundant)
Addressing	This shows the IP address setting mode. Tap this area to open a window where AUTO (DHCP) or STATIC can be selected. (default: AUTO (DHCP))
IP Address	If the Addressing item is set to “AUTO”, this will show the assigned IP address. If it is set to “STATIC”, this will show the IP address set by the user. When the Addressing item is set to “STATIC”, tapping this area will open the IP ADDRESS Screen. (See “IP Address/Subnet Mask/Default Gateway setting procedures”.)
Subnet mask	If the Addressing item is set to “AUTO”, this will show the assigned subnet mask. If it is set to “STATIC”, this will show the subnet mask set by the user. When the Addressing item is set to “STATIC”, tapping this area will open the SUBNET MASK Screen. (See “IP Address/Subnet Mask/Default Gateway setting procedures”.)
LINK Status	This shows the Dante network link status. This will be shown in red if it is not 1 G.
MAC Address	This shows the MAC address of the Primary/Secondary Dante port.

NOTE

To confirm Dante network settings, the Dante module must be restarted.

If Dante network settings have been changed, the APPLY button will appear highlighted.

Tap the APPLY button when it is highlighted to open a confirmation message.

Tap the REBOOT Dante button to restart the Dante module.

ATTENTION

Be aware that Dante input and output sound will be interrupted while the Dante module is restarting.

AUDIO/CLOCK setting status

This shows the status of Dante audio signal and clock.

Item	Content
Sampling rate	This shows the sampling frequency setting of the built-in Dante module. Tap this area to open a window where 48kHz or 96kHz can be selected. (default: 96 kHz) NOTE If the sampling rate is 48kHz, 64 IN and 64 OUT will be available. If it is 96kHz, this becomes 32 IN and 32 OUT.
Encoding	This shows the encoding setting.
AES 67 Mode	This shows the AES67 mode.
Latency	This shows the latency setting. Tap this area to open a window where the latency (0.25msec, 0.5msec, 1.0msec, 2.0msec or 5.0msec) can be selected. (default: 1.0msec)
Clock Source	This shows the Dante module clock source (Dante or Sonicview). Tap the icon to open the SYNC CLOCK Screen.
Dante Clock Status	This shows the Dante clock status (Leader, Follower or Unlock). “Unlock” will be shown in red.
Preferred Leader	This shows the Preferred Leader setting. Tap this area to open a window where ON or OFF can be selected. (default: OFF)

I/O Device page

Use this page to, for example, mount SB-16Ds, which are supported I/O devices, and make settings for them.

Device display area

This shows the ID numbers, model names (SB-16D) and Dante device module names for SB-16D units detected on the connected Dante network. SB-16D units that have different network addresses or are connected through routers will not be shown here.

Selected devices will be highlighted with yellow frames.

Tap the button to open the SB-16D control screen. (See “Control screen operations”.)

Scroll knob and scrollbar

If all the detected Dante devices cannot be shown on the screen at once, the scrollbar will appear and the scroll knob will be highlighted.

Drag the scrollbar to scroll the screen. The device display area () can also be scrolled by swiping up and down as well as by turning LCD knob 4.

Mount/unmount buttons

Use these buttons to mount SB-16D units and to unmount already mounted ones.

See the following for operation procedures.

“Mounting of devices connected to the Dante network”

“Unmounting devices”

“Mounting devices that are not on the Dante network”

Mounted Device area

This shows mounted devices.

The devices are shown with the following colors depending on status.

Item	Status
	Device connected to the Dante network
	Virtual device that does not exist on the Dante network

Selected devices and mounting positions will be highlighted with yellow frames.

Control privilege display area: This shows the control privilege status.

Item	Explanation
	This Sonicview has control privileges.
	This Sonicview does not have control privileges. The named Sonicview has control privileges. Tap this to open a message confirming whether or not to request control. (See “Setting control privileges after mounting”.)
	Control is possible from any device. Tap this to open a message confirming whether or not to request control. (See “Setting control privileges after mounting”.)
	This Sonicview does not have control privileges, so operation is not possible from the Home Screen or MODULE Screen. Tap this to open a message confirming whether or not to request control. (See “Setting control privileges after mounting”.)
	Mounting is in process.

This shows the module name. If no device with the same ID is connected to the same Dante network (when virtually-mounted), “Virtual” will be shown.

This shows the login status.

Item	Explanation
Logged In	Information for this SB-16D can be acquired by this Sonicview.
Logged Out	Information for this SB-16D cannot be acquired by this Sonicview. (Login is not possible because this SB-16D is already mounted by 10 Sonicview units or a communication error occurred.) (See “Login failure”.)

This shows the module name of the Dante device set in this SB-16D.

This shows the ID. If multiple devices with the same ID are connected to the same Dante network (when the same ID is duplicated), “ID” will be shown in red with a mark.

Tap this button to open the SB-16D control screen. (See “Control screen operations”.)

AUTO ROUTING button

This sets whether Dante routing settings are automatically made according to the SB-16D mounting state or using Dante Controller.

Tap this button to turn it on/off.

Option

Meaning

ON (default)

SB-16D and Sonicview Dante routing is set automatically according to the SB-16D mounting status.

We recommend this when an SB-16D is the only Dante device connected to the Sonicview.

OFF

Dante routing will not be set even if an SB-16D is mounted.

Use Dante Controller for routing. Use this setting when connecting Dante devices other than an SB-16D.

When the AUTO ROUTING button is changed from “OFF” to “ON”, the following confirmation message will appear if executing automatic Dante routing changes the Dante input routing of this unit.

Tapping the KEEP button will switch the AUTO ROUTING button to “ON” but Dante routing settings will be retained as is. If an SB-16D is mounted after the AUTO ROUTING button is switched to “ON”, routing will occur automatically.

Tapping the CHANGE button will change the Dante routing according to the mounting status. In this case, output routing from the Sonicview to other Dante devices will be retained as is, and output routing from the Sonicview to mounted SB-16D unit will be added.

Example of Dante routing when the AUTO ROUTING button is OFF

Dante routing state after the AUTO ROUTING button is switched to “ON” from the above state and the CHANGE button is tapped

NOTE

If all the following conditions have been met when the CHANGE button is tapped, the preamp of the SB-16D assigned to the Insert Return port will be set to the line level standard settings as follows.

This unit has acquired the control privileges for the mounted SB-16D

The input port of the mounted SB-16D is assigned to the Insert Return port

Preamp settings

PAD: ON

Analog GAIN: 0

Phantom: OFF

If control privileges for the concerned SB-16D have not been acquired by this unit, preamp settings cannot be changed to line level standard settings, so the following message will be shown.

Using SB-16D units

To use SB-16Ds as a Sonicview I/O boxes, they must be mounted (registered) in advance.

See the following for operation procedures.

“Mounting of devices connected to the Dante network”

“Mounting devices that are not on the Dante network”

A maximum of 4 SB-16D units can be mounted on a Sonicview.

If an SB-16D is mounted and control privileges acquired, this unit will be able to do the following.

Control SB-16D preamps

Control SB-16D preamps using snapshot recall

Control/use GPIO ports (expansion mode)

Control Dante output routing

The Sonicview manages SB-16D mounting status by ID. If no device with the same ID as the mounted ID is connected to the Dante network, “Virtual” will be shown instead of the device name.

If multiple devices with the same ID are connected to the same Dante network (when the same ID is duplicated), “ID” will be shown in red with marks for those devices.

If the ID of a mounted device is used by more than one device, the SB-16D that was recognized by the Sonicview first will be used. However, duplicate IDs must be resolved to show them on the SB-16D control screen. (See “Resolving duplicate IDs”.)

Moreover, an SB-16D with a duplicate ID that is later recognized by the Sonicview cannot be used.

If the AUTO ROUTING button on the I/O Device page is “ON”, the mounted SB-16D I/O ports and the main unit’s built-in Dante I/O will be assigned to Dante routing automatically when mounted according to the mounting position in the Mounted Device area (). See the table in “Dante routing” for details.

Mounting of devices connected to the Dante network

1.Tap a device in the left column on the Dante network that you want to mount.

The selected device will be shown with a yellow frame.

2.Tap the mounting destination on the right side (open mounting slot).

The selected mount destination will be shown with a yellow frame, and the central button will become highlighted ().

3.Tap the central button to mount it in the selected destination on the right side.

When mounting completes, a message will appear and information about control privileges after mounting will be shown in the top left of the mounting slot.

Item	Explanation
Pre Amp Control	Control is possible from this Sonicview.
Pre Amp Control by [device name]	The named Sonicview has control privileges. Control is not possible from this Sonicview. (Sound will pass.)

NOTE

If control privileges are not held, control of the preamps, GPIO (expansion mode), snapshot recall and output routing will not be possible from this Sonicview even when mounted.

If control privileges are acquired, control of the above items becomes possible, and sampling rate and reference level settings will be prioritized over those from other Sonicview units.

If all the following conditions are met when an SB-16D is mounted, the preamp of the SB-16D assigned to the Insert Return port will be set to the line level standard settings as follows.

This unit has acquired the control privileges for the mounted SB-16D

The input port of the mounted SB-16D has Dante routing as an input for this unit

The input port of the mounted SB-16D is assigned to the Insert Return port

Preamp settings

PAD: ON

Analog GAIN: 0

Phantom: OFF

If control privileges for the concerned SB-16D have not been acquired by this unit, preamp settings cannot be changed to line level standard settings, so the following message will be shown.

If the Sonicview with control privileges is not on the Dante network:

After the mounting indicator disappears, a mounting completed message will be shown. This message will disappear automatically after a few seconds.

If the Sonicview with control privileges is on the Dante network:

After mounting completes, tap the “Pre Amp Control by …” button. When the following message appears, tap the REQUEST button, and wait for approval from the Sonicview that has control privileges.

The following message will appear while waiting for permission. Tapping the CANCEL button will stop the permission waiting state and end the mounting operation.

A permission request message will appear on the Sonicview with control privileges.

This message will disappear automatically if the CANCEL button is tapped on the requesting device before the response is given on the Sonicview with control privileges.

If a button in the permission request message on the Sonicview with control privileges is tapped, the following will appear on the requesting Sonicview.

Tapping the ALLOW button will cause a message confirming that control has been acquired to appear on the requesting device. This message will disappear automatically after 2 seconds.

Tapping the DENY button will open a message confirming refusal of the request. Tap the OK button to close the message.

Unmounting devices

1.Tap the device that you want to unmount in the right column list.

The selected device will be shown with a yellow frame, and the central button will become highlighted ().

2.Tap the central button.

This unmounts the selected device, moving it to the list on the left.

If control privileges were held before unmounting, they will be cleared.

“Open Control” will be shown in the control privilege display area on other Sonicview units that have this device mounted.

Mounting devices that are not on the Dante network

Devices that are not connected to the Dante network can be mounted virtually.

Connecting a device with a corresponding ID when the I/O Device page AUTO ROUTING button is “ON” will cause preamp and routing data to be applied.

1.Tap the ID at the very bottom of the list on the left to open a window where an ID number can be set for a virtually-mounted device.

2.Swipe the options up and down to select the ID to mount.

Selections can also be changed by turning the LCD Knobs 2 and 3, which are lit pink and yellow.

If an ID that is already being used on the Dante network is selected, that ID will be red and the APPLY button will appear gray, showing the setting cannot be made.

3.Tap the APPLY button to confirm setting changes.

The selected ID number will be shown.

4.Tap the mounting destination on the right side (open mounting slot).

The selected mount destination will be shown with a yellow frame, and the central button will become highlighted ().

5.Tap the central button to mount it in the selected position on the right side.

Setting control privileges after mounting

Control privileges can be requested after mounting.

1.Tap the control privilege display area for a mounted SB-16D with control privileges that have not been acquired to open a message.

2.Tap the REQUEST button to start requesting control privileges.

Tap the CANCEL button to cancel requesting control privileges.

NOTE

If control privileges are not acquired, control of the preamps, GPIO (expansion mode), snapshot recall and output routing for that SB-16D will not be possible from this Sonicview even when mounted.

If control privileges are acquired, control of the above items becomes possible, and sampling rate and reference level settings for that SB-16D will be prioritized over those from other Sonicview units.

Resolving duplicate IDs

Resolving in the list on the right

1.Tap the button for a device with a duplicate ID to open the ID setting window.

2.Swipe the options up and down to set the ID as desired.

Selections can also be changed by turning the LCD Knobs 2 and 3, which are lit pink and yellow.

NOTE

If an ID that is already being used on the Dante network is selected, that ID will be red and the APPLY button will appear gray, showing the setting cannot be made.

3.Tap the APPLY button to confirm setting changes.

The selected ID number will be shown.

This resolves the duplication, and returns to the regular screen.

Resolving in the list on the left

1.Tap the button for a device with a duplicate ID.

This opens the control screen for the tapped device.

2.If “Controlled by this console” is shown to the right of the device name area, tap the ID area at the top left of the screen to open the ID setting window.

3.Swipe the options up and down to set the ID as desired.

Selections can also be changed by turning the LCD Knobs 2 and 3, which are lit pink and yellow.

NOTE

If an ID that is already being used on the Dante network is selected, that ID will be red and the APPLY button will appear gray, showing the setting cannot be made.

4.Tap the APPLY button to confirm setting changes.

The selected ID number will be shown.

This resolves the duplication, and returns to the regular screen.

Alerts and errors shown related to the SB-16D

When switching from virtual mounting to actual mounting:

The following message window will appear on the right touchscreen.

Tap the CLOSE button to close the message.

Tap the Dante Setup button to open the Dante SETUP Screen I/O Device page on the right touchscreen. In addition, the following alert message will appear at the top of every touchscreen.

SB-16D ID #xx-xx connected.

Tap this alert message to open the Dante SETUP Screen I/O Device page.

To close the alert message shown at the top of the screen, tap the button on the corresponding message on the ERROR page of the INFORMATION screen. (See “ERROR page”.)

When switching from actual mounting to virtual mounting:

When a mounted SB-16D is disconnected from the Dante network and becomes virtually mounted, the following error message will appear at the top of every touchscreen.

SB-16D ID #xx-xx has been disconnected.

Tap this error message to open the Dante SETUP Screen I/O Device page.

This error message can be resolved in the following ways.

If the SB-16D returns to the Dante network, the error will be resolved automatically and the error message at the top of the screen will disappear.

Tapping the button on the corresponding error message on the ERROR page of the INFORMATION screen will close the error message at the top of the screen.

Unmounting the corresponding device using the I/O DEVICE page of the Dante Setup screen will resolve the error and close the error message at the top of the screen.

When an ID is used more than once:

When another SB-16D that has the same ID as a mounted SB-16D is connected to the Dante network, resulting in duplicate IDs, the following error message will appear at the top of every touchscreen.

SB-16D ID #xx-xx has a ID conflict.

Tap this error message to open the Dante SETUP Screen I/O Device page.

In this case, the device that was mounted first is given priority, so it has no impact on operation as a mixer.

If an ID becomes duplicated when there is a remaining alert message that occurred when switching from virtual mounting to actual mounting, the error message will appear after the alert message is removed.

This error message can be resolved in the following ways.

Resolving the duplicate ID using the I/O DEVICE page of the Dante screen will close the error message at the top of the screen.

If the device causing duplication is removed from the Dante network, normal mounting status will be restored and the error message at the top of the screen will be closed.

When this error message is resolved, the following error resolution message will be added to the ERROR page of the INFORMATION screen.

SB-16D ID #xx-xx conflict has been resolved.

Restrictions when routing during 96kHz operation with Dante Controller

When the AUTO ROUTING button is set to “OFF”, “Sonicview Dante I/O” and “ 1-16”, for example, will not be shown in the list on the right of the I/O Device page.

Instead, the message below will appear.

Use the Dante Controller for Routing.

If the Sampling rate is set to “96kHz” on the Dante Settings page of the Dante SETUP screen, the list on the right of the I/O Device page will not show “ 33–48” and “ 49–64” in the bottom two mounting slots.

Alternatively, the message shown below will appear.

In this case, operations to acquire control privileges are necessary after mounting.

They will not be acquired automatically when mounted.

Immediately after mounting, “Pre Amp Control OFF” will be shown in the control privilege display area.

If no IF-DA64 (Dante card) is installed:

Tapping the control privilege display area will open the following message.

IF-DA64 is required to enable Pre Amp Control.

[CANCEL]

Tap the CANCEL button to close the message window and return to the previous screen. In this case, preamp control is not possible from this unit.

If an IF-DA64 (Dante card) is installed:

Tapping the control privilege display area will open the following message.

Route as follows by Dante Controller.
[SB-16D 1-16ch] to[ IF-DA64 (Slot1) 1-16ch]*

Do you want to enable Pre Amp Control?

[CANCEL] [ENABLE]

Tap the CANCEL button to close the message window and return to the previous screen. In this case, preamp control is not possible from this unit.

Tapping the ENABLE button will set the control privilege and “Pre Amp Control” will be shown in the control privilege display area.

If another Sonicview, for example, already has SB-16D control privileges:

Tapping the control privilege display area will open the following message.

Route as follows by Dante Controller.
[SB-16D 1-16ch] to [IF-DA64 (Slot1) 1-16ch]*

Do you request control?

Sonicview XXX has Pre Amp control.

[CANCEL] [REQUEST]

After this, control privileges can be acquired by following the procedures from step 5 in “Mounting of devices connected to the Dante network”.

By acquiring control privileges with the above methods, preamp control becomes possible from the assigned module of the SLOT that the IF-DA64 (Dante card) is installed in as an input source.

*This appears when an SB-16D is mounted in the 3rd mounting slot and an IF-DA64 (Dante card) is installed in SLOT 1.

If an SB-16D is mounted in the 4th mounting slot and an IF-DA64 (Dante card) is installed only in SLOT 2, the following message will appear.

Route as follows by Dante Controller.
[SB-16D 1-16ch] to [IF-DA64 (Slot2) 17-32ch]

One SB-16D can be accessed simultaneously from a maximum of 10 Sonicview units.

If 10 units would be exceeded, the Sonicview that tries to access that SB-16D will fail (login failure) and will not be able to control that SB-16D.

“Logged Out” will be shown at the top right of mounted devices for which logging in failed.

Tap the button for unmounted or mounted devices to show the following messages that explain generally why login failed.

Tap the OK button in the message to close it.

The content of the message depends on the reason login failed.

If 10 units are already logged in

If login was not possible because of a communication error

If logging in fails when an SB-16D is mounted, mounting will be executed, but the above messages will be shown.

The following items are possible or not possible using mounted devices with which login failed.

Possible

Input Dante Routing from the SB-16D to the Sonicview can be set with this unit, and the input sound of this SB-16D can be input to this unit.

Setting routing with Dante Controller makes inputting and outputting sound from this SB-16D possible.

Not possible

Output Dante routing from the Sonicview to the SB-16D cannot be set with this unit. For this reason, sound from this unit cannot be output from this SB-16D.

Acquiring control privileges and changing/confirming preamp and other settings are not possible.

Responding to login failure errors

If any Sonicview units are showing the operation screen for that unmounted SB-16D, close that screen.

If that SB-16D is mounted on more than 10 Sonicview units, unmount it from a Sonicview unit that does not need it.

If already mounted and logging in failed, after doing the above, unmount it and then mount it again.

If the above responses do not resolve the issue, turn the SB-16D power off once and wait a few seconds before turning the power on again.

Synchronizing audio settings

If the Sonicview has control privileges after mounting, the SB-16D sampling rate and reference level (both analog and digital) settings will automatically be synchronized with those of that Sonicview. Moreover, it will also be set as the device for snapshot recall and set as the device with priority for Dante output routing.

Dante routing

Routing of Dante I/O for mounted SB-16Ds and the Sonicview can be done automatically.

On the other hand, routing can be left to Dante Controller and the Sonicview can be set to not do routing.

Use the AUTO ROUTING button on the I/O Device page to set this. (See “ AUTO ROUTING button”.)

To conduct Dante routing from the Sonicview for SB-16D units mounted on it, set the AUTO ROUTING button to “ON”.

Dante routing will be set automatically when mounted.

In this case, depending on the SB-16D mounting position, the mounted SB-16D I/O port and this unit’s built-in Dante I/O will be routed for Dante automatically when mounting occurs as shown below.

When Sync Clock is 48 kHz

Mounting position in Mounted Device area	Routing destination
Top	Built-in Dante I/O 1–16 of this unit
2nd from top	Built-in Dante I/O 17–32 of this unit
3rd from top	Built-in Dante I/O 33–48 of this unit
4th from top	Built-in Dante I/O 49–64 of this unit

When Sync Clock is 96 kHz

Mounting position in Mounted Device area	Routing destination
Top	Built-in Dante I/O 1–16 of this unit
2nd from top	Built-in Dante I/O 17–32 of this unit
3rd from top	This will not be routed automatically. Use Dante Controller to route Dante I/O 1–16 for the IF-DA64 installed in this unit and Dante I/O 1–16 for the mounted SB-16D.
4th from top	This will not be routed automatically. Use Dante Controller to route Dante I/O 17–32 for the IF-DA64 installed in this unit and Dante I/O 1–16 for the mounted SB-16D.

NOTE

When the AUTO ROUTING button is changed from “OFF” to “ON”, if executing automatic Dante routing changes the Dante input routing of this unit, the following message will appear to confirm whether to match the routing with the mounting status.

Devices other than this Sonicview are routed to the mounted SB-16D.

Do you want to KEEP the routing? Or Change the routing to this Sonicview?

[KEEP] [CHANGE]

Example of Dante routing when the AUTO ROUTING button is OFF

Dante routing state after the AUTO ROUTING button is switched to “ON” from the above state and the CHANGE button is tapped

To conduct Dante routing for the Sonicview from Dante Controller, set the AUTO ROUTING button to “OFF”.

This will enable routing from Dante Controller.

When set to conduct Dante routing from Dante Controller, routing settings cannot be conducted from the Sonicview even for SB-16D units.

NOTE

Routing for mounted SB-16Ds will be retained as is. Routing will not occur automatically if an SB-16D is mounted after the AUTO ROUTING button is set to “OFF”.

SB-16D control

Preamp control as a Sonicview I/O expansion

From the operation screen of the module that has the built-in Dante input port routed, input connector preamps of SB-16Ds that have been routed by Dante to this Dante input port can be operated.

In this case, they can be operated in the same way as the built-in analog input preamps of the Sonicview.

Only if all the following conditions are all met, preamps can be operated on the Home Screen, MODULE (OVERVIEW) screen and MODULE (INPUT) screen.

A Dante port is assigned to the module

The SB-16D Dante port is routed to this Dante port

The SB-16D that is routed to this Dante port is mounted on the Sonicview and control privileges are held, or it is virtually mounted

Example of appearance when mounted and control privileges are held

In this case the same preamp settings will be shown as would be when routing the built-in analog input jacks.

Example of appearance when mounted but control privileges are not held

In this case, the SB-16D preamp settings can be shown, but the GAIN knob, PAD buttons and 48V buttons will appear black and cannot be operated.

Example of appearance when virtually mounted

In this case the same preamp settings will be shown as would be when routing the built-in analog input jacks, and marks are shown on routing settings.

SB-16D full control

Whether they are mounted or not, SB-16D units that are connected to the same Dante network can be fully controlled from a Sonicview.

NOTE

If another Sonicview has SB-16D control privileges, its setting values can be shown, but they cannot be controlled. In this case, an icon will appear at the top of the SB-16D control screen and the Dante device module name of the Sonicview that has control privileges will be shown.

1.Tap Menu Screen > Rear Panel Setup > Dante Setup to open the Dante SETUP screen and tap the I/O Device tab.

2.Tap the button for the device you want to control.

This opens the control screen.

Control screen operations

This shows the current ID.

Tap this area to open a window where the ID can be changed.

Swipe the options up and down to change the ID.

Selections can also be changed by turning the LCD Knobs 2 and 3, which are lit pink and yellow.

Tap the APPLY button to change the selected ID.

Tap the CANCEL button to close the window without changing the ID.

NOTE

If an ID that is already being used on the Dante network is selected, that ID will be red and the APPLY button will appear gray, showing the setting cannot be made.

Changing the ID when mounted could cause it to become unmounted.

Device name

This shows the module name of the SB-16D Dante device.

Tap this area to enable changing the module name of the Dante device.

If the device is virtually mounted, “---” will appear and tapping will not enable changing.

Control privilege status

This shows the control privilege status.

If this unit has control privileges, and “Controlled by this console” will be shown.

If this unit does not have control privileges, and “Controlled by [Dante device module name of the Sonicview that has control privileges]” will be shown.

In the following cases, nothing will be shown.

If no device has control privileges for that SB-16D

If the device is virtually mounted

button

Tap this button to send an Identify command to the SB-16D. The SB-16D that receives the Identify command will respond by blinking its SIG and STATUS indicators, making it possible to confirm the corresponding device. Tapping this button again when an SB-16D is responding will send it another Identify command, which will cause it to stop responding.

This button is not shown for devices that are virtually mounted.

button

Tap this button to open the Settings Screen where settings other than those related to preamp operation can be checked.

Channel modules

Work with channel names, GAIN knobs, PAD buttons and 48V buttons in this area.

Tapping a channel name will open the RENAME screen where it can be edited.

GAIN levels of the channels selected by the frame can be adjusted using the 1–8 LCD knobs that are lit red.

Tap a PAD button to turn the −20 dB pad on/off. When this button is on, it will appear highlighted.

Press and hold the 48V button to turn phantom power (+48V) on/off. When phantom power is on, the button will be highlighted.

GAIN knobs, PAD buttons and 48V buttons can also be used with virtually mounted devices.

If another Sonicview has control privileges for the SB-16D shown, it will appear as follows and cannot be controlled.

Example of appearance when control privileges are not held

Settings screen

Firmware Version

This shows the SB-16D firmware versions.

If the device is virtually mounted, “---” will appear in place of the numbers.

Serial No.

This shows the serial number of the SB-16D.

“---” will appear if the device is virtually mounted.

Dante Version Info

This shows the SB-16D Dante module firmware version.

If the device is virtually mounted, nothing will be shown even if tapped.

Tap this area to open a Dante information window.

Scroll knob and scrollbar

This scroll bar shows the position of the setting items currently shown on the screen relative to all items on the Settings Screen.

NOTE

To view setting items not shown on the screen, swipe the setting items area up and down to scroll the screen.

LCD knob 8, which is lit light blue, can also be turned to scroll the screen.

DC Power information

SB-16D DC power status is shown and related settings can be made here.

Item	Explanation
DC Volt.	This shows the current voltage and status of the DC power supply. A green indicator will be shown if the DC power supply is providing power normally. If the alert display setting is on, and the DC power supply voltage has become less than the alert voltage, an indicator will be shown. No indicator will be shown if the DC power supply is not providing power (if the DC power supply voltage is below the stop voltage).
Stop Volt.	This shows the stop voltage setting value.
Alert Volt.	This shows the setting value for the voltage that triggers showing an alert. If the Alert Voltage ON/OFF button is set to “OFF” in the DC Power settings window, “--.-V” will be shown here.
Settings button	Tap this button to open the DC Power settings window. (See “DC Power settings”.)

“---” will appear for all the settings if the device is virtually mounted. In addition the Settings button will appear gray and cannot be used.

Sampling rate buttons

These set the sampling frequency for the SB-16D.

The selected button will be highlighted.

Digital Reference Level buttons

Use these to set the digital reference level of the SB-16D.

The selected button will be highlighted.

Analog Reference Level buttons

Use these to set the analog reference level of the SB-16D.

The selected button will be highlighted.

NOTE

The settings of Sampling rate (), Digital Reference Level () and Analog Reference Level () buttons with green backgrounds are linked to the settings of the Sonicview that has control privileges. For this reason, settings cannot be changed on this Settings screen if mounted.

For virtually mounted devices, Sampling rate (), Digital Reference Level () and Analog Reference Level () button settings will all appear gray and cannot be operated.

LED Brightness buttons

Use the and buttons to set the brightness of the SB-16D indicators.

Range: 0 – 3 (default 3)

If the device is virtually mounted, “–” will appear and the buttons will be gray and cannot be operated.

GPIO Extension

Tap the Settings button to open the GPIO Extension Settings Screen. (See “GPIO Extension Settings Screen”.)

Virtually-mounted devices can also be operated.

Network Settings

Tap the Dante button to open the Dante Network Settings on the Network Settings Screen. (See “Dante Network Settings”.)

Tap the Controller button to open the Controller Network Settings on the Network Settings Screen. (See “Control Network Settings”.)

If the device is virtually mounted, the Dante and Controller buttons will be gray and the settings screen cannot be opened.

Factory Reset button

Tap the Reset button to open a window where settings can be restored to their factory default values. (See “Factory Reset”.)

If the device is virtually mounted, this button will be gray and cannot be operated.

DC Power settings

Tap the Settings button in the DC Power area to open the following DC Power settings window.

Stop Voltage: This sets the stop voltage.

Use LCD knob 4, which is lit light blue, to adjust it.

Range: 11.0 – 27.0 V (in steps of 0.1 V, default 11.0 V)

If the SB-16D is operating with only DC power supply, it will shut down if the DC power supply goes below this voltage.

If DC power is supplied from a battery, set the stop voltage according to the battery specifications. In all other cases, set this to a minimum of 11.0 V (the default value).

Alert Voltage: This sets the alert voltage.

Use LCD knob 5, which is lit green, to adjust it.

Range: OFF, 11.0 – 28.0 V (in steps of 0.1 V, default 11.5 V)

When the Stop Voltage setting is changed, this is automatically set +0.5V higher than the Stop Voltage.

Change this setting to adjust the timing if the alert is shown too quickly or too late.

DC Voltage: This shows the current DC input voltage.

Alert Voltage ON/OFF button: Tap this button to turn the alert message on/off. (Default: ON)

When ON, if the DC power supply voltage becomes less than the alert voltage, the following alerts will be shown.

SB-16D DC POWER indicator blinks

indicator appears in DC Power area ()

Alert Reset button: Tap this button to reset the Alert Voltage setting to the default value (Stop Voltage +0.5 V).

CANCEL button: Tap this button to discard the changes in the DC Power settings window and close it.

SET button: Tap this button to confirm the values in the DC Power settings window and close it.

GPIO Extension Settings Screen

The SB-16D GPIO port has the following functions.

GPIO-IN

Muting control of SB-16D input and output signals (Local mode function)

Mounted Sonicview extension GPIO-IN port operation (Extension mode function)

GPIO-OUT

Tally output for muting states of SB-16D input and output signals (Local mode function)

Mounted Sonicview extension GPIO-OUT port operation (Extension mode function)

The following settings to use these functions can be made on this screen.

ALL Extension mode

ALL Local mode

Individual mode

This shows the current ID.

Tap this area to open a window where the ID can be changed.

Swipe the options up and down to change the ID.

Selections can also be changed by turning the LCD Knobs 2 and 3, which are lit pink and yellow.

Tap the APPLY button to change the selected ID.

Tap the CANCEL button to close the window without changing the ID.

NOTE

If an ID that is already being used on the Dante network is selected, that ID will be red and the APPLY button will appear gray, showing the setting cannot be made.

Changing the ID when mounted could cause it to become unmounted.

GPIO port overall operation mode

This shows the overall operation mode for the GPIO port.

Tap this area to open a window where the overall operation mode for the GPIO ports of the SB-16D can be changed.

Option	Explanation
ALL Extension	The ALL Extension mode setting uses all GPIO ports as GPIO extension pins of the Sonicview that the SB-16D is mounted in.
ALL Local	The ALL Local mode setting uses all GPIO ports as pins that do the following. GPIO-IN: SB-16D input/output signal muting control GPIO-OUT: Tally output for muting states of SB-16D input/output signals
Individual	In this mode, the operation of each GPIO port is set individually.

Tap an option to switch the overall operation mode for the GPIO port of the SB-16D.

Pin number buttons

Tap this area to select a pin and show its settings in the Sonicview GPIO Extension display area (), the operation/action mode switching buttons for the individual pin () and the input/output signal selection status display area ().

When the overall operation mode for GPIO ports is “ALL Local” or “Individual”, tapping a pin number button will outline that button with a white frame.

Sonicview GPIO Extension display area

The GPIO IN Settings (when GPIO-IN pin selected) or GPIO OUT Settings (when GPIO-OUT pin selected) button is shown when the operation mode for the selected GPIO port is as follows.

When the GPIO port overall operation mode () is “ALL Extension”

When the GPIO port overall operation mode () is “Individual” and the operation/action mode button () is “Extension”

The selected GPIO port is used as a GPIO extension pin of the Sonicview that has the subject SB-16D mounted.

Set this with the GPIO-IN and GPIO-OUT pages on the USER DEFINED CONTROLS Screen of the Sonicview that has the subject SB-16D mounted.

Operation/action mode switching buttons for individual ports

These show the operation mode for the selected GPIO port in the following cases.

When GPIO port overall operation mode () is “ALL Local”

When the GPIO port overall operation mode () is “Individual”

These show the operation and action modes of the selected GPIO Port.

Tap these buttons to switch the operation and action modes of the individual port.

For GPIO IN ports

Option	Explanation
Extension	The Extension mode setting uses the selected ports as GPIO extension pins of the Sonicview that the SB-16D is mounted in. This can only be selected when the GPIO port overall operation mode () is “Individual”.
Local / Closed-Toggle	In this mode, when the selected IN port becomes shorted (Closed), the SB-16D input/output signal selected in the input/output signal selection status area () is muted/unmuted (toggled).
Local / Closed-Mute	In this mode, when the selected IN port becomes shorted (Closed), the SB-16D input/output signal selected in the input/output signal selection status area () is muted.
Local / Closed-Unmute	In this mode, when the selected IN port becomes shorted (Closed), the SB-16D input/output signal selected in the input/output signal selection status area () is unmuted.

For GPIO OUT ports

Option	Explanation
Extension	The Extension mode setting uses the selected ports as GPIO extension pins of the Sonicview that the SB-16D is mounted in. This can only be selected when the GPIO port overall operation mode () is “Individual”.
Local / Mute-Closed	In this mode, when the SB-16D input/output signal selected in the input/output signal selection status area () is muted, the selected OUT port becomes shorted (Closed).
Local / Unmute-Closed	In this mode, when the SB-16D input/output signal selected in the input/output signal selection status area () is unmuted, the selected OUT port becomes shorted (Closed).

Input/output signal selection status

These show the operation mode for the selected GPIO port in the following cases.

When GPIO port overall operation mode () is “ALL Local”

When the GPIO port overall operation mode () is “Individual” and the individual port operation/action mode button () is “Local / xxxxx”

When a GPIO-IN pin is selected, the SB-16D input/output signal that is subject to muting control is selected according to that pin.

Up to 16 can be selected for muting control by GPIO-IN pin.

If the selectable number is exceeded, the check fields will be shown in gray and become unselectable.

When a GPIO-OUT pin is selected, this selects the SB-16D input/output signal for mute/unmute status tally output from the selected pin.

A maximum of 16 input/output signals of the SB-16D used for tally output can be selected. If the selectable number is exceeded, the check fields will be shown in gray and become unselectable.

When multiple input/output signals are selected, tally output will occur if any of the selected input/output signals are muted (if set to Local / Mute - Closed) or unmuted (if set to Local / Unmute - Closed).

Dante Network Settings

This shows the status of the Dante network settings for the SB-16D.

When in Redundant mode, settings will be shown for the Primary connector on the left and for the Secondary connector on the right.

When in Switched (daisy-chain) mode, only the left side will be active.

Item	Content
Switch	This shows the selected connection mode. Tap this area to open a window where Redundant or Switched mode can be selected. (default: Redundant)
Addressing	This shows the IP address setting mode. Tap this area to open a window where AUTO (DHCP) or STATIC can be selected. (default: AUTO (DHCP))
IP Address	If the Addressing item is set to “AUTO”, this will show the assigned IP address. If it is set to “STATIC”, this will show the IP address set by the user. When the Addressing item is set to “STATIC”, tapping this area will open the IP ADDRESS Screen. (See “IP Address/Subnet Mask/Default Gateway setting procedures”.)
Subnet mask	If the Addressing item is set to “AUTO”, this will show the assigned subnet mask. If it is set to “STATIC”, this will show the subnet mask set by the user. When the Addressing item is set to “STATIC”, tapping this area will open the SUBNET MASK Screen. (See “IP Address/Subnet Mask/Default Gateway setting procedures”.)
LINK Status	This shows the Dante network link status. This will be shown in red if it is not 1 G.
MAC Address	This shows the MAC address of the Primary/Secondary Dante port.

To confirm Dante network settings for the SB-16D, the SB-16D Dante module must be restarted.

If SB-16D Dante network settings have been changed, the APPLY button will appear highlighted.

Tap the APPLY button when it is highlighted to open a confirmation message.

Since tapping the CANCEL button will not restart the unit, the settings will be as is but will not be applied to operation.

Tap the REBOOT Dante button to confirm the changes and restart the SB-16D Dante module.

After restarting, the settings will be applied to operation.

ATTENTION

Be aware that SB-16D Dante input and output sound will be interrupted while the SB-16D Dante module is restarting.

Control Network Settings

This shows the status of the Dante network settings for SB-16D control.

Item	Content
Addressing	This shows the IP address setting mode. Tap this area to open a window where AUTO (DHCP) or STATIC can be selected. (default: AUTO (DHCP))
IP Address	If the Addressing item is set to “AUTO”, this will show the assigned IP address. If it is set to “STATIC”, this will show the IP address set by the user. When the Addressing item is set to “STATIC”, tapping this area will open the IP ADDRESS Screen. (See “IP Address/Subnet Mask/Default Gateway setting procedures”.)
Subnet mask	If the Addressing item is set to “AUTO”, this will show the assigned subnet mask. If it is set to “STATIC”, this will show the subnet mask set by the user. When the Addressing item is set to “STATIC”, tapping this area will open the SUBNET MASK Screen. (See “IP Address/Subnet Mask/Default Gateway setting procedures”.)
MAC Address	This shows the MAC address for SB-16D control.

If Dante network settings for SB-16D control have been changed, the APPLY button will appear highlighted.

When settings are applied, the SB-16D Dante network connection will be interrupted once. For this reason, tap the APPLY button when it is highlighted to open a confirmation message.

Tap the CANCEL button to cancel the changes and restore the previous state.

Tap the APPLY button to confirm the changes.

Factory Reset

1.Tap the Reset button to open a window where settings can be restored to their factory default values.

Item

Explanation

Keep Network Settings

If the check mark () is added, the SB-16D Dante network settings will be retained.

If the check mark () is removed, the SB-16D Dante network settings will be restored to their factory defaults.

(This has a check () by default.)

Keep Dante Settings (Include Routing)

If the check mark () is added, the SB-16D Dante settings will be retained.

If the check mark () is removed, the SB-16D Dante settings will be restored to their factory defaults.

(This does not have a check () by default.)

2.Add check marks () for the settings that you want to retain.

Remove check marks () for the settings that you want to restore to factory defaults.

NOTE

If check marks () are added to both, only settings that are not related to the Dante network and Dante will be restored to their factory defaults.

3.Tapping the RESET or RESET & REBOOT button will open the following warning messages in a window.

Message if Keep Network Settings does not have a check mark ():

Network may be disconnected.

Message if Keep Dante Settings (Include Routing) does not have a check mark ():

Audio will be interrupted.

Dante routing will be cleared.

Message when the RESET & REBOOT button is tapped:

Audio will be interrupted.

Message if Keep Network Settings does not have a check mark ()

4.Tap the RESET button in the warning message to close the window and restore the following items to their factory default settings.

Settings without check marks ()

Settings other than those for Dante network and Dante

ATTENTION

If the RESET & REBOOT button is tapped, after settings are restored to their factory defaults, the I/O Device page of the Dante Setup screen will open. Moreover, until the reset SB-16D has completed restarting it will be disconnected from the Dante network.

Tap the CANCEL button to close the window without changing the settings.

Using GPIO extension functions

If the SB-16D GPIO pin operation mode is set to “Extension”, they can be used as Sonicview GPIO extension pins.

This setting can also be made for virtually mounted SB-16D units.

By storing the settings in the Sonicview, online setting is possible.

Setting procedure

1.Following the instructions in “GPIO Extension Settings Screen” for the “Overall operation mode for the GPIO port buttons” () or “ Operation mode switching buttons for individual ports” (), set the operation mode for the ports you want to use as a GPIO extension for this unit to “Extension”.

2.Use the following procedures to open GPIO-IN and GPIO-OUT screens.

Tap Menu Screen > Rear Panel Setup > GPIO Input Setup

Tap Menu Screen > Rear Panel Setup > GPIO Output Setup

3.Use LCD knob 8 to scroll the list of settings for groups of 8 ports that correspond to mounting positions.

In the SB-16D GPIO pin name area, SB-16D IDs and port numbers are shown in a “#ID [port number]” format.

If the device is virtually mounted, the GPIO port name background will appear yellow.

Ports with operation mode set to Extension in the list will be highlighted.

Ports with operation mode set to Local in the list will be shown in gray.

4.Tap the port you want to set in the list and assign functions using the same procedures as with the unit’s built-in GPIO.

Procedures for Dante connection with SB-16Ds

This explains procedures for connecting an SB-16D as a stage box to this unit, and controlling its preamps from modules with built-in Dante ports assigned in the same way as built-in analog inputs.

Dante connections with SB-16Ds

When this unit is operating at 48 kHz, up to 4 SB-16D units can be connected without Dante Controller.

When this unit is operating at 96 kHz, up to 2 SB-16D units can be connected without Dante Controller.

In all other cases, setting using Dante Controller will be necessary.

Procedures for Dante connection with this unit and one SB-16D

In this case, Dante connection without using Dante Controller is possible whether this unit’s built-in Dante “Sampling rate” is using 48kHz or 96kHz operation. Moreover, controlling a preamp of that SB-16D from a module with a built in Dante port assigned is possible.

1.If multiple SB-16D units are connected to the Dante network, set IDs that are not duplicated on them in advance in order to enable their identification. For details about ID setting procedures, see the SB-16D operation manual.

2.Connect the following Dante ports to the same Dante network.

Dante ports built into this unit

SB-16D Dante ports

NOTE

When using only one of these units and one SB-16D, their Dante ports can be connected directly as shown below.

3.Set the Dante routing control method.

Tap Menu Screen > Rear Panel Setup > Dante Setup to open the Dante SETUP screen and tap the I/O Device tab.

4.Set the AUTO ROUTING button to “ON”.

5.Follow the procedures in “Mounting of devices connected to the Dante network”, and mount the selected SB-16D as the top item in the Mounted Device list.

Through these procedures, the Dante I/O ports of this unit and the one SB-16D unit are routed by Dante as follows.

Dante I/O ports of this unit	SB-16D Dante I/O ports
Dante I/O 1–16 of this unit	SB-16D Dante I/O 1–16

As a result, the preamps (Analog GAIN, PAD ON/OFF, Phantom ON/OFF) of the corresponding SB-16D INPUT can be operated on the Home Screen and MODULE screen of the module that has Dante IN 1–16 inputs assigned.

Module that can operate SB-16D preamps	Object of preamp operation on the Home Screen and MODULE screen of the module (at left)
Module with Dante IN 1–16 assigned	INPUT 1–16 of the mounted SB-16D 1st in the list

Procedures for connecting 4 SB-16D units by Dante when the sampling rate of this unit’s built-in Dante module is “48kHz”.

In this case, Dante connection without using Dante Controller is possible. Moreover, controlling a preamp of that SB-16D from a module with a built in Dante port assigned is possible.

2.Connect the following Dante ports to the same Dante network.

Dante ports built into this unit

Dante ports of 4 SB-16D units

When connecting multiple SB-16D units, connect them through a switching hub as shown below. In this case, use different switching hubs for Primary and Secondary.

3.Set the Dante routing control method.

Tap Menu Screen > Rear Panel Setup > Dante Setup to open the Dante SETUP screen and tap the I/O Device tab.

4.Set the AUTO ROUTING button to “ON”.

5.Following the procedures in “Mounting of devices connected to the Dante network”, mount 4 SB-16D units one at a time from the top in the Mounted Device list.

Through these procedures, the Dante I/O ports of this unit and the 4 SB-16D units are routed by Dante as follows.

Dante I/O ports of this unit	SB-16D Dante I/O ports
Dante I/O 1–16 of this unit	Dante I/O 1–16 of the SB-16D mounted 1st in the list
Dante I/O 17–32 of this unit	Dante I/O 1–16 of the SB-16D mounted 2nd in the list
Dante I/O 33–48 of this unit	Dante I/O 1–16 of the SB-16D mounted 3rd in the list
Dante I/O 49–64 of this unit	Dante I/O 1–16 of the SB-16D mounted 4th in the list

Module that can operate SB-16D preamps	Object of preamp operation on the Home Screen and MODULE screen of the module (at left)
Module with Dante IN 1–16 assigned	INPUT 1–16 of the mounted SB-16D 1st in the list
Module with Dante IN 17–32 assigned	INPUT 1–16 of the mounted SB-16D 2nd in the list
Module with Dante IN 33–48 assigned	INPUT 1–16 of the mounted SB-16D 3rd in the list
Module with Dante IN 49–64 assigned	INPUT 1–16 of the mounted SB-16D 4th in the list

Procedures for connecting 4 SB-16D units by Dante when the sampling rate of this unit’s built-in Dante module is “96kHz”.

In this case, using Dante Controller is necessary.

When the “Sampling rate” Sync Clock is set to “96kHz” for the unit’s built-in Dante module, the unit’s built-in Dante I/O count becomes 32-in/32-out. For this reason, an IF-DA64 (Dante card) must be installed in a card slot in order to connect this unit by Dante with SB-16D input and output ports numbered 33 and higher. This explanation assumes that an IF-DA64 has been installed in SLOT 1. (See “Installing expansion cards (sold separately)”.)

2.Follow the instructions in “Precautions when using an IF-DA64” to enable synchronization of the two Dante modules (built-in Dante and IF-DA64 Dante card) with this unit’s master clock.

3.Connect the following Dante ports to the same Dante network.

Dante ports built into this unit

Dante ports of IF-DA64 installed in this unit

Dante ports of 4 SB-16D units

When connecting multiple SB-16D units, connect them through a switching hub as shown below. In this case, use different switching hubs for Primary and Secondary.

4.Set the Dante routing control method.

Tap Menu Screen > Rear Panel Setup > Dante Setup to open the Dante SETUP screen and tap the I/O Device tab.

5.Set the AUTO ROUTING button to “ON”.

6.Following the procedures in “Mounting of devices connected to the Dante network”, mount 4 SB-16D units one at a time from the top in the Mounted Device list.

7.Use Dante Controller on the computer connected to the Dante network in step 3 to make the following connection routing settings.

Connect Dante I/O 1–16 of the IF-DA64 installed in this unit to Dante I/O 1–16 of the SB-16D mounted 3rd from the top

Connect Dante I/O 17–32 of the IF-DA64 installed in this unit to Dante I/O 1–16 of the SB-16D mounted 4th from the top

As a result, the Dante I/O ports of this unit’s built-in Dante, the IF-DA64 (Dante card) installed in this unit’s SLOT 1 and the 4 SB-16D units are routed by Dante as follows.

Dante I/O ports of this unit	SB-16D Dante I/O ports
Dante I/O 1–16 of this unit	Dante I/O 1–16 of the SB-16D mounted 1st in the list
Dante I/O 17–32 of this unit	Dante I/O 1–16 of the SB-16D mounted 2nd in the list
SLOT 1 I/O 1–16 of this unit	Dante I/O 1–16 of the SB-16D mounted 3rd in the list
SLOT 1 I/O 17–32 of this unit	Dante I/O 1–16 of the SB-16D mounted 4th in the list

8.Acquire control privileges to enable operation of SB-16D units mounted 3rd and 4th from the top and routed through an IF-DA64 from the Home and MODULE screens of this unit.

Tap the “Pre Amp Control OFF” buttons for the 3rd and 4th devices to open the following confirmation message.

If control privileges for those SB-16D units have not been acquired by other devices:

The following message will be shown.

Tapping the ENABLE button will set the control privileges and “Pre Amp Control” will be shown in the control privilege display area.

If control privileges for those SB-16D units have been acquired by other devices:

The following message will be shown.

Tapping the REQUEST button and following the procedures from step 5 in “Mounting of devices connected to the Dante network” to acquire the control privileges will cause “Pre Amp Control” to be shown in the control privilege display area.

9.Conduct step 8 for the SB-16D units mounted 3rd and 4th in the list.

This will enable operation from this unit of SB-16D units mounted 3rd and 4th from the top and routed through an IF-DA64.

After completing these procedures, the preamps (Analog GAIN, PAD ON/OFF, Phantom ON/OFF) of the corresponding SB-16D units can be operated on the Home Screens and MODULE screens of the modules that have Dante 1–32 and SLOT 1–1 1–32 input ports assigned.

Module that can operate SB-16D preamps	Object of preamp operation on the Home Screen and MODULE screen of the module (at left)
Module with Dante IN 1–16 assigned	INPUT 1–16 of the mounted SB-16D 1st in the list
Module with Dante IN 17–32 assigned	INPUT 1–16 of the mounted SB-16D 2nd in the list
Module with SLOT 1 IN 1–16 assigned	INPUT 1–16 of the mounted SB-16D 3rd in the list
Module with SLOT 1 IN 17–32 assigned	INPUT 1–16 of the mounted SB-16D 4th in the list

ATTENTION

In these procedures, maintain the routing settings of the SB-16D units mounted 3rd and 4th from the top and the IF-DA64 (Dante card) as follows.

Connect Dante I/O 1–16 of the IF-DA64 installed in this unit to Dante I/O 1–16 of the SB-16D mounted 3rd from the top

Connect Dante I/O 17–32 of the IF-DA64 installed in this unit to Dante I/O 1–16 of the SB-16D mounted 4th from the top

If routings are changed from the above by Dante Controller, the preamp of an unintended SB-16D channel will be affected if a preamp is operated on this unit from the Home Screen or MODULE screen of a module with a corresponding SLOT input assigned.

Procedures to connect one SB-16D and a DA-6400* with an IF-DA64 (Dante card) installed to this unit by Dante

*In this example, connection is with Dante I/O 1–16 of a DA-6400 with an IF-DA64.

In this case, using Dante Controller is necessary.

2.Connect the following Dante ports to the same Dante network.

Dante ports built into this unit

SB-16D Dante ports

Dante ports of the IF-DA64 installed in the DA-6400

When connecting 3 or more Dante devices, connect them through a switching hub as shown below. In this case, use different switching hubs for Primary and Secondary.

3.Set the Dante routing control method.

Tap Menu Screen > Rear Panel Setup > Dante Setup to open the Dante SETUP screen and tap the I/O Device tab.

4.Set the AUTO ROUTING button to “ON”.

5.Follow the procedures in “Mounting of devices connected to the Dante network”, and mount the SB-16D as the top item in the Mounted Device list.

6.Change the Dante routing control method.

7.Set the AUTO ROUTING button to “OFF”.

8.Use Dante Controller on the computer connected to the Dante network in step 2 to make the following and connection routing settings.

Dante I/O 17–32 of this unit

Dante I/O 1–16 of the IF-DA64 installed in the DA-6400

Example of Dante Controller display when routing settings have been made connecting this unit’s Dante I/O 17–32 and Dante I/O 1–16 of the IF-DA64 installed in the DA-6400

Through these procedures, the Dante I/O ports of this unit, the SB-16D and the IF-DA64 (Dante card) installed in the DA-6400 are routed by Dante as follows.

Dante I/O ports of this unit	Dante I/O ports of external devices
Dante I/O 1–16 of this unit	Dante I/O 1–16 of the SB-16D mounted 1st in the list
Dante I/O 17–32 of this unit	Dante I/O 1–16 of the IF-DA64 installed in the DA-6400

Example of Dante Controller display when the above routing settings have been made

After completing these procedures, operation becomes possible for the preamps (Analog GAIN, PAD ON/OFF, Phantom ON/OFF) of the corresponding SB-16D INPUT on the Home Screen and MODULE screen of the module that has Dante IN 1–16 input ports assigned.

Module that can operate SB-16D preamps	Object of preamp operation on the Home Screen and MODULE screen of the module (at left)
Module with Dante IN 1–16 assigned	INPUT 1–16 of the mounted SB-16D 1st in the list

Notes about Dante

Dante is a transmission protocol developed by Audinate.

Using networks based on gigabit Ethernet standards, it enables multichannel (512 IN/512 OUT) transmission and high precision, for example.

Check the Audinate website for details about Dante.

https://www.audinate.com/

Connecting to a Dante network

In order to set up and use this unit, you must also set up the Ethernet network that it is connected to, a computer that runs Dante Controller and other devices that support Dante.

Dante controller is not necessary for use, however, when used with an SB-16D.

LAN cables used for connections

Use STP cables that are category 5e or higher.

Both crossover and straight cables can be used.

ATTENTION

This unit is not compatible with 100Mbps Ethernet switching hubs. Always use switching hubs that support Gigabit Ethernet.

NOTE

When the Dante Network Addressing setting is AUTO (DHCP), set the computer to set the IP address automatically.

When the Dante Network Addressing setting is STATIC, set the computer to match the Dante and network address.

Switched (daisy chain) connection

Dante devices can be daisy-chained when there are few connected devices and when not using a switching hub. Connect them as shown below.

Switched (daisy chain) connection example

NOTE

When using a switched (daisy chain) connection, connect to either the PRIMARY or SECONDARY connector.

If the number of connected devices increases, raising the latency setting will be necessary.

Redundant connection

For recording situations where retakes are not possible, including live performances, a connection set up like the following uses two completely independent primary and secondary networks.

Redundant connection example

NOTE

Settings for switched (daisy chain) and redundant connections do not change automatically. Tap Menu Screen > Rear Panel Setup > Dante Setup to open the Dante SETUP Screen, or change the settings on the Dante Controller Network Config screen.

ATTENTION

The primary and secondary networks cannot be connected on the same LAN (VLAN).

Using Dante Controller

Dante Controller overview

This unit uses the Dante Controller application, which is available at the Audinate website, to connect with other devices that support Dante.

Download the latest version of the Dante Controller application and an operation manual from the Audinate website.

Audinate download page

https://www.audinate.com/products/software/dante-controller

Make at least the following settings using a computer that has Dante Controller installed.

Set the audio routing.

Adjust the sampling frequency and bit depth of each Dante device.

NOTE

Settings made using Dante Controller are stored in the built-in memory of each Dante device.

Unless settings are modified, connections will not change even if Dante Controller is quit or the computer is disconnected from the Dante network.

Audio routing settings

When Dante Controller is launched, the Network View screen shown below will open.

On this screen, you can set and monitor conditions related to the Dante network.

Receiving device name

This is the name of a receiving device on the Dante network.

Receiving device channels

These are the names of the channels of the receiving device on the Dante network.

Transmitting device name

This is the name of a transmitting device on the Dante network.

Transmitting device channels

These are the names of the channels of the transmitting device on the Dante network.

Audio routing

Route the audio channels of the transmitting and receiving devices that you want to connect here.

Click the intersection of the channels you want to connect on the matrix to connect them.

NOTE

While pressing the computer keyboard Ctrl key, click the “-” at the intersection of device names to connect all connectable channels at once.

Changing sampling frequencies and bit depths with Dante Controller

Double-click a device name on the Network View screen to open the Device View screen.

On this screen, you can set and monitor conditions related to devices on the Dante network.

Click the Device Config tab to open the page where you can change the sampling frequency, bit rate and other settings of the device selected in shown in the illustration below.

Device name

This is the name of the device that can have its settings changed in the current Device View.

Change device name

Edit the device name.

Sampling frequency

Set the sampling frequency.

NOTE

This can also be set on the unit.

Bit depth

Set the bit depth.

Latency setting

Set the latency.

Use the following guidelines to change the latency setting.

Selectable latency value	Connected network setup guideline
250usec	The transmission route from the transmitting device to the receiving device passes through 1 gigabit switching hub.
500usec	The transmission route from the transmitting device to the receiving device passes through 5 gigabit switching hub.
1msec	The transmission route from the transmitting device to the receiving device passes through 10 gigabit switching hub.
2msec	The transmission speed of the transmitting device is 100 Mbps.
5msec	Use this maximum selectable latency value when creating a large-scale network.

ATTENTION

This unit is not compatible with 100Mbps Ethernet switching hubs. Always use switching hubs that are compatible with Gigabit Ethernet.

Changing the name of a device will clear audio routing settings. For this reason, we recommend changing device names to names that are easy to identify before setting audio routings.

Depending on network connection conditions, setting the latency to a value higher than the guideline might be necessary.

NOTE

This can also be set on the unit.

When using a switched (daisy chain) connection, which does not use a switching hub, set the latency according to the number of Dante devices that signals pass-through as shown below.

Switched (daisy chain) connection example

NOTE

The Dante module in this unit and IF-DA64 Dante cards (sold separately) have built-in switching hubs.

For this reason, when counting Dante devices, count this unit and IF-DA64 cards as two devices each.

SLOT SETUP screen

Make settings and view information for expansion cards installed in SLOT 1 and SLOT 2 on this screen.

Tap Menu Screen > Rear Panel Setup > Slot Setup to open this screen.

SLOT 1

This shows the name of the expansion card installed in SLOT 1 on the rear panel.

SLOT 2

This shows the name of the expansion card installed in SLOT 2 on the rear panel.

SLOT 1 parameters

This shows the parameters of the expansion card installed in SLOT 1 on the rear panel.

SLOT 2 parameters

This shows the parameters of the expansion card installed in SLOT 2 on the rear panel.

NOTE

“No Card” will appear if no card has been installed in SLOT 1 or SLOT 2.

When an IF-DA64 (Dante) card is installed

STATUS display area

This shows the operation status of the installed IF-DA64.

STATUS	Meaning
Available	The installed IF-DA64 is operating normally.
Unavailable	The installed IF-DA64 is not operating normally.

Precautions when using an IF-DA64

The Dante module built into this unit, an IF-DA64 Dante card installed in a SLOT and the unit’s master clock must be synchronized. Do this as follows.

When the unit’s master clock is not Dante (INT, WORD, etc.)

Use Dante Controller to set the Sync to External setting to “ON” for both the built-in Dante module and the IF-DA64.

Use Dante Controller to set the Preferred Leader setting to “ON” for either one of them. (We recommend using the built-in Dante module.)

When the unit’s master clock is Dante

Use Dante Controller to set the Sync to External setting to “ON” for the IF-DA64.

Use Dante Controller to set the Preferred Leader setting to “ON” for a Dante module other than an IF-DA64. (We recommend using the built-in Dante module.)

When an IF-AE16 (AES/EBU) card is installed

SRC ON/OFF buttons

These turn the SRC (sample rate converter) ON (default) and OFF for each signal line.

The selected buttons will be highlighted.

NOTE

SRC cannot be set to ON for the signal line selected as the master clock. For this reason, the signal line selected as the master clock will be shown as follows.

When an IF-MA64/EX or IF-MA64/BN (MADI) card is installed

MADI INPUT STATUS

This shows the channel mode/frame frequency of the MADI input signal.

“No signal” will appear if there is no input signal.

MADI INPUT FRAME

This shows the MADI input signal frame type (48K Frame/96K Frame).

“No signal” will appear if there is no input signal.

MADI INPUT SELECT buttons (IF-MA64/EX only)

Set the input connector used.

Options: COAXIAL, OPTICAL (default)

The selected button will be highlighted.

MADI OUTPUT CH MODE buttons

Set the output channel mode.

Options: 56ch/28ch, 64ch/32ch (default)

The selected button will be highlighted.

NOTE

Left of /: 1×Fs channel mode

Right of /: 2×Fs channel mode

2×Fs MADI OUTPUT FRAME buttons

These set the MADI output signal frame type when the unit's sampling frequency is 96 kHz.

Options: 48K Feame, 96K Frame (default)

The selected button will be highlighted.

ATTENTION

A MADI signal with a 96kHz sampling frequency and 48K Frame type cannot be distinguished from a MADI signal with a 48kHz sampling frequency.

For this reason, a 48K Frame MADI input signal that does not match the sampling frequency of the receiving device cannot be received as proper audio data.

When using a 48K Frame MADI signal, always match the sampling frequencies of the signal sending and receiving devices.

NOTE

The signal from the IF-MA64/EX MADI COAXIAL IN connector is output through its MADI COAXIAL THRU connector whether the unit is on or off.

When the unit is turned on/off, however, the signal output from the MADI COAXIAL THRU connector will be momentarily disrupted.

For this reason, time turning the unit on/off carefully when the signal output from the MADI COAXIAL THRU connector is being used by a connected device.

MADI COAXIAL EQUALIZER buttons

Set the equalizer for MADI COAXIAL input signals.

When an IF-MA64/EX or IF-MA64/BN is connected and a low-voltage MADI COAXIAL signal source or long BNC cable is being used, proper reception is not possible sometimes.

In this case, try setting MADI COAXIAL EQUALIZER to OFF.

Options: OFF, ON (default)

The selected button will be highlighted.

When an IF-AN16/OUT (analog output) card is installed

OUTPUT ATTENUATOR knobs

These adjust the output levels.

Range: −14.0 dB – 0.0 dB (default)

When the selection frame is shown, use the corresponding LCD knobs to adjust the values.

NOTE

The IF-AN16/OUT will always operate at 96 kHz even when synchronized to a master clock that is 48 kHz.

When an IF-MTR32 (multitrack recording) card is installed

SLOT SETUP screen when 2 IF-MTR32 cards installed

Recorder/Player: MTR RIGHTWARDS ARROW

Tap this area to open the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen. (See “MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen”.)

ATTENTION

Only one IF-MTR32 card can be used at a time.

If two IF-MTR32 cards are installed, only the one in SLOT 1 can be used. In this case, “Unavailable” will appear in the SLOT 2 area on the SLOT SETUP Screen.

When an IF-ST2110 (ST 2110) card is installed

SLOT SETUP screen when 2 IF-ST2110 cards installed

ST 2110 CONFIG

Tap this area to open the ST2110 SETUP Screen. (See “13 - IF-ST2110 expansion cards”.)

ATTENTION

Only one IF-ST2110 card can be used at a time.

If two IF-ST2110 cards are installed, only the one in SLOT 1 can be used. In this case, “Unavailable” will appear in the SLOT 2 area on the SLOT SETUP Screen.

LABEL SETUP screen

Use this screen to set the display modes and display labels for port labels (input and output connector names) and module labels that are shown in various places.

Tap Menu Screen > Mixer Setup > Label Setup to open this screen. This screen can also be opened by tapping the icon in the LABEL setting area of the MODULE (INPUT) Screen or MODULE (OUTPUT) Screen.

NOTE

The settings on this screen are subject to snapshot storing and recall. Moreover, the corresponding PARAMETER SAFE page setting group is “LABEL / COLOR / ICON”. (See “PARAMETER SAFE page”.)

DISPLAY MODE page

Use this screen to set the display modes for the port labels (input and output connector names) and module labels that are shown in various places.

PORT LABEL display mode setting buttons

Tap these buttons to set the display mode for the port labels (input and output connector names) as shown below.

The selected button will be highlighted.

Button

Meaning

USER (default)

The USER PORT LABEL (port name set by user) is shown.

If the USER PORT LABEL is undefined, the FIXED PORT LABEL will be shown.

FIXED

The predetermined FIXED PORT LABEL will be shown for each port (for example, “ANALOG 1” or “Dante 1”).

See “Where the PORT LABEL display mode setting is applied” for details about where this setting is applied.

MODULE LABEL display mode setting buttons

Tap these buttons to set the MODULE LABEL display mode as shown below.

The selected button will be highlighted.

Button	Meaning
USER	The USER MODULE LABEL (module name set by user) is shown. If the USER MODULE LABEL is undefined, the FIXED MODULE LABEL will be shown.
FIXED	The FIXED MODULE LABEL will be shown (predetermined names for each module, for example, “CH 1” and “MIX 1”).
PORT LABEL	The port name assigned to the corresponding module will be shown using the mode selected with the PORT LABEL display mode setting buttons ().

The default Sub MODULE LABEL display mode is FIXED.

The default Main MODULE LABEL display mode is USER.

For details about where the settings are applied, see “Where the Sub MODULE LABEL display mode setting is applied” and “Where the Main MODULE LABEL display mode setting is applied”.

Home screen appearance example

This sample image is an example of the appearance on the Home Screen in accordance with the PORT LABEL display mode setting button () and MODULE LABEL display mode setting button ().

Where the PORT LABEL display mode setting is applied

On the Home Screen (names of input and output ports at the top)

Where the displayed content changes according to the display mode setting of the MODULE LABEL (only when the MODULE LABEL display mode is “PORT LABEL”)

NOTE

When stereo-linked but the input PORT LABEL area only has space for one channel, the input PORT LABEL for the L channel will be shown.

Multiple output ports can be selected, but if there is no area to show multiple output port labels, the PORT LABEL for the output port selected for SELECT PORT LABEL on the MODULE (OUTPUT) Screen will be shown (“ SELECT PORT LABEL button”). If nothing has been selected for the SELECT PORT LABEL mode, the PORT LABEL for the output port shown at the top left of the MODULE (OUTPUT) Screen will be shown.

Where the Sub MODULE LABEL display mode setting is applied

Channel screens (1st line from top)

Home screen (MODULE LABEL area top row)

DCA/Mute Group SETUP Screen (top row of each module button)

KEY IN SOURCE SELECT Screen (top row of each module button)

TALKBACK page (top row of bus name buttons)

TALKBACK page (top row of bus name buttons in SELECTED ASSIGN window)

TALKBACK page (top row of bus name buttons in TALKBACK KEY ASSIGN window)

All pages of MIXER CONFIG Screen (top row of module name buttons)

Custom Layer SETUP page (top row of module name buttons)

SENDS ON FADER Screen (top row of bus selection buttons)

Where the Main MODULE LABEL display mode setting is applied

Channel screens (2nd line from top)

Channel screens (“SEND to bus name” area when in Sends On Fader mode)

Channel screens (bus name area when in GEQ FADER Ctrl mode)

Home screen (MODULE LABEL area bottom row)

Home Screen (SEND area bus name)

Home Screen (bus selection buttons in the selection window shown when the button is tapped)

MODULE Screen (USER MODULE LABEL display)

MODULE (COMP) Screen (KEY IN SOURCE button)

MODULE (DUCKER) Screen (KEY IN SOURCE button)

LIBRARY Screens for Module/GATE/EQ/COMP/GEQ (USER MODULE LABEL display)

MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen (bus name area)

DCA/Mute Group SETUP Screen (bottom row of each module button)

KEY IN SOURCE SELECT Screen (bottom row of each module button)

All pages of METER Screen

All pages of SEND OVERVIEW Screen (send source module names)

TALKBACK page (bottom row of bus name buttons)

TALKBACK page (bottom row of bus name buttons in SELECTED ASSIGN window)

TALKBACK page (bottom row of bus name buttons in TALKBACK KEY ASSIGN window)

All pages of MIXER CONFIG Screen (bottom row of module name buttons)

Custom Layer SETUP page (bottom row of module name buttons)

SENDS ON FADER Screen (bottom row of bus selection buttons)

ST2110 SETUP Screen HOME (Source/Destination) page (MODULE column on Source Information window)

NOTE

If the MODULE LABEL display mode is set to “PORT LABEL”, the modules below that are not assigned to input and output ports will be shown the same as when the MODULE LABEL display mode setting is “USER”.

FX RTN 1–4 modules

DCA 1–8 module

MODULE LABEL page

This screen shows all the display labels for modules used in other places in a list and enables editing them.

Module group page switches

This shows the names of module group pages.

Tap a page name to switch to the page with the corresponding module group.

The name of the selected page will be highlighted.

Module buttons

These buttons show the FIXED MODULE LABEL in the upper line and the USER MODULE LABEL in the lower line. If the USER MODULE LABEL is undefined, the FIXED MODULE LABEL will be shown.

Tap one of these buttons to open the MODULE LABEL Screen where the USER MODULE LABEL can be edited for that module. (See “MODULE LABEL page”.)

INPUT PORT LABEL page

This screen shows all the user port labels for input ports used in other places in a list and enables editing them.

Input port group page switches

These show the names of input port group pages.

Tap a page name to switch to the page with the corresponding input port group.

The name of the selected page will be highlighted.

Input port selection buttons

These buttons show the FIXED PORT LABEL in the upper line and the USER PORT LABEL in the lower line. If the USER PORT LABEL is undefined, the FIXED PORT LABEL will be shown.

Tap one of these buttons to open the USER LABEL (INPUT PORT) Screen where the USER PORT LABEL can be edited for that input port. (See “USER LABEL (INPUT PORT / OUTPUT PORT) Screen”.)

Scrollbar

These appear when all selectable options cannot be shown on the display at the same time.

Drag the display to scroll the screen. The screen can also be scrolled by swiping up and down on the input port selection button area () area.

Scroll knob

This appears highlighted when all selectable options cannot be shown on the display at the same time.

This icon shows that LCD knob 8 (lit light blue) can be used to scroll.

OUTPUT PORT LABEL page

This screen shows all the user port labels for output ports used in other places in a list and enables editing them.

Output port group page switches

These show the names of output port group pages.

Tap a page name to switch to the page with the corresponding output port group.

The name of the selected page will be highlighted.

Output port selection buttons

These buttons show the FIXED PORT LABEL in the upper line and the USER PORT LABEL in the lower line. If the USER PORT LABEL is undefined, the FIXED PORT LABEL will be shown.

Tap one of these buttons to open the USER LABEL (OUTPUT PORT) Screen where the USER PORT LABEL can be edited for that output port. (See “USER LABEL (INPUT PORT / OUTPUT PORT) Screen”.)

Scrollbar

These appear when all selectable options cannot be shown on the display at the same time.

Drag the display to scroll the screen. The screen can also be scrolled by swiping up and down on the output port selection button area () area.

Scroll knob

This appears highlighted when all selectable options cannot be shown on the display at the same time.

This icon shows that LCD knob 8 (lit light blue) can be used to scroll.

USER LABEL (INPUT PORT / OUTPUT PORT) Screen

Use this screen to add and edit user port labels for input and output ports.

NOTE

User port labels are not set by default.

User port labels can have up to 8 characters.

/ buttons

Tap these buttons to move left and right between the input/output ports shown for editing in their order on the input port group page of the INPUT PORT LABEL screen or the output port group page of the OUTPUT PORT LABEL screen.

FIXED PORT LABEL

This shows the FIXED PORT LABEL.

USER PORT LABEL

This shows the set USER PORT LABEL.

If the USER PORT LABEL is undefined, the FIXED PORT LABEL will be shown.

Keyboard input area

This shows the USER PORT LABEL being edited. Use the keyboard and buttons on this screen or a USB keyboard connected to the top panel USB port to edit the characters shown.

The combination of characters input can be changed depending on the status of the Caps lock and Shift keyboard buttons. See “Changing the keyboard keys” for details about changing the keyboard.

ATTENTION

The following symbols and punctuation marks cannot be input.

¥ / : * ? " < > |

Network Setup screen

Use this screen to make network settings primarily for the purpose of remote control of this unit using the dedicated TASCAM Sonicview Control application.

For details about the TASCAM Sonicview Control application, see its manual.

TASCAM Sonicview Control and its application manual can be downloaded from the TASCAM website.

Sonicview 16XP

https://tascam.com/us/product/sonicview_16xp/support

Sonicview 24XP

https://tascam.com/us/product/sonicview_24xp/support

Tap Menu Screen > Rear Panel Setup > Network Setup to open this screen.

Network status

This shows the network status of the unit.

Item	Content
MAC Address	This shows the unit's MAC address.
IP Address	This shows the unit's IP address.

IP SETUP

Set the IP address setting mode.

Options: AUTO (default), STATIC

IP Address/Subnet Mask/Default Gateway

This shows the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway of the unit when IP SETUP is “STATIC”.

default: 0.0.0.0

This will be gray when IP SETUP is “AUTO”.

Tap the address fields to open the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway screens.

IP ADDRESS setting screen

See “IP Address/Subnet Mask/Default Gateway setting procedures” for details about how to use these setting screens.

Password

Set the password to use when connecting to this unit through a network.

Tap the Change button to open the Change password screen.

The password can have up to 16 characters.

Model	Default password
Sonicview 16XP	Sonicview16
Sonicview 24XP	Sonicview24

The combination of characters input can be changed depending on the status of the Caps lock and Shift keyboard buttons on the Change password screen. See “Changing the keyboard keys” for details about changing the keyboard.

ATTENTION

The following symbols and punctuation marks cannot be input.

¥ / : * ? " < > |

NOTE

A USB keyboard that is connected to the top panel USB port can also be used to input and edit characters.

Machine Name

The name of the unit on the network can be set so remote applications can distinguish it from other Sonicview units when multiple ones are on the network.

Tap this area to open the Machine name screen.

The machine name can have up to 16 characters.

Model	Default machine name
Sonicview 16XP	Sonicview16
Sonicview 24XP	Sonicview24

The combination of characters input can be changed depending on the status of the Caps lock and Shift keyboard buttons on the Machine name screen. See “Changing the keyboard keys” for details about changing the keyboard.

ATTENTION

The following symbols and punctuation marks cannot be input.

¥ / : * ? " < > |

NOTE

A USB keyboard that is connected to the top panel USB port can also be used to input and edit characters.

IP Address/Subnet Mask/Default Gateway setting procedures

The IP address is set to “192.168.1.1” as an example in this explanation.

1.Tap the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway fields to open their setting screens.

2.Tap the number buttons to input setting values.

3.Tap “ . ” to move the cursor to the next field.

To change a setting, tap it to move the cursor to that field.

4.Repeat steps 2–3 as necessary to input setting values in each field.

5.Tap the Enter button to confirm the input and return to the Network Setup Screen.

Changed settings will be reflected in the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway fields of the Network Setup Screen.

NOTE

Each input field has three digits. When inputting values with less than three digits, inputting “0” first is not necessary.

After this screen opens, the first field will be highlighted.

When a field is highlighted, tapping a number button will input that number, replacing the value previously in the field. After this, input numbers as on a calculator.

If a fourth digit is entered, the first digit entered will be removed. For example, if “1234” was entered, “1” will be removed.

Saving the current settings

The settings of the unit are saved to the internal memory at least once every minute.

To be certain that the unit settings are saved in the internal memory before turning the power off, use the Save Current Settings function explained below.

NOTE

After saving All System Data or storing snapshot, EQ and other library settings data, settings have already been output to the memory, so these operations are not necessary before turning the power off.

1.Press the MENU key to open the Menu Screen.

2.On the Menu Screen, show the Save Current Settings item.

3.Tap the Save Current Settings item to open a saving confirmation message to the right of the menu list.

4.Tap the SAVE button to save the unit’s settings to its internal memory.

The message shown below will appear while saving.

“Saved.” will momentarily appear after saving completes and then this message will disappear.

MODULE Screen

Use this screen to make settings for the selected module.

Tap areas on the Home Screen or press the SEL key on the top panel to open a MODULE Screen.

MODULE Screen overview

Selection buttons for each page are shown at the top of the MODULE Screen.

MODULE (INPUT) Screen for CH 1–40 modules

MODULE (EQ) Screen for MIX 1–22 modules

NOTE

If the selected module is stereo, a stereo level meter will be shown.

Each level meter has an overload indicator at its top. They will appear to light red when the signal level reaches or exceeds −0.00026 dBFS (16-bit full-scale value).

When a level overload occurs, the entire bar meter will light red.

The area below −60 dBFS at the bottom of the level meters will light when above −70 dBFS.

button

Tap this button to return to the Home Screen.

button

Tap this button to switch between showing the selected module normally or in full-screen mode, which expands the MODULE Screen to fill the entire touchscreen. When this is on, the button will appear highlighted.

In full-screen mode, it is easy to use all the touchscreens at the same time to adjust, for example, EQ and COMP, or GATE, EQ and COMP.

Turning this button off on one screen will reopen the Home Screen on the other touchscreens.

NOTE

When the GEQ FADER Ctrl function is on, full-screen mode is kept on and cannot be turned off.

/ buttons

Tap these buttons to move left and right in order on the layer between modules to show and activate different ones for operation.

When the FULL SCREEN button is off, this will move only between the modules on the current page. For example, moving left and right on the COMP page will move only between the CH 1–40, MIX 1–22 and MAIN L/R Master modules on it.

When the FULL SCREEN button is on, pages become as follows after movement.

If the module after movement is in the same category, the selected page will not change.

If the module after movement is in a different category, it will be shown with the page shown previously in that category.

FIXED MODULE LABEL

This shows the FIXED MODULE LABEL.

USER MODULE LABEL

This shows the MODULE LABEL set as the Main MODULE LABEL. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

If the Main MODULE LABEL display mode is set to “PORT LABEL”, FX RTN 1-4 modules that are not assigned to input and output ports will be shown with the module labels used when the Main MODULE LABEL display mode is set to “USER”.

Tap this area when the Main MODULE LABEL display mode is set to “USER” to open the MODULE LABEL Screen where the user module label and set module color can be changed. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.) (See “MODULE LABEL page”.)

If the Main MODULE LABEL display mode is set to “PORT LABEL” and the PORT LABEL display mode is set to “USER” (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.), tapping this area will open the USER LABEL (INPUT PORT) or USER LABEL (OUTPUT PORT) Screen where the user port label can be edited for the input/output port assigned to this module. (See “USER LABEL (INPUT PORT / OUTPUT PORT) Screen”.)

No screen will open, however, if no input/output port has been assigned to the module.

button

Tap this button to open the MODULE menu for the selected module.

Tap menu items to, for example, change parameter settings for the selected module. (See “MODULE menu”.)

Page selection buttons

Tap a page selection button to open that page.

The selected button will be highlighted.

Button	Use
OVERVIEW	Make overall settings for the selected module.
INPUT	Make input settings for the selected module.
FX	Make internal effect settings for the selected module.
GATE/EXPANDER/DE-ESSER	Make dynamics effect settings for the selected module.
EQ	Make EQ settings for the selected module.
GEQ	Make GEQ settings for the selected module.
COMP/DUCKER	Make dynamics effect settings for the selected module.
SEND	Make bus send settings for the selected module.
PAN	Make pan settings for the selected module.
OUTPUT	Make output settings for the selected module.

NOTE

The INPUT button is only shown for CH 1–40 and ST IN 1–2 modules.

The FX button is only shown for FX RTN 1–4 modules.

The GATE, EXPANDER and DE-ESSER buttons are only shown for CH 1–40 modules.

The GEQ button is only shown for MIX 1–22 and MAIN L/R Master modules.

The COMP and DUCKER buttons are only shown for CH 1–40, MIX 1–22 and MAIN L/R master modules.

The OUTPUT button is only shown for MIX 1–22 and MAIN L/R master modules.

MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screen

Make overall modules settings on the MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screen, which every module has.

On this screen, signal processing flows from left to right, and the settings for the functions of the modules are shown.

Tap the MODULE LABEL area on the Home Screen to open this screen.

CH 1–40 MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screens

CH 1–40 modules when the stereo link setting is off

CH 1–40 modules when the stereo link setting is on

Metering Point button

This shows the name of the set metering point.

Tap this button to open a window for setting metering points for CH 1–40 modules.

Options: INPUT, PRE HPF (default), PRE EQ, POST EQ, PRE FADER, POST FADER

Tap an option to switch the metering point for the level meter.

NOTE

Metering points can also be changed on the METERING POINT page of the METER SETUP Screen. (See “METERING POINT page”.)

Level meters

This shows the level of the signal at the set metering point.

MUTE GROUP button

Tap this button to open the DCA/Mute Group SETUP Screen Mute Group Assign page. (See “Mute Group Assign page”.)

DCA button

Tap this button to open the DCA/Mute Group SETUP Screen DCA Assign page. (See “DCA Assign page”.)

MUTE GROUP 1–8 buttons

Tap these buttons to change Mute Group assignment states. (Default: off)

Assigned buttons will be highlighted.

DCA 1–8 buttons

Tap these buttons to change DCA assignment states. (Default: off)

Assigned buttons will be highlighted.

Metering Point position indicator

The highlighted indicator shows the position of the set metering point.

Snapshot Recall Safe button

Tap this button to enable the Snapshot Recall Safe function for the selected module. (Default: off)

When this is on, the button will appear highlighted.

NOTE

This can also be set on the MODULE SAFE page of the SNAPSHOT RECALL SAFE Screen. (See “MODULE SAFE page”.)

Insert Point

This shows the name of the set insert point.

Tap this button to open a window for setting the insert point for the selected module.

Options: PRE EQ (default), PRE FADER

NOTE

Settings can be made for all CH 1–40 insert points at once using INSERT POINT BATCH SETUP on the CH 1-40 CONFIG page of the MIXER CONFIG Screen. (See “CH 1–40 CONFIG page”.)

INPUT button

This shows the input source name.

The second line shows an abbreviation of the FIXED PORT LABEL.

The third line shows the USER PORT LABEL.

If the USER PORT LABEL is undefined, the FIXED PORT LABEL will be shown.

If the module is stereo, the FIXED PORT LABEL for the input sources will appear split left and right and abbreviated as follows.

Module name shown	Stereo module name shown
ANALOG	AN
Dante	DA
SLOT 1	S1
SLOT 2	S2
USB IN	USB
ST IN 1	ST1
ST IN 2	ST2
PLAYER	PL

If Dante ports that have mounted SB-16Ds assigned are selected, they will be shown as follows.

2nd line: DA port number

3rd line: #[ID] port number

4th line: USER PORT LABEL or SB #[ID] port number (if the USER PORT LABEL is undefined)

If it is a virtually-mounted SB-16D, will appear.

Tap this button to open the INPUT SOURCE SELECT Screen. (See “INPUT SOURCE SELECT screen”.)

+48V button

This shows the +48V button when the input source of the selected module is “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante”.

Press and hold the +48V button to turn phantom power (+48V) on/off. (This is off by default.)

When phantom power is on, the button will be highlighted.

A black button that cannot be operated will be shown if the input source is an SB-16D for which control privileges are not held.

PAD button

This shows the PAD button when the input source of the selected module is “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante”.

Tap this button to turn the −20 dB pad on/off. (Default: off)

When this button is on, it will appear highlighted.

A black button that cannot be operated will be shown if the input source is an SB-16D for which control privileges are not held.

NOTE

When the pad is switched on/off, the Analog GAIN value will be controlled as shown below so that it changes as little as possible.

When Analog Reference Level is +6 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −9 dBFS

Status before switching pad setting	Analog GAIN after switching pad setting
Analog GAIN: +3 – +37	Same value
PAD ON/Analog GAIN: −17 – +2	+3
PAD OFF/Analog GAIN: +38 – +57	+37

When Analog Reference Level is +4 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −20 dBFS

Status before switching pad setting	Analog GAIN after switching pad setting
Analog GAIN: +12 – +46	Same value
PAD ON/Analog GAIN: −8 – +11	+12
PAD OFF/Analog GAIN: +47 – +66	+46

When Analog Reference Level is +4 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −18 dBFS

Status before switching pad setting	Analog GAIN after switching pad setting
Analog GAIN: +10 – +44	Same value
PAD ON/Analog GAIN: −10 – +9	+10
PAD OFF/Analog GAIN: +45 – +64	+44

When Analog Reference Level is +4 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −16 dBFS

Status before switching pad setting	Analog GAIN after switching pad setting
Analog GAIN: +8 – +42	Same value
PAD ON/Analog GAIN: −12 – +7	+8
PAD OFF/Analog GAIN: +43 – +62	+42

When Analog Reference Level is +4 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −14 dBFS

Status before switching pad setting	Analog GAIN after switching pad setting
Analog GAIN: +6 – +40	Same value
PAD ON/Analog GAIN: −14 – +5	+6
PAD OFF/Analog GAIN: +41 – +60	+40

When Analog Reference Level is 0 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −20 dBFS

Status before switching pad setting	Analog GAIN after switching pad setting
Analog GAIN: +8 – +42	Same value
PAD ON/Analog GAIN: −12 – +7	+8
PAD OFF/Analog GAIN: +43 – +62	+42

When Analog Reference Level is 0 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −18 dBFS

Status before switching pad setting	Analog GAIN after switching pad setting
Analog GAIN: +6 – +40	Same value
PAD ON/Analog GAIN: −14 – +5	+6
PAD OFF/Analog GAIN: +41 – +60	+40

Analog GAIN knob

When the input source of the selected module is “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante”, an analog gain knob will be shown for this unit or the SB-16D that can be used to adjust the input level of the MIC/LINE input jack.

Turn LCD knob 1 (lit red) to adjust it.

When Analog Reference Level is +6 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −9 dBFS

PAD button setting	Range
OFF	+3 (default) – +57
ON	−17 – +37

When Analog Reference Level is +4 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −20 dBFS

PAD button setting	Range
OFF	+12 (default) – +66
ON	−8 – +46

When Analog Reference Level is +4 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −18 dBFS

PAD button setting	Range
OFF	+10 (default) – +64
ON	−10 – +44

When Analog Reference Level is +4 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −16 dBFS

PAD button setting	Range
OFF	+8 (default) – +62
ON	−12 – +42

When Analog Reference Level is +4 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −14 dBFS

PAD button setting	Range
OFF	+6 (default) – +60
ON	−14 – +40

When Analog Reference Level is 0 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −20 dBFS

PAD button setting	Range
OFF	+8 (default) – +62
ON	−12 – +42

When Analog Reference Level is 0 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −18 dBFS

PAD button setting	Range
OFF	+6 (default) – +60
ON	−14 – +40

The indicators to the left of the Analog GAIN knobs appear to light as shown below depending on the input level.

Red: −3 dBFS, Green: −40 dBFS

When the input source of the selected module is “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante” and the Stereo Link setting is on, 2 Analog GAIN knobs will be shown for the linked channels.

Turn LCD knob 1 (lit red) to adjust both together.

To operate them separately, do so on the MODULE (INPUT) screen after turning the GANG function OFF on that screen.

A black knob that cannot be operated will be shown if the input source is an SB-16D for which control privileges are not held.

NOTE

Explanation of Analog GAIN values

When signals at the Analog Reference Level (+6 dBu, +4 dBu, 0 dBu) are input, the Analog GAIN value that becomes the Digital Reference Level (−9 dBFS, −14 dBFS, −16 dBFS, −18 dBFS, −20 dBFS) at the digital stage is shown as “0”.

DIRECT OUT button

Tap this button to turn DIRECT OUT on/off. (Default: ON)

When ON, the signal will be output directly from this point, and this button and the DIRECT OUT TRIM knob will be highlighted.

NOTE

The DIRECT OUT POINT for CH 1–40 modules can also be changed as explained in “CH 1–40 CONFIG page”.

DIRECT OUT TRIM knob

Use this to adjust the DIRECT OUT output signal level.

Range: −20 dB – +20 dB (default: 0 dB)

Turn LCD knob 2/4/5/7 (lit blue) to adjust it.

NOTE

The knob used for this operation depends on DIRECT OUT POINT and DELAY POINT settings (“CH 1–40 CONFIG page”).

OUTPUT button

This shows the name of the output port that the DIRECT OUT signal is assigned to.

The second line shows an abbreviation of the FIXED PORT LABEL.

The third line shows the USER PORT LABEL.

If the USER PORT LABEL is undefined, the FIXED PORT LABEL will be shown.

If it has been assigned to multiple output ports, “…” will appear to the bottom right of the button.

If the module is stereo, the FIXED PORT LABEL for the output ports will appear split left and right and abbreviated as follows.

Module name shown	Stereo module name shown
ANALOG	AN
Dante	DA
SLOT 1	S1
SLOT 2	S2
USB OUT	USB

If Dante ports that have mounted SB-16Ds assigned are selected, they will be shown as follows.

2nd line: DA port number

3rd line: #[ID] port number

4th line: USER PORT LABEL or SB #[ID] port number (if the USER PORT LABEL is undefined)

If it is a virtually-mounted SB-16D, will appear.

Tap this button to open the DIRECT OUT SELECT Screen. (See “DIRECT OUT PORT SELECT screen”.)

Phase buttons

Use these to change the phases of the signals for the selected module.

Tap these buttons to reverse the phases of the selected module signals.

Phase button display when the Stereo Link setting is off for the selected module

	Normal
	Reversed

Phase button display when the selected module is stereo

	Normal
	Reversed

D.TRIM knob

Use this to adjust the digital trim value.

Range: −50.0 dB – +20.0 dB (default: 0.0 dB)

Turn LCD knob 2/3/4 (lit red) to adjust it.

When the Stereo Link setting for the selected module is on, 2 D.TRIM knobs will be shown together for the linked channels.

Turn LCD knobs 2/3/4 (lit red) to adjust both together.

To operate them separately, do so on the MODULE (INPUT) screen after turning the GANG function OFF on that screen.

NOTE

The knob used for this operation depends on DIRECT OUT POINT and DELAY POINT settings (“CH 1–40 CONFIG page”).

HPF button

Tap this button to turn the HPF on/off. (Default: OFF)

When this is ON, the button will appear highlighted.

HPF frequency

This adjusts the cutoff frequency of the HPF.

Range: 20 Hz – 1.0 kHz (default: 79 Hz)

Turn LCD knob 3/4/5 (lit blue) to adjust it.

When this is on, it will appear highlighted.

NOTE

The knob used for this operation depends on DIRECT OUT POINT and DELAY POINT settings (“CH 1–40 CONFIG page”).

SEND button

This shows the name of the output port that the INSERT SEND signal is assigned to.

The second line shows an abbreviation of the FIXED PORT LABEL.

The third line shows the USER PORT LABEL.

If the USER PORT LABEL is undefined, the FIXED PORT LABEL will be shown.

If it has been assigned to multiple output ports, “…” will appear to the bottom right of the button.

If the module is stereo, the FIXED PORT LABEL for the output ports will appear split left and right and abbreviated as follows.

Module name shown	Stereo module name shown
ANALOG	AN
Dante	DA
SLOT 1	S1
SLOT 2	S2
USB OUT	USB

If Dante ports that have mounted SB-16Ds assigned are selected, they will be shown as follows.

2nd line: DA port number

3rd line: #[ID] port number

4th line: USER PORT LABEL or SB #[ID] port number (if the USER PORT LABEL is undefined)

If it is a virtually-mounted SB-16D, will appear.

Tap this button to open the INSERT SEND PORT SELECT Screen. (See “INSERT SEND PORT SELECT screen”.)

INSERT button

Tap this button to turn the INSERT on/off. (Default: OFF)

When this is on, the button will appear highlighted.

RETURN button

This shows the name of the input port that is assigned for the INSERT RETURN signal.

The second line shows an abbreviation of the FIXED PORT LABEL.

The third line shows the USER PORT LABEL.

If the USER PORT LABEL is undefined, the FIXED PORT LABEL will be shown.

If the module is stereo, the FIXED PORT LABEL for the input ports will appear split left and right and abbreviated as follows.

Module name shown	Stereo module name shown
ANALOG	AN
Dante	DA
SLOT 1	S1
SLOT 2	S2
USB IN	USB
ST IN 1	ST1
ST IN 2	ST2
PLAYER	PL
SB-16D	SB

If Dante ports that have mounted SB-16Ds assigned are selected, they will be shown as follows.

2nd line: DA port number

3rd line: #[ID] port number

4th line: USER PORT LABEL or SB #[ID] port number (if the USER PORT LABEL is undefined)

If it is a virtually-mounted SB-16D, will appear.

Tap this button to open the INSERT RETURN PORT SELECT Screen. (See “INSERT RETURN PORT SELECT screen”.)

When the INSERT RETURN PORT of the selected module is “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante”, the Analog GAIN value will be shown to the left of the RETURN button.

Tapping the Analog GAIN value to the left of the RETURN button will show the Analog GAIN value that corresponds to the INSERT RETURN PORT to the left of the INSERT button. Use the LCD knob (lit red) below the shown Analog GAIN value to adjust the Analog GAIN.

Tap the Set to LINE LEVEL button to set the corresponding Pre Amp setting as follows.

PAD: ON

Analog GAIN: 0

Phantom: OFF

DELAY button

Tap this button to turn on/off the DELAY function, which corrects for input signal latency. (Default: OFF)

When this is on, the button will appear highlighted.

DELAY TIME

This adjusts the DELAY TIME.

The highlighted unit will be used for operation, so tap the button for the desired unit.

Unit options	Range (unit)
meter	0 – 117.3 (meter)
feet	0 – 384.8 (feet)
msec (default)	0 – 341.32 (msec)

Turn LCD knob 2/3/5/6 (lit green) to adjust it.

NOTE

The DELAY POINT for CH 1–40 modules can also be changed as explained in “CH 1–40 CONFIG page”.

The knob used for this operation depends on DIRECT OUT POINT and DELAY POINT settings (“CH 1–40 CONFIG page”).

MUTE button

Tap this button to turn muting on/off for the selected module signal.

When MUTE is on, the button will be highlighted.

NOTE

The MUTE keys on the top of the unit can also be used to set this.

FADER LEVEL

Use this to adjust the FADER level of the selected module signal.

Range: −∞ dB – +10.0 dB (default: −∞ dB)

Turn LCD knob 6/7 (lit blue) to adjust it.

NOTE

The channel faders on top of the unit can also be used for this adjustment.

The knob number used for this operation depends on DIRECT OUT POINT setting (“CH 1–40 CONFIG page”).

Tap the area while pressing the HOME key on the top panel to set the FADER level to 0 dB.

SENDS button

Tap this button to open the MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen for the selected module. (See “MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen”.)

ON/OFF button for the Audio Follow Video function

Tap this button to turn on/off the Audio Follow Video function of the selected module. When this is on, the button will appear highlighted.

This shows the name of the AFV TRIGGER SOURCE selected on the AFV TRIGGER SOURCE SELECT Screen

AFV button

Tap this button to open the MODULE (Audio Follow Video) Screen for the selected module. (See “MODULE (Audio Follow Video) Screen”.)

MIX/FX SEND level indicators

This list shows the on/off and PRE/POST states and the send levels to the MIX 1–22 and FX 1–4 buses. (See “ ALL SEND button ()”.)

Tap this area to open the MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen for the selected module with the bus selected for the tapped area.

PAN/BAL

This adjusts the panning/balance of the signals sent to the MAIN L/R bus. Turn LCD knob 8 (lit yellow) to adjust it.

Range: L100 – C – R100 (default: C)

When the icon is highlighted (), signals are being sent to the MAIN L/R bus.

Tap this area to open the MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen for the selected module. (See “MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen”.)

NOTE

Tap this area while pressing the HOME key on the top panel to set panning/balance to center (C).

AUTO MIXER button (CH 1–16 modules only)

This shows the name of the AUTO MIXER group (A/B/C/D) to which the corresponding channel module belongs.

If the selected group is TOP PRIORITY, a “TOP” icon will be shown in the bottom left of the button. When on, the icon will appear highlighted.

This will be dimmed when the AUTO MIXER is off.

Tap this button to open the AUTOMATIC MIXER Screen. (See “AUTO MIXER Function”.)

ST IN 1–2 MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screens

ST IN 1–2 module when the input source is ANALOG

Metering Point button

This shows the name of the set metering point.

Tap this button to open a window for setting metering points for ST IN 1–2 modules.

Options: INPUT, PRE EQ (default), PRE FADER, POST FADER

Tap an option to switch the metering point for the level meter.

NOTE

Metering points can also be changed on the METERING POINT page of the METER SETUP Screen. (See “METERING POINT page”.)

Level meters

This shows the level of the signal at the set metering point.

MUTE GROUP button

Tap this button to open the DCA/Mute Group SETUP Screen Mute Group Assign page. (See “Mute Group Assign page”.)

DCA button

Tap this button to open the DCA/Mute Group SETUP Screen DCA Assign page. (See “DCA Assign page”.)

MUTE GROUP 1–8 buttons

Tap these buttons to change Mute Group assignment states. (Default: off)

Assigned buttons will be highlighted.

DCA 1–8 buttons

Tap these buttons to change DCA assignment states. (Default: off)

Assigned buttons will be highlighted.

Snapshot Recall Safe button

Tap this button to enable the Snapshot Recall Safe function for the selected module. (Default: off)

When this is on, the button will appear highlighted.

NOTE

This can also be set on the MODULE SAFE page of the SNAPSHOT RECALL SAFE Screen. (See “MODULE SAFE page”.)

Metering Point position indicator

The highlighted indicator shows the position of the set metering point.

INPUT button

This shows the input source name. In this case, the FIXED PORT LABEL of the input source will appear split left and right and abbreviated as follows.

Module name shown	Stereo module name shown
ANALOG	AN
Dante	DA
SLOT 1	S1
SLOT 2	S2
USB IN	USB
ST IN 1	ST1
ST IN 2	ST2
PLAYER	PL

If Dante ports that have mounted SB-16Ds assigned are selected, they will be shown as follows.

2nd line: DA port number

3rd line: #[ID] port number

4th line: USER PORT LABEL or SB #[ID] port number (if the USER PORT LABEL is undefined)

If it is a virtually-mounted SB-16D, will appear.

Tap this button to open the INPUT SOURCE SELECT Screen. (See “INPUT SOURCE SELECT screen”.)

+48V button

This shows the +48V button when the input source of the selected module is “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante”.

Press and hold the +48V button to turn phantom power (+48V) on/off. (This is off by default.)

When phantom power is on, the button will be highlighted.

A black button that cannot be operated will be shown if the input source is an SB-16D for which control privileges are not held.

PAD button

This shows the PAD button when the input source of the selected module is “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante”.

Tap this button to turn the −20 dB pad on/off. (Default: off)

When this button is on, it will appear highlighted.

A black button that cannot be operated will be shown if the input source is an SB-16D for which control privileges are not held.

NOTE

When the pad is switched on/off, the Analog GAIN value will be controlled as shown below so that it changes as little as possible.

When Analog Reference Level is +6 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −9 dBFS

Status before switching pad setting	Analog GAIN after switching pad setting
Analog GAIN: +3 – +37	Same value
PAD ON/Analog GAIN: −17 – +2	+3
PAD OFF/Analog GAIN: +38 – +57	+37

When Analog Reference Level is +4 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −20 dBFS

Status before switching pad setting	Analog GAIN after switching pad setting
Analog GAIN: +12 – +46	Same value
PAD ON/Analog GAIN: −8 – +11	+12
PAD OFF/Analog GAIN: +47 – +66	+46

When Analog Reference Level is +4 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −18 dBFS

Status before switching pad setting	Analog GAIN after switching pad setting
Analog GAIN: +10 – +44	Same value
PAD ON/Analog GAIN: −10 – +9	+10
PAD OFF/Analog GAIN: +45 – +64	+44

When Analog Reference Level is +4 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −16 dBFS

Status before switching pad setting	Analog GAIN after switching pad setting
Analog GAIN: +8 – +42	Same value
PAD ON/Analog GAIN: −12 – +7	+8
PAD OFF/Analog GAIN: +43 – +62	+42

When Analog Reference Level is +4 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −14 dBFS

Status before switching pad setting	Analog GAIN after switching pad setting
Analog GAIN: +6 – +40	Same value
PAD ON/Analog GAIN: −14 – +5	+6
PAD OFF/Analog GAIN: +41 – +60	+40

When Analog Reference Level is 0 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −20 dBFS

Status before switching pad setting	Analog GAIN after switching pad setting
Analog GAIN: +8 – +42	Same value
PAD ON/Analog GAIN: −12 – +7	+8
PAD OFF/Analog GAIN: +43 – +62	+42

When Analog Reference Level is 0 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −18 dBFS

Status before switching pad setting	Analog GAIN after switching pad setting
Analog GAIN: +6 – +40	Same value
PAD ON/Analog GAIN: −14 – +5	+6
PAD OFF/Analog GAIN: +41 – +60	+40

Analog GAIN knobs

When the input source of the selected module is “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante”, this will show analog gain knobs for each channel of this unit or the SB-16D. These can be used to adjust input levels of MIC/LINE input jacks.

Turn LCD knob 1 (lit red) to adjust it.

When Analog Reference Level is +6 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −9 dBFS

PAD button setting	Range
OFF	+3 (default) – +57
ON	−17 – +37

When Analog Reference Level is +4 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −20 dBFS

PAD button setting	Range
OFF	+12 (default) – +66
ON	−8 – +46

When Analog Reference Level is +4 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −18 dBFS

PAD button setting	Range
OFF	+10 (default) – +64
ON	−10 – +44

When Analog Reference Level is +4 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −16 dBFS

PAD button setting	Range
OFF	+8 (default) – +62
ON	−12 – +42

When Analog Reference Level is +4 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −14 dBFS

PAD button setting	Range
OFF	+6 (default) – +60
ON	−14 – +40

When Analog Reference Level is 0 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −20 dBFS

PAD button setting	Range
OFF	+8 (default) – +62
ON	−12 – +42

When Analog Reference Level is 0 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −18 dBFS

PAD button setting	Range
OFF	+6 (default) – +60
ON	−14 – +40

The indicators to the left of the Analog GAIN knobs appear to light as shown below depending on the input level.

Red: −3 dBFS, Green: −40 dBFS

When the input source of the selected module is “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante”, 2 Analog GAIN knobs will be shown together.

Turn LCD knob 1 (lit red) to adjust both together.

To operate them separately, do so on the MODULE (INPUT) screen after turning the GANG function OFF on that screen.

A black knob that cannot be operated will be shown if the input source is an SB-16D for which control privileges are not held.

NOTE

Explanation of Analog GAIN values

Phase buttons

Use these to change the phases of the signals for the selected module.

Tap these buttons to reverse the phases of the selected module signals.

	Normal
	Reversed

D.TRIM knob

Use this to adjust the digital trim value.

Range: −50.0 dB – +20.0 dB (default: 0.0 dB)

Turn LCD knob 3 (lit red) to adjust it.

Two D.TRIM knobs will be shown together for the L and R channels.

Turn LCD knob 3 (lit red) to adjust both together.

To operate them separately, do so on the MODULE (INPUT) screen after turning the GANG function OFF on that screen.

MUTE button

Tap this button to turn muting on/off for the selected module signal.

When MUTE is on, the button will be highlighted.

NOTE

The MUTE keys on the top of the unit can also be used to set this.

FADER LEVEL

Use this to adjust the FADER level of the selected module signal.

Range: −∞ dB – +10.0 dB (default: −∞ dB)

Turn LCD knob 7 (lit blue) to adjust it.

NOTE

The channel faders on top of the unit can also be used for this adjustment.

Tap the area while pressing the HOME key on the top panel to set the FADER level to 0 dB.

SENDS button

Tap this button to open the MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen for the selected module. (See “MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen”.)

ON/OFF button for the Audio Follow Video function

Tap this button to turn on/off the Audio Follow Video function of the selected module. When this is on, the button will appear highlighted.

This shows the name of the AFV TRIGGER SOURCE selected on the AFV TRIGGER SOURCE SELECT Screen.

AFV button

Tap this button to open the MODULE (Audio Follow Video) Screen for the selected module. (See “MODULE (Audio Follow Video) Screen”.)

MIX/FX SEND level indicators

This list shows the on/off and PRE/POST states and the send levels to the MIX 1–22 and FX 1–4 buses. (See “ ALL SEND button ()”.)

Tap this area to open the MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen for the selected module with the bus selected for the tapped area.

BAL

This adjusts the balance of the signals sent to the MAIN L/R bus. Turn LCD knob 8 (lit yellow) to adjust it.

Range: L100 – C – R100 (default: C)

When the icon is highlighted (), signals are being sent to the MAIN L/R bus.

Tap this area to open the MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen for the selected module. (See “MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen”.)

NOTE

Tap this area while pressing the HOME key on the top panel to set the balance to center (C).

FX RTN 1–4 MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screens

Metering Point button

This shows the name of the set metering point.

Tap this button to open a window for setting metering points for FX RTN 1–4 modules.

Options: FX INPUT, FX OUTPUT (default), PRE FADER, POST FADER

Tap an option to switch the metering point for the level meter.

NOTE

Metering points can also be changed on the METERING POINT page of the METER SETUP Screen. (See “METERING POINT page”.)

Level meters

This shows the level of the signal at the set metering point.

MUTE GROUP button

Tap this button to open the DCA/Mute Group SETUP Screen Mute Group Assign page. (See “Mute Group Assign page”.)

DCA button

Tap this button to open the DCA/Mute Group SETUP Screen DCA Assign page. (See “DCA Assign page”.)

SEND OVERVIEW button

Tap this button to open the SEND OVERVIEW Screen for the selected FX RTN module. (See “FX 1–4 bus SEND OVERVIEW Screen”.)

MUTE GROUP 1–8 buttons

Tap these buttons to change Mute Group assignment states. (Default: off)

Assigned buttons will be highlighted.

DCA 1–8 buttons

Tap these buttons to change DCA assignment states. (Default: off)

Assigned buttons will be highlighted.

Snapshot Recall Safe button

Tap this button to enable the Snapshot Recall Safe function for the selected module. (Default: off)

When this is on, the button will appear highlighted.

NOTE

This can also be set on the MODULE SAFE page of the SNAPSHOT RECALL SAFE Screen. (See “MODULE SAFE page”.)

Metering Point position indicator

The highlighted indicator shows the position of the set metering point.

FX Processing button

Tap this button to open the MODULE (FX) Screen. (See “MODULE (FX) Screen”.)

MUTE button

Tap this button to turn muting on/off for the selected module signal.

When MUTE is on, the button will be highlighted.

NOTE

The MUTE keys on the top of the unit can also be used to set this.

FADER LEVEL

Use this to adjust the FADER level of the selected module signal.

Range: −∞ dB – +10.0 dB (default: 0.0 dB)

Turn LCD knob 7 (lit blue) to adjust it.

NOTE

The channel faders on top of the unit can also be used for this adjustment.

Tap the area while pressing the HOME key on the top panel to set the FADER level to 0 dB.

SENDS button

Tap this button to open the MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen for the selected module. (See “MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen”.)

ON/OFF button for the Audio Follow Video function

Tap this button to turn on/off the Audio Follow Video function of the selected module. When this is on, the button will appear highlighted.

This shows the name of the AFV TRIGGER SOURCE selected on the AFV TRIGGER SOURCE SELECT Screen.

AFV button

Tap this button to open the MODULE (Audio Follow Video) Screen for the selected module. (See “MODULE (Audio Follow Video) Screen”.)

MIX/FX SEND level indicators

This list shows the on/off and PRE/POST states and the send levels to the MIX 1–22 and FX 1–4 buses. (See “ ALL SEND button ()”.)

Tap this area to open the MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen for the selected module with the bus selected for the tapped area.

BAL

This adjusts the balance of the signals sent to the MAIN L/R bus. Turn LCD knob 8 (lit yellow) to adjust it.

Range: L100 – C – R100 (default: C)

When the icon is highlighted (), signals are being sent to the MAIN L/R bus.

Tap this area to open the MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen for the selected module. (See “MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen”.)

NOTE

Tap this area while pressing the HOME key on the top panel to set the balance to center (C).

MIX 1–22 and MAIN L/R Master MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screens

MIX 1–22 modules

MIX 1–22 modules with Stereo Link on

MAIN L/R Master module

Metering Point button

This shows the name of the set metering point.

Tap this button to open a window for setting the metering point.

Metering point settings for the MIX 1–22 modules and the MAIN L/R Master module are set separately for the AUX mode bus MAIN L/R module and the GROUP mode bus.

Options: INPUT, POST EQ, POST GEQ, PRE FADER, POST FADER, OUTPUT

Aux mode bus and MAIN L/R module defaults	OUTPUT
GROUP mode bus default	POST FADER

Tap an option to switch the metering point for the level meter.

NOTE

Metering points can also be changed on the METERING POINT page of the METER SETUP Screen. (See “METERING POINT page”.)

When the Metering Point is OUTPUT, and the corresponding bus has not been assigned to an output port (not being output from the unit), meters will not be shown.

Level meters

This shows the level of the signal at the set metering point.

MUTE GROUP button

Tap this button to open the DCA/Mute Group SETUP Screen Mute Group Assign page. (See “Mute Group Assign page”.)

DCA button

Tap this button to open the DCA/Mute Group SETUP Screen DCA Assign page. (See “DCA Assign page”.)

SEND OVERVIEW button

Tap this button to open the SEND OVERVIEW Screen for the selected module. (See “MIX 1–22 bus SEND OVERVIEW Screen” and “MAIN L/R bus SEND OVERVIEW Screen”.)

MUTE GROUP 1–8 buttons

Tap these buttons to change Mute Group assignment states. (Default: off)

Assigned buttons will be highlighted.

DCA 1–8 buttons

Tap these buttons to change DCA assignment states. (Default: off)

Assigned buttons will be highlighted.

Snapshot Recall Safe button

Tap this button to enable the Snapshot Recall Safe function for the selected module. (Default: off)

When this is on, the button will appear highlighted.

NOTE

This can also be set on the MODULE SAFE page of the SNAPSHOT RECALL SAFE Screen. (See “MODULE SAFE page”.)

Metering Point position indicator

This shows the position of the set metering point.

SEND button

This shows the name of the output port that the INSERT SEND signal is assigned to.

The second line shows an abbreviation of the FIXED PORT LABEL.

The third line shows the USER PORT LABEL.

If the USER PORT LABEL is undefined, the FIXED PORT LABEL will be shown.

If it has been assigned to multiple output ports, “…” will appear to the bottom right of the button.

If the module is stereo, the FIXED PORT LABEL for the output ports will appear split left and right and abbreviated as follows.

Module name shown	Stereo module name shown
ANALOG	AN
Dante	DA
SLOT 1	S1
SLOT 2	S2
USB OUT	USB

Tap this button to open the INSERT SEND PORT SELECT Screen. (See “INSERT SEND PORT SELECT screen”.)

INSERT button

Tap this button to turn the INSERT on/off. (Default: OFF)

When this is ON, the button will appear highlighted.

RETURN button

This shows the name of the input port that is assigned for the INSERT RETURN signal.

The second line shows an abbreviation of the FIXED PORT LABEL.

The third line shows the USER PORT LABEL.

If the USER PORT LABEL is undefined, the FIXED PORT LABEL will be shown.

If the module is stereo, the FIXED PORT LABEL for the input ports will appear split left and right and abbreviated as follows.

Module name shown	Stereo module name shown
ANALOG	AN
Dante	DA
SLOT 1	S1
SLOT 2	S2
USB OUT	USB
ST IN 1	ST1
ST IN 2	ST2
PLAYER	PL
SB-16D	SB

Tap this button to open the INSERT RETURN PORT SELECT Screen. (See “INSERT RETURN PORT SELECT screen”.)

When the INSERT RETURN PORT of the selected module is “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante”, the Analog GAIN value will be shown to the right of the RETURN button.

Tapping the Analog GAIN value to the right of the RETURN button will show the Analog GAIN value that corresponds to the INSERT RETURN PORT to the right of the INSERT button. Use the LCD knob (lit red) below the shown Analog GAIN value to adjust the Analog GAIN.

Tap the Set to LINE LEVEL button to set the corresponding Pre Amp setting as follows.

PAD: ON

Analog GAIN: 0

Phantom: OFF

DELAY button

Tap this button to turn the delay function ON or OFF (default). This can be used to adjust the timing of the output signal, for example. (Default: OFF)

When this is on, the button will appear highlighted.

DELAY TIME

This adjusts the DELAY TIME.

The highlighted unit will be used for operation, so tap the button for the desired unit.

Unit options	Range (unit)
meter	0 – 117.3 (meter)
feet	0 – 384.8 (feet)
msec (default)	0 – 341.32 (msec)

Turn LCD knob 4 (lit green) to adjust it.

ON/OFF button for the Audio Follow Video function

Tap this button to turn on/off the Audio Follow Video function of the selected module. When this is on, the button will appear highlighted.

This shows the name of the AFV TRIGGER SOURCE selected on the AFV TRIGGER SOURCE SELECT Screen.

MUTE button

Tap this button to turn muting on/off for the selected module signal.

When MUTE is on, the button will be highlighted.

NOTE

The MUTE keys on the top of the unit can also be used to set this.

FADER LEVEL

Use this to adjust the FADER level of the selected module signal.

Range: −∞ dB – +10.0 dB (default: 0.0 dB)

Turn LCD knob 5 (lit blue) to adjust it.

NOTE

The channel faders on top of the unit can also be used for this adjustment.

Tap the area while pressing the HOME key on the top panel to set the FADER level to 0 dB.

AFV button

Tap this button to open the MODULE (Audio Follow Video) Screen for the selected module. (See “MODULE (Audio Follow Video) Screen”.)

Phase buttons

Use these to change the phases of the signals for the selected module.

Tap these buttons to reverse the phases of the selected module signals.

Phase button display when the Stereo Link setting is off for the selected module

	Normal
	Reversed

Phase button display when the selected module is stereo

	Normal
	Reversed

OUTPUT button

This shows the name of the output port that the output signal of the selected module is assigned to.

The second line shows an abbreviation of the FIXED PORT LABEL.

The third line shows the USER PORT LABEL.

If the USER PORT LABEL is undefined, the FIXED PORT LABEL will be shown.

If it has been assigned to multiple output ports, “…” will appear to the bottom right of the button.

If the module is stereo, the FIXED PORT LABEL for the output ports will appear split left and right and abbreviated as follows.

Module name shown	Stereo module name shown
ANALOG	AN
Dante	DA
SLOT 1	S1
SLOT 2	S2
USB OUT	USB

If Dante ports that have mounted SB-16Ds assigned are selected, they will be shown as follows.

2nd line: DA port number

3rd line: #[ID] port number

4th line: USER PORT LABEL or SB #[ID] port number (if the USER PORT LABEL is undefined)

If it is a virtually-mounted SB-16D, will appear.

Tap this button to open the OUTPUT PORT SELECT Screen. (See “OUTPUT PORT SELECT screen”.)

SENDS button

Tap this button to open the MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen for the selected module. (See “MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen”.)

MIX/FX SEND level indicators

This list shows the on/off status and the send levels to the MIX 1–22 and FX 1–4 buses. (See “ ALL SEND button ()”.)

Tap this area to open the MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen for the selected module with the bus selected for the tapped area.

PAN/BAL (MIX 1–22 modules only)

This adjusts the panning/balance of the signals sent to the MAIN L/R bus. Turn LCD knob 8 (lit yellow) to adjust it.

Range: L100 – C – R100 (default: C)

When the icon is highlighted (), signals are being sent to the MAIN L/R bus.

Tap this area to open the MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen for the selected module. (See “MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen”.)

NOTE

Tap this area while pressing the HOME key on the top panel to set panning/balance to center (C).

MODULE (INPUT) Screen

Set module input settings on the MODULE (INPUT) Screens for CH 1–40 and ST IN 1–2 modules.

Tap the INPUT area on the Home Screen when the selection frame is shown to open this screen.

CH 1–40 modules

CH 1–40 modules with Stereo Link on

ST IN 1–2 modules with input source set to ANALOG

INPUT level meter area

This shows the input signal level(s) of the selected module.

LOCK/UNLOCK button

This button locks/unlocks routing setting change operations for the unit. This is always locked at the time of start up.

When set to “LOCK”, tapping the OSC button () will not change settings. In addition, the BATCH SETUP button cannot be operated. However, tapping the INPUT SOURCE button and switching to the INPUT SOURCE SELECT Screen is possible.

When set to “LOCK”, tap this button to open a confirmation message. Tap the UNLOCK button to close the message and set it to “UNLOCK”. Tapping the CANCEL button on the confirmation message will close it and maintain the locked state.

Tap this button when set to “UNLOCK” to switch it to “LOCK”.

NOTE

The LOCK/UNLOCK button () setting is shared by the following routing setting screens.

MODULE (INPUT) Screen

MODULE (OUTPUT) Screen

INPUT SOURCE SELECT Screen

OUTPUT PORT SELECT Screen

DIRECT OUT PORT SELECT Screen

INSERT SEND PORT SELECT Screen

INSERT RETURN PORT SELECT Screen

TALKBACK INPUT SELECT Screen

TALKBACK EXT1 DIRECT OUT PORT SELECT Screen

TALKBACK EXT2 DIRECT OUT PORT SELECT Screen

Return TALKBACK EXT DIRECT OUT PORT SELECT Screen

MONITOR 1 DIRECT OUT PORT SELECT Screen

MONITOR 2 DIRECT OUT PORT SELECT Screen

MONITOR 2 OUTPUT PORT SELECT Screen

Solo DIRECT OUT PORT SELECT Screen

INPUT SOURCE buttons

These buttons show the names of the currently selected input sources.

The first line shows an abbreviation of the FIXED PORT LABEL.

The second line shows the USER PORT LABEL.

If the USER PORT LABEL is undefined, the FIXED PORT LABEL will be shown.

Tap this button to open the INPUT SOURCE SELECT Screen. (See “INPUT SOURCE SELECT screen”.)

Buttons for Dante ports that have mounted SB-16Ds assigned will be shown as follows.

1st line: DA port number

2nd line: SB #[ID] port number

3rd line: USER PORT LABEL or SB #[ID] port number (if the USER PORT LABEL is undefined)

Assigned buttons for Dante ports that have virtually mounted SB-16Ds will be highlighted yellow.

LABEL setting area

LABEL setting area icon

Tap this icon to open the DISPLAY MODE page of the LABEL SETUP Screen. (See “MODULE LABEL page”.)

MODULE LABEL display mode setting button

This button switches the Main MODULE LABEL display mode. The current display mode appears highlighted.

Tap this button to cycle through the Main MODULE LABEL display modes in order: USER, FIXED, PORT LABEL.

See “DISPLAY MODE page” for details about Main MODULE LABEL display mode settings.

PORT LABEL display mode setting button

This button switches the PORT LABEL (input/output port name) display mode. The current display mode appears highlighted.

Tap this button to alternate the PORT LABEL display mode between “USER” and “FIXED”.

See “DISPLAY MODE page” for details about PORT LABEL display mode settings.

OSC setting area

OSC setting area icon

Tap this icon to open the SOLO/OSCILLATOR page of the TALKBACK / MONITOR / SOLO / OSC SETUP Screen. (See “Making solo and built-in oscillator settings”.)

OSC button

When the LOCK/UNLOCK button () is set to “UNLOCK”, tap this button to turn internal oscillator input on or off (default).

When on, the signal from the internal oscillator will be input to the selected module while maintaining the input source setting for that module. (Default: OFF)

When on, these buttons will appear highlighted and the INPUT SOURCE buttons () will appear gray.

POST D. TRIM level meter(s)

This shows the signal level(s) after the D. TRIM.

Analog GAIN knob and indicator

When the input source of the selected module is “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante”, this will show an analog gain knob that can be used to adjust the input level of the MIC/LINE input jacks on this unit or the SB-16D.

Turn LCD knob 1 (lit red) to adjust it.

When Analog Reference Level is +6 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −9 dBFS

PAD button setting	Range
OFF	+3 (default) – +57
ON	−17 – +37

When Analog Reference Level is +4 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −20 dBFS

PAD button setting	Range
OFF	+12 (default) – +66
ON	−8 – +46

When Analog Reference Level is +4 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −18 dBFS

PAD button setting	Range
OFF	+10 (default) – +64
ON	−10 – +44

When Analog Reference Level is +4 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −16 dBFS

PAD button setting	Range
OFF	+8 (default) – +62
ON	−12 – +42

When Analog Reference Level is +4 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −14 dBFS

PAD button setting	Range
OFF	+6 (default) – +60
ON	−14 – +40

When Analog Reference Level is 0 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −20 dBFS

PAD button setting	Range
OFF	+8 (default) – +62
ON	−12 – +42

When Analog Reference Level is 0 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −18 dBFS

PAD button setting	Range
OFF	+6 (default) – +60
ON	−14 – +40

The indicators to the left of the Analog GAIN knobs appear to light as shown below depending on the input level.

Red: −3 dBFS, Green: −40 dBFS

When the input source of the selected module is an “ANALOG” stereo module, 2 Analog GAIN knobs will be shown.

Use LCD knobs 1–2 (lit red) to adjust them.

A black knob that cannot be operated will be shown if the input source is an SB-16D for which control privileges are not held.

NOTE

Explanation of Analog GAIN values

PAD button

This shows the PAD button when the input source of the selected module is “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante”.

Tap this button to turn the −20 dB pad on/off. (Default: off)

When this button is on, it will appear highlighted.

A black button that cannot be operated will be shown if the input source is an SB-16D for which control privileges are not held.

NOTE

When the pad is switched on/off, the Analog GAIN value will be controlled as shown below so that it changes as little as possible.

When Analog Reference Level is +6 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −9 dBFS

Status before switching pad setting	Analog GAIN after switching pad setting
Analog GAIN: +3 – +37	Same value
PAD ON/Analog GAIN: −17 – +2	+3
PAD OFF/Analog GAIN: +38 – +57	+37

When Analog Reference Level is +4 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −20 dBFS

Status before switching pad setting	Analog GAIN after switching pad setting
Analog GAIN: +12 – +46	Same value
PAD ON/Analog GAIN: −8 – +11	+12
PAD OFF/Analog GAIN: +47 – +66	+46

When Analog Reference Level is +4 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −18 dBFS

Status before switching pad setting	Analog GAIN after switching pad setting
Analog GAIN: +10 – +44	Same value
PAD ON/Analog GAIN: −10 – +9	+10
PAD OFF/Analog GAIN: +45 – +64	+44

When Analog Reference Level is +4 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −16 dBFS

Status before switching pad setting	Analog GAIN after switching pad setting
Analog GAIN: +8 – +42	Same value
PAD ON/Analog GAIN: −12 – +7	+8
PAD OFF/Analog GAIN: +43 – +62	+42

When Analog Reference Level is +4 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −14 dBFS

Status before switching pad setting	Analog GAIN after switching pad setting
Analog GAIN: +6 – +40	Same value
PAD ON/Analog GAIN: −14 – +5	+6
PAD OFF/Analog GAIN: +41 – +60	+40

When Analog Reference Level is 0 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −20 dBFS

Status before switching pad setting	Analog GAIN after switching pad setting
Analog GAIN: +8 – +42	Same value
PAD ON/Analog GAIN: −12 – +7	+8
PAD OFF/Analog GAIN: +43 – +62	+42

When Analog Reference Level is 0 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −18 dBFS

Status before switching pad setting	Analog GAIN after switching pad setting
Analog GAIN: +6 – +40	Same value
PAD ON/Analog GAIN: −14 – +5	+6
PAD OFF/Analog GAIN: +41 – +60	+40

GANG button

The GANG button will be shown when the selected module is stereo.

Tap this button to turn the GANG function on/off. Turning the GANG function on, highlighting the button, will enable the simultaneous linked operation of the 2 Analog GAIN knobs and 2 D.TRIM knobs. (Default: OFF)

D.TRIM knob

Use this to adjust the digital trim value.

Range: −50.0 dB – +20.0 dB (default: 0.0 dB)

Turn LCD knob 7 (lit red) to adjust it.

Tap this area to open a BATCH SETUP window where the digital trim value of a range of channels can be set at the same time. (See “Setting digital trim values in batches”.)

+48V button

This shows the phantom power setting status when the input source of the selected module is “ANALOG” or “SB-16D connected by built-in Dante”.

Press and hold the +48V button to turn phantom power (+48V) on/off. (Default: OFF)

When phantom power is on, the button will be highlighted.

A black button that cannot be operated will be shown if the input source is an SB-16D for which control privileges are not held.

BATCH SETUP button

When the LOCK/UNLOCK button () is set to “UNLOCK”, tap this button to open a BATCH SETUP window where the input sources of a range of channels can be set at the same time. (See “Setting inputs sources for multiple channels at the same time in batches”.)

Change settings for multiple designated channels at the same time.

NOTE

This cannot be used when the LOCK/UNLOCK button () is set to “LOCK”.

If routing operation is set to “LOCK” on another touchscreen while a multiple setting window is open, it will close automatically.

Phase button

Use this to change the phase of the signal for the selected module.

Tap this button to reverse the phase of the selected module signal.

Phase button display when the Stereo Link setting is off for the selected CH 1–40 module

	Normal
	Reversed

Phase button display for stereo modules

	Normal
	Reversed

Stereo Link button (CH 1–40 modules only)

This shows the stereo link setting of the input channel.

	Stereo linking is off
	Stereo linking is on

Tap this button to open the Stereo Link setting window.

Linking with either module to the left or right is possible except for channels 1 and 40.

LOCATION button

This shows the LOCATION setting of the selected module, which is set on the LOCATION CONFIG page of the MIXER CONFIG Screen.

Tap this button to open the LOCATION CONFIG page of the MIXER CONFIG Screen. (See “LOCATION CONFIG page”.)

HPF/EQ frequency response graphs (CH 1–40 modules only)

This shows graphs of the HPF and EQ frequency responses.

When HPF and EQ are on, this will appear highlighted.

When HPF and EQ are off, this will appear gray.

When only HPF or EQ is on, the frequency response of that function will be highlighted.

HPF button (CH 1–40 modules only)

Tap this button to turn the HPF on/off. (Default: OFF)

When this is ON, the button will appear highlighted.

HPF frequency (CH 1–40 modules only)

This adjusts the cutoff frequency of the HPF.

Range: 20 Hz – 1.0 kHz (default: 79 Hz)

Turn LCD knob 8 (lit light blue) to adjust it.

When this is on, it will appear highlighted.

Setting digital trim values in batches

1.Tap the D.TRIM knob indicator to open a BATCH SETUP window where digital trim values can be set in batches.

2.Swipe the options up and down to select the modules to include in batch setting of digital trim values.

Selections can also be changed by turning the LCD Knobs 4–6 with the same colors.

3.Use the LCD knob 3, which is lit red, to adjust the trim level.

4.Tap the APPLY button to open a setting confirmation window.

5.Tap the OK button to set multiple digital trim values at the same time.

The BATCH SETUP window will close.

MODULE (FX) Screen

Make effect settings on the MODULE (FX) Screen of the FX RTN 1–4 modules.

Tap the FX area on the Home Screen when the selection frame is shown to open this screen.

FX RTN 1–4 module with PLATE REVERB

FX RTN 1–4 module with DELAY LCR

FX TYPE button

Tap this button to open the effect type selection window for the selected module.

Tap a button to select an effect type.

Selecting will close the selection window.

LIBRARY button

Tap this button to open the effect LIBRARY Screen. (See “Various LIBRARY Screens”.)

Effect type information

This shows the following information about the selected effect type.

FX TYPE name

FX LIBRARY name (if FX LIBRARY RECALL/STORE used)

Block diagram of the effect input/output algorithm

Main parameter settings

This shows the main parameter settings of the selected effect.

INPUT level meters

This shows signal levels input to the effect.

OUTPUT level meters

This shows the signal levels output from the effect.

INPUT LEVEL knob

This adjusts the levels input to the effect.

Range: −∞ dB – +10 dB (default: 0.0 dB)

When the selection frame is shown, use the corresponding LCD knob 1 to adjust the value.

Effect parameters

These show effect parameters and can be used to adjust them.

When a selection frame is shown, use the corresponding LCD knobs and buttons to change settings.

Tap tempo input buttons and tempo indicators (for DELAY FX TYPE only)

Tap these buttons to set the tap intervals as the DELAY TIME values.

The centers of the tap tempo buttons function as tempo indicators, and blink at the DELAY TIME intervals. If a DELAY TIME is “200 msec” or less, the indicator will stay highlighted.

NOTE

Using the User Defined Control function, tap tempo input can also be operated with USER KEYS, FOOTSWITCH and GPIO-IN controls. (See “USER DEFINED CONTROLS screen”.)

Tap tempo input is assigned as follows on the Foot Switch page by default.

Foot Switch (Tap Tempo | FX3 | Delay1)

MIX LEVEL knob

Use this to adjust the MIX levels of the dry and wet sounds.

Range: 0% (dry sound only) – 100% (default, wet sound only)

When the selection frame is shown, use the corresponding LCD knob 7 to adjust the value.

OUTPUT LEVEL knob

Use this to adjust the output level from the effect.

Range: −∞ dB – +10 dB (default: 0.0 dB)

When the selection frame is shown, use the corresponding LCD knob 8 to adjust the value.

Effect parameters

REVERB

Parameter name	Range	default
TYPE	HALL, ROOM, STUDIO, LIVE	HALL
PRE DELAY	0 msec – 200 msec	90 msec
REVERB TIME	0.1 sec – 10 sec	2.7 sec
SPREAD	0% – 100%	50%

STEREO REVERB

Parameter name	Range	default
TYPE	HALL, ROOM	HALL
PRE DELAY	0 msec – 200 msec	90 msec
REVERB TIME	0.1 sec – 20.0 sec	2.7 sec
SPREAD	0% – 100%	50%
LO GAIN	−12 dB – +12 dB	0 dB
LO FREQ	125 Hz – 2.00 kHz	445 Hz
HIGH GAIN	−12 dB – +12 dB	0 dB
HIGH FREQ	1.00 kHz – 16.00 kHz	3.36 kHz

PLATE REVERB

Parameter name	Range	default
TYPE	WARM, HARD, BRIGHT, DARK	WARM
PRE DELAY	0 msec – 200 msec	40 msec
REVERB TIME	0.1 sec – 10 sec	2.0 sec
HI DAMP	500 Hz – 16.0 kHz	3.36 kHz

GATE REVERB

Parameter name	Range	default
TYPE	Fast, Slow	Fast
GATE LEVEL	−48 dB – 0 dB	−16 dB
GATE TIME	10 msec – 3000 msec	100 msec

MONO DELAY

Parameter name	Range	default
DELAY TIME	1 msec – 3000 msec	50 msec
FEEDBACK	0 - 100	0
HI DAMP	500 Hz – 16.0 kHz	3.36 kHz

STEREO DELAY

Parameter name	Range	default
DELAY TIME	1 msec – 1500 msec	100 msec
FEEDBACK	0 – 100	20
HI DAMP	500 Hz – 16.0 kHz	3.36 kHz

PING-PONG DELAY

Parameter name	Range	default
DELAY TIME	1 msec – 1500 msec	500 msec
FEEDBACK	0 – 100	20
HI DAMP	500 Hz – 16.0 kHz	3.36 kHz

DELAY LCR

Parameter name	Range	default
HI DAMP	500 Hz – 16.0 kHz	3.36 kHz
DELAY TIME L	1 msec – 3000 msec	245 msec
DELAY TIME C	1 msec – 3000 msec	250 msec
DELAY TIME R	1 msec – 3000 msec	255 msec
FEEDBACK	0 – 100	0
WET LEVEL L	0 – 100	50
WET LEVEL C	0 – 100	0
WET LEVEL R	0 – 100	50

CHORUS

Parameter name	Range	default
RATE	0.05 Hz – 10.00 Hz	0.25 Hz
DEPTH	0% – 100%	0%
DELAY TIME	0 msec – 100 msec	40 msec
HI PASS	22 Hz – 2.00 kHz	125 Hz
HI DAMP	500 Hz – 16.0 kHz	3.36 kHz
SPREAD	0% – 100%	100%

FLANGER

Parameter name	Range	default
RATE	0.05 Hz – 10.00 Hz	0.20 Hz
DEPTH	0% – 100%	10%
DELAY TIME	0 msec – 100 msec	40 msec
PHASE	0 deg – 180 deg	180 deg

PHASER

Parameter name	Range	default
RATE	0.05 Hz – 10.0 Hz	0.40 Hz
STAGE	4 – 16	8
RESONANCE	0 – 10	2
PHASE	0 deg – 180 deg	180 deg

PITCH SHIFTER

Parameter name	Range	default
PITCH 1	−24 – +24	0
FINE 1	−50 Cent – +50 Cent	−10 Cent
PITCH 2	−24 – +24	0
FINE 2	−50 Cent – +50 Cent	+10 Cent

MODULE (GATE/EXPANDER/DE-ESSER) screens

GATE, EXPANDER and DE-ESSER settings can be made on the MODULE (GATE), MODULE (EXPANDER) and MODULE (DE-ESSER) screens for the CH 1–40 modules.

Tap the GATE/EXPANDER/DE-ESSER areas for each module on the Home Screen to open these screens.

INPUT level meter

This shows the signal level input to the GATE/EXPANDER/DE-ESSER.

Dynamics input/output characteristics graph

This shows a graph of the GATE/EXPANDER input/output response or of the DE-ESSER EQ frequency response.

Gain reduction meter

This meter shows the amount of gain reduction from the GATE/EXPANDER/DE-ESSER.

OUTPUT level meter

This shows the signal level output from the GATE/EXPANDER/DE-ESSER.

GATE/EXPANDER/DE-ESSER ON/OFF button

Tap this button to turn the dynamics effect on/off. (Default: OFF)

When on, this button, the dynamics input/output response graph and parameters will appear highlighted.

When off, a large “OFF” will appear in the top left of the dynamics input/output response graph area ().

LIBRARY button

Tap this button to open the GATE/EXPANDER/DE-ESSER LIBRARY Screen. (See “Various LIBRARY Screens”.)

Dynamics Parameters

These show GATE/EXPANDER/DE-ESSER parameters and can be used to adjust them.

Use the LCD knobs that correspond to the parameters to adjust their values.

DYNAMIC TYPE button

This shows the name of the currently selected dynamics type.

Tap this button to open the type selection menu.

Options: GATE (default), EXPANDER, DE-ESSER

Dynamics parameters

NOTE

Turn the LCD knobs to adjust them. They can also be adjusted by dragging the green and blue and icons on the graph.

GATE

Parameter name	Range	default
THRESHOLD	−80 dB – 0 dB	−25 dB
RANGE	−60 dB – 0 dB	−50 dB
ATTACK	0 ms – 125 ms	0 ms
HOLD	0 ms – 990 ms	20 ms
DECAY	5 ms – 5.00 s	300 ms

EXPANDER

Parameter name	Range	default
THRESHOLD	−60 dB – 0 dB	−40 dB
RATIO	1:1, 2:1, 4:1, 8:1, 16:1, 32:1, 64:1	4:1
KNEE	HARD, MID, SOFT	MID
ATTACK	0 ms – 125 ms	10 ms
RELEASE	5 ms – 5.00 s	250 ms

DE-ESSER

Parameter name	Range	default
THRESHOLD	−40 dB – 0 dB	−15 dB
KNEE	HARD, MID, SOFT	MID
CENTER FREQ	1.0 kHz – 10 kHz	4.0 kHz
Q	1.04 – 17.31	17.31

NOTE

The peak position of this DE-ESSER EQ graph shows the maximum gain reduction amount. Moreover, this DE-ESSER operates at a 2:1 ratio.

For this reason, the peak position range of the EQ graph is −20 dB – 0 dB , which is half the Threshold range of −40 dB – 0 dB.

MODULE (EQ) Screen

HPF (CH 1–40 only) and EQ settings can be made on the MODULE (EQ) Screen for every module.

Tap the module EQ area on the Home Screen to open this screen.

The colors of the parameters and points on the EQ graph are as follows.

LO band: red, LM band: yellow, HM band: green, HI band: light blue

CH 1–40 modules

ST IN 1–2 modules

FX RTN 1–4 module

MIX 1–22 modules

MAIN L/R Master module

LIBRARY button

Tap this button to open the EQ LIBRARY Screen. (See “Various LIBRARY Screens”.)

EQ ON/OFF button

Tap this button to turn the EQ on/off. (Default: OFF)

When on, this button, the EQ part of the HPF/EQ frequency response graph and the EQ parameters will appear highlighted.

NOTE

HPF is only shown for CH 1–40 modules.

HPF/EQ frequency response graph

This shows graphs of the HPF and EQ frequency responses. This shows the overall frequency response. RTA bar meters are also shown.

When HPF and EQ are on, this will appear highlighted.

When HPF and EQ are off, this will appear gray.

When only HPF or EQ is on, the frequency response of that function will be highlighted.

By tapping , , , or in the frequency response graph and then dragging it, the GAIN or FREQ of that band can be adjusted. In addition, by dragging left/right the ends of the bars extending from the for the selected band, the Q for that band can be adjusted.

When EQ is off, a large “OFF” will appear in the bottom right of the graph area.

NOTE

HPF is only shown for CH 1–40 modules.

FLAT button

Tap this button to open a confirmation message for resetting the gain settings for all bands to 0 dB.

Tap the FLAT button to set the EQ gain settings to 0 dB. In addition, if the HI band TYPE was set to LPF, this will be changed to PEAK.

PRE EQ level meter(s)

This shows the signal levels input to the EQ.

EQ band ON/OFF buttons

Tap these buttons to turn the EQ bands on/off. (Default: ON)

When on, the setting for the corresponding band will be applied to the overall frequency response in the graph area.

When off, the corresponding parameter will appear gray. Moreover, the setting for the corresponding band will not be applied to the overall frequency response in the graph area. Instead, the frequency response of that band will be shown separately as a gray line.

HPF button (CH 1–40 modules only)

Tap this button to turn the HPF on/off. (Default: OFF)

When this is on, this button and the HPF part of the HPF/EQ frequency response graph will appear highlighted.

HPF frequency (CH 1–40 modules only)

This adjusts the cutoff frequency of the HPF.

Range: 20 Hz – 1.0 kHz (default: 79 Hz)

When the selection frame is shown, turn LCD knob 2 (lit blue) to adjust it.

POST EQ level meter(s)

This shows the level of the signal output from the EQ.

EQ parameters (LO band)

This shows the EQ LO band parameters and can be used to adjust them.

When the selection frame is shown, use the corresponding LCD knobs to adjust the values.

Parameter name	Range	default
G	−18.0 dB – +18.0 dB	0 dB
F	20 Hz – 20.0 kHz	149 Hz
Q	0.10 – 17.31	1.04

NOTE

Tap the EQ gain area while pressing the HOME key on the top panel to set the EQ gain to 0 dB.

TYPE button (LO band)

This shows the LO band EQ type.

Tap this button to open the type selection menu.

Options: Bell (default), L.Shelf

EQ parameters (LM band)

This shows the EQ LM band parameters and can be used to adjust them.

When the selection frame is shown, use the corresponding LCD knobs to adjust the values.

Parameter name	Range	default
G	−18.0 dB – +18.0 dB	0 dB
F	20 Hz – 20.0 kHz	297 Hz
Q	0.10 – 17.31	1.04

NOTE

Tap the EQ gain area while pressing the HOME key on the top panel to set the EQ gain to 0 dB.

RTA button

Tap this button to turn the real-time analyzer (RTA) function on/off for each touchscreen separately. (Default: ON)

When this is on, the button becomes highlighted, and audio signal frequency response meters for the PRE FADER position of input modules or POST FADER position of output modules are shown behind the EQ response graph.

NOTE

RTA meters can be shown on up to three screens at the same time. For this reason, when using a Sonicview 24XP that has three touchscreens and the TASCAM Sonicview Control application, RTA ON/OFF states will be switched automatically according to the following rules.

When all three Sonicview 24XP touchscreens are showing EQ or GEQ with RTA ON, if RTA is switched from OFF to ON for the EQ or GEQ screen in the TASCAM Sonicview Control application, RTA will turn OFF automatically on the Sonicview 24XP EQ or GEQ screen for which RTA was switched ON first.

In the above state, if a Sonicview 24XP EQ or GEQ screen RTA is switched from OFF to ON, the TASCAM Sonicview Control application EQ or GEQ screen RTA will be switched OFF automatically.

When using a Sonicview 16XP that has two touchscreens with the TASCAM Sonicview Control application, the maximum number of EQ and GEQ screens at one time is three, so this type of automatic switching will not occur.

EQ parameters (HM band)

This shows the EQ HM band parameters and can be used to adjust them.

When the selection frame is shown, use the corresponding LCD knobs to adjust the values.

Parameter name	Range	default
G	−18.0 dB – +18.0 dB	0 dB
F	20 Hz – 20.0 kHz	4.0 kHz
Q	0.10 – 17.31	1.04

NOTE

Tap the EQ gain area while pressing the HOME key on the top panel to set the EQ gain to 0 dB.

EQ parameters (HI band)

This shows the EQ HI band parameters and can be used to adjust them.

When the selection frame is shown, use the corresponding LCD knobs to adjust the values.

Parameter name	Range	default
G	−18.0 dB – +18.0 dB	0 dB
F	20 Hz – 20.0 kHz	8.0 kHz
Q	0.10 – 17.31	1.04

NOTE

Tap the EQ gain area while pressing the HOME key on the top panel to set the EQ gain to 0 dB.

TYPE button (HI band)

This shows the HI band EQ type.

Tap this button to open the type selection menu.

Options: Bell (default), H.Shelf, LPF

EQ/GEQ frequency response graph

This shows graphs of the EQ and GEQ frequency responses. This shows the overall frequency response. RTA bar meters are also shown.

When EQ and GEQ are on, a graph of their sound responses will be shown highlighted.

When EQ and GEQ are off, the response graph for EQ without GEQ will be shown and appear gray.

When EQ is on and GEQ is off, the response graph for EQ only will be shown highlighted.

When EQ is off and GEQ is on, the response graph for EQ only will be gray and the response graph for GEQ only will be shown highlighted.

MODULE (GEQ) Screen

GEQ settings can be made on the MODULE (GEQ) Screens for MIX 1–22 and MAIN L/R Master modules.

Tap the module GEQ area on the Home Screen to open this screen.

MIX 1–22 MODULE (GEQ) Screen with GEQ off

MAIN L/R Master MODULE (GEQ) Screen with GEQ on

IN level meters

This shows signal level input to the GEQ.

GEQ ON/OFF button

Tap this button to turn the GEQ on/off.

When this is on, this button, the GEQ overall settings graph () and the GEQ setting display area () will appear highlighted.

LIBRARY button

Tap this button to open the GEQ LIBRARY Screen. (See “Various LIBRARY Screens”.)

GEQ FADER Ctrl ON/OFF button

Tap this button to turn on/off the GEQ FADER Ctrl fader function, which enables use of the channel faders for GEQ GAIN settings.

When the GEQ FADER Ctrl function is switched on, the button will appear highlighted and faders will move the GEQ GAIN values to corresponding positions. In addition, full-screen mode will be turned on automatically and the MODULE (GEQ) screen will fill the display.

When the GEQ FADER Ctrl function is on, faders can be operated to adjust the GEQ GAIN values of corresponding frequencies.

If a page other than GEQ is selected when the GEQ FADER Ctrl function is on, full-screen mode and the FADER Ctrl function will be switched off automatically.

When the GEQ FADER Ctrl function is switched off, the button will appear gray and faders will return to their ordinary positions. In addition, full-screen mode will automatically turn off.

When the GEQ FADER Ctrl function is on, the Channel Screen display will switch to GEQ FADER CTRL mode.

NOTE

When the GEQ FADER Ctrl function is on, full-screen mode is kept on and cannot be turned off.

GEQ FADER Ctrl operation range selection buttons

When the GEQ FADER Ctrl function is on, these buttons will appear highlighted.

Tap these buttons to switch the GEQ operation range.

Tap the BLACK LEFT-POINTING TRIANGLE button to switch to a lower operation range.

Tap the BLACK RIGHT-POINTING TRIANGLE button to switch to a higher operation range.

GEQ overall setting graph

(a) This shows the gain settings of all 31 GEQ bands.

(b) This shows RTA bar meters.

(d) This shows the overall frequency response of the EQ and GEQ.

When EQ and GEQ are on, a graph of their sound responses will be shown highlighted.

When EQ and GEQ are off, the response graph will not be shown.

When EQ is on and GEQ is off, the response graph for EQ only will be shown highlighted.

When EQ is off and GEQ is on, the response graph for GEQ only will be shown highlighted.

RTA button

Tap this button to turn the real-time analyzer (RTA) function on/off for each touchscreen separately. (Default: ON)

When this is on, the button becomes highlighted, and audio signal frequency response meters for the POST FADER position are shown behind the GEQ overall setting graph () and the GEQ setting for the range of bands that can be operated by LCD knobs ().

NOTE

In the above state, if a Sonicview 24XP EQ or GEQ screen RTA is switched from OFF to ON, the TASCAM Sonicview Control application EQ or GEQ screen RTA will be switched OFF automatically.

FLAT ALL button

Tap this button to open a confirmation message for resetting the gain settings for all GEQ frequencies to 0 dB.

Tap the FLAT button to set all band gain settings to 0 dB.

OUT level meters

This shows the level of the signal output from the GEQ.

Range of GEQ band settings that can be controlled by LCD knobs

The range of gain settings in bands selected for operation by LCD knobs is shown. The range of bands that can be operated by LCD knobs can be selected by touching the GEQ overall setting graph (). Adjust gain values by dragging the yellow sliders in the display area up and down or using the LCD knobs.

This shows RTA bar meters.

This shows the overall frequency response of the EQ and GEQ.

When EQ and GEQ are on, a graph of their sound responses will be shown highlighted.

When EQ and GEQ are off, the response graph will not be shown.

When EQ is on and GEQ is off, the response graph for EQ only will be shown highlighted.

When EQ is off and GEQ is on, the response graph for GEQ only will be shown highlighted.

When GEQ is off, a large “OFF” will appear in the bottom right of the area.

FLAT buttons

Tap these buttons to set gain settings for corresponding bands to 0 dB.

MODULE (COMP/DUCKER) Screen

COMP and DUCKER settings can be made on the MODULE (COMP) and MODULE (DUCKER) Screens for CH 1–40, MIX 1–22 modules and MAIN L/R Master modules.

Tap the COMP/DUCKER area on the Home Screen to open this screen.

CH 1–40 modules

MIX 1–22 modules

MAIN L/R Master module

KEY IN level meter(s)

This shows the KEY IN SOURCE level input to the COMP/DUCKER.

NOTE

If the module is stereo and the KEY IN SOURCE module is stereo, a stereo level meter will be shown.

If the module is mono and the KEY IN SOURCE module is stereo, a mono level meter will be shown, and the L+R mono level will be used as the trigger.

INPUT level meter(s)

This shows the signal level(s) of the selected module input to the COMP/DUCKER.

Dynamics input/output characteristics graph

This shows graphs of the COMP/DUCKER input/output response.

Gain reduction meter

This meter shows the amount of gain reduction from the COMP/DUCKER.

OUTPUT level meter(s)

This shows the level(s) of the signal(s) output from the COMP/DUCKER.

COMP/DUCKER ON/OFF button

Tap this button to turn the dynamics effect on/off. (Default: OFF)

When on, this button, the dynamics input/output response graph and parameters will appear highlighted.

When off, a large “OFF” will appear in the top left of the dynamics input/output response graph area ().

LIBRARY button

Tap this button to open the COMP/DUCKER LIBRARY Screen. (See “Various LIBRARY Screens”.)

KEY IN SOURCE button

This shows the name of the selected KEY IN source. (Default: SELF)

Tap this button to open the KEY IN SOURCE SELECT Screen. (See “KEY IN SOURCE SELECT screen”.)

KEY IN FILTER button

Tap this button to turn KEY IN FILTER on/off. (Default: OFF)

KEY IN FILTER TYPE button

This shows the KEY IN FILTER type.

Tap this button to open the type selection menu.

Options: HPF, BPF (default), LPF

This adjusts the Q value when the KEY IN FILTER type is bandpass.

Range: 0.1 – 17.31 (default: 1.04)

When the selection frame is shown, turn LCD knob 8 (lit light blue) to adjust it.

FREQ

This adjusts the KEY IN FILTER frequency.

Range: 20 Hz – 20 kHz (default: 20 Hz)

When the selection frame is shown, turn LCD knob 7 (lit light blue) to adjust it.

Dynamics parameters

These show COMP/DUCKER parameters and can be used to adjust them.

When a selection frame is shown, use the corresponding LCD knobs and buttons to change settings.

DYNAMICS TYPE button

This shows the name of the currently selected dynamics type. (Default: COMP)

Tap this area to open the type selection menu.

Options: COMP (default), DUCKER

Dynamics parameters

NOTE

Use the corresponding LCD knobs and buttons to change the settings. They can also be adjusted by dragging the green and blue and icons on the graph.

COMP

Parameter name	Range	default
THRESHOLD	−49 dB – 0 dB	−10 dB
RATIO	1.00:1 – ∞:1	2.50:1
KNEE	HARD, HARD MID, MID, SOFT MID, SOFT, SMOOTH	CH 1–40: MID MIX 1–22, MAIN L/R: SMOOTH
ATTACK	0.1 ms – 125 ms	30 ms
RELEASE	5 ms – 5.00 s	230 ms
OUTPUT GAIN	0 dB – +20 dB	0 dB
AUTO MAKEUP	OFF, ON	OFF

DUCKER

Parameter name	Range	default
THRESHOLD	−60 dB, −54 dB, −48 dB, −42 dB, −36 dB, −30 dB, −24 dB, −18 dB, −12 dB, −6 dB	−18 dB
ATTENUATE	−∞, −24 dB, −18 dB, −12 dB, −9 dB, −6 dB, −3 dB	−18 dB
HOLD	0.1 sec – 5.0 sec	1.0 sec
RELEASE	0.1 sec – 5.0 sec	3.0 sec

KEY IN SOURCE SELECT screen

Tap the KEY IN SOURCE button on the MODULE (COMP) or MODULE (DUCKER) Screen to open this screen.

The COMP/DUCKER KEY IN source can be selected with the following buttons.

SELF (default)

CH 1–40

MIX 1–22

MAIN L/R

The selected button will be highlighted.

NOTE

When the DYNAMICS TYPE is Comp, the KEY IN SOURCE is the Pre Comp signal.

When the DYNAMICS TYPE is DUCKER, the KEY IN SOURCE is the POST Fader/MUTE signal.

MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen

The following settings can be made on the MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen.

SEND level, SEND PAN, ON/OFF, PRE/POST to MIX 1–22 buses

SEND level, ON/OFF, PRE/POST to FX 1–4 buses

PAN/BAL

MAIN L/R bus assignments

The following settings can also be made for CH 1–40 modules when Stereo Link is on, and for ST IN 1–2 and FX RTN 1–4 modules.

MODE

IMAGE

Tap the following areas for each module on the Home Screen to open this screen.

SEND/PAN button

SEND area with selection frame shown

PAN/BAL area with selection frame shown

CH 1–40 modules

CH 1–40 modules with Stereo Link on

ST IN 1–2 modules

FX RTN 1–4 module

MIX 1–22 modules

MIX 1–22 modules with Stereo Link on

MAIN L/R Master module

SEND levels, SEND PAN and ON/OFF buttons for MIX 1–22 buses

This shows the SEND settings for MIX 1–22 buses.

Tap anywhere other than on a button to show the selection frame. When a selection frame is shown, use corresponding LCD knobs to adjust the shown SEND level and SEND PAN.

This shows the MIX 1–22 module label according to the display mode set for Main MODULE LABEL. In the following cases, however, the FIXED MODULE LABEL (“MIX 1”, for example) will be shown. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

When the Main MODULE LABEL display mode is “FIXED”

When the Main MODULE LABEL display mode is “USER” but the USER MODULE LABEL is undefined for the corresponding MIX module

This shows the send position settings for the MIX 1–22 buses.

No indicator	Set to POST FADER
PRE	Set to PRE FADER

Use this to adjust the send levels to the MIX 1–22 buses. When a selection frame is shown, use corresponding LCD knobs (lit orange) to adjust values.

Assignment on	Shown in orange
Assignment off	Shown in gray

Range: −∞ dB – +10 dB (default: −∞ dB)

Tap this button to turn on/off signals sent to the MIX 1–22 buses.

Module	default
CH 1–40/ST IN 1–2/FX RTN 1–4	ON
MIX 1–22/MAIN L/R Master	OFF

This adjusts the SEND PAN of the signal sent to the MIX 1–22 buses. When a selection frame is shown, use corresponding LCD knobs (lit yellow) to adjust values.

Range: L100 – C – R100 (default: C)

Rounded buttons are shown for MIX 1–22 modules set to GROUP buses. Tap this button to turn it on and off.

NOTE

A list of SEND settings for each bus can be viewed and operated (“MIX 1–22 bus SEND OVERVIEW Screen”).

Tap the SEND level area while pressing the HOME key on the top panel to set the SEND level for that bus to 0 dB.

Tap the SEND PAN area while pressing the HOME key on the top panel to set the SEND PAN for the tapped bus to center (C).

When Stereo Link is on for a MIX 1–22 bus, the PAN status will be shown in the bus area of the lower number, and the level and button will be shown in the bus area of the higher number.

SEND PAN parameters for buses with the PAN LINK setting on appear dim. Tapping them will not select them and they cannot be operated. They are linked to the PAN/BAL setting.

When a MIX 1–22 module is selected, the SEND level and button to the same bus as the selected module are not shown.

If a MIX 1–22 bus is already assigned to the MAIN L/R bus, trying to turn this MIX button on for the MAIN L/R Master module will produce an error message. To prevent a feedback loop, it cannot be turned on.

SEND levels and ON/OFF buttons for FX 1–4 buses

This shows the SEND settings for FX 1–4 buses.

Tap anywhere other than on a button to show the selection frame. When a selection frame is shown, use corresponding LCD knobs to adjust the shown SEND level.

This shows the FX RTN1–4 module label according to the display mode set for Main MODULE LABEL. In the following cases, however, the FIXED MODULE LABEL (“FX 1”, for example) will be shown. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

When the Main MODULE LABEL display mode is “FIXED”

When the Main MODULE LABEL display mode is “USER” but the USER MODULE LABEL is undefined for the corresponding FX RTN module

This shows the send position setting for the FX 1–4 bus.

No indicator	Set to POST FADER
PRE	Set to PRE FADER

Use this to adjust the send level to the FX 1–4 bus. When a selection frame is shown, use corresponding LCD knobs (lit green) to adjust values.

Assignment on	Shown in green
Assignment off	Shown in gray

Range: −∞ dB – +10 dB (default: −∞ dB)

Tap this button to turn on/off the signal sent to the FX 1–4 bus.

Options: ON (default), OFF

NOTE

This is not shown when the selected module is an FX RTN 1–4 or MAIN L/R Master module.

A list of SEND settings for each bus can be viewed and operated (“FX 1–4 bus SEND OVERVIEW Screen”).

Tap the SEND level area while pressing the HOME key on the top panel to set the SEND level for that bus to 0 dB.

PRE/POST SETTINGS button

Tap this button to highlight it, changing the ON/OFF button for each bus to a PRE/POST settings button.

Tap each button to change the send positions to the MIX 1–22 and FX1–4 buses.

Options: PRE, POST (default)

NOTE

This is only shown when the selected module is a CH 1–40, ST IN 1–2 or FX RTN 1–4 module.

A list of PRE/POST settings can be viewed and operated for each bus on the PRE/POST (INPUT) Screen (See “MIX 1–22 bus SEND OVERVIEW Screen” and “FX 1–4 bus SEND OVERVIEW Screen”.)

PAN indicator (shown for mono modules only)

This adjusts the pan of the signals sent to the MAIN L/R bus.

Range: L100 – C – R100 (default: C)

When the selection frame is shown, turn LCD knob 8 (lit yellow) to adjust it.

NOTE

A list of PAN/BAL settings can be viewed and operated for the MAIN L/R bus on the SEND PAN (INPUT) and SEND PAN (BUS) screens (“MAIN L/R bus SEND OVERVIEW Screen”).

When PAN settings are centered (C), signals are reduced by 3 dB and sent to both left and right MAIN MIX L/R buses.

Tap this area while pressing the HOME key on the top panel to set the pan to center (C).

MAIN button

Tap this button to turn the assignment to the MAIN L/R bus on/off.

When this is on, the button will appear highlighted, and the signal will be sent to MAIN L/R bus.

Module name	default
CH 1–40	On
ST IN 1–2	On
FX RTN 1–4	On
MIX 1–22	Off

NOTE

A list of MAIN L/R bus assignment settings can be viewed and operated on the ON/OFF (INPUT) and ON/OFF (BUS) screens (“MAIN L/R bus SEND OVERVIEW Screen”).

This is not shown when the selected module is the MAIN L/R Master module.

If the MAIN L/R Master module is already assigned to the selected MIX 1–22 bus and on, trying to turn this button on for the MIX 1–22 module will produce the following error message. To prevent a feedback loop, it cannot be turned on.

MODE

This shows the selected setting.

Tap this area to open a window where the setting can be selected to handle the stereo module input signal as a stereo signal or to handle either the left or right channel as a mono signal.

Option	Meaning
STEREO (default)	Input the two input signals as a stereo signal to the module.
L-Mono	Input only the left signal of the two input signals as a mono signal to the module.
R-Mono	Input only the right signal of the two input signals as a mono signal to the module.

NOTE

This is only shown when the selected module is a CH 1–40 module with the Stereo Link setting on, or a ST IN 1–2 or FX RTN 1–4 module.

If L-Mono or R-Mono is selected, the BAL setting will function as a PAN setting.

IMAGE

Use this to adjust the image width of the stereo signal.

The farthest left produces ordinary stereo. Turning it right reduces the stereo width until the center where it becomes mono. Turning it further to the right reverses the stereo positions until left and right are completely reversed at the farthest right.

Range: STEREO 100% – MONO – REVERSE 100% (default: STEREO 100%)

When the selection frame is shown, turn LCD knob 7 (lit green) to adjust it.

NOTE

This is only shown when the selected module is a CH 1–40 module with the Stereo Link setting on, or a ST IN 1–2 or FX RTN 1–4 module.

BAL indicator (shown for stereo modules only)

This adjusts the balance of the signals sent to the MAIN L/R bus.

Range: L100 – C – R100 (default: C)

When the selection frame is shown, turn LCD knob 8 (lit yellow) to adjust it.

NOTE

A list of PAN/BAL settings can be viewed and operated for the MAIN L/R bus on the SEND PAN (INPUT) and SEND PAN (BUS) Screen (“MAIN L/R bus SEND OVERVIEW Screen”).

This is not shown when the selected module is the MAIN L/R Master module.

When BAL settings are centered (C), the left channel is sent to the MAIN L bus and the right channel is sent to the MAIN R bus at 0 dB.

Tap this area while pressing the HOME key on the top panel to set the balance to center (C).

MODULE (OUTPUT) Screen

Module output settings can be made on the MODULE (OUTPUT) Screens for MIX 1–22 and MAIN L/R Master modules.

Tap the OUTPUT area at the top of the Home Screen of a MIX 1–22 or MAIN L/R Master module to open this screen.

MIX 1–22 modules

MIX 1–22 modules with Stereo Link on

MAIN L/R Master module

PRE FADER level meter(s)

This shows PRE FADER signal level(s).

LOCK/UNLOCK button

This button locks/unlocks routing setting change operations for the unit. This is always locked at the time of start up.

When locked, operation of the BATCH SETUP button is not possible. However, tapping the OUTPUT PORT SELECT area () and switching to the OUTPUT PORT SELECT Screen is possible.

Tap this button when set to “UNLOCK” to switch it to “LOCK”.

NOTE

The LOCK/UNLOCK button () setting is shared by the following routing setting screens.

MODULE (INPUT) Screen

MODULE (OUTPUT) Screen

INPUT SOURCE SELECT Screen

OUTPUT PORT SELECT Screen

DIRECT OUT PORT SELECT Screen

INSERT SEND PORT SELECT Screen

INSERT RETURN PORT SELECT Screen

TALKBACK INPUT SELECT Screen

TALKBACK EXT1 DIRECT OUT PORT SELECT Screen

TALKBACK EXT2 DIRECT OUT PORT SELECT Screen

Return TALKBACK EXT DIRECT OUT PORT SELECT Screen

MONITOR 1 DIRECT OUT PORT SELECT Screen

MONITOR 2 DIRECT OUT PORT SELECT Screen

MONITOR 2 OUTPUT PORT SELECT Screen

Solo DIRECT OUT PORT SELECT Screen

OUTPUT PORT SELECT area

This area shows the output ports that the signal of the selected module is assigned to.

The first line shows an abbreviation of the FIXED PORT LABEL.

The second line shows the USER PORT LABEL.

If the USER PORT LABEL is undefined, the FIXED PORT LABEL will be shown.

Up to 32 ports can be shown for mono modules.

Up to 16 ports can be shown for each stereo module.

If the number of assigned output ports exceeds the above, “…” will be shown at the bottom right of the area.

Tap this area to open the OUTPUT PORT SELECT Screen that has the tapped output port. (See “OUTPUT PORT SELECT screen”.)

If Dante ports that have mounted SB-16Ds assigned are selected, they will be shown as follows.

1st line: DA port number

2nd line: SB #[ID] port number

3rd line: USER PORT LABEL or SB #[ID] port number (if the USER PORT LABEL is undefined)

Assigned buttons for Dante ports that have virtually-mounted SB-16Ds will be highlighted yellow.

SELECT PORT LABEL button

When multiple output ports are assigned to the module, this button switches to a mode for selecting just one to be shown as the PORT LABEL.

Tap this button to switch to SELECT PORT LABEL mode.

Tap the button for the desired output port to select it for showing as the PORT LABEL.

The selected output port button will have a white frame.

By default, no port will be selected with the SELECT PORT LABEL mode. In this case, the output port shown at the top left of the OUTPUT PORT SELECT area () will be shown as the PORT LABEL.

If multiple output ports are not assigned to the module, this button will appear dimmed.

POST FADER level meter(s)

This shows POST FADER signal level(s).

BATCH SETUP button

When the LOCK/UNLOCK button () is set to “UNLOCK”, tap this button to open a BATCH SETUP window where the output ports of a range of channels can be set at the same time. (See “Setting output ports for multiple channels at the same time in batches”.)

Change settings for multiple designated channels at the same time.

Phase button(s)

Use these to change the phases of the signals for the selected module.

Tap these buttons to reverse the phases of the selected module signals.

Phase button display when the Stereo Link setting is off for the selected module

	Normal
	Reversed

Phase button display when the selected module is stereo

	Normal
	Reversed

LABEL setting area

LABEL setting area icon

Tap this icon to open the DISPLAY MODE page of the LABEL SETUP Screen. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

MODULE LABEL display mode setting button

This button switches the Main MODULE LABEL display mode. The current display mode appears highlighted.

Tap this button to cycle through the Main MODULE LABEL display modes in order: USER, FIXED, PORT LABEL.

See “MODULE LABEL page” for details about Main MODULE LABEL display mode settings.

PORT LABEL display mode setting button

This button switches the PORT LABEL (input/output port name) display mode. The current display mode appears highlighted.

Tap this button to alternate the PORT LABEL display mode between “USER” and “FIXED”.

See “MODULE LABEL page” for details about PORT LABEL display mode settings.

Stereo Link button (MIX 1–22 modules only)

These show the stereo link setting states of the MIX 1–22 modules.

	Stereo linking is off
	Stereo linking is on

Tap this button to open the Stereo Link setting window.

Linking with either module to the left or right is possible except for MIX 1 and MIX 22.

MODULE (Audio Follow Video) Screen

The Audio Follow Video (AFV) function can be considered as a “tally linking function” that automatically controls fader levels in response to external tally input events.

Use this screen to set AFV parameters for the selected module.

Tap any of the following to open this screen.

AFV button on the MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screen

Selection frame when it is on the AFV parameter on the Home Screen

Appearance when the ON/OFF button for the entire Audio Follow Video function is ON

ON/OFF button for the Audio Follow Video function of the selected module

Tap this button to turn on/off the Audio Follow Video function of the selected module.

When ON, buttons will be highlighted.

Audio Follow Video function TRIGGER SOURCE area

This shows the AFV TRIGGER SOURCE of the selected module.

When AFV TRIGGER is active, this area will be highlighted red.

Tap this area to open the AFV TRIGGER SOURCE SELECT Screen. (See “AFV TRIGGER SOURCE SELECT Screen”.)

This shows the name of the AFV TRIGGER SOURCE selected on the AFV TRIGGER SOURCE SELECT Screen.

TEST button

Use this button to test the operation of the Audio Follow Video function of the selected module alone.

Pressing this button will function as receiving an AFV ON event, while releasing this button will function as receiving an AFV OFF event.

ON/OFF button for the entire Audio Follow Video function

Tap this button to turn on/off the entire Audio Follow Video function.

When ON, buttons will be highlighted.

When off, all AFV parameters for all modules will appear gray.

Audio Follow Video function setting status graph

This graph illustrates the automatic fader level operation using the current AFV parameter settings. The vertical axis shows the FADER level and the horizontal axis shows the time.

ON LEVEL

This adjusts the fade target value of the fader level after an AFV ON event is received.

Range: −∞ dB – +10.0 dB (default: 0.00 dB)

Turn LCD knob 1 (lit white) to adjust it.

OFF LEVEL

This adjusts the fade target value of the fader level after an AFV OFF event is received.

Range: −∞ dB – +10.0 dB (default: −∞ dB)

Turn LCD knob 2 (lit blue) to adjust it.

WAIT TIME

This adjusts the amount of time until fading starts after receiving an AFV ON event.

Range: 0.0 – 10.0 sec (default: 0.0 sec)

Turn LCD knob 3 (lit green) to adjust it.

RISE TIME

This adjusts the amount of fade time until the ON LEVEL is reached after fading starts when an AFV ON event is received.

Range: 0.0 – 10.0 sec (default: 1.0 sec)

Turn LCD knob 4 (lit yellow) to adjust it.

HOLD TIME

This adjusts the amount of time until fading starts after receiving an AFV OFF event.

Range: 0.0 – 10.0 sec (default: 1.0 sec)

Turn LCD knob 6 (lit red) to adjust it.

FALL TIME

This adjusts the amount of fade time until the OFF LEVEL is reached after fading starts when an AFV OFF event is received.

Range: 0.0 – 10.0 sec (default: 1.0 sec)

Turn LCD knob 7 (lit light blue) to adjust it.

NOTE

If any of the following operations are conducted during a fade operation caused by the Audio Follow Video function, the fade operation will be canceled.

All System Data Loading

Snapshot Recall

Module Library Recall

FADER LEVEL operation of the corresponding module on the MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screen

FADER LEVEL operation of the corresponding module on the FADER LEVEL page of the SEND OVERVIEW (MAIN L/R) Screen

AFV TRIGGER SOURCE SELECT Screen

The AFV TRIGGER SOURCE of the selected module can be selected from the following on this screen.

GPIO input connector of this unit

GPIO input connector of a mounted SB-16D connected through the built-in Dante

Rear panel FOOTSWITCH jack

To open this screen, tap the Audio Follow Video function TRIGGER SOURCE area () on the MODULE (Audio Follow Video) Screen.

Audio Follow Video function TRIGGER SOURCE selection buttons

Tap these buttons to select the AFV TRIGGER SOURCE of the selected module.

Selected buttons will be highlighted.

User Defined Control functions assigned to a corresponding GPIO-IN/footswitch are shown in the ranks below the buttons.

Checking whether multiple functions have been assigned to an item is possible.

A mark will appear for virtually-mounted SB-16D GPIO-IN ports.

Assigned buttons for virtually-mounted SB-16D GPIO-IN ports will be highlighted yellow.

MODULE menu

MODULE menu operations

Tap the button at the top right of the MODULE screen to open the MODULE menu for the selected module.

Scrollbars appear when all selectable items cannot be shown in the MODULE menu at the same time. In this case, drag the menu up and down to scroll the items.

Tap the MODULE menu button or the button to close the menu.

MODULE menu items

Menu item	Function
Copy MODULE	This copies all the parameter setting values of the selected module into a buffer.
Paste MODULE	This pastes all the parameter setting values copied into the buffer to the selected module.
UNDO Paste MODULE	This undoes pasting to the selected module.
REDO Paste MODULE	This redoes pasting to the selected module.
Copy INPUT	This copies all the parameter setting values on the MODULE (INPUT) Screen of the selected module into a buffer.
Paste INPUT	This pastes all the MODULE (INPUT) Screen parameter setting values copied into the buffer to the selected module.
UNDO Paste INPUT	This undoes pasting to the MODULE (INPUT) Screen of the selected module.
REDO Paste INPUT	This redoes pasting to the MODULE (INPUT) Screen of the selected module.
MODULE Library	Tap this area to open the LIBRARY Screen for the selected module. (See “Various LIBRARY Screens”.)

NOTE

The underlined words in the menu item list will be replaced with the MODULE screen names of the selected module.

The menu items with underlined words are not shown on the MODULE (OVERVIEW) and MODULE (OUTPUT) screens.

The following parameters cannot be copied or pasted.

Input Routing

OSC Input

Output Port Assign*

Insert Send Port Assign*

Insert Return Port Assign*

Insert ON/OFF*

Direct Out Port Assign*

*Output ports cannot be used by multiple modules at the same time. These parameters are excluded from copying and pasting because doing so would change the output settings of other modules along with the paste destination.

Pasting parameters that can be operated independently for left and right in stereo modules

The following parameters can be set independently for left and right channels even in stereo modules.

Pre Amp

Phase

D.TRIM

If the mono/stereo states of the copy source and paste destinations are different, copying and pasting will occur as follows.

If the copy source is a mono module and the paste destination is a stereo module, the copy source setting data will be pasted to both L and R of the paste destination.

If the copy source is a stereo module and the paste destination is a mono module, the L channel setting data of the copy source will be pasted to the paste destination.

Pasting MODE/IMAGE parameters

MODE/IMAGE parameters shown on the MODULE (SEND/PAN) screen only exist for stereo input modules. (See “MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen”.)

For this reason, MODE/IMAGE parameters can only be copied and pasted when both the source and destination are stereo input modules.

SENDS ON FADER function

The SENDS ON FADER function enables controlling SEND levels with faders.

When in Sends On Fader mode, the SENDS ON FADER on the top panel lights and the following operations are possible.

Using channel faders to control SEND levels from each module to buses subject to SENDS ON FADER operation

Using the MASTER fader to control the FADER level (bus master level) of buses subject to SENDS ON FADER operation

Using channel MUTE keys to switch SEND ON/OFF to buses subject to SENDS ON FADER operation from each module (MUTE key lit: SEND OFF, MUTE key unlit: SEND ON)

In addition, the MUTE, SOLO and SEL keys and the color bar in the top panel master section will become operation keys and displays for the bus subject to SENDS ON FADER operation. The SEND indicator will also light and the L/R indicators will become unlit.

Sends On Fader mode can be activated and deactivated with the following operations.

Top panel SENDS ON FADER key

USER KEYS/FOOTSWITCH/GPIO-IN assigned to the Sends On Fader function (See “USER DEFINED CONTROLS screen”.)

NOTE

The Sends On Fader mode setting is assigned to the following USER KEYS by default on the User Key page.

USER KEYS 5–12 (Sends On Fader | MIX1–8)

SENDS ON FADER screen

Select the buses subject to SENDS ON FADER operation on this screen.

Press the SENDS ON FADER key on the top panel to open this screen.

Tap a bus selection button, highlighting it, to select that bus. The channel faders will move to the positions of the SEND levels from the modules to the selected buses. The MASTER fader will move to the position of the FADER level of the selected bus. The channel MUTE keys will be lit/unlit according to the SEND ON/OFF status to the selected bus of each module (MUTE key lit: SEND OFF, MUTE key unlit: SEND ON).

To use SENDS ON FADER operation while, for example, the Home Screen on the right touchscreen is open, tap the icon at the top right of this screen to close it.

Tapping the icon will close this window, but Sends On Fader mode will remain active. Press the SENDS ON FADER key to open the SENDS ON FADER Screen again.

Press SENDS ON FADER key when the SENDS ON FADER screen is open to end Sends On Fader mode. This will close the SENDS ON FADER screen and return these items to their normal display states: channel faders and mute buttons, MASTER faders, master section MUTE, SOLO and SEL keys and color bars, L/R SEND indicators and channel screens.

NOTE

This screen will not be shown for a MIX bus with BUS mode set to GROUP.

SEND OVERVIEW screen

SEND parameters for the selected bus (MIX 1–22, FX 1–4 or MAIN L/R) are shown in a list and can be operated.

The MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen shows a list of the SEND parameters () aligned vertically on the analog mixer, and can be used to operate them.

In contrast, the SEND OVERVIEW Screen shows a list of the SEND parameters () aligned horizontally on the analog mixer, and can be used to operate them.

MIX 1–22 bus SEND OVERVIEW Screen

Tap Menu Screen > Mixer Setup menu> MIX Send Overview to open this screen. The SEND OVERVIEW button at the top of the MODULE Screen for a MIX 1–22 module can also be tapped to open this screen.

SEND LEVEL (INPUT) page

SEND LEVEL (BUS) page

ON/OFF (INPUT) page

ON/OFF (BUS) page

PRE/POST (INPUT) page

SEND PAN (INPUT) page

SEND PAN (BUS) page

ON/OFF (INPUT) page (GROUP mode bus)

ON/OFF (BUS) page (GROUP mode bus)

NOTE

Tap a level while pressing the HOME key on the top panel to set that level to 0 dB.

Tap a PAN/BAL indicator while pressing the HOME key to set the tapped pan/balance setting to center (C).

button

Tap this button to return to the screen shown before the SEND OVERVIEW Screen.

MODULE button

Tap this button to open the MODULE Screen for the selected MIX 1–22 module.

/ buttons

Tap these buttons to move left and right in order between MIX 1–22, FX 1–4 and MAIN L/R buses to show and activate them for operation.

FIXED MODULE LABEL

This shows the FIXED MODULE LABEL of the selected bus.

USER MODULE LABEL

This shows the module label according to the display mode set for the Main MODULE LABEL of the selected bus. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

Tap this area when the Main MODULE LABEL display mode is set to “USER” to open the MODULE LABEL Screen where the user module label and set module color can be changed. (See “MODULE LABEL page”.)

If the Main MODULE LABEL display mode is set to “PORT LABEL” and the PORT LABEL display mode is set to “USER” (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.), tapping this area will open the USER LABEL (OUTPUT PORT) Screen where the user port label can be edited for the output port assigned to this module. (See “USER LABEL (INPUT PORT / OUTPUT PORT) Screen”.)

No screen will open, however, if no output port has been assigned to the module.

button

Tap this button to open the SEND OVERVIEW menu for the selected MIX 1–22 bus.

Tap menu items to change parameter settings for the selected MIX 1–22 buses. (See “SEND OVERVIEW menu”.)

Page selection buttons

Tap a page selection button to open that page.

The selected button will be highlighted.

Button	Use
SEND LEVEL (INPUT)	This shows a list of SEND levels from the CH 1–40, ST IN 1–2 and FX RTN 1–4 modules to the MIX 1–22 buses.
SEND LEVEL (BUS)	This shows a list of SEND levels from the MIX 1–22 and MAIN L/R Master modules to the MIX 1–22 buses.
ON / OFF (INPUT)	This shows a list of assignment on/off states from the CH 1–40, ST IN 1–2 and FX RTN 1–4 modules to the MIX 1–22 buses.
ON / OFF (BUS)	This shows a list of assignment on/off states from the MIX 1–22 and MAIN L/R Master modules to the MIX 1–22 buses.
PRE / POST (INPUT)	This shows a list of signal send positions from the CH 1–40, ST IN 1–2 and FX RTN 1–4 modules to the MIX 1–22 buses.
SEND PAN (INPUT)	This shows a list of pan/balance settings from the CH 1–40, ST IN 1–2 and FX RTN 1–4 modules to the MIX 1–22 buses.
SEND PAN (BUS)	This shows a list of pan/balance settings from the MIX 1–22 modules to the MIX 1–22 buses.

SEND levels

This shows a list of setting states for SEND levels from the CH 1–40, ST IN 1–2 and FX RTN 1–4 modules to the MIX 1–22 buses.

When a selection frame is shown, use corresponding LCD knobs (lit orange) to adjust SEND levels.

Range: −∞ dB – +10 dB (default: −∞ dB)

CH MUTE / PRE-SEND LINK

Set separately for each bus whether or not input module MUTE and Pre Fader Send MUTE from the input module to the AUX bus are linked.

Tap this button to switch the setting between LINK and UNLINK.

Display	Explanation
LINK (default)	Input module MUTE and Pre Fader Send MUTE from the input module to the AUX bus are linked
UNLINK	Input module MUTE and Pre Fader Send MUTE from the input module to the AUX bus are not linked

MIX MASTER LEVEL

This adjusts the FADER level (bus master level) for the selected MIX 1–22 bus.

Range: −∞ dB – +10 dB (default: 0.0 dB)

When the selection frame is shown, turn LCD knob 8 (lit blue) to adjust it.

SEND levels

This shows a list of setting states for SEND levels from the MIX 1–22 and MAIN L/R Master modules to the MIX 1–22 buses.

When a selection frame is shown, use corresponding LCD knobs (lit orange) to adjust SEND levels.

Range: −∞ dB – +10 dB (default: −∞ dB)

NOTE

SEND levels to the same bus as the selected bus shown in the USER MODULE LABEL area () will not be shown.

Input module ON/OFF buttons

This shows a list of assignment ON/OFF states from the CH 1–40, ST IN 1–2 and FX RTN 1–4 modules to the MIX 1–22 buses.

Tap these buttons to switch on/off assignments to MIX 1–22 buses. (Default: ON)

When ON, buttons will be highlighted.

BUS module ON/OFF buttons

This shows a list of assignment ON/OFF states from the MIX 1–22 and MAIN L/R Master modules to the MIX 1–22 buses.

Tap these buttons to switch on/off assignments to MIX 1–22 buses. (Default: OFF)

When ON, buttons will be highlighted.

NOTE

An assignment button for the same bus as the selected bus shown in the USER MODULE LABEL area () will not be shown.

PRE/POST buttons

This shows a list of settings for send positions from the CH 1–40, ST IN 1–2 and FX RTN 1–4 modules to the MIX 1–22 buses.

Tap these buttons to switch settings for send positions to MIX 1–22 buses. (See “19 - Block diagram”.)

Display	Explanation
PRE	Pre-fader
POST (default)	Post-fader

Tap the buttons to switch their send positions.

PAN/BAL for CH 1–40, ST IN 1–2 and FX RTN 1–4 modules

This shows a list of setting states for pan/balance from the CH 1–40, ST IN 1–2 and FX RTN 1–4 modules to the selected MIX 1–22 buses.

When a selection frame is shown, use corresponding LCD knobs (lit yellow) to adjust the pan/balance.

Range: L100 – C – R100 (default: C)

NOTE

For buses that have the PAN LINK setting on, the SEND PAN parameters appear dim and cannot be operated. They are linked to the PAN/BAL settings of the corresponding modules.

MIX 1–22 module PAN/BAL

This shows a list of setting states for pan/balance from the MIX 1–22 modules to the selected MIX 1–22 bus.

When a selection frame is shown, use corresponding LCD knobs (lit yellow) to adjust the pan/balance.

Range: L100 – C – R100 (default: C)

NOTE

For buses that have the PAN LINK setting on, the SEND PAN parameters appear dim and cannot be operated. They are linked to the PAN/BAL settings of the corresponding modules.

FX 1–4 bus SEND OVERVIEW Screen

Tap Menu Screen > Mixer Setup menu> MIX Send Overview to open this screen. The SEND OVERVIEW button at the top of the MODULE Screen for a FX RTN 1–4 module can also be tapped to open this screen.

SEND LEVEL (INPUT) page

SEND LEVEL (BUS) page

ON/OFF (INPUT) page

ON/OFF (BUS) page

PRE/POST (INPUT) page

SEND PAN (INPUT) page

SEND PAN (BUS) page

NOTE

Tap a level while pressing the HOME key on the top panel to set that level to 0 dB.

button

Tap this button to return to the screen shown before the SEND OVERVIEW Screen.

MODULE button

Tap this button to open the MODULE Screen for the FX RTN 1–4 module that corresponds to the FX 1–4 bus shown.

/ buttons

Tap these buttons to move left and right in order between MIX 1–22, FX 1–4 and MAIN L/R buses to show and activate them for operation.

FIXED MODULE LABEL

This shows the FIXED MODULE LABEL of the selected bus.

USER MODULE LABEL

This shows the module label according to the display mode set for the Main MODULE LABEL of the selected bus. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

button

Tap this button to open the SEND OVERVIEW menu for the selected FX 1–4 bus.

Tap menu items to change parameter settings for the selected FX 1–4 buses. (See “SEND OVERVIEW menu”.)

Page selection buttons

Tap a page selection button to open that page.

The selected button will be highlighted.

Button	Use
SEND LEVEL (INPUT)	This shows a list of SEND levels from the CH 1–40 and ST IN 1–2 modules to the FX 1–4 buses.
SEND LEVEL (BUS)	This shows a list of SEND levels from the MIX 1–22 modules to the FX 1–4 buses.
ON / OFF (INPUT)	This shows a list of assignment on/off states from the CH 1–40 and ST IN 1–2 modules to the FX 1–4 buses.
ON / OFF (BUS)	This shows a list of assignment on/off states from the MIX 1–22 modules to the FX 1–4 buses.
PRE / POST (INPUT)	This shows a list of signal send positions from the CH 1–40 and ST IN 1–2 modules to the FX 1–4 buses.
SEND PAN (INPUT)	This shows a list of pan/balance settings from the CH 1–40 and ST IN 1–2 modules to the FX 1–4 buses.
SEND PAN (BUS)	This shows a list of pan/balance settings from the MIX 1–22 modules to the FX 1–4 buses.

SEND levels

This shows a list of setting states for SEND levels from the CH 1–40 and ST IN 1–2 modules to the FX 1–4 buses.

When a selection frame is shown, use corresponding LCD knobs (lit green) to adjust SEND levels.

Range: −∞ dB – +10 dB (default: −∞ dB)

CH MUTE / PRE-SEND LINK

Set separately for each bus whether or not input module MUTE and Pre Fader Send MUTE from the input module to the AUX bus are linked.

Tap this button to switch the setting between LINK and UNLINK.

Display	Explanation
LINK (default)	Input module MUTE and Pre Fader Send MUTE from the input module to the AUX bus are linked
UNLINK	Input module MUTE and Pre Fader Send MUTE from the input module to the AUX bus are not linked

FX INPUT LEVEL

This adjusts the input level for the FX 1–4 module that corresponds to the FX 1–4 bus shown.

Range: −∞ dB – +10 dB (default: 0.0 dB)

When the selection frame is shown, turn LCD knob 8 (lit blue) to adjust it.

NOTE

This is the same parameter as the FX RTN 1–4 module INPUT LEVEL knob () (“MODULE (FX) Screen”).

SEND levels

This shows a list of setting states for SEND levels from the MIX 1–22 modules to the FX 1–4 buses.

When a selection frame is shown, use corresponding LCD knobs (lit green) to adjust SEND levels.

Range: −∞ dB – +10 dB (default: −∞ dB)

Input module ON/OFF buttons

This shows a list of assignment on/off states from the CH 1–40 and ST IN 1–2 modules to the FX 1–4 buses.

Tap these buttons to switch on/off assignments to FX 1–4 buses. (Default: ON)

When ON, buttons will be highlighted.

BUS module ON/OFF buttons

This shows a list of assignment on/off states from the MIX 1–22 modules to the FX 1–4 buses.

Tap these buttons to switch on/off assignments to FX 1–4 buses. (Default: ON)

When ON, buttons will be highlighted.

PRE/POST buttons

This shows a list of signal send position settings from the CH 1–40 and ST IN 1–2 modules to the FX 1–4 buses.

Tap these buttons to switch settings for send positions to FX 1–4 buses. (See “19 - Block diagram”.)

Display	Explanation
PRE	Pre-fader
POST (default)	Post-fader

Tap the buttons to switch their send positions.

PAN/BAL for CH 1–40 and ST IN 1–2 modules

This shows a list of setting states for pan/balance from the CH 1–40 and ST IN 1–2 modules to the selected FX 1–4 buses.

Display range: L100 – C – R100 (default: C)

NOTE

FX 1–4 bus SEND PAN parameters are always linked to the PAN/BAL settings of the corresponding modules (PAN LINK setting is always on). They are shown dimly and cannot be operated on this screen.

MIX 1–22 module PAN/BAL

This shows a list of setting states for pan/balance from the MIX 1–22 modules to the selected FX 1–4 bus.

Display range: L100 – C – R100 (default: C)

NOTE

FX 1–4 bus SEND PAN parameters are always linked to the PAN/BAL settings of the corresponding modules (PAN LINK setting is always on). They are shown dimly and cannot be operated on this screen.

MAIN L/R bus SEND OVERVIEW Screen

Tap Menu Screen > Mixer Setup menu> MIX Send Overview or Main L/R Assign Overview to open this screen. The SEND OVERVIEW button at the top of the MODULE Screen for the MAIN L/R Master module can also be tapped to open this screen.

FADER LEVEL (INPUT) page

FADER LEVEL (BUS) page

ON/OFF (INPUT) page

ON/OFF (BUS) page

SEND/PAN (INPUT) page

SEND/PAN (BUS) page

NOTE

Tap a level while pressing the HOME key on the top panel to set that level to 0 dB.

Tap a PAN/BAL indicator while pressing the HOME key to set the tapped pan/balance setting to center (C).

button

Tap this button to return to the screen shown before the SEND OVERVIEW Screen.

MODULE button

Tap this button to open the MODULE Screen for the selected MAIN L/R Master module.

/ buttons

Tap these buttons to move left and right in order between MIX 1–22, FX 1–4 and MAIN L/R buses to show and activate them for operation.

FIXED MODULE LABEL

This shows the FIXED MODULE LABEL of the selected bus.

USER MODULE LABEL

This shows the module label according to the display mode set for the Main MODULE LABEL of the MAIN L/R bus. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

No screen will open, however, if no output port has been assigned to the module.

button

Tap this button to open the SEND OVERVIEW menu for the MAIN L/R bus.

Tap menu items to change parameter settings for the MAIN L/R bus. (See “SEND OVERVIEW menu”.)

Page selection buttons

Tap a page selection button to open that page.

The selected button will be highlighted.

Button	Use
FADER LEVEL (INPUT)	This shows a list of FADER levels for the CH 1–40, ST IN 1–2 and FX RTN 1–4 modules.
FADER LEVEL (BUS)	This shows a list of FADER levels for the MIX 1–22 modules.
ON / OFF (INPUT)	This shows a list of assignment on/off states from the CH 1–40, ST IN 1–2 and FX RTN 1–4 modules to the MAIN L/R bus.
ON / OFF (BUS)	This shows a list of assignment on/off states from the MIX 1–22 modules to the MAIN L/R bus.
SEND PAN (INPUT)	This shows a list of pan/balance settings from the CH 1–40, ST IN 1–2 and FX RTN 1–4 modules to the MAIN L/R bus.
SEND PAN (BUS)	This shows a list of pan/balance settings from the MIX 1–22 modules to the MAIN L/R bus.

FADER levels

This shows a list of FADER level setting states for the CH 1–40, ST IN 1–2 and FX RTN 1–4 modules.

When a selection frame is shown, use corresponding LCD knobs (lit blue) to adjust FADER levels.

Module name	Range	default
CH 1–40	−∞ dB – +10 dB	−∞ dB
ST IN 1–2		−∞ dB
FX RTN 1–4		0.0 dB

MAIN L/R MASTER LEVEL

This adjusts the FADER level of the MAIN L/R Master module.

Range: −∞ dB – +10 dB (default: 0.0 dB)

When the selection frame is shown, turn LCD knob 8 (lit blue) to adjust it.

FADER levels

This shows a list of FADER level setting states for the MIX 1–22 modules.

When a selection frame is shown, use corresponding LCD knobs (lit blue) to adjust FADER levels.

Range: −∞ dB – +10 dB (default: 0.0 dB)

MAIN L/R assignment state indicators/buttons for input modules

This shows a list of assignment on/off states from the CH 1–40, ST IN 1–2 and FX RTN 1–4 modules to the MAIN L/R bus.

Tap these buttons to turn on/off assignments to the MAIN L/R bus.

Options: on (default), off

When this is on, the button will appear highlighted.

MAIN L/R assignment state indicators/buttons for BUS modules

This shows a list of assignment on/off states from the MIX 1–22 modules to the MAIN L/R bus.

Tap these buttons to turn on/off assignments to the MAIN L/R bus.

Options: on, off (default)

When this is on, the button will appear highlighted.

PAN/BAL for CH 1–40, ST IN 1–2 and FX RTN 1–4 modules

This shows a list of setting states for pan/balance from the CH 1–40, ST IN 1–2 and FX RTN 1–4 modules to the MAIN L/R bus.

When a selection frame is shown, use corresponding LCD knobs (lit yellow) to adjust the pan/balance.

Range: L100 – C – R100 (default: C)

MIX 1–22 module PAN/BAL

This shows a list of setting states for pan/balance from the MIX 1–22 modules to the MAIN L/R bus.

When a selection frame is shown, use corresponding LCD knobs (lit yellow) to adjust the pan/balance.

Range: L100 – C – R100 (default: C)

SEND OVERVIEW menu

SEND OVERVIEW menu operations

Tap the button at the top right of the SEND OVERVIEW screen to open the SEND OVERVIEW menu for the selected bus.

Tap menu items to change parameter settings for the selected bus all at once.

Tap the SEND OVERVIEW menu button or the button to close the menu.

SEND OVERVIEW menu items

SEND LEVEL (INPUT), SEND LEVEL (BUS) and FADER LEVEL (INPUT)

Menu item	Function
Copy LEVEL	This copies the SEND level to the selected bus to a buffer.
Paste LEVEL	This pastes the SEND level copied to the buffer to the selected bus.
Undo Paste LEVEL	This undoes pasting the SEND level.
Redo Paste LEVEL	This redoes pasting the SEND level.
Set All 0dB	This sets all the SEND levels to the selected bus to 0 dB.
Set All −∞dB	This sets all the SEND levels to the selected bus to −∞ dB.
Copy from Fader Level	This copies the FADER level to the SEND level to the selected bus.

NOTE

When the selected bus is MAIN L/R, this will change the FADER level setting.

When the selected bus is MAIN L/R, the “Copy from Fader Level” menu item will not be shown.

ON/OFF (INPUT) and ON/OFF (BUS)

Menu item	Function
Copy ON/OFF	This copies the assignment settings of the selected bus to a buffer.
Paste ON/OFF	This pastes the assignment settings to the selected bus that were copied to the buffer to the selected bus.
Undo Paste ON/OFF	This undoes the pasting of assignment settings to the selected bus.
Redo Paste ON/OFF	This redoes pasting of assignment settings to the selected bus.
Set All ON	This turns on all assignment settings to the selected bus.
Set All OFF	This turns off all assignment settings to the selected bus.
Copy from MAIN L/R Assign	This copies the MAIN L/R bus assignment settings to the selected bus assignment settings.

NOTE

When the selected bus is MAIN L/R, this will change the states of assignments to the MAIN L/R bus.

When the selected bus is MAIN L/R, the “Copy from MAIN L/R Assign” menu item will not be shown.

PRE / POST (INPUT)

Menu item	Function
Copy PRE/POST	This copies the PRE/POST settings to the selected bus to a buffer.
Paste PRE/POST	This pastes the PRE/POST settings to the selected bus that were copied to the buffer to the selected bus.
Undo Paste PRE/POST	This undoes the pasting of PRE/POST settings to the selected bus.
Redo Paste PRE/POST	This redoes pasting of PRE/POST settings to the selected bus.
Set All PRE	This sets all PRE/POST settings to the selected bus to PRE.
Set All POST	This sets all PRE/POST settings to the selected bus to POST.

SEND PAN (INPUT) and SEND PAN (BUS)

Menu item	Function
Copy PAN/BAL	This copies the pan/balance settings to the selected bus to a buffer.
Paste PAN/BAL	This pastes the pan/balance settings to the selected bus that were copied to the buffer to the selected bus.
Undo Paste PAN/BAL	This undoes the pasting of pan/balance settings to the selected bus.
Redo Paste PAN/BAL	This redoes pasting of pan/balance settings to the selected bus.
Set All PAN Center	This sets all pan/balance settings to the selected bus to center (C).
Copy from MAIN L/R PAN	This copies the MAIN L/R bus pan/balance settings to the selected bus pan/balance settings.

NOTE

When the selected bus is MAIN L/R, the “Copy from MAIN L/R PAN” menu item will not be shown.

Mute Group and DCA functions

Mute Group function

This unit has 8 mute groups.

Depending on the Mute Group Priority button setting on the PREFERENCES Screen (See “PREFERENCES screen”.), if MUTE for a module was set to ON before MUTE was set to ON for the mute group, whether or not MUTE will stay ON for that module when the group MUTE is set to OFF can be set.

When the Mute Group LED Flash switch on the PREFERENCES Screen is set to ON (See “PREFERENCES screen”.), the MUTE indicators will blink for modules muted as part of a mute group.

The following can be used to operate mute groups.

Mute Group Master page

USER KEYS/FOOTSWITCH/GPIO-IN controls assigned to the Mute Group function (See “USER DEFINED CONTROLS screen”.)

NOTE

The Mute Group function is assigned to the following by default on the User Key page.

USER KEYS 1–4 (Mute | Mute Group 1–4 | Mute - LIT)

DCA (Digital Control Amplifier) functions

This unit has 8 DCAs.

A DCA enables simultaneously adjusting the levels of a group of assigned modules while maintaining the balance of their fader levels. For example, if two modules assigned to a DCA have fader levels of −10 dB and −15 dB, when the DCA module FADER level is raised 5 dB, their fader levels will increase from −10 dB to −5 dB and −15 dB to −10 dB. In this case, the physical fader positions of the assigned faders will not change.

DCA module MUTE keys function the same way as Mute Groups.

Depending on the DCA Mute Priority button setting on the PREFERENCES Screen (See “PREFERENCES screen”.), if MUTE for a module was set to ON before MUTE was set to ON for the DCA, whether or not MUTE will stay ON for that module when the DCA MUTE is set to OFF can be set.

When the Mute Group LED Flash switch on the PREFERENCES Screen is set to ON (See “PREFERENCES screen”.), the MUTE indicators will blink for modules muted due to DCA modules.

Like mute groups, DCA module SOLO keys, allow the solo state of a group of modules assigned to it to be turned on/off together.

Depending on the DCA Solo Priority button setting on the PREFERENCES Screen (See “PREFERENCES screen”.), if SOLO for a module was set to ON before SOLO was set to ON for the DCA, whether or not SOLO will stay ON for that module when the DCA MUTE is set to OFF can be set.

The SOLO indicators will blink for modules that have SOLO turned on in DCA modules.

DCAs are operated by faders and MUTE and SOLO keys assigned to DCA layers and DCA modules.

One DCA can also be assigned to another DCA (DCA assignment nesting). The following DCA assignments, however, are not possible.

Self-assignment (for example, DCA 1 cannot be assigned to DCA 1)

Assignment of a DCA that is at a higher level (For example, if DCA 1 is above DCA 2, which is above DCA 3, in the structure, DCA 1 cannot be assigned to DCA 2, and DCA 1 and DCA 2 cannot be assigned to DCA 3.)

DCA modules that cannot be assigned have frames around their module button areas ().

DCA/Mute Group SETUP screen

DCA and Mute Group settings can be made on this screen.

Use the following procedures to open this screen.

Tap Menu screen > Mixer Setup menu > DCA / Mute Group

Tap a DCA or MUTE GROUP button on the MODULE (OVERVIEW) screen

Tap a DCA assignment area on the DCA Module Home Screen

Press a USER key assigned to a MUTE Group while pressing the MENU key on the top panel

DCA Assign page

DCA buttons

These show module labels for DCAs.

The module label set for the Sub MODULE LABEL is shown at the left of the top line.

The module label set for the Main MODULE LABEL is shown in the bottom line. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

Tap these buttons to select DCAs for changing assignments. Selected DCA buttons will be highlighted.

Snapshot Recall Safe button

Tap this button to enable the Snapshot Recall Safe function for the selected DCA. (Default: off)

When this is on, the button will appear highlighted.

NOTE

This can also be set on the MODULE SAFE page of the SNAPSHOT RECALL SAFE Screen. (See “MODULE SAFE page”.)

Module type selection pages

These are page buttons for module types assigned to the DCA.

Buttons selected by tapping will be highlighted.

Module buttons

These are buttons for selecting modules assigned to the selected DCA.

The module label set for the Sub MODULE LABEL is shown at the left of the top line.

The module label set for the Main MODULE LABEL is shown in the bottom line. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

Tapping these buttons, highlighting them, will assign them to the DCA.

NOTE

At the top right of each button, the Mute Group assignment status is shown and the DCA assignment status is shown in the bottom line in the same way as in the MODULE LABEL area on the Home Screen. (See “ MODULE LABEL area”.)

CLEAR ALL button

Tap this button to open a message confirming whether to clear all INPUT and OUTPUT/DCA assignments to the selected DCA.

Tap OK to clear all assignments.

Mute Group Assign page

MuteGrp buttons

These show the Mute Group module labels.

The module label set for the Sub MODULE LABEL is shown at the left of the top line.

The module label set for the Main MODULE LABEL is shown in the bottom line. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

Tap these buttons to select a Mute Group for changing assignments.

The selected Mute Group button will be highlighted.

Snapshot Recall Safe button

Tap this button to enable the Snapshot Recall Safe function for the selected Mute Group. (Default: off)

When this is on, the button will appear highlighted.

Module type selection pages

These are page buttons for module types assigned to the Mute Group.

Buttons selected by tapping will be highlighted.

Module buttons

These are buttons for selecting modules assigned to the selected Mute Group.

The module label set for the Sub MODULE LABEL is shown at the left of the top line.

The module label set for the Main MODULE LABEL is shown in the bottom line. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

Tapping these buttons, highlighting them, will assign them to the Mute Group.

NOTE

CLEAR ALL button

Tap this button to open a message confirming whether to clear all INPUT and OUTPUT/DCA assignments to the selected DCA.

Tap OK to clear all assignments.

Mute Group Master page

Mute Group names

These show the Mute Group module labels.

The module label set for the Sub MODULE LABEL is shown at the left of the top line.

The module label set for the Main MODULE LABEL is shown in the bottom line. (See “DISPLAY MODE page”.)

Tap these areas to open the MODULE LABEL Screen where the USER MODULE LABEL and set module color can be changed for the selected Mute Group. (See “MODULE LABEL screen”.)

Mute Group assignment list

These show lists of the fixed and user module labels of modules that have been assigned to mute groups.

MUTE buttons

These are Mute Group Master MUTE buttons. (Default: OFF)

Tap these buttons to turn them on and off.

When on, these buttons will appear highlighted and the modules assigned to those Mute Groups will be muted.

In this case, the MUTE keys will blink for modules muted as part of a mute group.

NOTE

Using the User Defined Control function, the Mute Group function can also be operated with USER KEYS, FOOTSWITCH and GPIO-IN controls. (See “USER DEFINED CONTROLS screen”.)

The Mute Group MUTE function is assigned to the following by default on the User Key page.

USER KEYS 1–4 (Mute | Mute Group 1–4 | Mute - LIT)

MODULE LABEL screen

The following settings can be made on this screen.

The user module labels that are shown on screens can be set and edited.

The set module label background colors shown on screens as well as the lit colors of channel color bars can be changed.

Module icons shown on channel screens can be set.

Mute Group user module labels can be set and edited. Set Mute Group module colors can be changed.

CH 1 MODULE LABEL Screen

DCA 1 MODULE LABEL Screen

Mute Group MODULE LABEL Screen

Keyboard input area

This shows the USER MODULE LABEL being edited. Use the keyboard and buttons on this screen or a USB keyboard connected to the top panel USB port to edit the characters shown.

Tap this area when the color palette or icon selection area is open to show the keyboard in the keyboard area ().

COLOR button

Tap this button to open the color palette where the set module color can be changed. (See “Changing set module colors”.)

ICON button

Tap this button to open the icon selection area where icons for each module shown on channel screens can be set.(See “Setting module icons”.)

Keyboard area

Tap the keyboard buttons in this area to edit the user module label shown in the keyboard input area.

Tap the Copy button to copy the characters shown in the keyboard input area to the copy buffer.

Tap the Paste button to paste the characters in the copy buffer to the keyboard input area.

Setting and editing user module labels

User module labels can be set and edited.

NOTE

User module labels are not set by default.

1.To open the MODULE LABEL Screen, tap a user module label display area on the MODULE LABEL page of the LABEL SETUP Screen, or on a MODULE, SEND OVERVIEW, MIXER CONFIG or LIBRARY screen. (For a DCA module, tap the MODULE LABEL area on the Home Screen. For a MUTE GROUP, tap the Mute Group name area on the Mute Group Master page.)

2.Tap the keyboard buttons on the MODULE LABEL Screen to input the user module label.

User module labels can have up to 8 characters.

NOTE

The combination of characters input can be changed depending on the status of the Caps lock and Shift keyboard buttons on the MODULE LABEL Screen. See “Changing the keyboard keys” for details about changing the keyboard.

3.The input characters will be immediately used as the user module labels on various screens, including channel screens.

4.Tap the Enter button on the MODULE LABEL Screen to open the MODULE LABEL Screen for the next module to the right.

ATTENTION

The following symbols and punctuation marks cannot be input.

¥ / : * ? " < > |

NOTE

A USB keyboard connected to the top panel USB port can also be used to input and edit characters.

If a user module label cannot be shown completely in a display area, the end will be cut off. If the end is a number, up to two digits will be included in the abbreviated name.

Changing the keyboard keys

The Caps lock and Shift button settings change the selection of characters that can be input as shown below.

NOTE

The Shift button automatically deactivates after inputting one character.

Setting for inputting numbers and lowercase letters

Caps lock button	Off
Shift button	Off

Setting for inputting numbers and uppercase letters

Caps lock button	On (highlighted)
Shift button	Off

Setting for inputting symbols and lowercase letters

Caps lock button	On (highlighted)
Shift button	On (highlighted)

Setting for inputting symbols and uppercase letters

Caps lock button	Off
Shift button	On (highlighted)

Changing set module colors

The set module label background colors shown on screens as well as the lit colors of channel color bars can be changed.

The factory default module color settings are as follows.

CH 1–40	Blue
ST IN 1–2	Blue
FX RTN 1–4	Green
MIX when the BUS mode is AUX	Orange
MIX when the BUS mode is GROUP	Purple
MAIN L/R	Red
DCA	Yellow
Mute Group	Red

2.Tap the COLOR button on the MODULE LABEL Screen to open the color palette.

3.Tap a color in the color palette to change the module color setting.

This will change the module label background color shown on screens as well as the lit color of channel color bars.

NOTE

Tapping the keyboard input area on a MODULE LABEL screen will reopen the keyboard.

Setting module icons

Icons shown for modules on channel screens can be set.

NOTE

Module icons are not set by default.

1.To open the MODULE LABEL Screen, tap a user module label display area on a MODULE, SEND OVERVIEW, MIXER CONFIG or LIBRARY screen. (For a DCA module, tap the MODULE LABEL area on the Home Screen.)

2.Tap the ICON button on the MODULE LABEL Screen to open the icon selection area.

3.Tap an icon in the icon selection area to set it.

Set icons will be shown on MODULE LABEL and channel screens.

NOTE

To select icons not shown on the screen, swipe the icon selection area up and down to scroll the screen. The screen can also be scrolled by tapping the icon categories on the left side of the screen.

Tapping the keyboard input area on a MODULE LABEL screen will reopen the keyboard.

AUTO MIXER Function

AUTO MIXER overview

This unit has an AUTO MIXER Function designed for speech that uses a gain sharing technique to keep volume stable.

The AUTO MIXER of this unit compares each mic input and the sum of all mic inputs and automatically adjusts the AUTO MIXER GAIN level of each mic input so that the level of output from the AUTO MIXER is equivalent whether there is a single mic input or multiple mic inputs.

The balance of the channels can be altered. For example, the levels of specific channels can be mixed higher or lower according to their WEIGHT value settings. This will change the gain distribution, but the sum of output levels from the AUTO MIXER will not change.

The four AUTO MIXER groups (A/B/C/D) can each be used to create up to four independent mixes.

NOTE

The AUTO MIXER functions immediately after the FADER and MUTE of the CH 1–16 modules (i.e., post fader). For this reason, pre-send signals including those sent to monitors, are not affected.

Post send signals to MIX and FX buses are from after the AUTO MIXER.

Extraction from the block diagram around the AUTO MIXER

The AUTO MIXER function of this unit is designed for meetings and other forms of speech. Be aware that it is not designed for instruments and music.

AUTO MIXER settings are subject to snapshots.

Preparations and procedures for using the AUTO MIXER function

1.Make the following settings when the AUTO MIXER function itself is off.

Adjust the mic preamp gains that will be subject to the AUTO MIXER and balance the mic volumes.

Set the faders to 0 dB and MUTE to OFF for the channels that will be subject to the AUTO MIXER.

2.Set the channel group to which mics subject to the AUTO MIXER are assigned to one of the AUTO MIXER groups (A, B, C or D). (See “ Channel group assignment button”.)

Set the channel group to which mics not subject to the AUTO MIXER are assigned to “---”.

3.Turn the AUTO MIXER function ON for the group selected in step 2. (See “ Group AUTO MIXER function ON/OFF buttons”.)

4.Turn the AUTO MIXER function itself ON. (See “ AUTO MIXER function overall ON/OFF button”.)

AUTOMATIC MIXER Screen

On this screen, make settings for the AUTO MIXER function included in the CH 1–16 modules.

AUTOMATIC MIXER Screen display procedures

Use the following procedures to open this screen.

Tap Menu screen > Mixer Setup menu > Automatic Mixer

Tap the AUTO MIXER GROUP button when the AUTO MIXER parameter is shown in the SEND area on the Home Screen

Tap the AUTO MIXER button on the MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screen of a CH 1–16 module

AUTOMATIC MIXER content explanation

AUTOMATIC MIXER Screen when LCD knobs are controlling WEIGHT

AUTOMATIC MIXER Screen when LCD knobs are controlling LO CUT & RELEASE

DUAL SCREEN button

Tap the or button to add display of the AUTOMATIC MIXER Screen to the touchscreen in the direction of the arrow. By doing this, all the AUTO MIXER settings and operation states for CH 1–16 (which are subject to the AUTO MIXER) can be checked and worked with at the same time on two touchscreens.

If the AUTOMATIC MIXER Screen is already open on the touchscreen in the direction of the arrow, tapping the or button will close the AUTOMATIC MIXER Screen on the tapped touchscreen.

Knob target selection buttons

Tapping these buttons switches the operation targets of the LCD knobs shown at the bottom of the AUTOMATIC MIXER Screen. Those LCD knobs can be used to adjust the parameters shown.

The selected button will be highlighted.

Button	Function
WEIGHT (default)	The WEIGHT value of each channel can be adjusted.
LO CUT & RELEASE	The LO CUT and RELEASE TIME of each group can be adjusted.

NOTE

The knob operation target can also be changed by tapping the GAIN level meter () in the channel settings display area () or the WEIGHT setting indicator () area.

TOP PRIORITY ON/OFF button

Use this button to activate priority of the groups selected for TOP PRIORITY.

Tap this button to turn the TOP PRIORITY setting ON or OFF. (Default: OFF)

NOTE

This button will be disabled if the Auto Mixer Priority Inhibit setting on the PREFERENCES screen is ON (default: ON). (See “ Auto Mixer Priority Inhibit switch”.)

When ON, the group selected for TOP PRIORITY will have increased priority and channels assigned to different groups will be muted. When on, this button and the following “TOP” icons will appear highlighted.

“TOP” icon for TOP PRIORITY subject (See “ TOP PRIORITY selection status”.)

“TOP” icons for group assignment buttons for channels that are assigned to this group (See “ Channel group assignment button”.)

AUTOMATIC MIXER Screen when LCD knobs are controlling WEIGHT

AUTOMATIC MIXER Screen when LCD knobs are controlling LO CUT & RELEASE

TOP PRIORITY group selection button

Use this to select the group to prioritize with the TOP PRIORITY ON/OFF button.

This shows the name of the group selected for TOP PRIORITY.

Tap this button to open the TOP PRIORITY group selection window.

Tap an option to select the TOP PRIORITY group. (A is selected by default.)

AUTO MIXER function overall ON/OFF button

This turns on/off the AUTO MIXER function itself. (Default: OFF)

Tap this button to open a confirmation message.

Tap the ON or OFF button to switch it on/off.

Tap the CANCEL button to close the confirmation message.

When ON, buttons will be highlighted.

When OFF, all AUTO MIXER parameters for all modules will appear dimmed.

button

Tap this button to open the menu for the selected AUTOMATIC MIXER Screen.

Tap the menu or button to close the menu.

Tap the Reset button in the menu to open a confirmation message for resetting the AUTO MIXER settings to their factory defaults.

Tap the RESET button restore the AUTO MIXER function to its factory default settings.

Tap the CANCEL button to close the confirmation message.

AUTOMATIC MIXER Screen when LCD knobs are controlling WEIGHT

AUTOMATIC MIXER Screen when LCD knobs are controlling LO CUT & RELEASE

Meter and indicator display selection tabs

Use these tabs to select the display mode for the meter and indicator display area ().

Buttons selected by tapping will be highlighted.

Meter/indicator display mode

Meaning

METER

INPUT & OUTPUT

(default)

Input and output level meters will be shown for the AUTO MIXER.

The input levels from each channel to the AUTO MIXER are shown as yellow meters on the left side of each channel.

The output levels of each channel from the AUTO MIXER are shown as yellowish-green meters on the right side of each channel.

GAIN & WEIGHT

AUTO MIXER GAIN level meters and WEIGHT setting indicators will be shown.

GAIN level meters for the channels that are automatically controlled by the AUTO MIXER are shown in red on their left sides.

WEIGHT setting indicators for each channel are shown to their right in light blue.

Meter and indicator display area

This row of 16 channels of meters and indicators shows AUTO MIXER input and output levels and setting states.

The content shown can be switched by tapping the meter and indicator display selection tabs (). In addition, tapping this area switches the channels subject to operation in the channel settings display area ().

The selected display of channels subject to operation will become highlighted and the channel settings display area () will be shown. (default: CH1-8)

Group assignment states

This shows the group assignment state of each channel.

The background color depends on the selected group.

When the group AUTO MIXER function is OFF, these will appear dimmed.

TOP PRIORITY selection status

If the selected group is TOP PRIORITY, a “TOP” icon will be shown to the right of the group name.

When the TOP PRIORITY setting is ON, the “TOP” icon will appear highlighted.

Group AUTO MIXER function ON/OFF buttons

These turn the AUTO MIXER function on/off for each group. (Default: ON)

Tap this button to open a confirmation message.

Tap the ON or OFF button to switch it on/off.

Tap the CANCEL button to close the confirmation message.

When ON, buttons will be highlighted.

When OFF, the AUTO MIXER parameters for the channels assigned to this group will appear dimmed.

AUTOMATIC MIXER Screen when LCD knobs are controlling WEIGHT

AUTOMATIC MIXER Screen when LCD knobs are controlling LO CUT & RELEASE

Group PRIORITY setting ON/OFF buttons

These turn on/off the PRIORITY settings of each group. (Default: OFF)

NOTE

This button will be disabled if the Auto Mixer Priority Inhibit setting on the PREFERENCES screen is ON (default: ON). (See “ Auto Mixer Priority Inhibit switch”.)

When ON, this button will appear highlighted and the priority of channels in the group that have their PRIORITY set to “ON” will be increased while those with PRIORITY set to “OFF” will be muted.

In addition, the channel PRIORITY setting ON/OFF buttons () that meet the following conditions will appear highlighted.

In the same group as the group PRIORITY setting ON/OFF buttons ()

Set to “ON”

AUTOMATIC MIXER Screen when LCD knobs are controlling WEIGHT

AUTOMATIC MIXER Screen when LCD knobs are controlling LO CUT & RELEASE

Channel settings display area

This shows the AUTO MIXER settings of each channel.

The background color depends on the selected group.

When the group AUTO MIXER function is OFF, this will appear dimmed.

AUTOMATIC MIXER Screen when LCD knobs are controlling WEIGHT

Channel group assignment button

Each channel can be assigned to 4 AUTO MIXER groups (A/B/C/D). Each group can be used to create up to four independent mixes.

This shows the name of the selected group.

The color of the channel setting display area changes according to the select group.

If the button is selected, it will not be subject to the AUTO MIXER and “---” will be shown.

If the selected group is TOP PRIORITY, a “TOP” icon will be shown to the left of the group name. When the TOP PRIORITY setting is ON, this “TOP” icon will appear highlighted.

Tap this area to open a window where the channel group can be assigned.

Tap an option to select the group for that channel. (Default: A)

Channel PRIORITY setting ON/OFF button

Use this to select a channel for prioritization when the Group PRIORITY setting ON/OFF button is ON.

Tap this button to turn PRIORITY ON or OFF for the channel. (Default: OFF)

When ON, the color of this button will become as follows.

Setting on the PRIORITY button of the group that the channel is assigned to	Button color
ON	Appears highlighted
OFF	Appears dim light blue

NOTE

This button will be disabled if the Auto Mixer Priority Inhibit setting on the PREFERENCES screen is ON (default: ON). (See “ Auto Mixer Priority Inhibit switch”.)

GAIN level meter

This shows the gain level as it is automatically adjusted by the AUTO MIXER function.

GATE indicator

This indicator shows whether or not the gate is open for the subject channel in the AUTO MIXER.

This lights when the GATE is closed and the input level to the AUTO MIXER is −90 dB or less. When the input level to the AUTO MIXER is −84 dB or higher and the GATE is open, it will be unlit.

WEIGHT setting indicator

Shows the WEIGHT value, which extends up or down from the center, as set by the WEIGHT knob ().

NOTE

The knob operation target can also be changed by tapping the GAIN level meter () or the WEIGHT setting indicator () area.

AUTOMATIC MIXER Screen when LCD knobs are controlling WEIGHT

AUTOMATIC MIXER Screen when LCD knobs are controlling LO CUT & RELEASE

Knob operation area

Use the corresponding LCD knobs to adjust the various AUTO MIXER parameters.

When LCD knobs control WEIGHT

The WEIGHT value of each channel can be set.

WEIGHT knob

This sets gain distribution within the same AUTO MIXER group for when multiple people are speaking at the same time.

WEIGHT value settings change the gain distribution, but the sum of output levels from the AUTO MIXER does not change.

When the knob target selection button (2) has been used to select “WEIGHT”, use the corresponding LCD knob (lit light blue) to adjust the WEIGHT value of that channel.

Range: −15 dB – +15 dB (default: 0 dB)

NOTE

This does not affect the volume when only one person is speaking.

Setting examples

Increase the WEIGHT value of the channel used by an important speaker.

Increase the WEIGHT value of channels that are difficult to hear.

Decrease the WEIGHT value of channels that sound louder than the others.

When LCD knobs are controlling LO CUT & RELEASE

The LO CUT and RELEASE TIME of each group can be set.

LO CUT

This low-cut filter for the group is applied to the signal that is used to determine the AUTO MIXER level. Use this for the purpose of reducing fluctuations in AUTO MIXER gain due to the impact of background noises that are unrelated to voices.

- 1 LO CUT on/off button

This button switches on/off the LO CUT for the group. (Default: off)

When the knob target selection button () has been used to select “LO CUT & RELEASE”, tap this button to switch the state.

When this is on, the button will appear highlighted.

- 2 LO CUT knob

This adjusts the cutoff frequency of the LO CUT for the group.

When the knob target selection button () has been used to select “LO CUT & RELEASE”, use LCD knobs 1/3/5/7 (lit orange/pink/purple/yellowish-green) to adjust the groups individually.

Range: 125 Hz – 4.00 kHz (default: 125 Hz)

RELEASE knob

Use this to adjust the time until the reduced gain level is restored to normal when only one person continues speaking after there had been multiple voices, for example.

When the knob target selection button () has been used to select “LO CUT & RELEASE”, use LCD knobs 2/4/6/8 (lit orange/pink/purple/yellowish-green) to adjust the release times for groups individually.

Range: 5 ms – 1.00 s (default: 500 ms)

Group AUTO MIXER function OFF indicator

“OFF” will appear when the group AUTO MIXER function ON/OFF button is OFF.

Snapshot functions

Snapshots of unit mixer settings can be named and saved for recall at any time.

In addition to recalling them from the Snapshot List Screen, they can also be recall using USER KEYS, FOOTSWITCH and GPIO-IN controls.

The following data is included in snapshots.

Input and output settings

Routing settings (INPUT/OUTPUT)

Internal oscillator input on/off

Analog gain

Pad on/off

Phantom power on/off

Phase button settings

Digital trim value settings

Direct out signal settings (on/off, trim, routing)

Insert input/output settings (on/off, point, routing)

Bus assignment settings (MIX bus, MAIN bus)

Analog gain, pad on/off and phantom power on/off for mounted SB-16D units

Signal processing settings

HPF parameters

EQ parameters

GEQ parameters

Dynamics parameters

Digital delay (delay time, on/off, point)

Effect parameters

Bus send settings (level, pre/post, pan/balance)

Pan/balance settings, image, mode

Fader/mute settings

Other module settings

DCA/MUTE group settings

Stereo link settings

Bus mode settings (AUX/GROUP)

Metering point settings

Module name, color and icon settings

User module label, module setting color and icon settings

LABEL SETUP Screen settings

MODULE (OUTPUT) Screen SELECT PORT LABEL mode setting

AFV settings

AUTO MIXER settings

Other settings

Internal oscillator settings (on/off, assignment, level, type, frequency)

Talkback settings (phantom power on/off, digital trim value)

Layer settings (layer key assignments, custom layer assignments, custom layer names for apps)

Brightness settings for the various displays

This setting data is saved.

Moreover, when recalling snapshots, specified parameters can be protected so that they are not changed. (For example, routings can be kept the same when recalling snapshots.)

NOTE

Settings of output connectors with the following signals assigned will not be changed by snapshot recalls.

SOLO DIRECT OUT L/R (See “ OUTPUT button”.)

TB to EXT 1/2 (See “ EXT 1 OUT / EXT 2 OUT buttons”.)

MONITOR 1 DIRECT OUT L/R (See “ Direct OUT PORT button (MONITOR 1)”.)

MONITOR 2 DIRECT OUT L/R (See “ Direct OUT PORT button (MONITOR 2)”.)

MONITOR 2 OUT L/R (See “ OUTPUT PORT button (MONITOR 2)”.)

For this reason, the following output routings might not be changed after snapshot recalls.

MIX 1–22

MAIN L/R

CH 1–40 Direct OUT

Insert Send

Example of MAIN L/R routing being affected

When the routing setting is
“MON 2 OUT L/R to ANALOG OUT 15/16”
and a snapshot is recalled with routing set to
“MAIN L/R OUT to ANALOG OUT 15/16”

The “MAIN L/R OUT to ANALOG OUT 15/16” setting
will not be recalled. Instead,
the “MON 2 OUT L/R to ANALOG OUT 15/16” setting
will be retained.

Using snapshot functions at the top of the Menu Screen

Snapshot functions can be conducted using the snapshot function area on the Menu Screen and from the Snapshot List Screen.

In this explanation, areas where snapshot data are saved are called “slots” or “data slots”.

Snapshot number

This shows the number of the snapshot active for storing and recalling. This will blink if it is not the same as the current snapshot (most recently stored/recalled snapshot).

Tap this area to open the Snapshot List Screen. (See “Snapshot List Screen”.)

Snapshot name area

This shows the name of the snapshot active for storing and recalling. This will blink if it is not the same as the current snapshot (most recently stored/recalled snapshot).

Tap this area to open the Snapshot List Screen. (See “Snapshot List Screen”.)

Snapshot selection button

Tap this button to switch to the snapshot that is one number lower, also switching to the corresponding name.

Press and hold this button to keep showing lower numbered snapshots.

Tapping this when the snapshot number is “001” will show “P0xx”, which is the highest numbered preset.

Tapping this when the snapshot number is “P001” will switch to “128”.

Snapshot selection button

Tap this button to switch to the snapshot that is one number higher, also switching to the corresponding name.

Press and hold this button to keep showing higher numbered snapshots.

Tapping this when the snapshot number is “128” will switch to “P001”.

Tapping this when the snapshot number is “P0xx”, which is the highest numbered preset, will switch to “001”.

STORE button

Tap this button to store (save) the current settings to the data slot shown. (See “Storing snapshots”.)

If a locked data slot is shown, this button will appear gray.

RECALL button

Tap this button to recall the data slot settings of the snapshot number/name shown. (See “Recalling snapshots”.)

If an empty data slot is shown, this button will appear gray.

icon

Tap this icon to open the CONFIRMATION settings window.

Tap these switches to set whether or not confirmation messages are shown when storing and recalling snapshots.

Tap this button again to close the CONFIRMATION setting window.

NOTE

These settings can also be set on the PREFERENCES Screen. (See “PREFERENCES screen”.)

icon

Tap this icon to close the Menu Screen.

icon

This icon will appear if the snapshot shown is locked.

(EDIT) icon

This icon will appear if settings have been changed for the last stored/recalled (current) snapshot.

Storing snapshots

Follow one of the procedures below to store (save) snapshot data.

Using STORE at the top of the Menu Screen

1.Tap the / buttons to show the snapshot number ()/name () of the save destination data slot.

2.Tap the STORE button ().

If the save destination data slot is empty, the settings of the current snapshot will be stored in it.

If the save destination data slot is not empty and the CONFIRMATION settings window STORE setting is ON, a save confirmation message will be shown.

Tapping the STORE button on the confirmation message will store the current snapshot settings in the data slot and close the message.

Tapping the CANCEL button on the confirmation message will close the message without storing.

3.After storing completes, a storing completion message will appear for about two seconds.

Storing snapshots on the Snapshot List Screen

1.Do one of the following to show the save destination data slot in the snapshot list display area.

Tap the / buttons

Turn LCD knob 8

Swipe the list up or down

Drag the scrollbar up or down

2.Tap the save destination data slot to select it.

This highlights the data slot.

3.Tap the STORE button ().

If the save destination data slot is empty, the settings of the current snapshot will be stored in it.

If the save destination data slot is not empty and the CONFIRMATION settings window STORE setting is ON, a save confirmation message will be shown.

Tapping the STORE button on the confirmation message will store the current snapshot settings in the data slot and close the message.

Tapping the CANCEL button on the confirmation message will close the message without storing.

4.After storing completes, a storing completion message will appear for about two seconds.

Storing using a control set on the USER DEFINED CONTROL Screen

If the Function and Parameter 1 settings on the USER DEFINED CONTROL Screen are as follows, the snapshot stored depends on the Parameter 2 setting.

Function	Parameter1
Snapshot	Store

Pressing the control when Parameter 2 is set to “Selected”

This stores the current snapshot settings in the data slot shown by the snapshot number ()/name () at the top of the Menu Screen.

Pressing the control when Parameter 2 is set to “No.”

This stores the current snapshot settings in the data slot number specified by Parameter 3.

Pressing the control when Parameter 2 is set to “+Target Key”

Press simultaneously with a control that has Function set to Snapshot and Parameter 1 set to Target to store the current snapshot settings in the data slot number specified by Parameter 2 and Parameter 3 of that control.

However, even when Function is set to Snapshot and Parameter 1 is set to Target, this will not work if the key assigned to Parameter 2 as “Next” or “Prev” is pressed at the same time.

NOTE

Snapshot names when stored

When stored, snapshots are automatically named based on the current snapshot name with additional data added as follows to make the generation clear.

1st generation: base name

2nd generation: base name+_XX (2-digit number)

3rd generation: base name+_XX+a-z (single lowercase letter)

When a name cannot be added automatically,

Cannot generate default name automatically.

Change name

[CANCEL] [RENAME]

will appear.

To change a name when storing, press the RENAME button to open the RENAME Screen.

Input a name that is not the same as existing data and tap Enter to store it.

*Conditions that prevent names from being added automatically

The current snapshot has a 1st generation name and data named “currentname_99” already exists.

The current snapshot has a 2nd generation name with “_XX” added and data named “currentname_XXz” already exists.

The current snapshot has a 3rd generation name.

When using a USER DEFINED CONTROL to store a snapshot excluding the current one, the name will be “USER KEY + data slot number”.

Recalling snapshots

Follow one of the procedures below to recall (load) snapshot data.

Using RECALL at the top of the Menu Screen

1.Tap the / buttons to open the snapshot number ()/name () of the data slot to be recalled.

2.Tap the RECALL button ().

If the CONFIRMATION settings window RECALL setting is ON, a confirmation message will be shown.

Tapping the RECALL button on the confirmation message will recall the snapshot and close the message.

Tapping the CANCEL button on the confirmation message will close the message without recalling.

3.After recalling completes, a recall completion message will appear for about two seconds.

Recalling snapshots on the Snapshot List Screen

1.Do one of the following to show the data slot to be recalled in the snapshot list display area.

Tap the / buttons

Turn LCD knob 8

Swipe the list up or down

Drag the scrollbar up or down

2.Tap the data slot to be recalled to select it.

This highlights the data slot.

3.Tap the RECALL button ().

If the CONFIRMATION settings window RECALL setting is ON, a confirmation message will be shown.

Tapping the RECALL button on the confirmation message will recall the snapshot and close the message.

Tapping the CANCEL button on the confirmation message will close the message without recalling.

4.After recalling completes, a recall completion message will appear for about two seconds.

Recalling using a control set on the USER DEFINED CONTROL Screen

If the Function and Parameter 1 settings on the USER DEFINED CONTROL Screen are as follows, the snapshot recalled depends on the Parameter 2 setting.

Function	Parameter1
Snapshot	Recall

Pressing the control when Parameter 2 is set to “Selected”

This recalls the settings in the data slot shown by the snapshot number ()/name () at the top of the Menu Screen.

Pressing the control when Parameter 2 is set to “Next” or “Prev”

This recalls the settings stored in the data slot one before/after (excluding presets) the snapshot shown by the number ()/name () at the top of the Menu Screen.

Pressing the control when Parameter 2 is set to “No.”

This recalls the settings in the data slot number specified by Parameter 3.

Pressing the control when Parameter 2 is set to “+Target Key”

Press simultaneously with a control that has Function set to Snapshot and Parameter 1 set to Target to recall the settings in the data slot number specified by Parameter 2 and Parameter 3 of that control.

NOTE

Limitations on recalling snapshot data from a different model (Sonicview 16XP/Sonicview 24XP)

When recalling snapshot data from a different model, a confirmation message like the following will be shown.

Message when recalling Sonicview 16XP snapshot data on a Sonicview 24XP

This is Sonicview 16 data.

Some parameters cannot be recalled.

Recall this data? [CANCEL] [RECALL]

Tap the RECALL button to recall. When recalling, compatible settings will be recalled as is. The following incompatible settings will be handled as shown.

Snapshot settings that are not compatible between Sonicview 24XP and Sonicview 16XP models

When recalling Sonicview 24XP data on a Sonicview 16XP

When recalling Sonicview 16XP data on a Sonicview 24XP

Analog input 17–24 settings

M/L 17–24 Input Assign

Not imported

No assignment

M/L 17–24 Phantom ON/OFF

Not imported

Set to OFF

M/L 17–24 PAD ON/OFF

Not imported

Set to OFF

M/L 17–24 Analog GAIN

Not imported

Set to minimum value

Fader 17–24 settings

Fader 17–24 Custom Layer Mapping

Not imported

No assignment

Layer Key Assign

Converted and imported as follows (re-creating original data as much as possible)

Sonicview 16XP Preset Layer

Sonicview 24XP Preset Layer

Recalled Sonicview 24XP data

Sonicview 16XP settings after recall

Recalled Sonicview 16XP data

Sonicview 24XP settings after recall

CH 1–16

CH 1–24

RIGHTWARDS ARROW

CH 1–16

RIGHTWARDS ARROW

CH 1–24

CH 17–32

CH 25–40/ST IN/FX RTN

RIGHTWARDS ARROW

CH 17–32

RIGHTWARDS ARROW

CH 1–24

CH 33–40/ST IN/FX RTN

MIX 1–22

MIX 1–22/MAIN L/R

RIGHTWARDS ARROW

MIX 1–16

CH 33–40/ST IN/FX RTN

RIGHTWARDS ARROW

CH 25–40/ST IN/FX RTN

MIX 1–16

DCA 1–8

RIGHTWARDS ARROW

DCA 1–8

MIX 1–16

RIGHTWARDS ARROW

MIX 1–22/MAIN L/R

MIX 17–22

CUSTOM 1 – CUSTOM 7

RIGHTWARDS ARROW

CUSTOM 1 – CUSTOM 7

MIX 17–22/MAIN L/R

RIGHTWARDS ARROW

MIX 1–22/MAIN L/R

---

RIGHTWARDS ARROW

---

DCA 1–8

RIGHTWARDS ARROW

DCA 1–8

ATTENTION

Be aware that the following will be discarded in this case.

CH 33–40/ST IN/FX RTN

MIX 17–22/MAIN L/R

CUSTOM 1 – CUSTOM 7

RIGHTWARDS ARROW

CUSTOM 1 – CUSTOM 7

---

RIGHTWARDS ARROW

---

Snapshot List Screen

Conduct snapshot function operations and setting data management and editing on this screen.

In this explanation, areas where snapshot and library data are saved are called “slots” or “data slots”.

Open this screen by tapping the snapshot number/name area at the top left of the Menu Screen.

Snapshot number

This shows the number of the snapshot active for storing and recalling.

This will blink if it is not the same as the current snapshot (most recently stored/recalled snapshot).

Snapshot name area

This shows the name of the snapshot active for storing and recalling.

This will blink if it is not the same as the current snapshot (most recently stored/recalled snapshot).

Snapshot selection button

This has the same function as the Snapshot selection button on the Menu Screen.

Snapshot selection button

This has the same function as the Snapshot selection button on the Menu Screen.

STORE button

This has the same function as the STORE button on the Menu Screen.

RECALL button

This has the same function as the RECALL button on the Menu Screen.

icon

This has the same function as the icon on the Menu Screen.

icon

Tap this icon to close the Snapshot List Screen and return to the Menu Screen.

icon

This has the same function as the icon on the Menu Screen.

(EDIT) icon

This has the same function as the icon on the Menu Screen.

LOCK/UNLOCK buttons

These show the locked/unlocked states of the data slots.

Button	Use
	Unlocked
	Locked

If setting data has not been saved in a slot, it will appear gray.

Tap a / icon to open a LOCK/UNLOCK switching window for the data slot.

Tap a LOCK/UNLOCK option to switch the status.

Locked data slots cannot be deleted, renamed, overwritten and stored, or pasted into.

PRESET button

Tap this button to move to the preset data (P001–) location in the snapshot list.

icon

This icon is shown for data slots that have had snapshots setting data copied to the internal storage.

NOTE

The icon is shown until new snapshot setting data is copied or until the unit power is turned off. The icon will also disappear if the copy source is deleted, overwritten or renamed.

RECALL SAFE button

This shows the Recall Safe setting status. If any are set to Recall Safe, this button will be highlighted.

Tap this button to open the SNAPSHOT RECALL SAFE Screen where settings that will be protected (retained) when snapshots are recalled can be selected. (See “SNAPSHOT RECALL SAFE screen”.)

IMPORT/EXPORT button

Tap this button to open the SNAPSHOT IMPORT/EXPORT Screen. (See “SNAPSHOT IMPORT / EXPORT screen”.)

Snapshot list

This shows snapshot numbers and names.

Data slots without any saved data are shown with horizontal bars.

The selected data slot will be highlighted.

“P” is added before the numbers of preset snapshots.

A yellow frame will be shown around the number of the current snapshot (most recently stored/recalled snapshot).

Snapshot editing menu button ()

This button only appears for the selected data slot.

Tap this button to open a menu for editing the selected data slot.

See “Library menu” for details.

RECALL UNDO/REDO button

Tap this button to undo/redo snapshot recall.

RECALL UNDO cancels the last snapshot recall and restores settings to their state before the recall.

RECALL REDO cancels the undo operation and restores settings to their state before the undo.

Comments

This shows the contents input in the COMMENT field on the RENAME Screen, which is opened by tapping the Rename button in the snapshot editing menu.

This shows as much of the added comments as possible from their beginnings.

Two lines will be shown if the content does not fit on one line. If the content still does not fit, the second line will end with …

Scroll knob and scrollbar

Drag the scrollbar to scroll the screen. The Snapshot List () and Comments () can also be scrolled by swiping up and down as well as by turning LCD knob 8.

Library menu

Use this to edit library data.

These buttons will be gray when they cannot be used.

Rename button

Tap this button to open the RENAME Screen.

If the current data slot is locked or setting data has not been saved in it, this will appear gray.

The snapshot name can have up to 16 characters.

The other library name can have up to 17 characters.

The snapshot comment can have up to 32 characters.

For snapshots, a comment field that can be edited will appear on the right side.

The combination of characters input can be changed depending on the status of the Caps lock and Shift keyboard buttons on the RENAME Screen. See “Changing the keyboard keys” for details about changing the keyboard.

ATTENTION

The following symbols and punctuation marks cannot be input.

¥ / : * ? " < > |

NOTE

A USB keyboard connected to the top panel USB port can also be used to input and edit characters.

Copy button

Tap this button to copy the settings data of the selected snapshot.

NOTE

The LIBRARY Screen for snapshots is the only one that has Copy and Paste functions.

Paste button

Tap this button to paste the settings data of the copied snapshot to the selected data slot.

This will appear gray for locked snapshots.

NOTE

The LIBRARY Screen for snapshots is the only one that has Copy and Paste functions.

Delete button

Tap this button to open a confirmation message for deleting the selected data.

If the current data slot is locked or setting data has not been saved in it, this will appear gray.

Tap the CANCEL button to close the confirmation message.

Tapping the DELETE button will delete the selected data and close the confirmation message.

button

Tap this button to close the Library Menu.

Copying snapshots

1.Select the snapshot to copy and tap the snapshot editing menu button ().

2.Tap the Copy button.

An icon will appear next to the copied snapshot.

3.Select the data slot where it will be pasted and tap the snapshot editing menu button ().

4.Tap the Paste button to paste it with a name given according to the snapshot storage rules. (See “ STORE button”.)

When a name cannot be added automatically, the RENAME screen will open. In this case, input a name that is not the same as existing data and tap the Enter button to paste and return to the Snapshot List Screen.

NOTE

When snapshot setting data is saved in the paste destination, a confirmation message will be shown.

Tap the CANCEL button to close the confirmation message.

Tap the OVERWRITE button to paste it with a name given according to the snapshot storage rules. (See “ STORE button”.)

The icon is shown until new snapshot setting data is copied or until the unit power is turned off. The icon will also disappear if the copy source is deleted, overwritten or renamed.

SNAPSHOT RECALL SAFE screen

The following settings can be made on this screen.

PARAMETER SAFE page

Use this to select parameters that will be protected (settings retained) when snapshots are recalled.

MODULE SAFE page

Use this to select modules that will be protected (settings retained) when snapshots are recalled.

Tap the RECALL SAFE button on the Snapshot List Screen to open this screen.

PARAMETER SAFE page

The recall safe function can be activated for specific groups of settings on this page.

Tap checkboxes in rows to activate the recall safe function for them.

Selected rows will have check marks () and be highlighted light blue.

NOTE

Settings included in INPUT/OSC PARAMETERS

Analog Gain

Analog Gain GANG On/Off

PAD On/Off

Phantom On/Off

Phase

D.Trim

HPF Freq

HPF On/Off

CH OSC INPUT

OSC On/Off

OSC Assign

OSC Level

OSC Type

OSC Freq

Settings included in OTHER MODULE PARAMETERS

Gate/Expander/De-Esser Parameters

EQ Parameters

GEQ Parameters

Comp/Ducker Parameters

Module Delay Parameters

Fader

Mute

MAIN L/R Assign

PAN/BAL

PAN LINK

Image

Mode

Direct Out Parameters

AFV Parameters

Auto Mixer Parameters

Talkback Phantom On/Off

Talkback D.Trim

Metering Point

LCD Brightness

MODULE SAFE page

The recall safe function can be activated for modules on this page.

Tap the buttons for modules to be selected for recall safe protection.

Selected module buttons will be highlighted and have yellow frames.

SNAPSHOT IMPORT / EXPORT screen

On the screen, snapshot settings data in this unit’s internal storage can be exported to loaded SD cards and USB flash drives. This data can also be imported from these external storage devices.

Tap the IMPORT/EXPORT button on the Snapshot List Screen to open this screen.

Media selection button

This shows the name of the currently selected media.

Tap this button to open a window where the import source/export destination can be set.

Options: USB, SD

Tap an option to switch the import source/export destination.

Folder

This shows the import source/export destination folder name.

The following folder on the external media is the import source/export destination folder.

\\TASCAM\SONICVIEW\SNAPSHOT

Snapshot list

This is a list of snapshots in the unit’s internal storage.

Snapshot List scroll knob and scrollbar

Drag the scrollbar to scroll the screen. The Snapshot List () can also be scrolled by swiping up and down as well as by turning LCD knob 4.

IMPORT/EXPORT mode buttons

Tap the (right arrow) button to switch the screen to export mode. The button will be highlighted () when switched to export mode.

Tap the (left arrow) button to switch the screen to import mode. The button will be highlighted () when switched to import mode.

NOTE

The unit will be set to export mode when it is turned on. After switching the setting, the last selected state will be retained until the unit is turned off.

List of data on selected media

This is a list of snapshot data on the selected media.

If the selected media type is not loaded, the following message will appear in the data list area.

IMPORT/EXPORT button

The button shown depends on the setting of the IMPORT/EXPORT mode button ().

When in import mode, the button will be highlighted if both the import source and destination have been selected.

When in export mode, the button will be highlighted if the snapshot to be exported has been selected.

Tap this button when highlighted to execute the import/export operation.

Export data list scroll knob and scrollbar

If the number of snapshots on the selected media cannot all be shown on the screen at once, the scrollbar will appear and the scroll knob will be highlighted.

Drag the scrollbar to scroll the screen.

The list of data on the selected media () can also be scrolled by swiping up and down as well as by turning LCD knob 8.

Exporting snapshots

1.Tap the snapshot name area () on the Menu Screen to open the Snapshot List Screen. (See “Snapshot List Screen”.)

2.Tap the IMPORT/EXPORT button on the Snapshot List Screen to open the SNAPSHOT IMPORT/EXPORT Screen. (See “SNAPSHOT IMPORT / EXPORT screen”.)

3.Connect the export destination media (SD card/USB flash drive).

4.Use the media selection button () to select the media to use as the export destination. (See “ Media selection button”.)

5.Tap the EXPORT/IMPORT mode () button to switch to export mode.

6.In the list of snapshots in the unit’s internal storage (), tap the snapshot data to be exported.

The snapshot data to be exported and the EXPORT button will be highlighted.

7.Tap the EXPORT button.

The exported snapshot data will be added to the exported data list (), and an export complete message will appear at the top of the screen.

NOTE

A confirmation message will be shown if snapshot data with the same name already exists on the export destination media.

Tap the CANCEL button to cancel exporting and close the confirmation message.

Tap the OVERWRITE button to overwrite the data of the snapshot with the same name and close the confirmation message.

Tap the RENAME button to open the RENAME Screen. Input a name that is not the same as an existing snapshot name. Then, tap the Enter button to execute the export and return to the SNAPSHOT IMPORT/EXPORT Screen.

The following message will be shown if the export destination media is a locked SD card.

Cannot Export. SD card Locked.

One of the following messages will be shown if the export destination media does not have enough open space.

Cannot Export. SD card is full.

Cannot Export. USB memory is full.

Importing snapshots

ATTENTION

If a snapshot created on a unit with firmware version 1.1.0 or later is recalled by a unit with firmware version 1.0.x, proper operation will not be possible, so the following restriction applies.

Snapshots created on units with firmware version 1.1.0 or later cannot be imported by units with firmware version 1.0.x. (Snapshots created by units with firmware version 1.0.x can be imported by units with firmware version 1.1.0 or later.)

1.Tap the snapshot name area () on the Menu Screen to open the Snapshot List Screen. (See “Snapshot List Screen”.)

2.Tap the IMPORT/EXPORT button on the Snapshot List Screen to open the SNAPSHOT IMPORT/EXPORT Screen. (See “SNAPSHOT IMPORT / EXPORT screen”.)

3.Connect the import source media (SD card/USB flash Drive).

4.Use the media selection button () to select the media to use as the import source. (See “ Media selection button”.)

5.Tap the EXPORT/IMPORT mode () button to switch to import mode.

6.If the list of data on the selected media () has no snapshot data that you want to import, tap the folder selection button to the right of the media selection button to open the folder selection menu.

If the entire pull-down menu cannot be shown on the display, use LCD knob 8, the scrollbar or swipe gestures to scroll the screen.

Tap “ GREATER-THAN SIGN ” to the left of a folder name to open that folder and show its contents.

Tap “” to the left of the name of a folder to close it.

Tap the name of a folder to select it.

The name of the selected folder is reflected in the folder selection button path display field.

Folder selection pull-down menu example

7.After selecting the desired folder, tap the “” at the left end of the folder selection button to close the folder selection pull-down menu.

8.In the list of data on the selected media (), tap the snapshot data to be imported.

The snapshot data to be imported will be highlighted.

9.In the list of snapshots in the unit’s internal storage (), tap the input destination data slot.

The import destination data slot and the IMPORT button will appear highlighted.

10.Tap the IMPORT button.

The imported snapshot data will be added to the snapshot list ().

NOTE

An OVERWRITE confirmation message will be shown if snapshot data with the same name as the import source already exists in the import destination data slot.

A REPLACE confirmation message will be shown if snapshot data with a different name from the import source exists in the import destination data slot.

Tap the CANCEL button to cancel importing and close the confirmation message.

Tap the OVERWRITE button to import and overwrite the data of the snapshot with the same name and close the confirmation message.

Tap the REPLACE button to import and overwrite snapshot data with a different name and close the confirmation message.

The following message will be shown if the import destination slot is locked.

Cannot Import. Target Locked.

Various LIBRARY Screens

This unit can store (save) and recall groups of various settings in libraries.

The selected GATE/EXPANDER/DE-ESSER type and its parameter settings

EQ parameter settings

The selected COMP/DUCKER type and its parameter settings

The selected FX type and its parameter settings

GEQ parameter settings

CH 1–40 and ST IN 1–2 module parameter settings

FX RTN 1–4 module parameter settings

MIX 1–22 and MAIN L/R Master module parameter settings

Tap the LIBRARY button on the GATE/EXP/DE-ESSER, EQ, COMP/DUCKER, FX or GEQ module screen to open the corresponding LIBRARY Screen.

CH 1–40 MODULE (EQ) Screen

To open LIBRARY screens (LIBRARY MODULE INPUT, LIBRARY MODULE FX RTN and LIBRARY MODULE OUTPUT screens) for modules, tap the button at the top right of a MODULE Screen. Then, tap MODULE Library in the menu list that appears.

The parameters included in module libraries are the same as the parameters used for Copy MODULE. (See “MODULE menu”.)

LIBRARY screen overview

Use various library functions and manage and edit library data on these screens.

Library list

This shows library item numbers and names.

Data slots without any saved data are shown with horizontal bars.

The selected data slot will be highlighted.

“P” is added before the numbers of library presets.

LIBRARY menu button ()

This button only appears for the selected data slot.

Tap this button to open the library menu for editing the selected data slot.

See “Library menu” for details.

Preview display

This shows a preview of the selected library data.

For module libraries, tap the tabs to change the preview contents.

Corresponding module name

This shows the user module label of the module active for library storing and recalling.

LOCK/UNLOCK buttons

These show the locked/unlocked states of the data slots.

Button	Use
	Unlocked
	Locked

If setting data has not been saved in a slot, it will appear gray.

Tap a / icon to open a LOCK/UNLOCK switching window for the data slot.

Tap a LOCK/UNLOCK option to switch the status.

Locked data slots cannot be deleted, renamed, or overwritten and stored.

PRESET button

Tap this button to move to the preset data (P001–) location in the library list.

RECALL SAFE button

This is shown for module libraries.

This shows the Recall Safe setting status. If any are set to Recall Safe, this button will be highlighted.

Tap this button to open the MODULE RECALL SAFE Screen where settings that will be protected (retained) when module libraries are recalled can be selected. (See “MODULE RECALL SAFE screens”.)

STORE button

Tap this button after selecting a data slot to store the currently selected module settings to that data slot.

If no data slot is selected or locked library data is selected, this button will appear gray.

Library data names when stored are as follows.

EQ/GEQ Library

USER MODULE LABEL_MMDDhhmm (month, day, hour, minute)

Example: CH1_06091557, Vocal_06091558

Dynamics Library

When the USER MODULE LABEL is already set	USER MODULE LABEL_MMDDhhmm (for example, Vocal_06091558)
When the USER MODULE LABEL is not set	Dynamics type_month day hour minute (without spaces) (for example, “GATE_06091557”)

FX Library

FX TYPE name_month day hour minute (without spaces)

Example: REVERB_06091557, ST REV_06091558

Module Library

Module name_month day hour minute

Example: CH1_06091557, Vocal_06091558

NOTE

If the data name when storing is the same as an existing data name, the following message will be shown.

Default name already exists.

change name.

[CANCEL] [RENAME]

A confirmation message will be shown if the selected data slot has settings data.

Tap the Cancel button to cancel storing in the library and close the confirmation message.

Tap the Replace button to overwrite the library settings data with the same name and close the confirmation message.

RECALL button

On LIBRARY MODULE Screens, after selecting the data slot, tap this button to open a window to confirm the data to be recalled.

Tap the button for the desired recall data to open a recall confirmation window.

Tap the Cancel button in the recall confirmation window to cancel recalling from the library and close the confirmation message.

Tap the Recall button in the recall confirmation window to recall the library settings data for the selected recall items to the currently selected module and return to the MODULE Screen.

On GATE/EXP/DE-ESSER, EQ, COMP/DUCKER, FX and GEQ library screens, after selecting the data slot, tap this button to open a recall confirmation window.

Tap the Cancel button to cancel recalling from the library and close the confirmation message.

Tap the Recall button to recall the library settings data to the currently selected module and return to the MODULE Screen.

If no data slot is selected or a data slot that does not have saved data is selected, this button will appear gray.

RECALL UNDO/REDO button

Tap this button to undo the last executed recall operation for that library or to redo that operation.

Undo and redo are only possible with the module that was last used for recall with that library. If a different module is selected or recall has not been conducted since startup, the Undo button will appear gray.

Scroll knob and scrollbar

Drag the scrollbar to scroll the screen. The LIBRARY List can also be scrolled by swiping up and down as well as by turning LCD knob 8.

MODULE RECALL SAFE screens

Use the following MODULE RECALL SAFE screens to select parameters that will be protected (settings retained) when module libraries are recalled.

MODULE INPUT RECALL SAFE screen

MODULE FX RTN RECALL SAFE screen

MODULE OUTPUT RECALL SAFE screen

Tap the RECALL SAFE buttons on the corresponding module library screens to open these screens.

NOTE

Settings included in INPUT PARAMETERS on the MODULE INPUT RECALL SAFE Screen

Analog Gain

Analog Gain GANG On/Off

Phantom On/Off

PAD On/Off

Phase

D.Trim

HPF Freq

HPF On/Off

The following parameters are not included in module libraries.

Routing

All System Data screen

On this screen, settings for the entire mixer including all snapshot and library data (“All System Data”) can be handled in the following ways.

All System Data can be saved as a file to the internal storage

All System Data can be recalled from the internal storage (and applied to the mixer)

All System Data can be backed up (exported as a file) to an SD card or USB flash drive

All System Data can be restored (imported as a file) from an SD card or USB flash drive to the internal storage

NOTE

The Password setting on the Network Setup Screen is excluded when backing up and restoring All System Data.

Tap Menu Screen > System Setup menu > All System Data to open this screen.

List of saved files

This list shows All System Data Files that have been saved in the internal storage.

The selected file is highlighted.

button

This button only appears for the selected file.

Tap this button to open a confirmation message for deleting the All System Data file.

Tap the CANCEL button to close the confirmation message.

Tapping the DELETE button will delete the selected All System Data file from the internal storage and close the confirmation message. The selected All System Data file will be removed from the list of saved files ().

SAVE button

Tap this button to save All System Data to the internal storage. (See “Saving all mixer settings”.)

LOAD button

Tap this button to load All System Data from the internal storage. (See “Loading all mixer settings”.)

If no All System Data file is selected, this button will appear gray.

NOTE

If the following two conditions apply, loading will not be possible and the button will appear gray.

OA Tally Inhibit switch is ON (See “ OA Tally Inhibit switch”.)

ON AIR Tally is input to GPIO-IN

Factory Reset button

This button restores setting values to their factory defaults by clearing all unit settings to their default values and erasing all types of user data* saved in the internal memory. (See “Restoring factory default settings”.)

*User data saved in internal memory includes

Saved All System Data

Data stored in snapshots

Data stored in various LIBRARY Screens

NOTE

If the following two conditions apply, resetting will not be possible and the button will appear gray.

OA Tally Inhibit switch is ON (See “ OA Tally Inhibit switch”.)

ON AIR Tally is input to GPIO-IN

BACKUP button

If no All System Data file is selected, this button will appear gray.

Tap this button when an All System Data file is selected to open a confirmation message for backing up that data to external memory. (See “Backing up all mixer settings”.)

RESTORE button

Tap this button to open the ALL SYSTEM DATA RESTORE Screen. (See “Restoring all mixer settings”.)

Scroll knob and scrollbar

If all the saved files cannot all be shown on the screen at once, the scrollbar will appear and the scroll knob will be highlighted.

Drag the scrollbar to scroll the screen. The list of saved files () can also be scrolled by swiping up and down as well as by turning LCD knob 8.

Saving all mixer settings

Follow the procedures below to save all mixer settings (All System Data) to the internal storage.

1.Tap the SAVE () button to open a confirmation message for saving All System Data.

2.Tapping the CANCEL button on the confirmation message will close the message.

Tapping the SAVE button on the confirmation message will save All System Data to the internal storage and close the confirmation message.

The name shown on the confirmation message will be added to the list of saved files ().

Loading all mixer settings

Follow the procedures below to load all mixer settings (All System Data) from the internal storage (applying them to the mixer).

1.Tap the LOAD button () when an All System Data file is selected to open a confirmation message to load that data.

NOTE

To load network settings, tap the “include NETWORK Settings” check box on the confirmation message to add a check () to it.

2.Tapping the CANCEL button on the confirmation message will close the message.

Tapping the LOAD button on the confirmation message will start loading the selected All System Data from the internal storage and close the confirmation message. The message shown below will appear while loading. After loading completes, the file will no longer be selected.

ATTENTION

Use caution, because loading All System Data will replace all Snapshot and LIBRARY settings data with the loaded data.

To keep the current data, save it before loading.

All System Data cannot be loaded with an IF-MTR32 that is currently recording or playing. Stop IF-MTR32 recording/playback before loading.

Backing up all mixer settings

All mixer settings (All System Data) in the internal storage can be backed up (exported as a file) to an SD card or USB flash drive.

1.Connect the media to use for backup.

2.Tap the file to be backed up to select it.

3.Tap the BACKUP button.

A confirmation message will appear.

If both an SD card and a USB flash drive are connected, tap the media selection button shown with a BLACK RIGHT-POINTING TRIANGLE and select the media to use for the backup.

4.Tapping the BACKUP button on the confirmation message will back up the All System Data file.

The backup data will be saved in the following fixed folder on the media used for backup.

\\TASCAM\SONICVIEW\ALL_SYSTEM_DATA

If that folder does not exist on the backup media, it will be created.

A confirmation message will be shown if a file with the same name already exists on the backup media.

Tap the CANCEL button to close the confirmation message.

Tap the OVERWRITE button to overwrite the All System Data file with the same name and close the confirmation message.

Tap the RENAME button to open the RENAME Screen. Input a name that is not the same as an existing All System Data file name. Then, tap the Enter button to execute the backup and return to the ALL SYSTEM DATA Screen.

The following message will be shown if the backup destination media is a locked SD card.

Cannot Backup. SD card Locked.

One of the following messages will be shown if the backup destination media does not have enough open space.

Cannot Backup. SD card is full.

Cannot Backup. USB memory is full.

Tap the CANCEL button to close the confirmation message.

Tapping the BACKUP button will back up (export) the All System Data file from the internal storage to the selected external media and close the confirmation message.

Restoring all mixer settings

All mixer settings (All System Data) that is backed up on an SD card or USB flash drive can be imported to the internal storage.

ATTENTION

If a Snapshot created on a unit with firmware version 1.1.0 or later is recalled by a unit with firmware version 1.0.x, proper operation will not be possible, so the following restriction applies.

All System Data created on units with firmware version 1.1.0 or later cannot be restored on units with firmware version 1.0.x. (All System Data created by units with firmware version 1.0.x can be restored on units with firmware version 1.1.0 or later.)

NOTE

Restoring imports the All System Data on an external storage device as a file to the internal storage.

This does not affect the mixer settings.

To apply imported All System Data settings to the mixer settings, load the All System Data file. (See “Loading all mixer settings”.)

1.Connect the media that has the All System Data file to be restored written to it.

2.Tap the RESTORE button.

The ALL SYSTEM DATA RESTORE Screen will open.

NOTE

If no SD or USB flash drive is connected, the following pop-up message will appear.

3.Tap the media selection button to select the media that has the All System Data file to be restored.

NOTE

If either an SD card or a USB flash drive is connected, but not both, the media selection menu will not be shown.

4.If the file you want to restore is not in the shown folder, tap the folder selection button to the right of the media selection button to open the folder selection pull-down menu.

If the entire pull-down menu cannot be shown on the display, use LCD knob 8, the scrollbar or swipe gestures to scroll the screen.

Tap “ GREATER-THAN SIGN ” to the left of a folder name to open that folder and show its contents.

Tap “” to the left of the name of a folder to close it.

Tap the name of a folder to select it.

The name of the selected folder is reflected in the folder selection button path display field.

Folder selection pull-down menu example

5.After selecting the desired folder, tap the “” at the left the end of the folder selection button to close the folder selection pull-down menu.

6.Select the file to restore, and tap the RESTORE button.

A confirmation message will appear.

7.Tapping the RESTORE button on the confirmation message will restore the file.

A confirmation message will be shown if a file with the same name already exists on the restore destination (internal storage).

Tap the CANCEL button to close the confirmation message.

Tap the OVERWRITE button to overwrite the All System Data file with the same name and close the confirmation message.

Tap the RENAME button to open the RENAME Screen. Input a name that is not the same as an existing All System Data name. Then, tap the Enter button to restore the data and return to the ALL SYSTEM DATA Screen.

One of the following messages will be shown if the internal storage does not have enough open space.

Cannot Restore. Internal memory is full.

Restoring factory default settings

Unit settings can be restored to their factory default state by clearing all unit settings to their defaults and deleting all types of user data* saved in the internal memory.

*User data saved in internal memory includes

Saved All System Data

Data stored in snapshots

Data stored in various LIBRARY Screens

1.Tap the Factory Reset () button to open a message confirming factory reset execution.

2.Tapping the CANCEL button on the confirmation message will close the message.

Tap the CONTINUE button in the confirmation message to open a reconfirmation message.

3.Tapping the CANCEL button in the reconfirmation message will close the message.

Tapping the RESET button in the reconfirmation message will execute the factory reset.

The following message will appear on every touchscreen while the factory reset is being executed.

Normal display will be restored after the factory reset completes.

NOTE

Executing a factory reset will delete all types of user data saved in the internal memory. Back up various data to external storage as necessary.

Network settings will also be reset, so the unit will be disconnected from the network.

NOTE

For Sonicview 16XP and Sonicview 24XP, IF-MTR32 is pre-installed in SLOT1.

Multitrack recording with this unit can be enabled by installing an IF-MTR32 (multitrack recording) card in SLOT 1 or SLOT 2 on the rear panel.

The IF-MTR32 is a multitrack recorder (MTR) that is capable of recording up to 32 tracks (when the sampling rate is 48 kHz).

The recording/playback formats are as follows.

File format: BWF/WAV (recording is always BWF), monophonic

Sampling Rate: 48 kHz, 96 kHz

Quantization bit depth

When recording: 24-bit or 32-bit

When playing: 16-bit*, 24-bit or 32-bit

*Quantization bit depth: 16-bit

Playback of imported files with this bit depth is supported only when the MTR operation mode is LIVE RECORDING MODE or VIRTUAL SOUND CHECK MODE. Recording at 16-bit is not supported. Moreover, punching in/out is not possible with imported 16-bit files, so they cannot be selected when the MTR operation mode is OVERDUB MODE.

Recording will be at the sampling frequency set on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER - MENU Screen. (See “ Sampling Rate (Max Tracks) buttons”.)

ATTENTION

Only one IF-MTR32 card can be used at a time.

If two IF-MTR32 cards are installed, only the one in SLOT 1 can be used.

Maximum recording time

File format used	Media capacity
File format used	64GB	128GB	256GB	512GB
48kHz/24-bit/ 32-track	3h 49m	7h 41m	15h 23m	30h 49m
48kHz/32-bit/ 32-track	2h 52m	5h 45m	11h 32m	23h 07m
96kHz/24-bit/ 16-track	3h 50m	7h 41m	15h 24m	30h 50m
96kHz/32-bit/ 16-track	2h 52m	5h 46m	11h 33m	23h 08m

The recording times shown above are estimates. They might differ depending on the media used.

The recording times shown above are not continuous recording times, but rather they are the total possible recording times for the media.

NOTE

If the size of a recording file for a track exceeds 4 GB during recording, a new take will be created and recording will continue in that take.

Formatting SD cards

SD cards formatted by an IF-MTR32 are optimized to improve performance during recording. Use an IF-MTR32 to format SD cards to be used with an IF-MTR32. (See “ Format buttons”.)

Errors might occur when recording with an IF-MTR32 using an SD card formatted by a computer or other device.

SD cards used by IF-MTR32 units

A list of SD cards that have been confirmed for use with the IF-MTR32 can be found by accessing the TASCAM website.

Sonicview 16XP

https://tascam.com/us/product/sonicview_16xp/support

Sonicview 24XP

https://tascam.com/us/product/sonicview_24xp/support

Please use SD cards included in this list.

Projects and takes

With this multi track recorder (MTR), groups of files recorded at the same time are called “takes” and folders that contain recorded takes are called “projects”.

MTR operation modes

This MTR has the following three operation modes.

The operation mode can be changed by tapping the MTR operation () button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen.(See “Switching MTR operation mode”.)

LIVE RECORDING MODE

In this mode, takes can be recorded one at a time and multiple takes can be played back consecutively in a project.

VIRTUAL SOUND CHECK MODE

The routing with the MTR in this mode is limited to virtual sound check routing.

When recording, sound sources for virtual sound checks are recorded by recording the DIRECT OUT from the corresponding INPUT modules.

When the SOUND CHECK button appears highlighted, MTR playback output starts for the INPUT of the corresponding channels, enabling a virtual sound check.

NOTE

In this mode, the DIRECT OUT POINT is set to “INPUT”.

OVERDUB MODE

The routing with the MTR in this mode is limited to INSERT SEND/RETURN.

In this mode, overdubbing, including punching in/out, is possible with individual takes that have already been recorded.

MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen

Use this screen to make settings and show the status of the IF-MTR32 (multitrack recorder) card installed in SLOT 1 or SLOT 2.

Tap Menu Screen > Recorder/Player menu > Multi Track Recorder to open this screen. This screen can also be opened by tapping “Recorder/Player: MTR RIGHTWARDS ARROW ” shown for the slot with the IF-MTR32 installed on the SLOT SETUP Screen.

NOTE

When the IF-MTR32 card is initializing, the “Multi Track Recorder” sub menu item will be shown in gray on the Menu Screen, and the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen will not open even if it is tapped. Wait a while until it becomes usable.

When in LIVE RECORDING MODE or VIRTUAL SOUND CHECK MODE

Screen appearance in LIVE RECORDING MODE

When in OVERDUB MODE

Project Name

This shows the name of the currently open project.

Tap this area when the MTR is stopped to open the BROWSE MTR Screen, which shows a project list. (See “Selecting projects”.)

AUTO ROUTING button

Tap this button when the MTR is stopped to open an AUTO ROUTING confirmation message. (See “Using the AUTO ROUTING function”.)

Take Name

This shows the name of the currently open take.

Tap this area when the MTR is stopped to open the BROWSE MTR Screen, which shows a list of takes in the current project. (See “MULTI TRACK RECORDER - BROWSE Screen”.)

MTR operation mode button

This shows the current MTR operation mode.

LIVE RECORDING MODE

VIRTUAL SOUND CHECK MODE

OVERDUB MODE

Tap this button when the MTR is stopped to open the MTR operation mode switching menu. (See “Using the AUTO ROUTING function”.)

MTR menu button ()

Tap this button when the MTR is stopped to open the dedicated MTR Menu Screen. (See “MULTI TRACK RECORDER - MENU Screen”.)

Meters and REC READY/INPUT MONITOR indicator area

This area shows the meters and REC READY/INPUT MONITOR states of each track.

32 tracks are shown when the Sampling Rate (Max Tracks) button () setting is “48kHz/32tracks” on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER - MENU Screen, and 16 tracks are shown when this is set to “96kHz/16tracks”. (See “MULTI TRACK RECORDER - MENU Screen”.)

Each meter has an overload indicator at its top. They will appear to light red when the signal level reaches or exceeds −0.00026 dBFS (16-bit full-scale value).

When a level overload occurs, the entire bar meter will light red.

The area below −60 dBFS at the bottom of the level meters will light when above −70 dBFS.

When REC READY is on, the icon below the meter will appear red ().

When INPUT MONITOR is on, the icon below the meter will appear blue ().

Tap this area to open a REC READY / INPUT MONITOR settings window below the meters for the group of 8 tracks in the area tapped. (See “REC READY/INPUT MONITOR settings”.)

IN/OUT mark display area

The IN () and OUT () points in the take are shows above the time progress bar.

Progress bar

When recording, the amount of space already used as a proportion of the total space on the media is shown as a red bar. As recording progresses, the red bar extends from the left to the right.

When playing, the current playback position relative to the length of the project or take being played (depending on the time display mode) is shown as a green bar. Dragging it changes the playback position.

Mark indicator area

The marks ( BLACK UP-POINTING TRIANGLE ) in the take are shown below the progress bar.

When the time display mode is PROJECT, only marks in the take that is currently playing are shown.

IN/OUT point setting area

Use this area to set IN/OUT points and the repeat mode.

SET IN button

When tapped, this sets the IN point at the current recording/playback time. If an IN point has already been set, tapping this will reset the IN point.

This will be used as the I-O repeat point when the MTR operation mode is LIVE RECORDING MODE or VIRTUAL SOUND CHECK MODE.

This will be used as either the I-O repeat point or the auto punch in point when the MTR operation mode is OVERDUB MODE.

SET OUT button

When tapped, this sets the OUT point at the current recording/playback time. If an OUT point has already been set, tapping this will reset the OUT point.

This will be used as the I-O repeat point when the MTR operation mode is LIVE RECORDING MODE or VIRTUAL SOUND CHECK MODE.

This will be used as either the I-O repeat point or the auto punch out point when the MTR operation mode is OVERDUB MODE.

CLEAR button

This clears the IN/OUT points.

Repeat mode setting button

This sets the repeats playback function mode.

When the MTR operation mode is LIVE RECORDING MODE or VIRTUAL SOUND CHECK MODE, tap this to cycle through these options: OFF, 1, ALL and I-O.

When the MTR operation mode is OVERDUB MODE, tap this to cycle through these options: OFF, 1, and I-O. Repeat playback is not possible, however, when the AUTO PUNCH button is set to “ON”.

Repeat mode	Function
	Playback will not be repeated.
	The entire take that is currently selected will be played repeatedly.
	The entire project will be played repeatedly. This can be selected when the MTR operation mode is LIVE RECORDING MODE or VIRTUAL SOUND CHECK MODE.
	Playback will be repeated between the IN and OUT points.

NOTE

Set the in and out points at least 200 ms apart. If the interval is less than 200 ms, the following message will appear and the later point will not be set.

Invalid I/O. Interval too short.

Trying to set the out point before the in point or the in point after the out point will fail and the following message will appear. Set the in point so that it is before the out point.

Invalid I/O. Please set IN and OUT in order.

If the MTR operation mode is switched to OVERDUB MODE when the repeat mode is set to ALL, the repeat mode will be automatically switched to OFF.

AUTO REC button and indicator

When the MTR is stopped, tap this button to open the MULTI TRACK RECORDER - MENU Screen where automatic recording settings are made. When automatic recording is on, this appears light red.

(TO TOP/SKIP PREV.) button

Tap this when playing or paused to return to the beginning of the current take.

Tap this when a take is stopped at its beginning to skip to the beginning of the previous take.

The button will appear white while it is being pressed.

(SKIP NEXT) button

Tap this when stopped, playing or paused to skip to the next take.

The button will appear white while it is being pressed.

MARK setting area

Use this area to make mark function settings.

SET MARK button

This sets a mark at the current recording/playback time.

BLACK LEFT-POINTING TRIANGLE MARK SKIP button

Use this to move to the position of the nearest mark that is before the current playback position.

BLACK RIGHT-POINTING TRIANGLE MARK SKIP button

Use this to move to the position of the nearest mark that is after the current playback position.

button

Tap this button to open a window that shows mark list information.

See “Editing takes” for details.

(REW) button

When stopped, playing back or playback is paused, tap this button to start searching backward. Press and hold this button to search while it is being pressed.

Tap this button when searching backward to return to the state before searching backward.

When searching backward, this button will appear white.

Fast Forward (F.FWD) button

When stopped, playing back or playback is paused, tap this button to start searching forward. Press and hold this button to search while it is being pressed.

Tap this button when searching forward to return to the state before searching forward.

When searching forward, this button will appear white.

BLACK SQUARE button

Tap this when recording/playing to stop recording/playing.

When stopped, this button will appear white.

Transport status indicator

This icon shows the MTR operation status.

Indicator appearance	Operation status
	Stopped
	Playing
	Searching backward
	Searching forward
	Recording

BLACK RIGHT-POINTING TRIANGLE button

Tap this when playback is stopped or paused to start playback.

Tap this when recording is paused to resume recording.

When recording or playing, this button will appear green.

SOUND CHECK button

When the MTR is stopped, tap this button to switch between routing for recording and routing for sound checks (MTR playback).

Button appearance	Routing status
	Routing for recording
	Routing for playback

NOTE

Recording is not possible when the SOUND CHECK button is on.

The MTR must be stopped to change the SOUND CHECK status. The following message will appear if changing the SOUND CHECK status is attempted while the MTR is operating.

To change, the MTR must be stopped.

Tap this button to open a message that confirms switching the routing.

Example of confirmation message when turning on the SOUND CHECK button

Example of confirmation message when turning off the SOUND CHECK button

Tapping the YES button on the confirmation message will switch the routing and button status.

Tapping the NO button will close the message without changing the routing or button status.

NOTE

The routing can be changed by turning the SOUND CHECK button on/off even if the lock/unlock setting for changing routing settings is locked on the MODULE (INPUT) Screen or INPUT SOURCE SELECT Screen, for example.

When recording the DIRECT OUT if the DIRECT OUT POINT setting is “POST HPF”*

Use caution because signals will pass through Phase/D.Trim/HPF again during sound check (playback) if Phase/D.Trim/HPF is enabled during recording.

When recording the DIRECT OUT if the DIRECT OUT POINT setting is “POST FADER”*

Use caution because signals will pass through Phase/D.Trim/HPF/GATE/EQ/COMP/DELAY again during sound check (playback) if Phase/D.Trim/HPF/GATE/EQ/COMP/DELAY is enabled during recording.

*Issues like the above will not occur when the DIRECT OUT POINT setting is “INPUT”.

When recording the BUS Output Port

Use caution because signals will pass through EQ/GEQ/COMP/DELAY/Phase again during sound check (playback) if EQ/GEQ/COMP/DELAY/Phase is enabled when recording the BUS Output Port.

To avoid two routes for processing the signals when recording and when playing back with the BUS module, set the routing from the BUS module to the MTR to “Insert Send”.

pause button

Tap this when stopped or playing to pause playback.

When the MTR operation mode is LIVE RECORDING MODE or VIRTUAL SOUND CHECK MODE, tap when recording to pause recording.

This cannot be used during recording when the MTR operation mode is OVERDUB MODE.

When recording or playback is paused, this button will appear white.

button

Tap this when stopped and at least one REC READY is on to put the unit into recording standby.

If the MTR operation mode is LIVE RECORDING MODE or VIRTUAL SOUND CHECK MODE, tapping this when recording will not interrupt recording, but will end the current take and start a new take (take splitting).

When the MTR operation mode is LIVE RECORDING MODE or VIRTUAL SOUND CHECK MODE, tap this when in recording standby to start a new take and remain in recording standby.

When the MTR operation mode is OVERDUB MODE and at least one REC READY is on, tap this when playing to punch in and start recording.

When recording or paused, this button will appear light red.

Time counter display mode

This shows the current time counter display mode.

Tap this area to switch the display mode.

Display mode	Meaning
TAKE	This shows the elapsed time from the beginning of the take and the remaining time to the end of the take.
PROJECT	This shows the elapsed time from the beginning of the project and the remaining time to the end of the project.

Elapsed time counter

This shows the elapsed recording/playback time in an hour: minute: second: 1/100 second format.

Tap the counter to switch to location time input mode and show number input and LOCATE buttons below it. Tap the LOCATE button to locate immediately to the input time.

Tap the button at the top right of the locate time input area to close it.

Remaining time counter

When the MTR operation mode is LIVE RECORDING MODE or VIRTUAL SOUND CHECK MODE

During playback, this shows the remaining time until the end of the take or project according to the selected display mode in an hour: minute: second: 1/100 second format.

When recording, this shows the remaining available recording time.

When the MTR operation mode is OVERDUB MODE

This shows the remaining available recording time.

AUTO PUNCH button/indicator

Tap this button to open the MULTI TRACK RECORDER - MENU Screen where settings for operation of the auto punch in/out function are made. (See “Automatic punch in/out function”.)

When on, this appears light red.

REHEARSAL button

Tap this button to turn the auto punch in/out rehearsal function on/off. (See “Rehearsing punching in and out”.)

This will blink when the rehearsal function is on.

This button can only be used when the automatic punch in/out function is on.

UNDO/REDO button

Tap this button when it appears lit to use the UNDO/REDO function. The UNDO button appears when UNDO is possible. The REDO button appears when UNDO has been used.

When this button appears unlit, UNDO and REDO are not possible.

(TO TOP) button

Tap this when stopped, playing or paused to return to the beginning of the take.

The button will appear white while it is being pressed.

(TO END) button

Tap this when stopped, playing or paused to skip to the end of the take.

The button will appear white while it is being pressed.

Using the AUTO ROUTING function

Tap the AUTO ROUTING () button at the top of the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen to use this function.

The AUTO ROUTING confirmation message below will be shown.

NOTE

AUTO ROUTING cannot be executed if the SOUND CHECK button is on (playback routing enabled). Turn the SOUND CHECK button off to enable the execution of AUTO ROUTING.

The routing can be changed with AUTO ROUTING even if the lock/unlock setting for changing routing settings is locked on the MODULE (INPUT) Screen and INPUT SOURCE SELECT Screen, for example.

When in LIVE RECORDING MODE

First, select “CH module 1–32” or “CH module 9–40”.

If the Sampling Rate (Max Tracks) button setting is “96kHz/16tracks” on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER - MENU Screen, select “CH module 1–16” or “CH module 25–40”.

Tap the “YES Connect the Direct Out” button to route the DIRECT OUT connections of the selected CH module group to 1–32 of the slot with the IF-MTR32 installed.

If the Sampling Rate (Max Tracks) button setting is “96kHz/16tracks” on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER - MENU Screen, routing will be to 1–16 of the slot.

Tap the “YES Connect the SEND/RETURN” button to route the INSERT SEND/RETURN connections of the selected CH module group to 1–32 of the slot with the IF-MTR32 installed.

If the Sampling Rate (Max Tracks) button setting is “96kHz/16tracks” on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER - MENU Screen, routing will be to 1–16 of the slot.

In this case, the metering points of the CH module groups will be automatically switched according to the insert point settings as shown below.

Insert point setting for the selected CH module group	CH module group metering point
All PRE EQ	PRE EQ
All PRE FADER	PRE FADER
Mix of PRE EQ and PRE FADER	PRE FADER

Tapping the “NO Connect by myself” button will keep the current routing settings, so make necessary routing changes manually.

Tapping the button will close the message without changing routing settings.

When in VIRTUAL SOUND CHECK MODE

First, select “CH module 1–32” or “CH module 9–40”.

If the Sampling Rate (Max Tracks) button setting is “96kHz/16tracks” on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER - MENU Screen, select “CH module 1–16” or “CH module 25–40”.

Tap the “YES Connect the Direct Out (INPUT)” button to route DIRECT OUT connections that have DIRECT OUT POINT set to “INPUT” of the selected CH module group to 1–32 of the slot in which the IF-MTR32 is installed.

If the Sampling Rate (Max Tracks) button setting is “96kHz/16tracks” on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER - MENU Screen, routing will be to 1–16 of the slot.

Tapping the button will close the message without changing routing settings.

When in OVERDUB MODE

First, select “CH module 1–32” or “CH module 9–40”.

If the Sampling Rate (Max Tracks) button setting is “96kHz/16tracks” on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER - MENU Screen, select “CH module 1–16” or “CH module 25–40”.

Tap the “YES Connect the SEND/RETURN” button to route the INSERT SEND/RETURN connections of the selected CH module group to 1–32 of the slot with the IF-MTR32 installed.

If the Sampling Rate (Max Tracks) button setting is “96kHz/16tracks” on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER - MENU Screen, routing will be to 1–16 of the slot.

In this case, the metering points of the CH module groups will be automatically switched according to the insert point settings as shown below.

Insert point setting for the selected CH module group	CH module group metering point
All PRE EQ	PRE EQ
All PRE FADER	PRE FADER
Mix of PRE EQ and PRE FADER	PRE FADER

Tapping the “NO Connect by myself” button will keep the current routing settings, so make necessary routing changes manually.

Tapping the button will close the message without changing routing settings.

NOTE

When the MTR operation mode is OVERDUB MODE, always use “Insert Send/Return” for routing between the mixer and the MTR.

Normal punch in/out recording will not be possible using different routing settings.

Switching MTR operation mode

To switch between the three MTR operation modes, when the MTR is stopped, tap the MTR operation () button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen.

This will open the MTR operation mode switching menu.

Tap one of the operation mode buttons to switch to that mode and open an AUTO ROUTING confirmation screen. (See “Using the AUTO ROUTING function”.)

Tap the button at the top left to return to the previous screen without changing the MTR operation mode.

NOTE

MTR must be stopped to change the MTR operation mode. The following message will appear if changing the MTR operation mode is attempted while the MTR is operating.

To change, the MTR must be stopped.

SOUND CHECK must be “OFF” to change the MTR operation mode. The following message will appear if changing the MTR operation mode is attempted while SOUND CHECK is “ON”.

To change, SOUND CHECK must be OFF.

At least one take is necessary to record in OVERDUB MODE. For this reason, if the current project has no takes, switching to OVERDUB MODE will cause the following message to be shown.

1.Tap the CREATE button to open the following confirmation message.

2.Set the Sampling Rate, Bit Depth and File Name Prefix.

3.Tap the CREATE button to create a take.

Tap the CANCEL button to open the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen without creating a take.

If the CANCEL button was tapped in any of the above confirmation messages

1.The following message will be shown when switching to the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen or if the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen button is tapped to start recording.

Tap the CREATE button to open the following confirmation message.

Set the Sampling Rate, Bit Depth and File Name Prefix, and tap the CREATE button to create a take and put the recorder in standby.

Tapping the CANCEL button on any of the above confirmation messages will restore it to a stopped state.

2.Tap the button at the top right of the take list on the BROWSE MTR Screen to open the following confirmation message.

Set the Sampling Rate, Bit Depth and File Name Prefix, and tap the CREATE button to create a take.

Tap the CANCEL button to close the confirmation message without creating a take.

REC READY/INPUT MONITOR settings

Tap the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen meter/REC READY/INPUT MONITOR area () to open a REC READY / INPUT MONITOR settings window below the meters for the group of 8 tracks in the area tapped.

REC READY setting buttons are in the upper row and INPUT MONITOR setting buttons are in the lower row for the selected 8 tracks.

Tap these buttons to turn them on/off.

The REC READY setting buttons show the routing settings for the tracks as follows.

Top line: Track input signal

Bottom line: Track signal output destination

Tap the button at the top right of the REC READY / INPUT MONITOR settings window to close the window and restore the normal MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen.

When INPUT MONITOR is on, the signal input to the MTR will be output from the MTR as is, regardless of the MTR operation status and REC READY on/off status.

When REC READY is on

When stopped or recording, sound input to the MTR will be output from the MTR as is.

During playback, the MTR playback sound is output from the MTR.

Tap the REC READY ALL ON/ALL OFF button to turn it on/off for all tracks.

The ALL ON and ALL OFF buttons show the REC READY setting status.

REC READY setting status	ALL ON button appearance	ALL OFF button appearance
When all tracks are on
When all tracks are off
When some tracks are on and some are off

Tap the INPUT MONITOR ALL ON/ALL OFF button to turn it on/off for all tracks.

The ALL ON and ALL OFF buttons show the INPUT MONITOR setting status.

INPUT MONITOR setting status	ALL ON button appearance	ALL OFF button appearance
When all tracks are on
When all tracks are off
When some tracks are on and some are off

MTR output according to REC READY and INPUT MONITOR settings

When in LIVE RECORDING MODE or VIRTUAL SOUND CHECK MODE

	REC READY
	Off	On	Off	On
	INPUT MONITOR
	Off	Off	On	On
When stopped	No MTR output	Sound input to the MTR is output from the MTR	Sound input to the MTR is output from the MTR
Playing/playback paused	MTR playback sound is output from the MTR	MTR playback sound is output from the MTR
Recording/recording paused	No MTR output	Sound input to the MTR is output from the MTR

When in OVERDUB MODE

	REC READY
	Off	On	Off	On
	INPUT MONITOR
	Off	Off	On	On
When stopped	No MTR output	Sound input to the MTR is output from the MTR	Sound input to the MTR is output from the MTR
Playing/playback paused	MTR playback sound is output from the MTR	MTR playback sound is output from the MTR
Recording/recording paused	MTR playback sound is output from the MTR	Sound input to the MTR is output from the MTR

Yellow cells: Setting combinations that have different results in LIVE RECORDING MODE / VIRTUAL SOUND CHECK MODE and in OVERDUB MODE

MULTI TRACK RECORDER - MENU Screen

Use this screen to make various settings for the IF-MTR32 (multitrack recorder) card installed in SLOT 1 or SLOT 2.

To open this screen, tap Menu Screen > Recorder/Player menu > Multi Track Recorder to open the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen. Then, tap the button at the top right when the MTR is stopped.

MTR - MENU Screen when in LIVE RECORDING MODE

MTR - MENU Screen when in OVERDUB MODE

BROWSE button

Tap this button to open the BROWSE MTR Screen. (See “MULTI TRACK RECORDER - BROWSE Screen”.)

Sampling Rate (Max Tracks) buttons

This sets the sampling frequency and maximum number of tracks when the MTR operation mode is LIVE RECORDING MODE or VIRTUAL SOUND CHECK MODE.

The selected button will be highlighted light blue.

Options: 48 kHz / 32 tracks (default), 96 kHz / 16 tracks

NOTE

The sampling frequency for the IF-MTR32 can be set to a value different from the Sync Clock of the Sonicview 16XP/24XP that it is installed in.

Since the number of tracks that can be recorded/played changes when this setting is switched, a routing change confirmation message will appear as shown below.

Message when switching to 48 kHz / 32 tracks

Message when switching to 96 kHz / 16 tracks

Bit Depth buttons

This setting will be used for the bit depth when the MTR operation mode is LIVE RECORDING MODE or VIRTUAL SOUND CHECK MODE.

The selected button will be highlighted light blue.

Options: 24-bit, 32-bit (default)

File Name Prefix buttons

This setting will be used for the first characters of recording file names when the MTR operation mode is LIVE RECORDING MODE or VIRTUAL SOUND CHECK MODE.

The selected button will be highlighted light blue.

Option

Meaning

DATE (default)

The year, month and day that the recording started will be added to the recording file name in YYMMDD format.

Edit Name

The file name set by the user will be used as the recording file name (SONICVIEW by default).

The set name is shown on the button.

Tap the EDIT button on the right to open the Edit Name Screen where the file name set by the user can be edited.

Media status

This shows the status of the SD card loaded in the IF-MTR32.

Item	Explanation
UHS-I	This area will appear lit if the card supports UHS-I.
Capacity	Shows the total amount of space on the SD card.
Free	This shows the amount of unused capacity on the SD card.

Format buttons

Use these to format the SD card loaded in the IF-MTR32.

We recommend using the ERASE option to format SD cards when using them with the IF-MTR32 for the first time.

Tap the QUICK button to format only the application management area on the medium.

Tap the ERASE button to conduct erase formatting.

ATTENTION

Formatting will erase all the data on the SD card. Back up to a computer, for example, before formatting a card.

NOTE

ERASE formatting takes more time than QUICK formatting. We recommend doing this when plenty of time is available.

The writing speeds to SD cards and other storage media that use flash memory tend to decrease after writing occurs repeatedly. If the writing speed decreases, this could have a negative impact on recording.

Using the ERASE formatting function of this unit should restore the writing speed of the SD card.*

For this reason, we recommend using the ERASE formatting function at the following times.

If the following message appears when recording

MTR Recording Error. Buffer overflow.

Whenever the card has been written to until it became completely full

On a regular schedule (about once per month)

Before starting important recordings

*Writing speed might not be restored depending on the SD card condition (including malfunction and age).

AUTO REC button

Tap this button to turn the automatic recording function on/off (default).

When on, this button will appear red.

See “Automatic recording function” for details.

Automatic recording function setting knobs

Use these to set the automatic recording operation levels and time.

Start Level knob

This sets the level for starting automatic recording.

Use LCD knob 6, which is lit red, to set this. (See “Automatic recording function”.)

Options: OFF*, −72 dBFS – −24 dBFS (in 6 dBFS increments, −42 dBFS default)

*When “OFF” is selected, tap the button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen to start recording.

End Level knob

This sets the level for ending automatic recording.

Use LCD knob 7, which is lit yellow, to adjust it. (See “Automatic recording function”.)

Options: OFF*, −72 dBFS – −24 dBFS (in 6 dBFS increments, −42 dBFS default)

*When “OFF” is selected, tap the BLACK SQUARE button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen to stop recording.

End Time knob

This sets the time until automatic recording stops after the recording level goes below the End Level.

Use LCD knob 8, which is lit green, to adjust it. (See “Automatic recording function”.)

If the recording level goes above the End Level before this time elapses, recording will continue.

Range: 1 – 60 seconds (default: 5 seconds)

End Mode buttons

Tap one of these buttons to set what happens when automatic recording has started and the End Time has elapsed after the recording level has gone below the End Level. (See “Automatic recording function”.)

Option	Meaning
Take Split (default)	Standby for recording in a new file
Continue	Standby for recording in the same file

The selected button will be highlighted light blue.

PRE REC button

Tap this button to turn the pre-recording function on/off. (default: OFF)

When on, this button will appear red.

See “Pre-recording function” for details.

Version button

Tap this button to open a window that shows information about the IF-MTR32 firmware version.

Tap the UPDATE button to open the Firmware Update Screen for the slot with the IF-MTR32 installed.

AUTO PUNCH button

Tap this button to turn the auto punch in/out function ON/OFF (default).

When on, this button will appear red.

See “Automatic punch in/out function” for details.

Auto punch in/out function setting knobs

Use these to set the auto punch in/out function operation times. (See “Automatic punch in/out function”.)

Pre Roll Time knob

This sets the pre-roll time for the auto punch in.

Use LCD knob 6, which is lit red, to set this.

Range: 0 – 10 seconds (default: 2 seconds)

Post Roll Time knob

This sets the post roll time for the auto punch out.

Use LCD knob 7, which is lit yellow, to adjust it.

Range: 0 – 10 seconds (default: 2 seconds)

MULTI TRACK RECORDER - BROWSE Screen

Use this screen to select folders and files on the SD card loaded in the IF-MTR32 (multitrack recorder) card installed in SLOT 1 or SLOT 2.

To open this screen, tap Menu Screen > Recorder/Player menu > Multi Track Recorder to open the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen. Then, tap the project/take name. This screen can also be opened by tapping the BROWSE button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER - MENU Screen.

BROWSE MTR Screen showing project list

BROWSE MTR Screen showing take list

Level name

This shows the icon and name of the level that is currently open.

“MTR Projects Root” will be shown when the project list is open.

The name of the project that contains the takes will be shown when the take list is open. When the current project is being shown, “(current project)” will appear after the name.

button

Use this button to create a new project folder at the root level of the SD card.

Tap this button to open a screen where the name of the folder being created can be input.

The combination of characters input can be changed depending on the status of the Caps lock and Shift keyboard buttons on the Make Project Screen.

See “Changing the keyboard keys” for details about changing the keyboard.

Project list

This shows the names of project folders on the root level of the SD card in name order.

Tap a project in this area to select it as the current project.

A check () is shown next to the name of the current project.

Project menu buttons ()

Tap one of these buttons to open a menu window that enables the following operations on the project folder shown to the left.

Menu item	Explanation
Open	This selects the project folder to the left of the tapped button as the current project and opens its take list.
Rename	This opens a screen where the name of the project folder to the left of the tapped button can be changed.
Delete	This deletes the project folder to the left of the tapped button.

NOTE

This operation is not possible during recording and playback.

Rename and Delete cannot be used with the current project.

Scrollbar

This appears when the number of folders and files exceeds the amount that can be shown on the display at the same time.

Drag the scrollbar to scroll the screen. The project/take list can also be scrolled by swiping it up and down as well as by turning LCD knob 8.

Level change button

Tap the button to show the folder level one step above the current level.

NOTE

This will be gray when the MTR Projects Root (highest) level is open.

Take list

This shows the names and lengths of the takes in the project folder that is currently being shown. Tap this area to select a take as the current take, adding a check mark () to it.

Take menu buttons ()

Tap one of these buttons to open a menu window that enables the following operations on the take shown to the left.

Menu item	Explanation
Open	This selects the take to the left of the tapped button and reopens the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen.
Rename	This opens a screen where the name of the take to the left of the button can be changed.
Delete	This deletes the take to the left of the button.

NOTE

This operation is not possible during recording and playback.

New take creation button (OVERDUB MODE only)

Use this button to create a new take.

Tap this button to open the following confirmation message.

Set the Sampling Rate, Bit Depth and File Name Prefix, and tap the CREATE button to create a take.

Folder structure overview

The IF-MTR32 manages audio files in project folders.

The SD card contains “PROJECT” and other project folders. These project folders contain audio files called takes (files from single recordings).

Folder structure

The illustration below shows the folder structure.

The folder and file structure can be checked by accessing the SD card using a computer with an SD card reader.

NOTE

Other folders and files will also be created for management.

Only folders at the root of the SD card can be selected as the current folder. Folders in other locations cannot be selected as the current folder.

Recording file names

The naming pattern for recording files is as follows.

[1–9-character File Name Prefix]_[3-digit take number]_[2-digit track number].wav

File format overview

The IF-MTR32 can record and play files with the following formats.

File format: BWF/WAV*

Sampling frequency: 48 kHz, 96 kHz

Quantization bit depth: 16-bit**, 24-bit, 32-bit

Number of channels: 1 (mono)

*This unit does not record files in WAV format, but it can play them.

** Recording with a quantization bit depth of 16-bit is not possible. Moreover, punching in/out is not possible with takes that contain 16-bit tracks. For this reason, selecting takes that contain 16-bit tracks is not possible when the MTR operation modes is OVERDUB MODE.

NOTE

The single-channel WAV files named “[File Name Prefix]_[2-digit track number].wav” and numbered 32 and below when the sampling frequency is 48 kHz (16 and below when the sampling frequency is 96 kHz) are recognized as a single take.

Single-digit track numbers have “0” placed at the number beginnings, for example “01” and “02”.

WAV files with the following “[2-digit track number]” values in their names are recognized as individual takes.

48kHz sampling frequency: 33 and higher

96kHz sampling frequency: 17 and higher

WAV files without “[2-digit track number]” values in their names are recognized as individual takes.

Managing projects

With the IF-MTR32 (multi track recording) card, groups of files recorded at the same time are called “takes”. The folders that contain recorded takes are handled as “projects” and data is managed separately for each project folder.

To record and produce music, a project folder that has already been created must be selected or a new project folder must be created.

This chapter describes functions that range from basic operations such as procedures for selecting and creating new projects to various project management functions.

NOTE

To use the WAV files from a project in a DAW or other application, copy them to a computer. Do not use the files on the SD card directly.

Viewing project and take lists

To open a list of projects/takes saved on the SD card, tap the project or take name area on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER screen to open the BROWSE MTR Screen. The BROWSE MTR screen can also be opened by tapping the BROWSE button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER - MENU Screen. (See “MULTI TRACK RECORDER - BROWSE Screen”.)

Project operations

Tap the button at the right end of a project folder name on the BROWSE MTR Screen to open a menu window where project operations can be conducted.

Tap the buttons in the menu window to conduct project operations.

Menu item	Explanation
Open	Tapping this selects that project as the current project and opens its take list.
Rename	Tapping this opens the Rename screen where the name of the selected project can be changed.
Delete	Tap this to open a message confirming whether or not to delete the selected project. Tap the CANCEL button to close the confirmation message. Tapping the OK button will delete the selected project and close the confirmation message.

NOTE

This operation is not possible during recording and playback.

Rename and Delete cannot be used with the current project.

Creating new projects

To record or play with this unit, you must create and select a project.

The following procedure can be used to create a new project.

1.Open the BROWSE MTR Screen when the MTR is stopped. (See “MULTI TRACK RECORDER - BROWSE Screen”.)

2.Tap the button at the top right of the screen to open the Make Project Screen where the name of the project being created can be input.

3.The combination of characters input can be changed depending on the status of the Caps lock and Shift keyboard buttons on the Make Project Screen. See “Changing the keyboard keys” for details about changing the keyboard.

TIP

The project name can be changed later on the Rename Screen.

4.Tap the Enter button to create a new project and return to the BROWSE MTR Screen.

NOTE

To cancel project creation, tap the button at the top left of the screen.

Input project names must be at least 1 character and no more than 11 characters.

Project are created on the root level of the SD card.

If a folder with the same name already exists when the Enter button is tapped, the following message will appear. Input a different name.

This name already exists. Please enter another name.

Selecting projects

Follow the procedures below to select the project to use.

1.Open the BROWSE MTR Screen when the MTR is stopped.(See “MULTI TRACK RECORDER - BROWSE Screen”.)

NOTE

A check () is shown next to the name of the project that is currently selected.

2.Tap the name of a project folder to select it as the current project, adding a check () next to the name.

NOTE

The following selection procedures can also be used.

1. Tap the button at the right end of a project folder name to open a menu window.

2. Tap the Open button to set the selected project as the current project and open its take list.

Deleting projects

Projects can be deleted.

Deleting unnecessary projects when the SD card space is low can create more open space.

NOTE

The current project cannot be deleted.

Files might be saved on the SD card for using the UNDO function in OVERDUB MODE. Those files can be deleted if the SD card loaded in the IF-MTR32 is removed and reinserted.

1.Open the BROWSE MTR Screen when the MTR is stopped. (See “MULTI TRACK RECORDER - BROWSE Screen”.)

2.Tap the button at the right end of the folder name of the project that you want to delete to open a menu window.

3.Tap the Delete button to open a message confirming whether or not to delete the selected project.

Tap the CANCEL button to close the confirmation message.

Tapping the OK button will delete the selected project and close the confirmation message.

Changing project names

1.Open the BROWSE MTR Screen when the MTR is stopped. (See “MULTI TRACK RECORDER - BROWSE Screen”.)

2.Tap the button at the right end of the folder name of the project that you want to rename to open a menu window.

3.Tap the Rename button to open the Rename Screen where the name of the selected project can be changed.

4.Change the project name.

The combination of characters input can be changed depending on the status of the Caps lock and Shift keyboard buttons on the Rename Screen. See “Changing the keyboard keys” for details about changing the keyboard.

5.Tap the Enter button to change the project name and return to the BROWSE MTR Screen.

NOTE

To cancel project renaming, tap the button at the top left of the screen.

Changed project names must be at least 1 character and no more than 11 characters.

The name of the current project cannot be changed.

If a folder with the same name already exists when the Enter button is tapped, the following message will appear. Input a different name.

This name already exists. Please enter another name.

Basic recording

Selecting the MTR input source

The input source can be selected for the IF-MTR32 (multitrack recording) card.

MTR and automatic routing

Tap the AUTO ROUTING () button at the top of the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen to open the following routing confirmation message.

After selecting either “CH module 1-32” or “CH module 9-40”, tap the “YES Connect the Direct Out” button to route the DIRECT OUT connections of the selected CH module group to 1–32 of the slot in which the IF-MTR32 is installed.

Tap the “YES Connect the SEND/RETURN” button to route the INSERT SEND/RETURN connections of the selected CH module group to 1–32 of the slot in which the IF-MTR32 is installed.

Tapping the “NO Connect by myself” button will keep the current routing settings, so make necessary routing changes manually.

Tap the button to close the message. Doing this will retain the current routing settings.

Manual input routing to the MTR

Audio signals can be input to the MTR by assigning the desired signals to the output ports of the SLOT that the IF-MTR32 is installed in.

To send the audio signal of a CH module to the MTR, select “1-32” of the slot in which the IF-MTR32 is installed for the following assignment destinations.

DIRECT OUT (DIRECT OUT button on)

Insert Send

To send the audio signal of a BUS module to the MTR, select “1-32” of the slot in which the IF-MTR32 is installed for the following assignment destinations.

Insert Send

Output Port

NOTE

Input port audio signals cannot be sent to the MTR without assigning them to a CH module.

Precautions

When recording the DIRECT OUT if the DIRECT OUT POINT setting is “POST HPF”:

Use caution because signals will pass through Phase/D.Trim/HPF again during sound check (playback) if Phase/D.Trim/HPF is enabled during recording.

When recording the DIRECT OUT if the DIRECT OUT POINT setting is “POST FADER”:

Use caution because signals will pass through Phase, D.Trim, HPF, GATE, EQ, COMP and DELAY again during sound check (playback) if they are enabled during recording.

How to avoid these issues

To avoid two routes for processing the signals when recording and when playing back with the CH module, set the routing from the CH module to the MTR to one of the following.

DIRECT OUT with DIRECT OUT POINT setting set to “INPUT”

Insert Send

Precaution

When recording the BUS Output Port:

Use caution because signals will pass through EQ/GEQ/COMP/DELAY/Phase again during sound check (playback) if EQ/GEQ/COMP/DELAY/Phase is enabled when recording the BUS Output Port.

How to avoid this issue

To avoid two routes for processing the signals when recording and when playing back with the BUS module, set the routing from the BUS module to the MTR to “Insert Send”.

Recording

This unit can simultaneously record up to 32 tracks.

The following recording procedures are an example of steps to take when recording with the IF-MTR32 for the first time.

1.Load an SD card in the IF-MTR32.

2.Use the Erase Format function on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER - MENU Screen to format the SD card. (See “ Format buttons”.)

3.Tap the MTR operation mode button at the top of the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen (See “ MTR operation mode button”.), and select LIVE RECORDING MODE or VIRTUAL SOUND CHECK MODE.

4.Set REC READY to “On” for the tracks to record.

Recording standby will be enabled, and the REC READY indicators will blink red.

5.Adjust the input levels of each channel that will be recorded.

6.Tap the button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen to pause recording.

7.Tapping the BLACK RIGHT-POINTING TRIANGLE button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen will start recording and make the and buttons appear lit.

The REC READY indicators for tracks being recorded will stop blinking and stay lit.

8.When recording has completed, tap the BLACK SQUARE button.

Checking recorded audio (playing recordings)

1.Switch to MTR routing for playback.

Tap the SOUND CHECK button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen and confirm the message that is shown (See “ SOUND CHECK button”.). This highlights the button and routes the MTR outputs to the recording channel inputs and Insert Return, enabling playback monitoring.

See “ SOUND CHECK button” for details switching MTR routing.

2.Use the / Fast Forward and BLACK SQUARE buttons on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen, for example, to locate to a position you want to check.

NOTE

For details about the locate function, see “Locate function”.

3.Tap the BLACK RIGHT-POINTING TRIANGLE button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen to play the recorded tracks.

NOTE

To replace parts of tracks, switch the MTR operation mode to OVERDUB MODE and punch in/out. (See “Punch in/out function” and “Automatic punch in/out function”.)

Recorder functions

Locate function

The playback position can be moved on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen in the following ways.

All these methods can be used when the recorder is stopped or playing back.

Drag the progress bar left or right

This allows approximate changes to the location to be made quickly.

Turn LCD knob 8 (lit green) when the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen is open

Each click of LCD knob 8 changes the playback position by 50–70 ms. Each click of LCD knob 8 while it is being pressed changes the playback position by about 10 sec.

Press and hold the or Fast Forward button

Input the location time

Inputting the location time to locate

The current position of the recorder can be moved by inputting the time in the time counter.

1.Tap the elapsed time counter on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen to switch to location time input mode and show number input and LOCATE buttons below the time counter.

2.Input the desired location time.

3.Tap the LOCATE button to locate (move) immediately to the input time.

Repeat playback function

The repeat playback function can be used to play something over and over.

Tap the repeat mode setting button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen to set the repeat playback function.

When the MTR operation mode is LIVE RECORDING MODE or VIRTUAL SOUND CHECK MODE, tap the repeat mode setting button to cycle through these options: OFF, 1, ALL and I-O.

When the MTR operation mode is OVERDUB MODE, tap the repeat mode setting button to cycle through these options: OFF, 1, and I-O. Repeat playback is not possible, however, when the AUTO PUNCH setting is “ON”.

Repeat mode	Function
	Playback will not be repeated.
	The entire take that is currently selected will be played repeatedly.
	The entire project will be played repeatedly. This can be selected when the MTR operation mode is LIVE RECORDING MODE or VIRTUAL SOUND CHECK MODE.
	Playback will be repeated between the IN and OUT points. (See “Setting the punch in/out points”.)

NOTE

If the MTR operation mode is switched to OVERDUB MODE when the repeat mode is set to ALL, the repeat mode will be automatically switched to OFF.

Automatic recording function

This function can start recording automatically.

Recording starts automatically when the recording level exceeds a set level. In addition, the recorder can be set to pause the current file or start a new file when the recording level goes below a set level.

Make these settings on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER - MENU Screen.

NOTE

This can be used when the MTR operation mode is LIVE RECORDING MODE or VIRTUAL SOUND CHECK MODE.

AUTO REC button

Tap this button to turn the automatic recording function on/off (default).

When On, this button will appear red and recording will occur according to the following settings.

Start Level knob

This sets the level for starting automatic recording.

Use LCD knob 6, which is lit red, to set this.

Options: OFF*, −72 dBFS – −24 dBFS (in 6 dBFS increments, −42 dBFS default)

*When “OFF” is selected, tap the button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen to start recording.

End Level knob

This sets the level for ending automatic recording.

Use LCD knob 7, which is lit yellow, to adjust it.

Options: OFF*, −72 dBFS – −24 dBFS (in 6 dBFS increments, −42 dBFS default)

*When “OFF” is selected, tap the BLACK SQUARE button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen to stop recording.

End Time knob

This sets the time until automatic recording stops after the recording level goes below the end level.

Use LCD knob 8, which is lit green, to adjust it.

If the recording level goes above the End Level before this time elapses, recording will continue.

Range: 1 – 60 seconds (default: 5 seconds)

End Mode buttons

Tap one of these buttons to set what happens when automatic recording has started and the End Time has elapsed after the recording level has gone below the End Level.

Option	Meaning
Take Split (default)	Standby for recording in a new take
Continue	Standby for recording in the same take

The selected button will be highlighted light blue.

Pre-recording function

When recording is paused, this function can record up to two seconds of signal input before recording is started.

Make these settings on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER - MENU Screen.

NOTE

This can be used when the MTR operation mode is LIVE RECORDING MODE or VIRTUAL SOUND CHECK MODE.

PRE REC button

Tap this button to turn the pre-recording function on/off. (default: OFF)

When on, this button will appear red.

Punch in/out function

Punching in and out is a function used to replace parts of already recorded tracks.

After starting playback of the recorder, use this to switch to recording when it reaches the part to be replaced (punch in). Then, switch back to playback when the end of that part is reached (punch out) and stop after the set amount of time.

NOTE

This can only be used when the MTR operation mode is OVERDUB MODE.

When the MTR operation mode is OVERDUB MODE, always use Insert Send/Return for mixer and MTR routing. Normal punch in/out recording will not be possible using different routing settings.

1.Determine the part you want to replace in advance.

Select a point where the replacement audio can be combined well with the original track audio.

2.Turn on REC READY for the track with the part to be replaced and enter recording standby (REC READY indicator blinks red).

3.Start playback before the part to be replaced.

4.When the part to be replaced is reached, tap the button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen, and perform the part.

Recording will start (punch in).

5.When the end of the part to be replaced is reached, tap the BLACK SQUARE or BLACK RIGHT-POINTING TRIANGLE button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen.

Tap the BLACK SQUARE button to stop recording.

Tap the BLACK RIGHT-POINTING TRIANGLE button to switch from recording to playback.

Using the footswitch to punch in/out

A footswitch can be used to punch in/out if the recommended TASCAM RC-1F footswitch (sold separately) is connected to the FOOTSWITCH jack on the rear panel.

To use a footswitch to punch in/out, you must set the foot switch function assignment to “Punch IN/OUT” for "MTR" in advance. (See “Foot Switch page”.)

At step 4 above, press the footswitch instead of the button, and at step 5 press it again instead of the BLACK RIGHT-POINTING TRIANGLE button.

NOTE

This unit was designed to be used with unlatched (momentary) footswitches that have to be pushed to function (shorted when pushed).

Automatic punch in/out function

Using the automatic punch in/out function, you can automatically record between punch in and out points set in advance.

To use the automatic punch in/out functions, start playback from a pre-roll point before the punch in point where recording will start.

Recording will stop when the punch out point is reached, and playback will stop after the post roll.

NOTE

This can only be used when the MTR operation mode is OVERDUB MODE.

Setting the punch in/out points

1.Open the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen.

2.Tap the BLACK RIGHT-POINTING TRIANGLE button to start playback.

3.Tap the SET IN button at the punch in point and the SET OUT button at the punch out point.

The set points are shown above the progress bar as and .

NOTE

Punch in/out points can also be set when stopped.

Set the in and out points at least 200 ms apart. If the interval is less than 200 ms, the following message will appear and the later point will not be set.

Invalid I/O. Interval too short.

Trying to set the out point before the in point or the in point after the out point will fail and the following message will appear. Set the in point so that it is before the out point.

Invalid I/O. Please set IN and OUT in order.

Tap the CLEAR button to clear set punch in and out points.

4.Press the BLACK SQUARE button to stop playback.

5.Tap the AUTO PUNCH button to open the MULTI TRACK RECORDER - MENU Screen and turn on the automatic punch in/out function.

6.Tap the button at the top left of the screen to return to the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen.

NOTE

By setting only the punch in point, you can start recording with automatic punch in and then continue recording until you tap the BLACK SQUARE or BLACK RIGHT-POINTING TRIANGLE button to stop.

By setting only the punch out point, you can start recording by tapping the button and then stop recording with automatic punch out.

Setting pre roll and post roll points

When using automatic punch in/out, set the amount of playback time before the punch in point (pre roll point) and the amount after the punch out point before playback stops (post-roll point).

1.Open the MULTI TRACK RECORDER - MENU Screen when the MTR is stopped. (See “MULTI TRACK RECORDER - MENU Screen”.)

2.Use LCD knob 6, which is lit red, to adjust the Pre Roll Time, and use LCD knob 7, which is lit yellow, to adjust the Post Roll Time.

Pre Roll Time: 0 – 10 seconds (default: 2 seconds)

Post Roll Time: 0 – 10 seconds (default: 2 seconds)

3.Tap the button at the top left of the screen to return to the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen.

Rehearsing punching in and out

You can rehearse before punch in/out recording. In rehearsal, recording will not occur, but monitoring will be the same as if recording.

1.Confirm that the AUTO PUNCH button appears red on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen.

2.Tap the REHEARSAL button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen to turn it on, highlighting it.

3.Turn on REC READY for the tracks to use with automatic punch in/out. (See “REC READY/INPUT MONITOR settings”.)

4.Tap the button.

Auto punch in/out rehearsal starts.

The transport starts playback from the pre-roll point. Both track playback and input source signals can be monitored. (See “Setting pre roll and post roll points”.)

When the punch in point is reached, only the input source signal will be monitored. The button will blink, showing that it rehearsal mode is active.

When the punch out point is reached, both track playback and input source signals will be monitored. The button will become gray.

When the set Post Roll Time has elapsed after the punch out point, playback will automatically stop and the BLACK RIGHT-POINTING TRIANGLE button will blink. (See “Setting pre roll and post roll points”.)

Rehearsal can be repeated.

Using automatic punching in and out

Follow these procedures to punch in and out automatically and record.

1.Confirm that the AUTO PUNCH button appears red on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen.

2.Tap the REHEARSAL button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen to turn it off, making it appear gray.

3.Turn on REC READY for the tracks to use with automatic punch in/out. (See “REC READY/INPUT MONITOR settings”.)

4.Tap the button.

The transport starts playback from the pre-roll point. Both track playback and input source signals can be monitored. (See “Setting pre roll and post roll points”.)

When the punch in point is reached, only the input source signal will be monitored, and the button will appear lit.

When the punch out point is reached, both track playback and input source signals will be monitored. The button will become gray.

NOTE

The following message will appear if the button is tapped when the AUTO PUNCH button is lit red but the punch in and out points have not been set.

Tap the button after setting the punch in and out points.

Cannot execute AUTO PUNCH. Set both I/O points.

The following message will appear if the button is tapped during MTR playback when the AUTO PUNCH button is lit red.

Tap the button after stopping the MTR.

Cannot execute AUTO PUNCH. Stop the MTR.

Undoing auto punch in/out operations (UNDO function)

If you want to redo punching in and out, the operation last conducted can be undone.

When a project is loaded or the unit is turned off, information about previous operations will be lost, so undoing and redoing them will no longer be possible.

NOTE

Files used for undoing are sometimes saved on the SD card. Those files can be deleted if the SD card loaded in the IF-MTR32 is removed and reinserted.

Undoing the most recent punch in/out operation

Tap the UNDO button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen to start undoing and open a message.

When undoing completes, the state before the previous operation will be restored and the message will close.

Redoing an undone operation

After undoing, tap the REDO button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen to start redoing and open a message.

When redoing completes, the state before undoing will be restored and the message will close.

Editing takes

Changing take names

1.Open the BROWSE MTR Screen when the MTR is stopped. (See “MULTI TRACK RECORDER - BROWSE Screen”.)

2.Tap the button at the right of the take name that you want to rename to open a menu window.

3.Tap the Rename button to open the Rename Screen where the name of the selected take can be changed.

4.Change the take name.

5.Tap the Enter button to change the take name and return to the BROWSE MTR Screen.

NOTE

Changed take names must be at least 1 character and no more than 16 characters.

To cancel take renaming, tap the button at the top left of the screen.

If a take with the same name already exists in the same folder when the Enter button is tapped, the following message will appear. Input a different name.

This name already exists. Please enter another name.

Deleting takes

Specified takes can be deleted.

Deleting unnecessary takes when the SD card space is low can create more open space.

NOTE

Files might be saved on the SD card for using the UNDO function in OVERDUB MODE. Those files can be deleted if the SD card loaded in the IF-MTR32 is removed and reinserted.

1.Open the BROWSE MTR Screen when the MTR is stopped. (See “MULTI TRACK RECORDER - BROWSE Screen”.)

2.Tap the button at the right of the take that you want to delete to open a menu window.

3.Tap the DELETE button to open a message confirming whether or not to delete the selected take.

Tap the CANCEL button to close the confirmation message.

Tapping the OK button will delete the selected take and close the confirmation message.

Importing files that have been recorded on other devices

Audio files that meet the following conditions can be imported and played as takes. Moreover, files that were created on an IF-MTR32 (multitrack recording) card and meet the following conditions can be played as is.

File format: BWF/WAV

Sampling frequency: 48 kHz, 96 kHz

Quantization bit depth: 16-bit, 24-bit, 32-bit

Number of channels: 1

File name format

[File name first half]_[2-digit track number].wav

Examples:

SONICVIEW_001_01.wav (track 1 file)

SONICVIEW_001_02.wav (track 2 file)

SONICVIEW_001_31.wav (track 31 file)

SONICVIEW_001_32.wav (track 32 file)

ATTENTION

Punching in/out is not possible with takes that contain 16-bit tracks. For this reason, selecting takes that contain 16-bit tracks is not possible in OVERDUB MODE.

NOTE

WAV files named “[File name first half]_[2-digit track number].wav” with 2-digit track numbers from “01” to “32” when the sampling frequency is 48 kHz (“01” to “16” when the sampling frequency is 96 kHz) are recognized as a single take.

Single-digit track numbers have “0” placed at the number beginnings, for example “01” and “02”.

WAV files with the following “[2-digit track number]” values in their names are recognized as individual takes.

48kHz sampling frequency: 33 and higher

96kHz sampling frequency: 17 and higher

WAV files without “[2-digit track number]” values in their names are recognized as individual takes.

Preparation before Importing

Always use an IF-MTR32 to format SD cards before using them with an IF-MTR32 for the first time. SD cards formatted by an IF-MTR32 are optimized for improved performance.

Operation of this unit might be affected when using an SD card that has been formatted by a computer or other device.

1.Use the IF-MTR32 to format the SD card. (See “ Format buttons”.)

NOTE

When formatted by an IF-MTR32, a “PROJECT” folder will automatically be created at the root level.

2.Remove the formatted SD card and load it in an SD card reader connected to a computer.

3.When a card has been formatted by an IF-MTR32, the computer will recognize it as a drive named “IF-MTR32”.

4.Copy the audio files that you want to load to a folder on the “IF-MTR32”.

5.When finished copying, remove the SD card from the card reader and load it in the IF-MTR32.

Using imported files with this unit

If audio files have been added to the current project, those that can be played will automatically be recognized as takes.

When audio files have been added outside the current project, if the added folder is selected as the current project on the BROWSE MTR Screen, those files that can be played will automatically be recognized as takes.

Mark function

Marks can be used to cue for playback, for example.

In addition to use with this unit, mark information added to WAV files can be used with software, for example, that supports the BWF format.

Adding marks

When playing or recording, the SET button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen can be tapped to add a mark at the current point.

When a mark is added, a pop-up showing the mark number appears on the display.

BLACK UP-POINTING TRIANGLE icons appear below the playback progress bar at the positions where marks are set.

Marks added during recording/playback will automatically be saved in the WAV file when recording/playback stops.

Marks added when stopped will automatically be saved in the WAV file at the following times.

When playback is started and then stopped after they have been set

When switching to a different take

NOTE

Punch in/out points are types of marks, but they are different from marks set using the SET MARK button in the following ways.

Marks set using the SET MARK button are saved in WAV files.

Punch in/out points are not saved in WAV files and are discarded by the following operations.

Changing the MTR operation mode

Switching projects or takes

Starting recording when in LIVE RECORDING or VIRTUAL SOUND CHECK mode

Turning off the power for the unit

Moving between marks

The following two methods are available.

Moving forward/backward one at a time

When stopped, paused or playing back, tap the BLACK LEFT-POINTING TRIANGLE / BLACK RIGHT-POINTING TRIANGLE MARK SKIP button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen to move (skip) from the current location to the previous/next mark.

Moving by selecting from a list

1.When stopped, paused or playing back, tap the button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen to open a window that shows mark list information.

2.Turn LCD knob 1 to select the mark at the desired destination time.

3.Tap the LOCATE button to move (skip) to the position of the selected mark.

NOTE

Tap the IN or OUT point button in the mark list to move (skip) to the corresponding time.

Clearing individual marks

Marks can be cleared when stopped, paused or playing back.

The following two methods are available.

Selecting from a list and deleting

1.When stopped, paused or playing back, tap the button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen to open a window that shows mark list information.

2.Turn LCD knob 1 to select the mark to be deleted.

3.Tap the DELETE button to delete that mark.

NOTE

Repeat steps 2 – 3 to delete multiple marks.

Moving to the mark and deleting

Move to the position of the mark to be deleted and tap the SET MARK button on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen to delete that mark.

When a mark is deleted, a pop-up will appear on the display.

Sonicview 16XP/24XP Mixer Basic Parameters

Libraries

Name	User	Preset
Snapshot	128	1
MODULE INPUT	128	2
MODULE FX RTN	128	4
MODULE OUTPUT	128	1
EQ	128	18
GEQ	128	0
GATE/EXP/DE-ESSER	128	11
COMP/DUCKER	128	12
FX	128	14

Input Modules

Function		Parameter	steps	Fine Step (when LCD knob turned without being pressed)	Coarse Steps (when LCD knob turned while being pressed)
Pre Amp	Analog Gain	When Analog Reference Level is +4 dBu and Digital Reference Level is -20 dBFS When PAD OFF: +12 dB – +66 dB When PAD ON: −8 dB – +46 dB NOTE See “Preamp analog gain for every reference level” for value ranges for various analog and digital reference levels.	55	1 dB/click	2 dB/click
	PAD	OFF/ON
	Phantom	OFF/ON
OSC INPUT		OFF/ON
Phase Sw		Normal/Reverse
D.TRIM		−50.0 dB – +20.0 dB	141	0.5 dB/click	2.0 dB/click
HPF	Switch	OFF/ON
HPF	Freq	20 Hz – 1.0 kHz	69	1 point/click 1/12 oct/click	3 step/click 1/4 oct/click
DIRECT OUT	Direct Out Switch	OFF/ON
	Direct Out Point	INPUT/POST HPF/POST FADER
	Direct Out Trim	−20.0 dB – +20.0 dB	401	0.1 dB/click	2.0 dB/click
INSERT	Switch	OFF/ON
INSERT	Insert Point	PRE EQ/PRE FADER
GATE/EXP/DE-ESSER	Dynamics1 Switch	OFF/ON
GATE/EXP/DE-ESSER	Dynamics1 Type	GATE/EXPANDER/DE-ESSER
GATE	Gate Threshold	−80 dB – 0 dB	81	1 dB/click	4 dB/click
	Gate Range	−60 dB – 0 dB	61	1 dB/click	3 dB/click
	Gate Attack	0 ms – 125 ms	126	1 ms/click	5 ms/click
	Gate Hold	0 ms – 990 ms	100	10 ms/click	50 ms/click
	Gate Decay	5 ms – 5.00 s	100	1 point/click	5 point/click
EXP	Expander Threshold	−60 dB – 0 dB	61	1 dB/click	3 dB/click
	Expander Ratio	1:1, 2:1, 4:1, 8:1. 16:1. 32:1, 64: 1	7	1 point/click	1 point/click
	Expander Knee	HARD/MID/SOFT	3	1 point/click	1 point/click
	Expander Attack	0 ms – 125 ms	126	1 ms/click	5 ms/click
	Expander ReleaseTime	5 ms - 5.00 s	100	1 point/click	5 point/click
DE-ESSER	De-Esser Threshold	−40 dB – 0 dB	41	1 dB/click	2 dB/click
	De-Esser Knee	HARD/MID/SOFT	3	1 point/click	1 point/click
	De-Esser CenterFreq	1.0 kHz – 10.0 kHz	91	0.1 kHz/step	0.5 kHz/step
	De-Esser Q	1.04 – 17.31	28	1 point/click	1 point/click
4 BAND EQ	Switch	OFF/ON
	Band Switch	OFF/ON
	Gain	−18.0 – +18.0	361	0.1 dB/click	1.0 dB/click
	Freq	20 Hz – 20.0 kHz	121	1 point/click 1/12 oct/click	6 point/click 1/2 oct/click
	Q	0.10 – 17.31	55	1 point/click	3 point/click
	Type (LO)	L.Shelf/Bell
	Type (HI)	H.Shelf/Bell/LPF
31 BAND GEQ	Switch	OFF/ON
31 BAND GEQ	Gain	−18.0 – +18.0	361	0.1 dB/click	1.0 dB/click
COMP/DUCKER	Switch	OFF/ON
	Type	COMP/DUCKER
	Key In Source	SELF, CH 1–40, MIX 1–22, MAIN L/R
	Key In Filter Switch	OFF/ON
	Key In Filter Type	HPF/BPF/LPF
	Key In Filter Freq	20 Hz – 20.0 kHz	121	1 point/click 1/12 oct/click	6 point/click 1/2 oct/click
	Key In Filter Q	0.10 – 17.31	55	1 point/click	3 point/click
COMP	Comp Thresh	−49 dB – 0 dB	50	1 dB/click	2 dB/click
	Comp Ratio	1.00:1 – ∞:1	21	1 point/click	1 point/click
	Comp Knee	HARD HARD MID MID SOFT MID SOFT SMOOTH	6	1 point/click	1 point/click
	Comp Attack	0.02 ms – 125 ms	135	1 point/click	5 point/click
	Comp Release	5 ms – 5.00 s	100	1 point/click	5 point/click
	Comp Auto Makeup	OFF/ON
	Comp Output Gain	0 dB – 20 dB	21	1 dB/click	1 dB/click
DUCKER	Ducker Threshold	−60 dB – −6 dB	5	6 dB/click	6 dB/click
	Ducker Attenuation	−∞, −24, −18, −12, −9, −6, −3 (dB)	7	1 point/click	1 point/click
	Ducker HoldTime	0.1 sec – 5.0 sec	50	0.1 sec/click	0.1 sec/click
	Ducker Release Time	0.1 sec – 5.0 sec	50	0.1 sec/click	0.1 sec/click
DELAY	Delay Switch	OFF/ON
	Delay Time	0.0 meter – 117.3 meter 0.0 feet – 384.8 feet 0.00 msec – 341.32 msec		0.1 meter/click 0.1 feet/click 0.02 msec/click	2.0 meter/click 5.0 feet/click 5.00 msec/click
	Delay Point	INPUT/PRE FADER
	Delay Edit Unit	meter/feet/msec
FADER LEVEL		−∞ dB, −120 dB – +10.0 dB	1024	1 point/click (−10 dB – +10 dB: 0.05 dB/click)	40 point/click (−10 dB – +10 dB: 2 dB/click)
MUTE		OFF/ON
MAIN L/R Assign		OFF/ON
PAN/BAL		L100 – C – R100	201	1 point/click	10 point/click
IMAGE		STEREO 100% – MONO – REVERSE 100%	101	2%/click	10%/click
MODE		STEREO/L-MONO/R-MONO	3
Send	Send Level	−∞ dB, −120 dB – +10.0 dB	1024	1 point/click (−10 dB – +10 dB: 0.05 dB/click)	40 point/click (−10 dB – +10 dB: 2 dB/click)
	Send Pan	L100 – C – R100	201	1 point/click	10 point/click
	Send Switch	OFF/ON
	Send Point	PRE/POST
DCA		8 DCAs
Mute Group		8 Groups
Stereo Link		OFF/ON
Auto Mixer	Switch	OFF/ON
	Top Priority Switch	OFF/ON
	Top Priority Group	A – D	4
	Group Switch	OFF/ON
	Group Priority Switch	OFF/ON
	Group Lo Cut Switch	OFF/ON
	Group Lo Cut Freq	125 Hz – 4.00 kHz	61	1 point/click	3 point/click
	Group Release Time	5 msec – 1.00 sec	70	1 point/click	5 point/click
	Channel Group Assign	A – D, ---	5
	Channel Priority	OFF/ON
	Channel Weight	−15 – +15	31	1 dB/click	1 dB/click

Preamp analog gain for every reference level

When Analog Reference Level is +6 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −9 dBFS
When PAD OFF	+3 dB – +57 dB
When PAD ON	−17 dB – +37 dB
When Analog Reference Level is +4 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −20 dBFS
When PAD OFF	+12 dB – +66 dB
When PAD ON	−8 dB – +46 dB
When Analog Reference Level is +4 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −18 dBFS
When PAD OFF	+10 dB – +64 dB
When PAD ON	−10 dB – +44 dB
When Analog Reference Level is +4 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −16 dBFS
When PAD OFF	+8 dB – +62 dB
When PAD ON	−12 dB – +42 dB
When Analog Reference Level is +4 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −14 dBFS
When PAD OFF	+6 dB – +60 dB
When PAD ON	−14 dB – +40 dB
When Analog Reference Level is 0 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −20 dBFS
When PAD OFF	+8 dB – +62 dB
When PAD ON	−12 dB – +42 dB
When Analog Reference Level is 0 dBu and Digital Reference Level is −18 dBFS
When PAD OFF	+6 dB – +60 dB
When PAD ON	−14 dB – +40 dB

Output Modules

Function		Parameter	steps	Fine Step (when LCD knob turned without being pressed)	Coarse Steps (when LCD knob turned while being pressed)
Insert	Switch	OFF/ON
4 BAND EQ	Switch	OFF/ON
	Band Switch	OFF/ON
	Gain	−18.0 – +18.0	361	0.1 dB/click	1.0 dB/click
	Freq	20 Hz – 20.0 kHz	121	1 point/click 1/12 oct/click	6 point/click 1/2 oct/click
	Q	0.10 – 17.31	55	1 point/click	3 point/click
	Type (LO)	L.Shelf/Bell
	Type (HI)	H.Shelf/Bell/LPF
31 BAND GEQ	Switch	OFF/ON
31 BAND GEQ	GAIN	−18.0 – +18.0	361	0.1 dB/click	1.0 dB/click
COMP/DUCKER	Switch	OFF/ON
	Type	COMP/DUCKER
	Key In Source	SELF, CH 1–40, MIX 1–22, MAIN L/R
	Key In Filter Switch	OFF/ON
	Key In Filter Type	HPF/BPF/LPF
	Key In Filter Freq	20 Hz – 20.0 kHz	121	1 point/click 1/12 oct/click	6 point/click 1/2 oct/click
	Key In Filter Q	0.10 – 17.31	55	1 point/click	3 point/click
COMP	Comp Thresh	−49 dB – 0 dB	50	1 dB/click	2 dB/click
	Comp Ratio	1.00:1 – ∞:1	21	1 point/click	1 point/click
	Comp Knee	HARD HARD MID MID SOFT MID SOFT SMOOTH	6	1 point/click	1 point/click
	Comp Attack	0.02 ms – 125 ms	135	1 point/click	5 point/click
	Comp Release	5 ms – 5.00 s	100	1 point/click	5 point/click
	Comp Auto Makeup	OFF/ON
	Comp Output Gain	0 dB – +20 dB	21	1 dB/click	1 dB/click
DUCKER	Ducker Threshold	−60 dB – −6 dB	5	6 dB/click	6 dB/click
	Ducker Attenuation	−∞, −24, −18, −12, −9, −6, −3 (dB)	7	1 point/click	1 point/click
	Ducker HoldTime	0.1 sec, 0.5 – 5.0 sec	11	1 point/click	1 point/click
DELAY	Delay Switch	OFF/ON
	Delay Time	0.0 meter – 117.3 meter 0.0 feet – 384.8 feet 0.00 msec – 341.32 msec		0.1 meter/click 0.1 feet/click 0.02 msec/click	2.0 meter/click 5.0 feet/click 5.00 msec/click
	Delay Point	INPUT/PRE FADER
	Delay Edit Unit	meter/feet/msec
FADER LEVEL		−∞ dB, −120 dB – +10.0 dB	1024	1 point/click (−10 dB – +10 dB: 0.05 dB/click)	40 point/click (−10 dB – +10 dB: 2 dB/click)
MUTE		OFF/ON
Phase Sw		Normal/Reverse
Main L/R Assign		OFF/ON
Pan Bal		L100 – C – R100	201	1 point/click	10 point/click
MIX to Main L/R Send	Send Level	−∞ dB, −120 dB – +10.0 dB	1024	1 point/click (−10 dB – +10dB: 0.05 dB/click)	40 point/click (−10 dB – +10 dB: 2 dB/click)
	Send Pan	L100 – C – R100	201	1 point/click	10 point/click
	Send Switch	OFF/ON
DCA		8 DCAs
Mute Group		8 Groups
Stereo Link		OFF/ON
Bus Mode		AUX/GROUP
Pan Link		OFF/ON
OSC	OSC Switch	OFF/ON
	OSC Level	−36 dB – 0 dB	37	1 dB/click	2 dB/click
	OSC Type	Sine Wave/Pink Noise/White Noise
	OSC Freq	100 Hz/440 Hz/1 kHz/10 kHz
Monitor	Monitor Mono	OFF/ON
	Monitor Dimmer Switch	OFF/ON
	Monitor Dimmer Level	−40 dB – 0 dB	41	1 dB/click	2 dB/click
	Monitor Delay Switch	OFF/ON
	Monitor Delay Time	0.0 meter – 117.3 meter 0.0 feet – 384.8 feet 0.00 msec – 341.32 msec		0.1 meter/click 0.1 feet/click 0.02 msec/click	2.0 meter/click 5.0 feet/click 5.00 msec/click

Sonicview 16XP/24XP Mixer Basic Parameters (FX)

FX common

Function		Parameter	steps	Fine Step (when LCD knob turned without being pressed)	Coarse Steps (when LCD knob turned while being pressed)
FX	FX Input Level	−∞ dB, −120 dB – +10.0 dB	1024	1 point/click (−10 dB – +10 dB: 0.05 dB/click)	40 point/click (−10 dB – +10 dB: 2 dB/click)
	FX Output Level	−∞ dB, −120 dB – +10.0 dB	1024	1 point/click (−10 dB – +10 dB: 0.05 dB/click)	40 point/click (−10 dB – +10 dB: 2 dB/click)
	FX Mix Level	0% − 100%	101	1%/click	5%/click

Function		Parameter	steps	Fine Step (when LCD knob turned without being pressed)	Coarse Steps (when LCD knob turned while being pressed)	Description
REVERB	TYPE	HALL/ROOM/STUDIO/LIVE	4	1 point/click	1 point/click	Reverb type
	PRE DELAY	0 msec − 200 msec	201	1 msec/click	10 msec/click	Time before reverb starts after sound is input
	REVERB TIME	0.1 sec − 10.0 sec	61	0.1 sec/click (0 − 5.0 sec) 0.5 sec/click (5.0 − 10.0 sec)	0.2 sec/click (0 − 5.0 sec) 1.0 sec/click (5.0 − 1 0.0 sec)	Reverb time
	SPREAD	0% − 100%	101	1%/click	5%/click	Reverb spread
STEREO REVERB	TYPE	HALL/ROOM	2	1 point/click	1 point/click	Reverb type
	PRE DELAY	0 msec − 200 msec	201	1 msec/click	10 msec/click	Time before reverb starts after sound is input
	REVERB TIME	0.1 sec − 20.0 sec	71	0.1 sec/click (0 − 5.0 sec) 0.5 sec/click (5.0 − 10.0 sec) 1.0 sec/click (10.0 − 20.0 sec)	0.2 sec/click (0 − 5.0 sec) 1.0 sec/click (5.0 − 10.0 sec) 2.0 sec/click (10.0 − 20.0 sec)	Reverb time
	SPREAD	0% − 100%	101	1%/click	5%/click	Reverb spread
	LO/HIGH GAIN	−12.0 dB − +12.0 dB	49	0.5 dB/click	1.0 dB/click	Shelf filter gain
	LO FREQ	125 Hz − 2.0 kHz	49	1 point/click	3 point/click	Cutoff frequency of the low-shelf filter
	HIGH FREQ	1.00 kHz − 16.00 kHz	49	1 point/click	3 point/click	Cutoff frequency of the high-shelf filter
PLATE REVERB	TYPE	WARM/HARD/BRIGHT/DARK	4	1 point/click	1 point/click	Reverb type
	PRE DELAY	0 msec − 200 msec	201	1 msec/click	10 msec/click	Time before reverb starts after sound is input
	REVERB TIME	0.1 sec − 10.0 sec	61	0.1 sec/click (0 − 5.0 sec) 0.5 sec/click (5.0 − 10.0 sec)	0.2 sec/click (0 − 5.0 sec) 1.0 sec/click (5.0 − 10.0 sec)	Reverb time
	HI DAMP	500 Hz − 16.0 kHz	61	1 point/click	3 point/click	Cutoff frequency of reverb high-frequency attenuation
GATE REVERB	TYPE	FAST/SLOW	2	1 point/click	1 point/click	Gate behavior Fast: Gate opens quickly when Gate Level is exceeded It opens for the set Gate Time. Slow: Gate opens gradually when Gate Level is exceeded It opens completely after the set Gate Time has elapsed.
	GATE LEVEL	−48 dB – 0 dB	49	1 dB/click	2 dB/click	Level at which the gate opens
	GATE TIME	10 msec – 3.0 sec	201	1 msec/click (0 − 100 msec) 10 msec/click (100 msec − 1.0 sec) 0.1 sec/click (1.0 − 3.0 sec)	10 msec/click (0 − 100 msec) 100 msec/click (100 msec − 1.0 sec)	Time that the gate is open
MONO DELAY	DELAY TIME	1 msec – 3000 msec	3000	1 msec/click	100 msec/click	Delay time
	FEEDBACK	0 – 100	101	1 point/click	5 point/click	Feedback amount
	HI DAMP	500 Hz – 16.0 kHz	61	1 point/click	3 point/click	Cutoff frequency of high-frequency attenuation
STEREO DELAY	DELAY TIME	1 msec – 1500 msec	1500	1 msec/click	100 msec/click	Delay time
	FEEDBACK	0 – 100	101	1 point/click	5 point/click	Feedback amount
	HI DAMP	500 Hz – 16.0 kHz	61	1 point/click	3 point/click	Cutoff frequency of high-frequency attenuation
PING-PONG DELAY	DELAY TIME	1 msec – 1500 msec	1500	1 msec/click	100 msec/click	Delay time
	FEEDBACK	0 – 100	101	1 point/click	5 point/click	Feedback amount
	HI DAMP	500 Hz – 16.0 kHz	61	1 point/click	3 point/click	Cutoff frequency of high-frequency attenuation
DELAY LCR	HI DAMP	500 Hz – 16.0 kHz	61	1 point/click	3 point/click	Cutoff frequency of high-frequency attenuation
	DELAY TIME L/C/R	1 msec – 3000 msec	3000	1 msec/click	100 msec/click	Delay time
	FEEDBACK	0 – 100	101	1 point/click	5 point/click	Feedback amount
	WET LEVEL L/C/R	0 – 100	101	1 point/click	5 point/click	Wet level
CHORUS	RATE	0.05 Hz – 10.0 Hz	101	1 point/click	5 point/click	Chorus modulation frequency
	DEPTH	0% – 100%	101	1%/click	5%/click	Chorus depth
	DELAY TIME	0 msec – 100 msec	101	1 msec/click	5 msec/click	Time until wet level is output
	HI PASS	22 Hz – 2.00 kHz	79	1 point/click	3 point/click	High pass filter that limits the frequency of input signals
	HI DAMP	500 Hz – 16.0 kHz	61	1 point/click	3 point/click	Cutoff frequency of high-frequency attenuation
	SPREAD	0% – 100%	101	1%/click	5%/click	Left-right width effect
FLANGER	RATE	0.05 Hz – 10.0 Hz	101	1 point/click	5 point/click	Flanger modulation frequency
	DEPTH	0% – 100%	101	1%/click	5%/click	Flanger depth
	DELAY TIME	0 msec – 100 msec	101	1 msec/click	5 msec/click	Time until wet level is output
	PHASE	0 deg – 180 deg	181	1 deg/click	10 deg/click	Left-right modulation phase difference
PHASER	RATE	0.05 Hz – 10.0 Hz	101	1 point/click	5 point/click	Phaser modulation frequency
	STAGE	4/8/12/16	4	1 point/click	1 point/click	The number of phase steps
	RESONANCE	0 – 10	11	1 point/click	1 point/click	Amount of resonance applied to the feedback sound
	PHASE	0 deg – 180 deg	181	1 deg/click	10 deg/click	Left-right modulation phase difference
PITCH	PITCH 1/2	−24 – +24	49	1 point/click	2 point/click	Shift amount (in semitones)
PITCH	FINE TUNE 1/2	−50 Cent – +50 Cent	101	1 cent/click	5 cent/click	Shift amount (in cents)

Sonicview 16XP/24XP Preset List

Gate Library Preset List

No.	TYPE	NAME	Parameters
P001	GATE	Floor Tom	Threshold	Range	Attack	Hold	Decay
P001	GATE	Floor Tom	−20 dB	−40 dB	0 msec	60 msec	320 msec
P002	GATE	Kick in	Threshold	Range	Attack	Hold	Decay
P002	GATE	Kick in	−30 dB	−50 dB	0 msec	110 msec	95 msec
P003	GATE	Kick out	Threshold	Range	Attack	Hold	Decay
P003	GATE	Kick out	−35 dB	−50 dB	0 msec	100 msec	85 msec
P004	GATE	Noise Gate	Threshold	Range	Attack	Hold	Decay
P004	GATE	Noise Gate	−28 dB	−60 dB	0 msec	50 msec	300 msec
P005	GATE	Rack Tom 1	Threshold	Range	Attack	Hold	Decay
P005	GATE	Rack Tom 1	−20 dB	−40 dB	0 msec	60 msec	380 msec
P006	GATE	Rack Tom 2	Threshold	Range	Attack	Hold	Decay
P006	GATE	Rack Tom 2	−20 dB	−40 dB	0 msec	60 msec	300 msec
P007	GATE	Snare bottom	Threshold	Range	Attack	Hold	Decay
P007	GATE	Snare bottom	−28 dB	−40 dB	0 msec	90 msec	300 msec
P008	EXP	EXP Snare bottom	Threshold	Ratio	Knee	Attack	Release
P008	EXP	EXP Snare bottom	−27 dB	4:1	Mid	60 msec	280 msec
P009	EXP	EXP Tom	Threshold	Ratio	Knee	Attack	Release
P009	EXP	EXP Tom	−28 dB	4:1	Mid	60 msec	380 msec
P010	DE-ESSER	DE-ESS Vocal 2k	Threshold	Knee	Center Feq	Q
P010	DE-ESSER	DE-ESS Vocal 2k	−28 dB	Mid	2.5 kHz	3.45
P011	DE-ESSER	DE-ESS Vocal 4k	Threshold	Knee	Center Feq	Q
P011	DE-ESSER	DE-ESS Vocal 4k	−28 dB	Mid	4.2 kHz	4.32

EQ Library Preset List

No.	NAME	Parameters
P001	A.Gtr 1	Low		Low Mid		Hi Mid		Hi
		Q	-	Q	1.90	Q	-	Q	Hi Shelf
		Freq	-	Freq	397 Hz	Freq	-	Freq	3.56 kHz
		Gain	-	Gain	−2.5 dB	Gain	-	Gain	1.5 dB
P002	A.Gtr 2	Low		Low Mid		Hi Mid		Hi
		Q	4.94	Q	2.02	Q	2.02	Q	Hi Shelf
		Freq	140 Hz	Freq	375 Hz	Freq	3.17 kHz	Freq	5.04 kHz
		Gain	−3.0 dB	Gain	−3.0 dB	Gain	+3.5 dB	Gain	+1.0 dB
P003	Bass Line	Low		Low Mid		Hi Mid		Hi
		Q	7.99	Q	-	Q	2.14	Q	-
		Freq	132 Hz	Freq	-	Freq	1.59 kHz	Freq	-
		Gain	−3.0 dB	Gain	-	Gain	+4.0 dB	Gain	-
P004	Bass mic	Low		Low Mid		Hi Mid		Hi
		Q	-	Q	2.02	Q	2.02	Q	-
		Freq	-	Freq	265 Hz	Freq	3.00 kHz	Freq	-
		Gain	-	Gain	−5.0 dB	Gain	+5.0 dB	Gain	-
P005	E.Gtr	Low		Low Mid		Hi Mid		Hi
		Q	-	Q	1.90	Q	-	Q	Hi Shelf
		Freq	-	Freq	397 Hz	Freq	-	Freq	3.56 kHz
		Gain	-	Gain	−2.5 dB	Gain	-	Gain	+1.5 dB
P006	Floor Tom	Low		Low Mid		Hi Mid		Hi
		Q	2.02	Q	1.41	Q	-	Q	1.80
		Freq	79 Hz	Freq	420 Hz	Freq	-	Freq	5.04 kHz
		Gain	+3.5 dB	Gain	−4.0 dB	Gain	-	Gain	+3.0 dB
P007	Hi Hat	Low		Low Mid		Hi Mid		Hi
		Q	-	Q	0.92	Q	-	Q	-
		Freq	-	Freq	472 Hz	Freq	-	Freq	-
		Gain	-	Gain	−8.0 dB	Gain	-	Gain	-
P008	Kick in	Low		Low Mid		Hi Mid		Hi
		Q	-	Q	1.90	Q	2.46	Q	-
		Freq	-	Freq	315 Hz	Freq	4.49 kHz	Freq	-
		Gain	-	Gain	−4.0 dB	Gain	+8.0 dB	Gain	-
P009	Kick out	Low		Low Mid		Hi Mid		Hi
		Q	2.46	Q	1.04	Q	1.41	Q	-
		Freq	63 Hz	Freq	375 Hz	Freq	3.78 kHz	Freq	-
		Gain	+3.0 dB	Gain	−6.0 dB	Gain	+7.0 dB	Gain	-
P010	Over Head	Low		Low Mid		Hi Mid		Hi
		Q	-	Q	1.20	Q	-	Q	Hi Shelf
		Freq	-	Freq	445 Hz	Freq	-	Freq	4.24 kHz
		Gain	-	Gain	−6.0 dB	Gain	-	Gain	+1.5 dB
P011	Rack Tom 1	Low		Low Mid		Hi Mid		Hi
		Q	-	Q	1.41	Q	-	Q	1.41
		Freq	-	Freq	472 Hz	Freq	-	Freq	4.76 kHz
		Gain	-	Gain	−4.0 dB	Gain	-	Gain	+6.0 dB
P012	Rack Tom 2	Low		Low Mid		Hi Mid		Hi
		Q	-	Q	1.41	Q	-	Q	1.04
		Freq	-	Freq	397 Hz	Freq	-	Freq	4.24 kHz
		Gain	-	Gain	−4.0 dB	Gain	-	Gain	+4.0 dB
P013	Ride	Low		Low Mid		Hi Mid		Hi
		Q	-	Q	1.41	Q	-	Q	Hi Shelf
		Freq	-	Freq	397 Hz	Freq	-	Freq	4.24 kHz
		Gain	-	Gain	−8.0 dB	Gain	-	Gain	+1.5 dB
P014	Snare bottom	Low		Low Mid		Hi Mid		Hi
		Q	-	Q	1.41	Q	2.02	Q	Hi Shelf
		Freq	-	Freq	297 Hz	Freq	3.36 kHz	Freq	2.52 kHz
		Gain	-	Gain	−4.0 dB	Gain	+3.0 dB	Gain	+2.0 dB
P015	Snare top	Low		Low Mid		Hi Mid		Hi
		Q	-	Q	1.90	Q	2.02	Q	Hi Shelf
		Freq	-	Freq	445 Hz	Freq	3.36 kHz	Freq	2.00 kHz
		Gain	-	Gain	−3.5 dB	Gain	+3.0 dB	Gain	+5.0 dB
P016	Synth Bass	Low		Low Mid		Hi Mid		Hi
		Q	4.32	Q	-	Q	3.84	Q	-
		Freq	70 Hz	Freq	-	Freq	3.17 kHz	Freq	-
		Gain	+3.0 dB	Gain	-	Gain	−3.0 dB	Gain	-
P017	Vocal Female	Low		Low Mid		Hi Mid		Hi
		Q	3.13	Q	1.80	Q	3.45	Q	Hi Shelf
		Freq	281 Hz	Freq	595 Hz	Freq	2.83 kHz	Freq	5.04 kHz
		Gain	−3.5 dB	Gain	−3.5 dB	Gain	−2.0 dB	Gain	+2.0 dB
P018	Vocal Male	Low		Low Mid		Hi Mid		Hi
		Q	4.32	Q	2.87	Q	3.84	Q	Hi Shelf
		Freq	210 Hz	Freq	375 Hz	Freq	4.49 kHz	Freq	5.04 kHz
		Gain	−3.0 dB	Gain	−3.5 dB	Gain	−2.0 dB	Gain	+3.0 dB

Comp Library Preset List

No.	NAME	Parameters
P001	A.Gtr	Threshold	Ratio	Knee	Attack	Release	Output Gain
P001	A.Gtr	−29 dB	2.50:1	Mid	1 msec	200 msec	+2 dB
P002	Bass Line	Threshold	Ratio	Knee	Attack	Release	Output Gain
P002	Bass Line	−27 dB	3.33:1	Mid	30 msec	230 msec	+2 dB
P003	Bass mic	Threshold	Ratio	Knee	Attack	Release	Output Gain
P003	Bass mic	−30 dB	3.33:1	Hard	20 msec	125 msec	+3 dB
P004	Keyboard	Threshold	Ratio	Knee	Attack	Release	Output Gain
P004	Keyboard	−17 dB	2.50:1	Mid	50 msec	200 msec	+0 dB
P005	Kick in	Threshold	Ratio	Knee	Attack	Release	Output Gain
P005	Kick in	−20 dB	2.86:1	Mid	20 msec	30 msec	+3 dB
P006	Kick out	Threshold	Ratio	Knee	Attack	Release	Output Gain
P006	Kick out	−19 dB	2.50:1	Mid	20 msec	40 msec	+3 dB
P007	Snare bottom	Threshold	Ratio	Knee	Attack	Release	Output Gain
P007	Snare bottom	−30 dB	2.50:1	Mid	30 msec	230 msec	+0 dB
P008	Snare top	Threshold	Ratio	Knee	Attack	Release	Output Gain
P008	Snare top	−26 dB	3.33:1	Mid	15 msec	65 msec	+3 dB
P009	Synth Bass	Threshold	Ratio	Knee	Attack	Release	Output Gain
P009	Synth Bass	−28 dB	3.33:1	Mid	30 msec	150 msec	+0 dB
P010	Vocal Cho	Threshold	Ratio	Knee	Attack	Release	Output Gain
P010	Vocal Cho	−28 dB	3.33:1	Mid	30 msec	150 msec	+1 dB
P011	Vocal Female	Threshold	Ratio	Knee	Attack	Release	Output Gain
P011	Vocal Female	−25 dB	2.50:1	Mid	25 msec	150 msec	+3 dB
P012	Vocal Male	Threshold	Ratio	Knee	Attack	Release	Output Gain
P012	Vocal Male	−24 dB	2.50:1	Mid	25 msec	200 msec	+3 dB

FX Library Preset List

No.	FX TYPE	Name	Parameters
P001	REVERB	Dr Rev	TYPE	PRE DELAY	REVERB TIME	SPREAD
P001	REVERB	Dr Rev	LIVE	6 msec	2.0 sec	70%
P002	GT-REV	Gate Rev	TYPE	GATE LEVEL	GATE TIME
P002	GT-REV	Gate Rev	Fast	−20 dB	810 msec
P003	ST-REV	Inst Rev	TYPE	PRE DELAY	REVERB TIME	SPREAD	LO GAIN	LO FREQ	HI GAIN	HI FREQ
P003	ST-REV	Inst Rev	HALL	20 msec	2.2 sec	80%	3.0 dB	132 Hz	2.0 dB	1.89 kHz
P004	PL-REV	SN Rev	TYPE	PRE DELAY	REVERB TIME	HI DAMP
P004	PL-REV	SN Rev	BRIGHT	20 msec	1.8 sec	4.00 kHz
P005	PL-REV	Vo Rev 1	TYPE	PRE DELAY	REVERB TIME	HI DAMP
P005	PL-REV	Vo Rev 1	WARM	80 msec	2.8 sec	8.00 kHz
P006	REVERB	Vo Rev 2	TYPE	PRE DELAY	REVERB TIME	SPREAD
P006	REVERB	Vo Rev 2	HALL	40 msec	2.4 sec	70%
P007	LCR-DLY	Delay LCR	HI DAMP	DELAY TIME L	DELAY TIME C	DELAY TIME R	FEEDBACK	WET LEVEL L	WET LEVEL C	WET LEVEL R
P007	LCR-DLY	Delay LCR	10.1 kHz	250 msec	750 msec	500 msec	40	80	80	80
P008	MN-DLY	Mono Delay	DELAY TIME	FEEDBACK	HI DAMP
P008	MN-DLY	Mono Delay	500 msec	40	10.1 kHz
P009	PP-DLY	Ping-Pong Delay	DELAY TIME	FEEDBACK	HI DAMP
P009	PP-DLY	Ping-Pong Delay	500 msec	60	10.1 kHz
P010	ST-DLY	Stereo Delay	DELAY TIME	FEEDBACK	HI DAMP
P010	ST-DLY	Stereo Delay	500 msec	40	10.1 kHz
P011	CHORUS	Chorus	RATE	DEPTH	DELAY TIME	HI PASS	HI DAMP	SPREAD
P011	CHORUS	Chorus	0.25 Hz	0%	40 msec	125 Hz	3.36 kHz	100%
P012	FLANGER	Flanger	RATE	DEPTH	DELAY TIME	PHASE
P012	FLANGER	Flanger	0.20 Hz	10%	40 msec	180 deg
P013	PHASER	Phaser	RATE	STAGE	RESONANCE	PHASE
P013	PHASER	Phaser	0.40 Hz	8	2	180 deg
P014	PITCH	Pitch	PITCH 1	FINE 1	PITCH 2	FINE 2
P014	PITCH	Pitch	0	−10 cent	0	+10 cent

Port number	Assigned function
1	Fader Start/Stop \| CH29 \| Alternate \| NORMAL-Open
2	Fader Start/Stop \| CH31 \| Alternate \| NORMAL-Open
3	Fader Start/Stop \| CH33 \| Alternate \| NORMAL-Open
4	Fader Start/Stop \| CH35 \| Alternate \| NORMAL-Open
5	Fader Start/Stop \| CH37 \| Alternate \| NORMAL-Open
6	Fader Start/Stop \| CH39 \| Alternate \| NORMAL-Open
7	Fader Start/Stop \| STIN1 \| Alternate \| NORMAL-Open
8	Fader Start/Stop \| STIN2 \| Alternate \| NORMAL-Open

Menu item	Sub menu item	Functions	Page
Mixer Setup	Meter	View various meters and set various meter display parameters	METER screen
	MIX Send Overview	View and use a list of MIX 1–22 / FX 1–4 / MAIN L/R bus send settings	MIX 1–22 bus SEND OVERVIEW Screen
	Automatic Mixer	AUTO MIXER settings	AUTO MIXER Function
	Main L/R Assign Overview	View and use a list of MAIN L/R bus assignment states	MAIN L/R bus SEND OVERVIEW Screen
	DCA / Mute Group	Make the following settings DCA assignments Mute Group assignments Turn Mute Group Master on/off	DCA/Mute Group SETUP screen
	Talkback / Monitor / Solo / OSC	TALKBACK / RETURN TALKBACK / MONITOR output / SOLO / built-in oscillator settings	Making talkback settings
			RETURN TALKBACK settings
			Making monitor output settings
			Making solo and built-in oscillator settings
	Config Mixer / Location / Bus	Make the following settings CH 1–40 stereo link settings DIRECT OUT POINT settings DELAY POINT settings INSERT POINT unified settings Location setting BUS MODE settings MIX 1–22 stereo link settings PAN LINK settings	MIXER CONFIG screen
	Label Setup	Label settings for input/output ports	LABEL SETUP screen
Front Panel Setup	User Key Setup	Assign functions to the 18 USER KEYS	User Key page
	Layer / Master Fader Setup	Make the following settings Assign channel sets and custom layers to the 7 LAYER KEYS Assign module groups to custom layers Assign modules to the MASTER fader	Layer Key SETUP page
	Talkback Setup	Make talkback settings	Making talkback settings
	Brightness	Set the brightness of the various displays	PREFERENCES screen
Rear Panel Setup	Dante Setup	Set and view the status of the built-in Dante module and an SB-16D connected via the built-in Dante module	Dante SETUP screen
	ST 2110 Setup	View the settings and states of IF-ST2110 cards installed in SLOT 1 or SLOT 2 on the rear panel. NOTE In the following circumstances, this sub menu item will appear gray and the ST 2110 Setup Screen will not open even if it is tapped. When no IF-ST2110 is installed When the IF-ST2110 is being initialized	13 - IF-ST2110 expansion cards
	Slot Setup	Set various functions of expansion cards loaded in SLOT 1 and SLOT 2	SLOT SETUP screen
	WORD OUT Mode Setup	Make WORD OUT jack output mode settings	SYNC CLOCK screen
	Network Setup	Make Network settings	Network Setup screen
	FOOT SW Setup	Assign footswitch functions	Foot Switch page
	GPIO Input Setup	Assign functions to the GPIO input connector	GPIO-IN page
	GPIO Output Setup	Assign functions to the GPIO output connector	GPIO-OUT page
	LAMP Dimmer Setup	Set the brightness of the lamp connected to the LAMP jack on the back of the unit	PREFERENCES screen
System Setup	Information	View the state of the unit and error information	INFORMATION Screen
	Sync Clock	Make the following settings Sampling frequency Master clock Output mode of word clock output connector	SYNC CLOCK screen
	Preferences	Make the following settings USB Keyboard type setting Confirmation when storing/recalling snapshots Reference level Cooling fan operation mode and speed Brightness of various displays Contrast of channel screens	PREFERENCES screen
	Media Manage	Display and format media data	Media Manage Screen
	All System Data	Save, load, back up and restore data for entire mixer	All System Data screen
	Clock Adjust	Set date and time of built-in clock	Setting the built-in clock date and time
	Version Information	View system version information	Version Information Screen
	Firmware Update	Update the firmware	Firmware update procedures
Recorder / Player	Recorder / Player	Use built-in recorder/player	10 - Recording and playback
Recorder / Player	Multi Track Recorder	Use IF-MTR32 (multitrack recording) card installed in SLOT 1 or SLOT 2 on the rear panel NOTE In the following circumstances, this sub menu item will appear gray and the MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen will not open even if it is tapped. When no IF-MTR32 is installed When the IF-MTR32 is being initialized	12 - Multitrack Recorder
Save Current Settings		Save current mixer settings in built-in memory (We recommend doing this before turning the unit off)	Saving the current settings

Page name	Contents
ANALOG OUTPUT	Select analog output ports.
Dante	Select built-in Dante output ports.
SLOT 1	Select the output ports of the expansion card installed in SLOT 1.
SLOT 2	Select the output ports of the expansion card installed in SLOT 2.
USB OUT	Select USB audio interface output ports.

Error status	Background color
Error currently occurring	Red
Alert currently occurring	Yellow
Resolved error	Gray

Error/alert type	Message	Meaning	Note
System Clock Error	“Master clock name” clock has no signal. Switched to Internal.	There is no signal from the master clock.	Master clock name: WORD Dante SLOT 1 (slot signal type) SLOT 2 (slot signal type) Slot signal types: AES, Dante, MADI
	“Master clock name” clock is unlocked. Switched to Internal.	The master clock is unlocked.
	“Master clock name” clock regained.	The master clock has been regained (locking is possible again after becoming unlocked).
	“Master clock name” clock regained. Can be re-synced to “Master clock name”.	The master clock has been regained (locking is possible again after becoming unlocked). (message that appears at the top of the screen)
	“Master clock name” clock is locked.	The master clock is locked. (This is shown in gray on the INFORMATION Screen ERROR page as a record of when locked status was restored after a No Signal or Unlock state error was resolved. This is not shown at the top of the screen.)
Slot Card Error	SLOT [slot number] [card name] was removed.	The expansion card was removed.	Slot number: 1/2 Card name: IF-AE16 (AES) IF-AN16/OUT (Analog Out) IF-DA64 (Dante) IF-MA64/BN (MADI) IF-MA64/EX (MADI) IF-MTR32 (Recorder) IF-ST2110 (ST 2110)
Slot Card Error	SLOT [slot number] [card name] failure.	Trouble was detected with the expansion card.
Internal Dante Error	Dante Module Unavailable.	The built-in Dante module is in an unusable state (in safe mode/updating).
Internal Dante Error	Dante Module Available.	The built-in Dante module is in a usable state.	This is shown in gray on the INFORMATION Screen ERROR page as an error record. This is not shown at the top of the screen.
Insufficient available memory error	Insufficient memory. A system reboot is recommended to ensure stable operation. - The reboot should take less than a minute. - During system reboot audio and operation will be interrupted.	The amount of available memory that can be used by the system is becoming low. As soon as is convenient, use the POWER switch on the back of the unit to restart it in order to maintain stable operation of the system. Restarting should take less than one minute. Note that while restarting audio output will stop and operation will not be possible.	This is shown when the AVAILABLE MEMORY decreases to the red bar on the STATUS page of the INFORMATION Screen. In this case, an error message will be shown at the top of the screen along with a message window.
Device Temperature Error	SYSTEM is too HOT. Increase FAN speed.	The internal temperature of the unit has risen. Increase the speed of the cooling fan.
	CPU is too HOT. Increase FAN speed.	The temperature of the CPU has risen. Increase the speed of the cooling fan.
	DSP is too HOT. Increase FAN speed.	The temperature of the DSP has risen. Increase the speed of the cooling fan.
	IF-ST2110 Card is too HOT.	The temperature of the IF-ST2110 expansion card has risen.
	SYSTEM is too COLD.	The internal temperature of the unit is too low.
	CPU is too COLD.	The temperature of the CPU is too low.
	DSP is too COLD.	The temperature of the DSP is too low.
	SYSTEM temperature normal.	The internal temperature of the unit has returned to the proper range.	This is shown in gray on the INFORMATION Screen ERROR page as an error record. This is not shown at the top of the screen.
	CPU temperature normal.	The temperature of the CPU has returned to the proper range.
	DSP temperature normal.	The temperature of the DSP has returned to the proper range.
	IF-ST2110 Card temperature normal.	The temperature of the IF-ST2110 expansion card has returned to the proper range.
Cooling FAN Error	Cooling FAN failure.	The cooling fan in the main unit has stopped.
	IF-ST2110 Card FAN failure.	The cooling fan in the IF-ST2110 expansion card has stopped.
	Cooling FAN in motion.	The cooling fan in the main unit has started moving.	This is shown in gray on the INFORMATION Screen ERROR page as an error record. This is not shown at the top of the screen.
	IF-ST2110 Card FAN in motion.	The cooling fan in the IF-ST2110 expansion card has started moving.
Prohibited Setting Alert	Clock master changed to Internal. [Card name] cannot be clock master.	Even though an IF-AN16/OUT or IF-MTR32 cannot be selected as the master clock, it was, so the master clock was changed to “INT”.	This could occur upon startup if the SLOT card set as the master clock was switched to an IF-AN16/OUT or IF-MTR32 when the power was off.
Slot Card Alert	SLOT [slot number] [card name] installed.	An expansion card was installed while the power was off.	Slot number: 1/2 Card name: IF-AE16 (AES) IF-AN16/OUT (Analog Out) IF-DA64 (Dante) IF-MA64/BN (MADI) IF-MA64/EX (MADI) IF-MTR32 (Recorder) IF-ST2110 (ST 2110)
Slot Card Alert	SLOT [slot number] was changed from [old card name] to [current card name].	The expansion card was changed while the power was off.
Internal Dante Alert	Dante I/O Sample rate changed by Dante Controller.	The internal Dante input/output sampling frequency was changed by Dante Controller.
Storage Media Alert	Unrecognized format (SD card).	An SD card with a format that cannot be recognized was loaded.
Storage Media Alert	Unrecognized format (USB memory).	A USB flash drive with a format that cannot be recognized was loaded.
Record Alert	Recording stopped. Media Full.	The medium did not have enough capacity, so recording stopped.
	Recording error. Buffer overflow.	Recording stopped because a buffer overflow occurred during recording.
	Recording stopped. File limit reached. Please change to another folder.	Recording stopped because the total number of files in the folder would exceed the system limit. Switch to another folder.
	Recording error. SD card was removed.	Recording stopped because the SD card was disconnected during recording.
Play Alert	Play error. Buffer underrun.	Playback stopped because a buffer underrun occurred during playback.
Play Alert	Play error. [Media name] was removed.	Playback stopped because the media was disconnected during playback.	Media name: SD card USB
SB-16D mounting error	SB-16D ID #xx-xx has been disconnected.	A mounted SB-16D has been disconnected from the Dante network and became virtually mounted.	xx = 1 – 16
SB-16D mounting alert	SB-16D ID#xx-xx connected.	A virtually mounted SB-16D has been connected to the Dante network and became mounted.	xx = 1 – 16 This message will not be shown if this alert occurs within three minutes of starting up.
SB-16D duplicate ID error	SB-16D ID #xx-xx has a ID conflict.	An SB-16D with the same ID as an already mounted SB-16D has been connected to the Dante network.	xx = 1 – 16
SB-16D duplicate ID error	SB-16D ID #xx-xx conflict has been resolved.	The duplicated ID conflict of mounted SB-16D units has been resolved.	xx = 1 – 16 This is shown in gray on the INFORMATION Screen ERROR page as an error record. This is not shown at the top of the screen.
SB-16D parameter setting alert	SB-16D ID #xx-xx INPUT xx cannot be set to LINE LEVEL. This console does not have SB-16D ID #xx-xx Pre Amp Control.	The input port that was or is assigned to the Insert Return port belongs to an SB-16D for which control privileges have not been acquired, so the preamp settings of the corresponding input port could not be changed to the line level standard settings. See the following for details about when this is shown. “ AUTO ROUTING button” “Using SB-16D units” “ Input source selection buttons”	xx = 1 – 16
IF-MTR32 (multitrack recorder) alert	MTR File Error.	Reading the file failed with the MTR.
	MTR Non-Supported WAV format.	The WAV file is not supported by the MTR Please see “File format overview” for file formats that can be used by the MTR.
	MTR Cannot MARK. (Limit Reached)	Only 99 marks can be added.
	MTR No Playback File.	No file is available for playback with the MTR.
	MTR Playing Error.	MTR playback failed. Check the file.
	MTR cannot record. Please enable at least one REC READY track	Recording cannot start because no MTR recording track has been selected. Enable REC READY for at least one.
	MTR buffer overflow occurred. Recording will continue.	Writing to the MTR SD card timed out. This has caused audio to be interrupted and noise to occur. A mark was added at the point when audio was interrupted. Execute the erase format function or change the SD card.	Executing ERASE format for the SD card on the MULTI TRACK RECORDER - MENU Screen should restore the performance of the card. However, writing speed might not be restored depending on the SD card condition (including malfunction and age).
	MTR Recording stopped. Buffer overflow.	Recording stopped because SD card writing performance with the MTR has degraded. A mark has been added at the point when audio was interrupted because writing to the SD card timed out. Check the audio around the mark. Execute the erase format function or change the SD card.
	MTR Recording stopped. SD Card Full.	Recording stopped because the MTR SD card has no open space.
	MTR Recording stopped. Take limit reached. Please change to another project.	MTR recording stopped because the total number of files, folders and other items inside the folder was great.
	MTR Failed to write.	Writing failed with the MTR. Replace the SD card.
	MTR File Protected.	Editing is not possible because the MTR file is protected from writing. Remove file protection.
	MTR Protected SD Card. Please unprotect the SD card.	The MTR SD card is locked. Remove protection.
IF-MTR32 (multitrack recorder) alert	MTR SD Card Error. Please format the SD card.	The MTR SD card is not formatted properly or the card might be broken. Format the SD card. Formatting will erase all the data on that card.
	MTR Format Error. Please format the SD card.	The MTR SD card is not formatted properly or the card might be broken. Format the SD card. Formatting will erase all the data on that card.
	MTR Operation cannot be continued. Please reinsert the SD CARD.	A problem occurred with the MTR SD card. Reinsert the card.
	MTR Invalid SD Card. Please change the SD card.	Something might be wrong with the MTR SD card. Replace the SD card.
	MTR System ROM Error.	If this error occurs frequently, please contact TASCAM customer support
	MTR Unknown Error. XX An unexpected error occurred inside the system. Please contact our customer support with the error code.	If this error occurs frequently, please contact TASCAM customer support.	XX is the error number

Item	Explanation
Total size	This shows the total capacity of the media.
Used	This shows the amount of space already used.
Available	This shows the amount of free space.

Device	Explanation
MAIN	Update the firmware of the main unit.
SLOT 1	Update the firmware of the expansion card installed in SLOT 1.
SLOT 2	Update the firmware of the expansion card installed in SLOT 2.

Icon	Meaning
	Single playback
	Folder playback (default)
	Single repeat playback
	Folder repeat playback

	Tap this when the player is playing to stop playback. When the player is stopped, this button will be highlighted white.
	When the player is stopped or playing, tap this button to pause playback. When the player is paused, this button will be highlighted white.
	Tap this when the player is stopped or paused to start playback. When playing, this button will be highlighted green.
/	When the player is stopped, playing back or paused, tap these buttons to start searching forward/backward. Pres and hold one of these to keep searching while it is being touched. Tap this when searching forward/backward to return to the state before searching. When searching forward/backward, this button will appear white.
/	Tap this when the player is stopped to skip to the previous/next file. Tap the button when playing or paused to return to the beginning of the file. Press the button when a file is stopped at its beginning to skip to the beginning of the previous file. Tap the button during playback to skip to the next file.

Button appearance	Content
Audio Network Config.	Shows audio and network setting states
HOME (Source / Destination)	Shows lists of source and destination streams

Indicator	Connection status
	The transmission status is good.
	Some connections have problems. The number of problems is shown with a numeral.
	Connection has not been achieved. The number of problems is shown with a numeral.

Contents/Identifier				Type	Value	Writable
Sonicview	identity	version		String	Sonicview System Version data character string Example: 1.07.00 build 20240627	False
		product		String	Product name Fixed value: Sonicview 24	False
		role		String	Network Setup Screen: Machine Name setting Default value: Sonicview 24	True
		company		String	Manufacturer name Fixed value: TEAC Corporation	False
	information	clock_status		String	Good/Unlocked/Regained	False
		sampling_rate		Int64	96000/48000	False
		clock_master		String	INTERNAL/WORD/Dante/SLOT1/SLOT2	False
		sd		String	MOUNTED/NO MEDIA	False
		usb		String	MOUNTED/NO MEDIA	False
		recorder		String	STOP/PAUSE/REC	False
		player		String	STOP/PAUSE/PLAY/REW/FF	False
Sonicview	information	slot1		String	Slot card product name (signal/product type) Examples: IF-DA64 (Dante), IF-MTR32 (Multi Track Recorder), etc.	False
		slot2		String		False
		system_temperature		Int64	Internal temperature of unit (ºC) numerical value × 10000	False
		system_temperature_is_good		Bool	True = within normal range (0–50ºC) / False = temperature error (too HOT / too COLD)	False
		dsp_temperature		Int64	DSP temperature (ºC) numerical value × 10000	False
		dsp_temperature_is_good		Bool	True = within normal range (0–85ºC) / False = temperature error (too HOT / too COLD)	False
		cpu_temperature		Int64	CPU temperature (ºC) numerical value × 10000	False
		cpu_temperature_is_good		Bool	True = within normal range (0–80ºC) / False = temperature error (too HOT / too COLD)	False
		fan_rpm		Int64	Cooling fan revolution speed (rpm)	False
		fan_is_good		Bool	True = cooling fan operating / False = cooling fan stopped	False
		mtr_version		String	IF-MTR32 (MTR card) version information	False
		mtr_status		String	IF-MTR32 (MTR card) operation status STOP/PAUSE/PLAY/REW/FF	False
	errors	error_1–40		String	Error message character string Examples: 2023/06/22 08:53 INT clock is unlocked. Switched to Internal. 2023/06/22 08:53 Cooling FAN failure.	False
	sources	analog_1-24 (Sonicview 24)	label	String	Port name string (8 characters maximum)	True
		analog_1-16 (Sonicview 16)	label	String		True
		Analog_17-24 (Sonicview 16)	label	String		True
		stereo_in_1l-2r	label	String		True
		player_l-r	label	String		True
		dante_1–64	label	String		True
		slot1_1–64	label	String		True
		slot2_1–64	label	String		True
		usb_in_1–32	label	String		True
Sonicview	channels	channel_1–40	fader	Int64	min = 0 / max = 1023 (0 dB = 816)	True
			mute	Bool	True = Muted / False = Unmuted	True
			solo	Bool	True = Solo ON / False = Solo OFF	True
			input	Int64	min = 0 / max = xxx (select from Enumeration List)	True
		channel_stin1–2	fader	Int64	min = 0 / max = 1023 (0 dB = 816)	True
			mute	Bool	True = Muted / False = Unmuted	True
			solo	Bool	True = Solo ON / False = Solo OFF	True
			input	Int64	min = 0 / max = xxx (select from Enumeration List)	True
		channel_fxrtn1–4	fader	Int64	min = 0 / max = 1023 (0 dB = 816)	True
			mute	Bool	True = Muted / False = Unmuted	True
			solo	Bool	True = Solo ON / False = Solo OFF	True
		channel_mix1–22	fader	Int64	min = 0 / max = 1023 (0 dB = 816)	True
			mute	Bool	True = Muted / False = Unmuted	True
			solo	Bool	True = Solo ON / False = Solo OFF	True
		channel_main	fader	Int64	min = 0 / max = 1023 (0 dB = 816)	True
			mute	Bool	True = Muted / False = Unmuted	True
			solo	Bool	True = Solo ON / False = Solo OFF	True
		channel_dca1–8	fader	Int64	min = 0 / max = 1023 (0 dB = 816)	True
			mute	Bool	True = Muted / False = Unmuted	True
			solo	Bool	True = Solo ON / False = Solo OFF	True
		channel_mutegroup1–8	mute	Bool	True = Muted / False = Unmuted	True
	snapshots	snapshot_1-128, P001	name	String	Snapshot name	False
			comment	String	Snapshot comment	False
			empty	Bool	True = No data / False = Data present	False
			recall	Bool	Setting to “True” will recall. After recall completes, this will return to “False”.	True

Model	Meaning
Sonicview 16	L/R 1–8, MASTER
Sonicview 24	L/C/R 1–8, MASTER

Shortcut operation	Explanation
Press a SEL key while pressing the HOME key on the top panel	This sets the FADER level to 0 dB for the channel of the pressed SEL key on the top panel. When the SENDS ON FADER key on the top panel is pressed (Sends On Fader mode is on), this sets the SEND level to 0 dB. When the GEQ Screen FADER Ctrl function is on, this sets the GEQ gain of the corresponding frequency to 0 dB.
Tap the SEND level area on the touchscreen while pressing the HOME key on the top panel	This sets the following parameters to 0 dB. Home Screen SEND levels MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screen FADER levels MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen SEND levels SEND OVERVIEW Screen SEND LEVEL (INPUT) page and SEND LEVEL (BUS) page SEND/MASTER levels SEND OVERVIEW Screen FADER LEVEL page FADER and MASTER levels
Tap the PAN area on the touchscreen while pressing the HOME key on the top panel	This sets the following pan/balance settings to center (C). Home Screen PAN/BAL MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screen PAN/BAL MODULE (SEND/PAN) Screen PAN/BAL SEND OVERVIEW Screen SEND PAN (INPUT) page and SEND PAN (BUS) page PAN/BAL
Tap the EQ gain area on the touchscreen while pressing the HOME key on the top panel	This sets the EQ gain settings to 0 dB on the MODULE (EQ) Screens of each module.
Turn any LCD knob while pressing the HOME key on the top panel	This adjusts the brightness of all the touchscreens, channel screens, various indicators and the lamp connected to the LAMP connector on the rear panel at the same time.
Press and turn any LCD knob while pressing the HOME key on the top panel	This adjusts the brightness of all the touchscreens and channel screens at the same time.

Shortcut operation	Explanation
Press the TALKBACK key while pressing the MENU key on the top panel	This opens the TALKBACK page of the TALKBACK / MONITOR / SOLO / OSC SETUP Screen on the touchscreen.
Press the SOLO or SOLO CLEAR key while pressing the MENU key on the top panel	This opens the SOLO/OSCILLATOR page of the TALKBACK / MONITOR / SOLO / OSC SETUP Screen on the touchscreen.
Press a LAYER KEYS 1–7 while pressing the MENU key on the top panel	This opens the Layer Key SETUP Screen for the selected layer on the touchscreen.
Press a USER KEYS A–F or USER KEYS 1–12 key while pressing the MENU key on the top panel	This will open one of the following screens that corresponds to the function assigned to USER KEYS A–F or USER KEYS 1–12.
	USER key function	Screen recalled by MENU+USER key
	Unassigned	USER KEY setting screen for the depressed USER key
	Snapshot	Snapshot List Screen
	Monitor	MONITOR 1/2 page of the TALKBACK / MONITOR / SOLO / OSC SETUP screen
	SOLO	SOLO/OSCILLATOR page of the TALKBACK / MONITOR / SOLO / OSC SETUP Screen
	OSC	SOLO/OSCILLATOR page of the TALKBACK / MONITOR / SOLO / OSC SETUP Screen
	Talkback	TALKBACK page of the TALKBACK / MONITOR / SOLO / OSC SETUP Screen
	LED Indication	Nothing will happen
	Sends On Fader	Nothing will happen
	Recorder/Player	RECORDER/PLAYER Screen
	MTR	MULTI TRACK RECORDER Screen
	Insert ON/OFF	MODULE (OVERVIEW) Screen
	Send On/Off	MODULE (SEND/ PAN) Screen for module where Parameter 1 is set
	Mute	Mute Group Assign Screen if the operation target is Mute Group 1–8. Nothing if the operation target is not Mute Group 1–8.
	Tap Tempo	FX MODULE (FX) Screen for the assigned number
	Screen	Screen where Parameter 1 and 2 are set
Turn an LCD knob while pressing the MENU key on the top panel	This adjusts the contrast of the channel screen that corresponds to that knob.

48 kHz	ms	Routing details
A to A	0.510	MIC/LINE IN CH module MAIN L/R BUS MAIN L/R module OUTPUT (analog)
A to A	0.620	MIC/LINE IN CH module MAIN L/R BUS MAIN L/R module MONITOR OUT
D to D	0.498	SLOT MADI IN CH module MAIN L/R BUS MAIN L/R module SLOT MADI OUT
A to D	0.458	MIC/LINE IN CH module MAIN L/R BUS MAIN L/R module SLOT MADI OUT
D to A	0.571	SLOT MADI IN CH module MAIN L/R BUS MAIN L/R module OUTPUT (analog)
D to A	0.666	SLOT MADI IN CH module MAIN L/R BUS MAIN L/R module MONITOR OUT

96 kHz	ms	Routing details
A to A	0.510	MIC/LINE IN CH module MAIN L/R BUS MAIN L/R module OUTPUT (analog)
A to A	0.620	MIC/LINE IN CH module MAIN L/R BUS MAIN L/R module MONITOR OUT
D to D	0.104	SLOT MADI IN CH module MAIN L/R BUS MAIN L/R module SLOT MADI OUT
A to D	0.261	MIC/LINE IN CH module MAIN L/R BUS MAIN L/R module SLOT MADI OUT
D to A	0.374	SLOT MADI IN CH module MAIN L/R BUS MAIN L/R module OUTPUT (analog)
D to A	0.468	SLOT MADI IN CH module MAIN L/R BUS MAIN L/R module MONITOR OUT